THREE MILE CREEK SEVERE WEATHER ATTENUATION TANKS (SWATs) · 2019. 2. 3. · THREE MILE CREEK SEVERE WEATHER ATTENUATION TANKS (SWATs) PROJECT VICINITY MAP Board Members: Samuel L

THREE MILE CREEK SEVERE WEATHER ATTENUATION TANKS

(SWATs)

PROJECT VICINITY MAP

Board Members: Samuel L. Jones, Chair Kenneth W. Nichols, Vice ChairWalter A. Bell Secretary-TreasurerMaynard V. Odom Sheri N. Weber Barbara Drummond Thomas Zoghby

Director: Charles Hyland

PREPARED FOR THE

MOBILE AREA WATER AND SEWER SYSTEM MOBILE, ALABAMA

SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 2 OF 3

For information regarding this project, contact:

DAVID CARR, P.E. 25 W. Cedar Street

c'12tffl Suite 350 •Pensacola, FL 32502 sM

Office:(850) 396-4923 Mobile:(850) 781-8123

BID DOCUMENTS

CH2M 697482

FEBRUARY 2019

MOBILE AREA WATER AND SEWER SYSTEM

MOBILE, ALABAMA

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

for the construction of the

THREE MILE CREEK SEVERE WEATHER ATTENUATION TANKS (SWATs)

Contract No. 697482

****

****

CH2M HILL February 2019

© CH2M HILL Owner Organization 2019. All rights reserved. This document and the ideas and designs incorporated herein, as an instrument of professional service, is the property of CH2M HILL and is not to be used in whole or part, for any other project without the written authorization of CH2M HILL. Any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document and the ideas and designs incorporated herein is at the sole risk of the party(ies) reusing, modifying, or altering it. All references to CH2M HILL and its employees and all professional seals shall be removed prior to any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document.

Project No. 697482 Copy No.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 TABLE OF CONTENTS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 00 01 10 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 Pages

PART 1 - MAWSS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Table of Contents ................................................................................................... 1- 16 Invitation for Bids .................................................................................................. 1- 1 Proposal.................................................................................................................. 1- 6 Subcontracting Plan ............................................................................................... 1- 1 Contract .................................................................................................................. 1- 4 Contract Bond ........................................................................................................ 1- 2 Labor and Material Bond ....................................................................................... 1- 3 Section 1 – Definition of Terms............................................................................. 1- 4 Section 2 – Proposal Requirements and Conditions .............................................. 1- 3 Section 3 – Award and Execution of Contract ....................................................... 1- 5 Section 4 – Scope of Work .................................................................................... 1- 3 Section 5 – Control of Work .................................................................................. 1- 6 Section 6 – Control of Material ............................................................................. 1- 2 Section 7 – Legal Relations and Responsibility to Public ..................................... 1- 5 Section 8 – Prosecution and Progress .................................................................... 1- 12 Section 9 – Testing Materials ................................................................................ 1- 3 Section 10 – Special Provisions ............................................................................. 1- 19 Special Conditions to the Standard Specifications for Water Mains, Sanitary Sewers and Sewage Pumping Stations, Board of Water and Sewer Commissioners of the City of Mobile, Alabama ................................................... 1- 3 Appendix H – Small and Small Disadvantaged Business ..................................... 1- 8 Appendix J – Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit ............................................... 1- 1 Bid Bond ................................................................................................................ 1- 1 Information for Bidders ......................................................................................... 1- 3 Supplemental General Conditions ......................................................................... 1- 32 Wage Rates ............................................................................................................ 1- 14

PART 2 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary of Work .................................................................... 1- 2 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures ........................................... 1- 6 01 29 00 Payment Procedures ................................................................. 1- 3 01 31 13 Project Coordination ................................................................ 1- 8 01 31 19 Project Meetings ...................................................................... 1- 3 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation .................................... 1- 6 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ............................................................... 1- 9 Supplement 1, Forms: Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal .................................................................................. 1- 1

697482A.GN1

TABLE OF CONTENTS PW\DEN003\697482 00 01 10 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms .................................................. 1- 5 01 43 33 Manufacturers’ Field Services ................................................. 1- 3 Supplement 1, Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation................................................................................ 1- 1 01 45 16.13 Contractor Quality Control ...................................................... 1- 9 01 45 33 Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing .......................... 1- 6 Supplement 1, Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility ........ 1- 2 Supplement 2, Fabricator’s Certificate of Compliance ............ 1- 1 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls ........................................... 1- 8 01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control .............................. 1- 12 01 57 28 Temporary Flow Control ......................................................... 1- 7 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements .............................................. 1- 8 Supplement 1, Form: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance .............................................................................. 1- 1 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures................................................................. 1- 3 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data ............................................. 1- 6 Supplement 1, Forms: Maintenance Summary Form .............. 1- 2 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing ............................................................ 1- 5 01 91 14 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup .................................. 1- 6 Supplement 1, Unit Process Startup Form ............................... 1- 1 Supplement 2, Facility Performance Demonstration/

Certification Form .................................................................... 1- 1 DIVISION 2—EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 Demolition ............................................................................... 1- 8 DIVISION 3—CONCRETE

03 01 32 Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces ............... 1- 10 03 01 33 Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces .................................. 1- 11 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories ......................................... 1- 5 03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories .............................................. 1- 9 03 21 00 Steel Reinforcement ................................................................. 1- 4 03 24 00 Fibrous Reinforcing ................................................................. 1- 3 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete ............................................................ 1- 27 Supplement 1, Concrete Mix Design, Class 5000F1S1P2C2 .. 1- 2 Supplement 2, Concrete Mix Design, Class 4500F1S1P1C1 .. 1- 2 Supplement 3, Concrete Mix Design, Class CF00F1S1P0C1 . 1- 2 03 39 00 Concrete Curing ....................................................................... 1- 3 03 40 00 Precast Concrete ....................................................................... 1- 4 03 62 00 Grouting ................................................................................... 1- 9 Supplement 1, 24-hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout Test

Form and Grout Testing Procedures ........................................ 1- 3 03 63 00 Concrete Doweling .................................................................. 1- 4

697482A.GN1


03 64 23 Epoxy Resin Injection Grouting .............................................. 1- 10 03 64 24 Polyurethane Injection Grouting .............................................. 1- 9 DIVISION 4—MASONRY (NOT USED)

DIVISION 5—METALS

05 05 19 Post-Installed Anchors ............................................................. 1- 8 05 05 23 Welding .................................................................................... 1- 6 Supplement 1, Welding and Nondestructive Testing .............. 1- 1 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications ................................................................... 1- 17 05 52 16 Aluminum Railings .................................................................. 1- 9 05 53 00 Metal Gratings ......................................................................... 1- 5 DIVISIONS 6 THROUGH 8 (NOT USED)

DIVISION 9—FINISHES

09 90 00 Painting and Coating ................................................................ 1- 23 Supplement 1, Painting Schedule ............................................ 1- 1 Supplement 2, Paint System Data Sheet .................................. 1- 1 Supplement 3, Product Data Sheet ........................................... 1- 1 09 96 35 Chemical-Resistant Coatings ................................................... 1- 4 Supplement 1, Corrosion Control Assistance Form ................ 1- 1 DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES

10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties and Safety Equipment ................... 1- 3 DIVISIONS 11 THROUGH 12 (NOT USED)

DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 34 23 Prefabricated Buildings ............................................................ 1- 9 DIVISIONS 14 THROUGH 22 (NOT USED)

VOLUME 2

DIVISION 23—HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 81 00 Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment ...................................... 1- 10 DIVISIONS 24 THROUGH 25 (NOT USED)

697482A.GN1


DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL

26 05 02 Basic Electrical Requirements ................................................. 1- 7 26 05 04 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods .................................. 1- 15 26 05 05 Conductors ............................................................................... 1- 18 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ...................... 1- 6 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes ................................................................. 1- 28 26 05 70 Electrical Systems Analysis ..................................................... 1- 9 Supplement 1, Figure 1: Example Arc Flash Label ................. 1- 1 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems .................................... 1- 21 26 20 00 Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors ......................................... 1- 12 26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers ...................................................... 1- 4 26 24 16 Panelboards .............................................................................. 1- 7 26 24 19 Low-Voltage Motor Control .................................................... 1- 9 26 27 26 Wiring Devices ........................................................................ 1- 8 26 29 23 Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System ................. 1- 21 26 32 13.13 Diesel Engine Generator Set .................................................... 1- 22 Supplement 1, Project Sizing Report ....................................... 1- 1 26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switches ................................................... 1- 6 26 41 00 Facility Lightning Protection ................................................... 1- 6 26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices ......................................................... 1- 5 26 50 00 Lighting .................................................................................... 1- 14 DIVISIONS 27 THROUGH 30 (NOT USED)

DIVISION 31—EARTHWORK

31 10 00 Site Clearing............................................................................. 1- 3 31 23 13 Subgrade Preparation ............................................................... 1- 3 31 23 16 Excavation................................................................................ 1- 4 31 23 19.01 Dewatering ............................................................................... 1- 3 31 23 23 Fill and Backfill ....................................................................... 1- 8 31 23 23.15 Trench Backfill ........................................................................ 1- 8 31 32 00 Soil Stabilization ...................................................................... 1- 5 31 32 10 Tree Protection and Root Pruning............................................ 1- 7 31 32 19.16 Geotextile ................................................................................. 1- 6 31 41 00 Shoring ..................................................................................... 1- 2 DIVISION 32—EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses .......................................................... 1- 4 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving ......................................................................... 1- 7 32 16 00 Curbs and Sidewalks ................................................................ 1- 2 32 31 13 Fences and Gates ...................................................................... 1- 17 32 91 13 Soil Preparation ........................................................................ 1- 3

697482A.GN1


32 92 00 Turf and Grasses ...................................................................... 1- 7 32 93 00 Plants ........................................................................................ 1- 12 DIVISION 33—UTILITIES

33 05 13 Manholes .................................................................................. 1- 6 33 05 16.13 Precast Concrete Utility Structure ........................................... 1- 5 33 16 13.15 Prestressed Concrete Tank with Steel Diaphragm ................... 1- 20 33 41 01 Storm Drain Piping .................................................................. 1- 2 33 41 01.05 Reinforced Concrete ................................................................ 1- 2 33 44 13.13 Catch Basins............................................................................. 1- 2 DIVISIONS 34 THROUGH 39 (NOT USED)

DIVISION 40—PROCESS INTEGRATION

40 05 15 Piping Support Systems ........................................................... 1- 10 Supplement 1, Table 1: Nonchemical Areas ............................ 1- 1 40 27 00 Process Piping—General ......................................................... 1- 20 Supplement 1, Piping Schedule Legend .................................. 1- 2 Supplement 2, Piping Schedule ............................................... 1- 1 40 27 00.01 Ceramic-Epoxy-Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings ............. 1- 3 40 27 00.10 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings ........................... 1- 2 40 27 01 Process Piping Specialties........................................................ 1- 10 40 27 02 Process Valves and Operators .................................................. 1- 18 Supplement 1, Electric Actuated Valve Schedule ................... 1- 2 Supplement 2, Self-Regulated Valve Schedule ....................... 1- 1 40 80 01 Process Piping Leakage Testing .............................................. 1- 6 40 90 01 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems ................... 1- 42 Supplement 1, Loop Specifications ......................................... 1- 17 Supplement 2, Instrument List ................................................. 1- 1 Supplement 3, Lift Station 1, PLC I/O List ............................. 1- 3 Supplement 4, Lift Station 2, PLC I/O List ............................. 1- 2 Supplement 5, Surge Suppressor List ...................................... 1- 1 Supplement 6, Photo of Existing SCADA

Screen – Manhole 13 ............................................................... 1- 1 Supplement 7, Instrument Calibration Sheet: .......................... 1- 2 Supplement 8, I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet .......................... 1- 2 Supplement 9, Performance Acceptance Test Sheet ................ 1- 2 40 91 00 Instrumentation and Control Components ............................... 1- 23 40 95 80 Fiber Optic Communication Subsystem .................................. 1- 15 Supplement 1, As-Built Fiber Optic Cable Installation Form . 1- 2 Supplement 2, As-Built Conduit Installation Form ................. 1- 1 DIVISIONS 41 THROUGH 43 (NOT USED)

697482A.GN1


DIVISION 44—POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT

44 11 29.14 Activated Carbon Odor Control Systems ................................ 1- 4 44 42 28 Weir and Baffle Plates ............................................................. 1- 2 44 42 56.02 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pumps ................................ 1- 8 Supplement 1, Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump Data Sheet ................................................................................ 1- 2 44 42 56.04 Submersible Pumps .................................................................. 1- 6 Supplement 1, Data Sheets: Pump and Motor ......................... 1- 2 DIVISIONS 45 THROUGH 49 (NOT USED)

VOLUME 3

PART 3 - DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY)

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONING FEBRUARY 8, 2019 EQUIPMENT ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 23 81 00 - 1

SECTION 23 81 00 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:

1. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI): 210/240, Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.

2. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA): Bulletin 300, Setup No. 1.

3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): a. 52.2, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning

Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. b. 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential

Buildings. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Section IX,

Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 5. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

b. D2370, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings.

c. D4060, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser.

d. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

e. G154, Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.

6. ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL). 7. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

a. 9001, Quality Management Systems - Requirements. b. 13256-1, Water-Source Heat Pumps—Testing and Rating for

Performance—Part 1: Water-to-Air and Brine-to-Air Heat Pumps. 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 255, Standard Method of

Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 10. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 94-5V, Standard for Tests for

Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.

697482A.GN1

UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONING PW\DEN003\697482 EQUIPMENT FEBRUARY 8, 2019 23 81 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. The following is a list of abbreviations which may be used in this section:

1. AC: Air Conditioning. 2. COP: Coefficient of Performance. 3. EER: Energy Efficiency Ratio. 4. DX: Direct Expansion. 5. HP: Heat Pump. 6. IR: Infra Red. 7. LED: Light Emitting Diode. 8. PSC: Permanent Split Capacitor. 9. SPST: Single Pole, Single Throw. 10. TXV: Thermostatic Expansion Valve. 11. UV: Ultraviolet.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals:

1. Complete specifications, descriptive drawings, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature which shall include make, model, dimensions, weight of equipment, and electrical schematics for all products specified.

2. Manufacturer’s standard finish color selection for enclosure finishes. 3. Complete performance data that will indicate full compliance with the

specifications: a. Include fan sound power level data (ref. 10 to 12 watts) at design

operating point, based on AMCA Bulletin 300, Setup No. 1. b. Include heating and cooling performance data at design operating

conditions. 4. Factory dip-applied protective coating product data.

B. Informational Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for heat pumps, air-conditioning units, and motors.

2. Detailed information on structural, mechanical, electrical, or other modifications necessary to adapt arrangement or details shown to equipment furnished.

3. Sample copy of guarantee. 4. Test reports. 5. Operation and Maintenance Data in conformance with Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data. a. Include wiring and control diagrams for equipment. b. Include as-built version of equipment schedules.

697482A.GN1


1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Heating and Cooling Equipment: Minimum operating efficiencies, defined as COP and EER, as specified in ASHRAE 90.1.

B. Unit shall be rated (when matched with appropriate outdoor unit) per ARI 210/240.

C. Units shall be certified by UL and CSA, and shall be UL or ETL listed and labeled.

D. Cooling performance rated in accordance with ARI testing procedures.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Storage: Products shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent damage and in an area that is protected from the elements.

B. Protection of Equipment:

1. Box, crate, or otherwise protect from damage and moisture during shipment, handling, and storage.

2. Protect from exposure to corrosive fumes and keep thoroughly dry at all times.

3. Store motors, drives, electrical equipment, and other equipment with anti-friction or sleeve bearings in weathertight and heated storage facilities prior to installation.

4. For extended storage periods, plastic equipment wrappers shall not be used to prevent accumulation of condensate in gears and bearings.

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following materials:

Item Quantity

Filters One complete set per unit.

B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Specified components of this Section, including insulation, facings, mastics, and adhesives, shall have fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread without evidence of continued progressive combustion, and 50 for smoke developed, as per test conducted in accordance with ASTM E84 and NFPA 255 methods.

697482A.GN1


B. Multiple Compressor Units:

1. Provide completely independent refrigeration circuits and controls. 2. Indoor unit air coils shall have intermingled circuits, unless specified

otherwise.

2.02 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES

A. Refer to Drawings.

2.03 WALL MOUNT AC UNITS (50-AC-1, 50-AC-2, AND 50-AC-3) (50-AC-3 IS LOCATED AT EXISTING ELECTRICAL BUILDING)

A. General:

1. Self-contained wall-mounted air conditioner suitable for outdoor use, specifically designed for telecommunications/electrical enclosure climate control.

2. Completely factory assembled and tested; includes compressor, indoor and outdoor coils, fans, motors, prewired controls, interconnecting refrigerant tubing, wiring, circuit breaker, and other necessary components mounted in corrosion resistant cabinet.

3. Unit shall be shipped from factory with full operating refrigerant and oil charge.

B. Unit Cabinet:

1. Constructed of galvanized steel sheet metal with factory applied paint finish.

2. Sloped top with built-in mounting flanges. 3. Unit Mounting Brackets: Full-length bracket shall be factory provided. 4. Conditioned air section shall be insulated with 1/2-inch, 2-pound dual

density fiberglass. 5. Supply Grille: Adjustable aluminum double deflection type, factory

installed. 6. Return Grille: Aluminum, fixed blade type, factory installed.

C. Compressor:

1. Hermetic type, equipped with immersion type self-regulating crankcase heater.

2. Motor shall be protected by internal line-break thermostat. 3. Electrical wiring connections at compressor shall be protected by

receptacle housing.

697482A.GN1


D. Refrigeration Components:

1. Refrigeration Circuit: a. Liquid filter dryer. b. Suction and liquid access valves.

E. Condenser Section:

1. Condenser Coil: Constructed of aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes.

2. Entire condenser coil coated with anticorrosion protective coating in accordance with Article Factory Dip-Applied Protective Coating.

3. Fan: a. Direct driven, slow speed propeller type for quiet operation. b. Motor: Equipped with thermal protector.

F. Evaporator Section:

1. Evaporator Coil: Constructed of aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes.

2. Two direct driven evaporator blowers shall be of centrifugal type, forward curved.

3. Indoor Motor: Equipped with thermal protector.

G. Electric Heat Coil:

1. UL listed. 2. Heavy-duty nickel-chromium elements. 3. Individual line-break HIGH limit control for each stage. 4. HIGH limit control operating through heating element contactors,

equipped with automatic reset. 5. Internally factory-wired to provide single-point power connection with

unit.

H. Controls:

1. Refrigerant Metering: Factory installed refrigerant metering device. 2. Internal control circuit of a current limiting type transformer to generate

24V ac, switching devices to operate compressor, indoor fan motor, and electrical heater(s).

3. Provide automatic resetting adjustable time delay circuit to prevent rapid compressor cycling and to delay startup of compressor on call for cooling.

4. Low pressure bypass shall be factory installed for startup of unit down to 0 degree F.

697482A.GN1


5. Safeties: a. Control circuit shall incorporate manual reset safety circuit to

render refrigerant system (compressor and outdoor fan motor) inoperative should there be a loss of airflow or refrigerant.

b. System lockout condition shall be indicated by contact closure available at low voltage terminal block.

c. Safety circuit shall be resettable at wall thermostat. d. Refrigeration circuit shall include high and low pressure switches

with lockout relay.

I. Filters: Two-inch pleated throwaway type filter, mounted internally, factory supplied, and accessible through access panel.

J. Accessories: Provide as scheduled in Equipment Schedule.

K. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Marvair; Compac. 2. Bard; WA Series.

2.04 FACTORY DIP-APPLIED PROTECTIVE COATING

A. General:

1. Factory dip-applied protective coating for application to plate fin and tube coils.

2. Coil factory assembled and tested before coating application. 3. Coating suitable for coils with maximum 30 fins per inch fin density.

Bridging of product across coil fins is unacceptable. 4. After application and proper curing, product shall endure bending of

coil assembly in standard manufacturing process without cracking. 5. Apply coating to coil before final factory assembly of equipment.

Coating process that requires disassembly of equipment for removal of coil to be coated is not acceptable.

B. Coating Material: Use one of the following materials:

1. Epoxy Modified Phenolic. Straight phenolic materials are not acceptable.

2. Epoxy or epoxy urethane. 3. Polyelastomer: Complex chain linked polyelastomer material.

C. Coating Process:

1. Coil Inspection and Sealing: a. Inspect coil for open tubes, headers, capillary tubes; repair as

necessary.

697482A.GN1


b. Fill with dry nitrogen, cap and seal, to prevent contamination of internal coil surfaces with cleaning or coating solutions.

2. Coil Cleaning: a. Immerse coil in heated alkaline cleaning solution to remove

lubricants, machining oils, and residual factory contamination. b. Followed with immersion in potable water bath to neutralize and

remove cleaning solution. 3. Coating Application:

a. Immerse coil assembly in coating bath, including headers, casing, and heat exchange surfaces.

b. Completed remove coil from equipment during coating application.

4. Curing: Oven baked at metal temperature not to exceed 400 degrees F. 5. Quality Control: Free from voids, checks, cracks and blisters.

D. Performance: Coil finish shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. Salt Spray Test: In accordance with ASTM B117, minimum 3,000-hour duration, with no fin corrosion or degradation.

2. Thermal Efficiency: Loss no greater than 1 percent after coating application.

3. Exposure to UV Light: UV inhibited life of minimum 10 years when exposed to sun in the State of Florida.

E. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Bronz-glow; F-875. 2. Or-equal.

2.05 UNITARY EQUIPMENT CONTROLS

A. Electronic AC Unit Controller:

1. Seven-day programmable thermostat with LCD display. 2. Heating and Cooling Stages:

a. Up to four-stage cooling and four-stage heating electronic control. b. Staging delay between each cycle. c. Visual indication of activation of each stage.

3. Integrated thermostat. 4. Temperature Scale: Manually adjustable, 55 degrees F to 90 degrees F

scale. 5. Adjustments external to controller. 6. Adjustable “dead band” between heating and cooling to be between

4 degrees F and 20 degrees F. 7. Power loss memory for restoration of sequence of operation in event of

power loss.

697482A.GN1


2.06 ELECTRICAL

A. General:

1. Units shall include high and low voltage terminal block connections. 2. Control voltage to indoor unit fan shall be 24 volts. 3. Motor Starters/Contactors: Factory installed with unitary equipment,

unless otherwise noted. 4. Disconnects: Factory installed nonfused disconnects or circuit breakers

on each unit, unless otherwise noted.

B. Motors:

1. Refer to Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors, for general requirements.

2. Unless otherwise stated, electric motors shall comply with the following: a. Voltage, Phase, Horsepower, Synchronous Speed: Refer to

Equipment Schedule for motor driven equipment. b. Enclosure: ODP, unless specified otherwise. c. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads

satisfactorily. d. Winding Thermal Protection: Manufacturer’s standard. e. Space Heater: Manufacturer’s standard. f. Multispeed Motors, Synchronous Speed, Number of Windings:

Manufacturer’s standard. g. Efficiency: Minimum efficiency per Section 26 20 00,

Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Lifting Lugs: Provide suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds.

B. Equipment Identification Plates: Furnish 16-gauge Type 316 stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component and control panel in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 3/8-inch high engraved block type black enamel filled equipment identification tag indicated in this Specification and as shown on Drawings.

C. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Quantity as recommended by manufacturer.

697482A.GN1


2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Direct expansion coils leak tested underwater with 200-psig air. Pressure tested to 450 psig.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Set and install equipment so that equipment is level and properly supported.

B. Make certain that piping connections to equipment do not cause any strain on equipment.

C. Make certain that vibration isolation has been installed per manufacturer’s instructions and isolation devices are performing satisfactorily.

D. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, and these Specifications.

E. Install all safety devices as recommended by manufacturer and/or required by code in these Specifications.

F. Initial equipment startup shall be made by an authorized representative of the unit manufacturer.

G. Startup: Manufacturer shall provide a factory-trained representative employed by the equipment manufacturer to perform the following services. Supervision only, of Contractor personnel, will not be acceptable.

1. Leak test. 2. Refrigerant pressure test. 3. Evacuate (if required). 4. Dehydrate (if required). 5. Charge condensing unit with refrigerant and oil (if required).

H. Factory Checkout:

1. Contractor shall secure the services of a factory trained and qualified service engineer employed by the equipment manufacturer who shall inspect the installation including external interlock, power connections; supervise initial operation, calibration of operating and safety controls and supervise electrical testing including insulation resistance of motors and voltage balance between phases during starting and running.

697482A.GN1


2. This service engineer shall forward a report in three copies to Engineer when the unit is in safe and proper operating condition. This report shall contain all pressure and control settings, meg readings, voltage readings per phase during START and RUN, suction temperature and pressure, liquid temperature and pressure, and shall list minor discrepancies to be corrected which do not affect safe and reliable operation.

3. One additional copy of report shall be left in unit control panel. One copy of bound installation operation and maintenance service, and parts brochures, including applicable serial numbers, full unit description, parts ordering sources, shall be placed in the unit control panel at the time of starting.

I. Locate units to provide access for filter changing; motor, drive, and bearing servicing; and fan shaft and coil removal.

J. Isolate sheet metal duct connections from all portions of the unit not internally spring-isolated from fans, or other vibrating or rotating equipment.

K. Inspect internal casing insulation, seal all exposed edges, and butt joints with mastic to ensure insulation will not be loosened during operation.

3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Do not operate units until filters are installed. If operated without filters, completely clean coils, and interior of units.

3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of proper installation, equipment testing, startup assistance, and training of Owner’s personnel for specified equipment.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 05 02 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 05 02 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Requirements specified within this section apply to Division 26, Electrical. Work specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individual sections.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1584, Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Calculations.

2. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): National Electrical Installation Standards.

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 7: 1584, Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Calculations. Electrical

Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide comprehensive short circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash study per section 26 05 70, Electrical System Analysis. Initial complete short circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash studies shall be submitted, reviewed and approved before major electrical equipment Shop Drawings will be reviewed.

B. Provide lightning protection design and construction for above grade structures per section 26 41 00, Facility Lightning Protection.

C. Provide anchorage and bracing design drawings, calculations, and related information where required under Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

D. Provide seismic certification per requirements of Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing, where required in that section for electrical equipment listed.

697482A.GN1

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PW\DEN003\697482 26 05 02 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.04 ELECTRIC SERVICE DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY

A. Incoming aerial electrical service facilities provided by the serving utility as part of its normal obligation to customers is work provided outside this Contract. Under this Contract, provide customer required service provisions and electrical work including, but not limited to, primary trench and backfill, primary duct system, transformer pad site preparation, transformer pad, metering components and associated conduit, and secondary facilities Schedule and coordinate work of serving utility as required to provide electric service to the Work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


1. Provide manufacturers’ data for the following: a. Electrical service components. b. Nameplates, signs, and labels.

2. Anchorage and bracing drawings and catalog information, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

B. Informational Submittals: Anchorage and bracing calculations, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

C. Quality Control Submittals

1. Voltage field test results 2. Voltage balance report. 3. Equipment line current report. 4. Factory Test certification and reports for all major electrical equipment. 5. Site test certification and reports as specified in other Division 26,

Electrical Section.


A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC.

B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.

697482A.GN1


C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of hazardous area indicated.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. The following areas are classified hazardous Class I, Division 1, Group D, because of the potential for occurrence of hazardous concentrations of combustible gases, and for exposure to corrosive environment. Use materials and methods required for such areas.

1. Inside lift stations containing wastewater. 2. Inside new and existing severe weather attenuation tanks. 3. Odor control. 4. Inside diversion box. 5. Area 3 feet-0 inch around vent openings.

B. The following areas are classified hazardous, Class I, Division 2, Group D, because of the potential for accumulation of hazardous concentrations of combustible gases, and for exposure to corrosive environment. Use materials and methods required for such areas.

1. Enclosed, belowgrade valve and metering vaults with closed piping systems containing wastewater.

2. Area 18 inches above hatches and extending 3 feet-0 inch from the edge of a hatch or opening.

C. The following areas are classified nonhazardous, wet, and corrosive. Use materials and methods required for such areas.

1. Outdoor above-grade areas not covered above. 2. Belowgrade vaults.

D. The following areas are classified as indoor and dry: Electrical Room.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of materials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer.

B. Material and equipment installed in heated and ventilated areas shall be capable of continuous operation at their specified ratings within an ambient temperature range of 40 degrees F to 104 degrees F.

697482A.GN1


C. Materials and equipment installed outdoors shall be capable of continuous operation at their specified rating within the ambient temperature range stated in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

D. Equip panels installed outdoors in direct sun with sun shields.

2.02 EQUIPMENT FINISH

A. Manufacturer’s standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

2.03 NAMEPLATES

A. Material: Laminated plastic.

B. Attachment Screws: Stainless steel.

C. Color: White, engraved to a black core.

D. Letter Height:

1. Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: 1/8 inch. 2. Other Electrical Equipment: 3/8 inch.

2.04 SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Sign size, lettering, and color shall be in accordance with NEMA Z535.4.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. Contractor shall be responsible for actual location of equipment and devices and for proper routing and support of raceways, subject to approval of Engineer.

B. Check approximate locations of light fixtures, switches, electrical outlets, equipment, and other electrical system components shown on Drawings for conflicts with openings, structural members, and components of other systems and equipment having fixed locations. In the event of conflicts, notify Engineer in writing.

C. Install work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise specified.

697482A.GN1


D. Keep openings in boxes and equipment closed during construction.

E. Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully perform cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, paving, or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Following such work, restore surfaces to original condition.

3.02 ANCHORING, BRACING, AND MOUNTING

A. Equipment anchoring and mounting shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements for Project design criteria provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, to meet the requirements of Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

3.03 COMBINING CIRCUITS INTO COMMON RACEWAY

A. Drawings show each homerun circuit to be provided. Do not combine power or control circuits into common raceways without authorization of Engineer.

3.04 NAMEPLATES, SIGNS, AND LABELS

A. Arc Flash Protection Warning Signs:

1. Field mark motor control centers, automatic transfer switch, main breakers, and panelboards to warn qualified persons of potential arc-flash hazards. Locate marking so to be clearly visible to persons before working on energized equipment.

2. Use arc flash hazard boundary, energy level, PPE level and description, shock hazard, bolted fault current, and equipment name from study required in Section 26 05 70, Electrical Systems Analysis as basis for warning signs.

B. Available Fault Current Signs:

1. Install label on service equipment to indicate the maximum available fault current at the equipment. Labels shall be of sufficient durability for the environment in which the equipment is installed. Labels shall include the following information: a. Equipment name or identification. b. Available fault current at the equipment. c. Date the fault current calculations were performed.

2. Use bolted fault current and equipment name from study required in Section 26 05 70, Electrical Systems Analysis, as basis for the label.

697482A.GN1


3. Where existing electrical systems are modified, completely remove existing fault current labels if present, and install new labels in accordance with the above requirements.

C. Multiple Power Supply Sign: Install permanent plaque or directory at each service disconnect location denoting other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying the building, and the area served by each.

D. Equipment Nameplates:

1. Provide a nameplate to label electrical equipment including switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, motor starters, transformers, terminal junction boxes, disconnect switches, switches and control stations.

2. Switchgear, motor control center, transformer, and terminal junction box nameplates shall include equipment designation.

3. Disconnect switch, starter, and control station nameplates shall include name and number of equipment powered or controlled by that device.

4. Switchboard and panelboard nameplates shall include equipment designation, service voltage, and phases.

3.05 LOAD BALANCE

A. Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads and distribution equipment.

B. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and other equipment where balancing is required.

C. When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads, maintain accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that lists final circuit arrangement.

3.06 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Cleaning: Throughout the Work, clean interior and exterior of devices and equipment by removing debris and vacuuming.

B. Touchup Paint:

1. Touchup scratches, scrapes and chips on exterior and interior surfaces of devices and equipment with finish matching type, color, and consistency and type of surface of original finish.

2. If extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish entire equipment in a manner that provides a finish equal to or better than factory finish, that meets requirements of Specification, and is acceptable to Engineer.

697482A.GN1


3.07 PROTECTION FOLLOWING INSTALLATION

A. Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effects of moisture on insulation and contact surfaces.

B. When equipment intended for indoor installation is installed at Contractor’s convenience in areas where subject to dampness, moisture, dirt or other adverse atmosphere until completion of construction, ensure adequate protection from these atmospheres is provided and acceptable to Engineer.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 AND METHODS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 26 05 04 - 1

SECTION 26 05 04 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and

Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy and High-Strength Low Alloy Formability.

b. E814, Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 2. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 18,

Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors. 4. International Society of Automation (ISA): RP12.06.01, Wiring

Practices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation–Part 1: Intrinsic Safety.

5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts

Maximum). b. C12.1, Code for Electricity Metering. c. C12.6, Phase-Shifting Devices Used in Metering, Marking and

Arrangement of Terminals. d. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors,

and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts. e. ICS 5, Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot

Devices. f. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches

(600 Volts Maximum). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical

Code (NEC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. b. 248, Standard for Low Voltage Fuses. c. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with

Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors. d. 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case

Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. e. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. f. 810, Standard for Capacitors. g. 943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. h. 1059, Standard for Terminal Blocks. i. 1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

697482A.GN1

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW\DEN003\697482 AND METHODS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 05 04 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Provide manufacturers’ data for the following: a. Control devices. b. Control relays. c. Circuit breakers. d. Fused switches. e. Nonfused switches. f. Timers. g. Fuses. h. Magnetic contactors. i. Intrinsic safety barriers. j. Firestopping. k. Enclosures: Include enclosure data for products having

enclosures. 2. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by

Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

B. Informational Submittals: Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.


A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and special tools:

1. Fuses, 0 Volt to 600 Volts: Six of each type and each current rating installed.


A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):

1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ having jurisdiction, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Material and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied NRTL listing mark.

697482A.GN1


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER THERMAL MAGNETIC, LOW VOLTAGE

A. General:

1. Type: Molded case. 2. Trip Ratings: 15 amps to 1,200 amps. 3. Voltage Ratings: 120, 240, 208, 277, 480, and 600V ac. 4. Suitable for mounting and operating in any position. 5. UL 489.

B. Operating Mechanism:

1. Overcenter, trip-free, toggle type handle. 2. Quick-make, quick-break action. 3. Locking provisions for padlocking breaker in OPEN position. 4. ON/OFF and TRIPPED indicating positions of operating handle. 5. Operating handle to assume a CENTER position when tripped.

C. Trip Mechanism:

1. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. 2. Electronic trip with long, instantaneous, short and ground fault

protection. 3. Two and three pole, common trip. 4. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole. 5. Test button on cover. 6. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise. 7. Do not provide single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties where

multi-pole circuit breakers are shown.

D. Short Circuit Interrupting Ratings:

1. Equal to, or greater than, available fault current or interrupting rating shown.

2. Not less than the following rms symmetrical currents for the indicated trip ratings: a. Less than 250V ac: 10,000, or as shown. b. 600V ac: 35,000 or as shown.

E. Equipment Ground Fault Interrupter (EGFI): Where indicated, equip breaker specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 30-mA ground fault (UL-listed for equipment ground fault protection).

697482A.GN1


F. Magnetic Only Type Breakers: Where shown; instantaneous trip adjustment which simultaneously sets magnetic trip level of each individual pole continuously through a 3X to 10X trip range.

G. Accessories: Shunt trip, auxiliary switches, handle lock ON devices, mechanical interlocks, key interlocks, unit mounting bases, double lugs as shown or otherwise required. Shunt trip operators shall be continuous duty rated or have coil-clearing contacts.

H. Connections:

1. Supply (line side) at either end. 2. Mechanical wire lugs, except crimp compression lugs where shown. 3. Lugs removable/replaceable for breaker frames greater than

100 amperes. 4. Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating breaker or

conductor ampacity.

I. Enclosures for Independent Mounting:

1. See Article Enclosures. 2. Service Entrance Use: Breakers in required enclosure and required

accessories shall be UL 489 listed. 3. Interlock: Enclosure and switch shall interlock to prevent opening cover

with switch in the ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.

2.02 FUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE

A. UL 98 listed for use and location of installation.

B. NEMA KS 1.

C. Short Circuit Rating: 200,000 amps rms symmetrical with Class R, Class J, or Class L fuses installed.

D. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.

E. Connections:

1. Mechanical lugs, except crimp compression lugs where shown. 2. Lugs removable/replaceable. 3. Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors at NEC 75 degrees C

ampacity.

697482A.GN1


F. Fuse Provisions:

1. 30-amp to 600-amp rated shall incorporate rejection feature to reject all fuses except Class R.

2. 601-amp rated and greater shall accept Class L fuses, unless otherwise shown.

G. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

H. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.

2.03 NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE

A. NEMA KS 1.

B. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.

C. Lugs: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at NEC 75 degrees C ampacity.

D. Auxiliary Contact:

1. Operation: Make before power contacts make and break before power contacts break.

2. Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5 Designation A600.

E. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

F. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.

2.04 FUSE, 250-VOLT AND 600-VOLT

A. Power Distribution, General:

1. Current-limiting, with 200,000 ampere rms interrupting rating. 2. Provide to fit mountings specified with switches. 3. UL 248.

B. Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 1 Amp to 600 Amps:

1. Class: RK-1. 2. Type: Dual element, with time delay. 3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Bussmann; Types LPS-RK (600 volts) and LPN-RK (250 volts). b. Littelfuse; Types LLS-RK (600 volts) and LLN-RK (250 volts).

697482A.GN1


C. Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 601 Amps to 6,000 Amps:

1. Class: L. 2. Double O-rings and silver links. 3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Bussmann; Type KRP-C. b. Littelfuse, Inc.; Type KLPC.

D. Cable Limiters:

1. 600V or less; crimp to copper cable, bolt to bus or terminal pad. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Bussmann; K Series.

E. Ferrule:

1. 600V or less, rated for applied voltage, small dimension. 2. Ampere Ratings: 1/10 amp to 30 amps. 3. Dual-element time-delay, time-delay, or nontime-delay as required. 4. Provide with blocks or holders as indicated and suitable for location and

use. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Bussmann. b. Littlefuse, Inc.

2.05 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH

A. Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5 Designation A600.

B. Selector Switch Operating Lever: Standard.

C. Indicating Light: Push-to-test. LED, full voltage.

D. Pushbutton Color:

1. ON or START: Green. 2. OFF or STOP: Red.

E. Pushbutton and selector switch lockable in OFF position where indicated.

F. Legend Plate:

1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Engraving: Enamel filled in high contrasting color. 3. Text Arrangement: 11-character/spaces on one line, 14-character/spaces

on each of two lines, as required, indicating specific function. 4. Letter Height: 7/64 inch.

697482A.GN1


G. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Heavy-Duty, Oil-Tight Type: a. General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P. b. Square D Co.; Type T. c. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type 10250T.

2. Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type: a. Square D Co.; Type SK. b. General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P. c. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type E34. d. Crouse-Hinds; Type NCS.

2.06 TERMINAL BLOCK, 600 VOLTS

A. UL 486E and UL 1059.

B. Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes.

C. Capable of termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment, panels, or boxes.

D. Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing direct contact with wire between compression screw and yoke.

E. Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity metal.

F. Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal.

G. Current bar shall ensure vibration-proof connection.

H. Terminals:

1. Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than stripping.

2. Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space. 3. Individual, rail mounted.

I. Marking system, allowing use of preprinted or field-marked tags.

J. Manufacturers:

1. Weidmuller, Inc. 2. Ideal. 3. Electrovert USA Corp.

697482A.GN1


2.07 MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAY

A. Industrial control with field convertible contacts rated 10 amps continuous, 7,200VA make, 720VA break.

B. NEMA ICS 2, Designation: A600 (600 volts).

C. Time Delay Relay Attachment:

1. Pneumatic type, timer adjustable from 0.2 second to 60 seconds (minimum).

2. Field convertible from ON delay to OFF delay and vice versa.

D. Latching Attachment: Mechanical latch, having unlatching coil and coil clearing contacts.


1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; D26 Type M. 2. General Electric Co.; Type CR120A/CR120B. 3. Square D; Type X.

2.08 TIME DELAY RELAY

A. Industrial relay with contacts rated 5 amps continuous, 3,600VA make, 360VA break.

B. NEMA ICS 2 Designation: B150 (150 volts).

C. Solid-state electronic, field convertible ON/OFF delay.

D. One normally open and one normally closed contact (minimum).

E. Repeat accuracy plus or minus 2 percent.

F. Timer adjustment from 1 second to 60 seconds, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.


1. Square D Co.; Type XO. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type D26MR. 3. General Electric Co.; Type CR120.

697482A.GN1


2.09 RESET TIMER

A. Drive: Synchronous motor, solenoid-operated clutch.

B. Mounting: Semiflush panel.

C. Contacts: 10 amps, 120 volts.

D. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Eagle Signal Controls; Bulletin 125. 2. Automatic Timing and Controls; Bulletin 305.

2.10 ELAPSED TIME METER

A. Drive: Synchronous motor.

B. Range: 0 hour to 99,999.9 hours, nonreset type.

C. Mounting: Semiflush panel.


1. General Electric Co.; Type 240, 2-1/2-inch Big Look. 2. Eagle Signal Controls; Bulletin 705.

2.11 MAGNETIC CONTACTOR

A. UL listed.

B. Electrically operated, electrically held.

C. Main Contacts:

1. Power driven in one direction with mechanical spring dropout. 2. Silver alloy with wiping action and arc quenchers. 3. Continuous-duty, rated 30 amperes, or as shown. 4. Poles: As shown.

D. Control: As shown.

E. Auxiliary Contacts: Quantity as shown, rated 7200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, A600 per NEMA ICS 5.

F. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

697482A.GN1



1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Class A201. 2. General Electric Co.; CR 353. 3. Square D Co.; Class 8910.

2.12 PHASE MONITOR RELAY

A. Features:

1. Voltage and phase monitor relay shall drop out on low voltage, voltage unbalance, loss of phase, or phase reversal.

2. Contacts: Single-pole, double-throw, 10 amperes, 120/240V ac. Where additional contacts are shown or required, provide magnetic control relays.

3. Adjustable trip and time delay settings. 4. Transient Protection: 1,000V ac. 5. Mounting: Multipin plug-in socket base.

B. Manufacturer and Product: RK Electronics.

2.13 MAGNETIC LIGHTING CONTACTOR

A. Comply with NEMA ICS 2; provide UL 508 listing.

B. Electrically operated by dual-acting, single coil mechanism.

C. Inherently interlocked and mechanically held in both OPEN and CLOSED position.

D. Main Contacts:

1. Double-break, continuous-duty, rated 30 amperes, 600 volts, withstand rating of 22,000 amps rms symmetrical at 250 volts, 14,000 amps rms symmetrical at 480 volts.

2. Marked for electric discharge lamps, tungsten, and general purpose loads.

3. Position not dependent on gravity, hooks, latches, or semipermanent magnets.

4. Capable of operating in any position. 5. Visual indication for each contact.

E. Auxiliary contact relay for three-wire Form 3 control.

F. One normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contact rated 10 amperes continuous, 7,200VA make, 720VA break with NEMA designation of A600 (600 volts).

697482A.GN1


G. Fully rated neutral terminal.

H. Provision for remote pilot lamp with use of auxiliary contacts.

I. Clamp type, self-rising terminal plates for solderless connections.

J. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

K. Manufacturers and Products:

1. ASCO. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Class A202. 3. General Electric Co.; Class CR360 (mechanically held). 4. Square D; Class 8903, Type LL (mechanically held).

2.14 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS

A. Carbon Steel Framing Channel:

1. Material: Rolled, mild strip steel, 12-gauge minimum, ASTM A1011/ A1011M, Grade 33.

2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

B. Paint Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with electro-deposited rust inhibiting acrylic or epoxy paint.

C. PVC-Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with 40-mil polyvinyl chloride coating.

D. Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, Type 316 stainless steel, 12-gauge minimum.

E. Extruded Aluminum Framing Channel:

1. Material: Extruded from Type 6063-T6 aluminum alloy. 2. Fittings fabricated from Alloy 5052-H32.

F. Nonmetallic Framing Channel:

1. Material: Fire retardant, fiber reinforced vinyl ester resin. 2. Channel fitting of same material as channel. 3. Nuts and bolts of long glass fiber reinforced polyurethane.

G. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc. 2. Unistrut Corp. 3. Aickinstrut.

697482A.GN1


2.15 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIER

A. Provides a safe energy level for exposed wiring in a Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 hazardous area when circuit is connected to power source in nonhazardous area.

B. Rating: Power source shall be rated 24 volts dc, nominal, with not more than 250 volts available under fault conditions.

C. Contact Rating: 5 amps, 250 volts ac.

D. Mounting: Rail or surface.


1. MTL, Inc.; Series 2000 or Series 3000. 2. R. Stahl, Inc.

2.16 SWITCHBOARD MATTING

A. Provide matting having a breakdown of 20 kV minimum.

B. Manufacturer: U.S. Mat and Rubber Company.

2.17 FIRESTOPS

A. General:

1. Provide UL 1479 classified hourly fire rating equal to, or greater than, the assembly penetrated.

2. Prevent the passage of cold smoke, toxic fumes, and water before and after exposure to flame.

3. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E814, by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Firestop System:

1. Formulated for use in through-penetration firestopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire-rated walls and floors.

2. Fill, Void, or Cavity Material: 3M Brand Fire Barrier Caulk CP25, Putty 303, Wrap/Strip FS195, Composite Sheet CS195 and Penetration Sealing Systems 7902 and 7904 Series.

3. Two-Part, Foamed-In-Place, Silicone Sealant: Dow Corning Corp. Fire Stop Foam, General Electric Co. Pensil 851.

4. Fire Stop Devices: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes, for raceway and cable fittings.

697482A.GN1


2.18 ENCLOSURES

A. Finish: Sheet metal structural and enclosure parts shall be completely painted using an electrodeposition process so interior and exterior surfaces as well as bolted structural joints have a complete finish coat on and between them.

B. Color: Manufacturer’s standard color (gray) baked-on enamel, unless otherwise shown.

C. Barriers: Provide metal barriers within enclosures to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

D. Enclosure Selections:

1. Except as shown otherwise, provide electrical enclosures according to the following table:

Enclosures

Location Finish Environment NEMA 250 Type

Indoor Finished Dry 4X 316 Stainless Steel

Indoor Unfinished Dry 4X 316 Stainless Steel

Indoor Unfinished Industrial Use 4X 316 Stainless Steel

Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet 4X 316 Stainless Steel

Indoor and Outdoor Any Denoted “WP” 4X 316 Stainless Steel

Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet and Corrosive 4X 316 Stainless Steel

Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet, Dust or Oil 13 Stainless Steel

Indoor and Outdoor Any Hazardous Gas 7 Stainless Steel

Indoor and Outdoor Any Hazardous Dust 9 Stainless Steel

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.02 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH

A. Install heavy-duty, oil-tight type in nonhazardous, indoor, dry locations, including motor control centers, control panels, and individual stations, unless otherwise shown.

B. Install heavy-duty, watertight and corrosion-resistant type in nonhazardous, outdoor, or normally wet areas, unless otherwise shown.

697482A.GN1


3.03 INDUSTRIAL CAPACITORS

A. Provide suitable hangers or mounting brackets for wall or ceiling mounting.

3.04 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL

A. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment, raceway, and cable tray systems.

B. Channel Type:

1. Interior, Wet or Dry (Noncorrosive) Locations: a. Aluminum Raceway: Extruded aluminum b. PVC-Coated Conduit: PVC coated. c. Steel Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Carbon steel.

2. Interior, Corrosive (Wet or Dry) Locations: a. Aluminum Raceway: Extruded aluminum. b. PVC Conduit: Type 316 stainless steel or nonmetallic. c. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered:

Type 316 stainless steel, nonmetallic, or PVC-coated steel. 3. Outdoor, Noncorrosive Locations:

a. Steel Raceway: Carbon steel framing channel, except where mounted on aluminum handrail, then use aluminum framing channel.

b. Aluminum Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Aluminum framing channel or carbon steel with neoprene material isolators.

4. Outdoor Corrosive Locations: a. PVC Conduit: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Aluminum Raceway: Aluminum c. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered:

Type 316 stainless steel, or PVC-coated steel. 5. Aluminum Railings: Devices mounted on aluminum railing shall use

aluminum framing channel.

C. Paint cut ends prior to installation with the following:

1. Carbon Steel Channel: Zinc-rich primer. 2. Nonmetallic Channel: Epoxy resin sealer. 3. PVC-Coated Channel: PVC patch.

3.05 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS

A. Install in compliance with ISA RP12.06.01.

B. Arrange conductors such that wiring from hazardous areas cannot short to wiring from nonhazardous area.

C. Stencil “INTRINSICALLY SAFE CIRCUIT” on all boxes enclosing barriers.

697482A.GN1


3.06 SWITCHBOARD MATTING

A. Install 36-inch width at switchgear, switchboard, motor control centers, and panelboards.

B. Matting shall run full length of all sides of equipment that have operator controls or afford access to devices.

3.07 FIRESTOPS

A. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer’s instructions. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

B. Sealant: Install sealant including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide firestops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 CONDUCTORS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 05 05 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 05 05 CONDUCTORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC): CS 8, Specification for Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 kV through 46 kV.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. c. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper

Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. d. B496, Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric-

Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors. 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. 48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5 kV Through 500 kV.

b. 386, Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V.

c. 404, Standard for Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500 V to 500000 V.

4. Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association, Inc. (ICEA): a. S-58-679, Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification. b. S-73-532, Standard for Control Thermocouple Extensions and

Instrumentation Cables. c. T-29-520, Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests with

Theoretical Heat Input of 210,000 Btu/hour. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA):

a. CC 1, Electric Power Connectors for Substations. b. WC 57, Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and

Instrumentation Cables. c. WC 70, Standard for Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for

the Distribution of Electrical Energy. d. WC 71, Standard for Nonshielded Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts

for Use in the Distribution of Electric Energy. e. WC 74, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the

Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy.

697482A.GN1

CONDUCTORS PW\DEN003\697482 26 05 05 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of

Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. 7. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): TIA-568-C,

Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

a. 13, Standard for Safety for Power-Limited Circuit Cables. b. 44, Standard for Safety for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and

Cables. c. 62, Standard for Safety for Flexible Cord and Cables. d. 486A-486B, Standard for Safety for Wire Connectors. e. 486C, Standard for Safety for Splicing Wire Connectors. f. 510, Standard for Safety for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene,

and Rubber Insulating Tape. g. 854, Standard for Safety for Service-Entrance Cables. h. 1072, Standard for Safety for Medium-Voltage Power Cables. i. 1277, Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray

Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members. j. 1569, Standard for Safety for Metal-Clad Cables. k. 1581, Standard for Safety for Reference Standard for Electrical

Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: a. Wire and cable. b. Wire and cable accessories. c. Cable fault detection system.

2. Manufactured Wire Systems: a. Product data. b. Rating information. c. Dimensional drawings. d. Special fittings.

3. Busway: a. Product data. b. Rating information. c. Dimensional drawings. d. Special fitting. e. Equipment interface information for equipment to be connected to

busways.

697482A.GN1


4. Cable Pulling Calculations: a. Ensure submitted and reviewed before cable installation. b. Provide for the following cable installations:

1) Medium voltage cable runs that cannot be hand pulled. 2) Multiconductor 600-volt cable sizes larger than 2 AWG that

cannot be hand pulled. 3) Power and control conductor, and control and

instrumentation cable installations in ductbanks. 4) Feeder circuits; single conductors No. 4/0 and larger.

B. Informational Submittals: Factory Test Report for conductors 600 volts and below.



1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70.

B. Conductor Type:

1. 120-Volt and 277-Volt Lighting, 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. 2. 120-Volt Receptacle Circuits, 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. 3. All Other Circuits: Stranded copper.

C. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2, except for sizes No. 6 and larger, with XHHW-2 insulation.

D. Direct Burial and Aerial Conductors and Cables:

1. Type USE/RHH/RHW insulation, UL 854 listed, or Type RHW-2/USE-2.

2. Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC 70.

697482A.GN1


E. Flexible Cords and Cables:

1. Type SOW-A/50 with ethylene propylene rubber insulation in accordance with UL 62.

2. Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC 70.

2.02 600-VOLT RATED CABLE

A. General:

1. Type TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray Flame Test at 70,000 Btu per hour, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13 meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 725.

2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer’s name, maximum working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark.

3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit. 4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations,

75 degrees C wet locations. 5. Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant.

B. Type 1, Multiconductor Control Cable:

1. Conductors: a. 14 AWG, seven-strand copper. b. Insulation: 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon. c. UL 1581 listed as Type THHN/THWN rated VW-1. d. Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape. e. Color Code: In accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 1,

Table 2. 2. Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray

Flame Test. 3. Cable Sizes:

No. of Conductors Max. Outside Diameter

(Inches) Jacket Thickness

(Mils)

3 0.41 45

5 0.48 45

7 0.52 45

12 0.72 60

19 0.83 60

25 1.00 60

37 1.15 80

697482A.GN1


4. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Southwire.

C. Type 2, Multiconductor Power Cable:

1. General: a. Meet or exceed UL 1581 for cable tray use. b. Meet or exceed UL 1277 for direct burial and sunlight-resistance. c. Overall Jacket: PVC.

2. Conductors: a. Class B stranded, coated copper. b. Insulation: Chemically cross-linked ethylene-propylene or cross-

linked polyethylene. c. UL rated VW-1 or listed Type XHHW-2. d. Color Code:

1) Conductors, size 8 AWG and smaller, colored conductors, ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 1.

2) Conductors, size 6 AWG and larger, ICEA S-73-532, Method 4.

3. Cable shall pass ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray Flame Test.

4. Cable Sizes:

Conductor Size

Minimum Ground

Wire Size

No. of Current Carrying

Conductors

Max. Outside

Diameter (Inches)

Nominal Jacket

Thickness (Mils)

12 12 2 3 4

0.42 0.45 0.49

45

10 10 2 3 4

0.54 0.58 0.63

60

8 10 3 4

0.66 0.75

60

6 8 3 4

0.74 0.88

60

4 6 3 4

0.88 1.04

60 80

2 6 3 4

1.01 1.16

80

1 6 3 4

1.10 1.25

80

697482A.GN1


Conductor Size

Minimum Ground

Wire Size

No. of Current Carrying

Conductors

Max. Outside

Diameter (Inches)

Nominal Jacket

Thickness (Mils)

1/0 6 3 4

1.22 1.35

80

2/0 4 3 4

1.32 1.53

80

3/0 4 3 4

1.40 1.60

80

4/0 4 3 4

1.56 1.78

80 110

5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Southwire.

D. Type 3, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements.

1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic

polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD. 4. Conductors:

a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8.

b. 20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire. c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d. Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon. e. Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red.

5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. c. Belden.

E. Type 4, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single triad, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements.

1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic

polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.

697482A.GN1


3. Dimension: 0.32-inch nominal OD. 4. Conductors:

a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8.

b. 20 AWG, seven-strand, tinned copper drain wire. c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d. Jacket: 4-mil nylon. e. Color Code: Triad conductors black, red, and blue.


F. Type 5, 18 AWG, Multitwisted Shielded Pairs, with a Common Overall Shield, Instrumentation Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process control, and computer cable, meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements.

1. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in

accordance with ASTM B8. b. Tinned copper drain wires. c. Pair drain wire size AWG 20, group drain wire size AWG 18. d. Insulation: 15-mil PVC. e. Jacket: 4-mil nylon. f. Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red with red conductor

numerically printed for group identification. g. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic

polymer. 2. Cable Shield: 2.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer,

overlapped for 100 percent coverage. 3. Cable Sizes:

Number of Pairs

Maximum Outside Diameter (Inches)

Nominal Jacket Thickness

(Mils)

4 0.50 45

8 0.68 60

12 0.82 60

16 0.95 80

24 1.16 80

36 1.33 80

50 1.56 80

697482A.GN1



G. Type 6, 18 AWG, Multitwisted Pairs with Common Overall Shield Instrumentation Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process control, and computer cable meeting NEMA WC 57.

1. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in

accordance with ASTM B8. b. Tinned copper drain wire size AWG 18. c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d. Jacket: 4-mil nylon. e. Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red with red conductor

numerically printed for group identification. 2. Cable Shield: 2.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer,

overlapped for 100 percent coverage.

Cable Sizes: Number of Pairs

Maximum Outside Diameter (Inches)

Nominal Jacket Thickness

(Mils)

4 0.48 45

8 0.63 60

12 0.75 60

16 0.83 60

24 1.10 80

36 1.21 80

50 1.50 80


H. Type 8, Multiconductor Adjustable Frequency Drive Power Cable:

1. Conductors: a. Class B, stranded coated copper. b. Insulation: 600-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL

Type XHHW-2. c. Grounding Conductors: Insulated stranded copper.

697482A.GN1


2. Sheath: a. UL 1277 Type TC, 90 degrees C. b. Continuous shield, A1/polyester foil, drain wires, overall copper

braid. 3. Outer Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) per UL 1569. 4. Cable Sizes:

Conductor Size

Minimum Ground

Wire Size (AWG)

No. of Insulated

Conductors

Max. Outside

Diameter (Inches)

Minimum Jacket

Thickness (Mils)

12 AWG 12 4 0.655 50

10 AWG 10 4 0.769 50

8 AWG 8 4 0.940 50

6 AWG 6 4 1.038 50

4 AWG 4 4 1.180 50

2 AWG 2 4 1.351 50

5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Belden; Series 29500. b. Alpha Wire; Series V c. LAPP USA; OLFLEX VFD Slim.

I. Type 9, Multi-Conductor, 3 Symmetrical Grounds, Adjustable Frequency Drive Cable:

1. Meeting requirements of UL 1277 and UL 2277. 2. Conductors:

a. Flexible fine wire stranded tinned copper. b. Insulation: 2000-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL

Type XHHW-2. c. Grounding Conductors: Flexible fine wire stranded tinned copper.

Provide three symmetrical grounding conductors. 3. Sheath: UL 1277 Type TC, 90 degrees C. Continuous shield,

A1/polyester foil, drain wires, overall tinned copper braid (Minimum 80 percent optical coverage).

4. Outer Jacket: PVC per UL 1569. 5. Bending radius: 7.5 times outside diameter of cable.

697482A.GN1


6. Cable Sizes:

Conductor Size

Minimum Ground

Wire Size (AWG)

No. of Insulated

Conductors

Max. Outside

Diameter (Inches)

Jacket Thickness

(Mils)

6 AWG 3x12 3x3

0.93

50

4 AWG 3x12 3x3

1.015

50

2 AWG 3x10 3

1.155

50

1 AWG 3x10 3

1.335 50

1/0 KCM 3x10 3

1.395

50

2/0 AWG 3x8 3

1.50

50

4/0 AWG 3x8 3

1.865

60

250 KCM 3x8 3

1.980 60

350 KCM 3x8 3

2.220 60

500 KCM 3x8 3

2.505

75

7. Manufacturer and Product: a. Belden, Series 29500. b. Or approved Equal.

2.03 SPECIAL CABLES

A. Type 30, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Telephone and Data Cable, 300V:

1. Category 6 UTP, UL listed, and third party verified to comply with TIA/EIA 568-C Category 6 requirements.

2. Suitable for high speed network applications including gigabit ethernet and video. Cable shall be interoperable with other standards compliant products and shall be backward compatible with Category 5 and Category 5e.

3. Provide four each individually twisted pair, 23 AWG conductors, with FEP insulation and blue PVC jacket.

697482A.GN1


4. NFPA 70 Plenum (CMP) rated; comply with flammability plenum requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 262.

5. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1-inch minimum at a temperature of minus 20 degrees C maximum without jacket or insulation cracking.

6. Manufacturer and Product: Belden; 7852A.

B. Type 31, Data Highway Cable:

1. Outer Jacket: Blue PVC. 2. Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped

to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Drain: 55 percent tinned copper braid and drain wire. 4. Dimension: 0.243-inch nominal OD. 5. Conductors:

a. One pair 20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper. b. Insulation: Polyethylene. c. Color Code: Blue and clear.

6. Manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley. b. Belden.

2.04 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE or THHN/THWN, insulation.

B. Direct Buried: Bare stranded copper.

2.05 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

A. Tape:

1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33+, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510.

2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 88.

3. Arc and Fireproofing: a. 30-mil, elastomer. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) 3M; Scotch Brand 77, with Scotch Brand 69 glass cloth tapebinder.

2) Plymouth; 53 Plyarc, with 77 Plyglas glass cloth tapebinder.

697482A.GN1


B. Identification Devices:

1. Sleeve: a. Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed

black markings. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Raychem; Type D-SCE or ZH-SCE. 2) Brady, Type 3PS.

2. Heat Bond Marker: a. Transparent thermoplastic heat bonding film with acrylic pressure

sensitive adhesive. b. Self-laminating protective shield over text. c. Machine printed black text. d. Manufacturer and Product: 3M Co.; Type SCS-HB.

3. Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot stamped on plate.

4. Tie-On Cable Marker Tags: a. Chemical-resistant white tag. b. Size: 1/2 inch by 2 inches. c. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type CM-SCE.

5. Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat-shrink sleeve, 2-inch minimum.

C. Connectors and Terminations:

1. Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors: a. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulug. 3) ILSCO.

2. Nylon, Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70,

75 degrees C ampacity. b. Seamless. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulink. 3) ILSCO; ILSCONS.

3. Self-Insulated, Freespring Wire Connector (Wire Nuts): a. UL 486C. b. Plated steel, square wire springs. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Thomas & Betts. 2) Ideal; Twister.

4. Self-Insulated, Set Screw Wire Connector: a. Two piece compression type with set screw in brass barrel. b. Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel.

697482A.GN1


c. Manufacturers: 1) 3M Co. 2) Thomas & Betts. 3) Marrette.

D. Cable Lugs:

1. In accordance with NEMA CC 1. 2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal. 3. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators:

a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed. 2) Burndy; Hydent. 3) ILSCO.

4. Uninsulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators: a. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Thomas & Betts; Locktite. 2) Burndy; Quiklug. 3) ILSCO.

E. Cable Ties:

1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP.

F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation:

1. Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin. 2. Single wall for insulation and strain relief. 3. Dual Wall, adhesive sealant lined, for sealing and corrosion resistance. 4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON. b. Raychem; RNF-100 and ES-2000.

G. Data Cable Accessories: Terminators, connectors, and junctions necessary for a complete DeviceNet, Profibus PA, and Profibus DP systems.

2.06 PULLING COMPOUND

A. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, water-based lubricant; UL listed.

B. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and lead-covered wire and cable.

697482A.GN1


C. Approved for intended use by cable manufacturer.

D. Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass raceways.

E. Manufacturers:

1. Ideal Co. 2. Polywater, Inc. 3. Cable Grip Co.

2.07 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS

A. System Rating:

1. 20 amperes load-carrying capacity each phase with final assemblies consisting of maximum of three-phase conductors.

2. Composition: Type MC cable with 90 degrees C insulation and stranded copper conductors.

B. Cable Configuration: Three, single-phase, five-wire circuit with standard color wire coding:

1. 208/120 Volt: Black, red, blue, white, green. 2. 480/277 Volt: Brown, orange, yellow, white, green.

C. Locking Mechanism: Latch/strike with voltage clearly marked on latch.

D. NFPA 262 listed for use in air handling plenums, listed to connect or disconnect under load, and manufactured in accordance with NFPA 70, Article No. 604.

2.08 WARNING TAPE

A. As specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.


A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and UL 854.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Conductor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless noted otherwise.

697482A.GN1


C. Do not exceed cable manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii.

D. Terminate conductors and cables, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A-486B for copper conductors and aluminum conductors.

F. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to-center spacing as required by equipment terminals.

G. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means, bundle conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 12 inches on center.

H. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or cables.

I. Concrete-Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of conductors, pull through each raceway a mandrel approximately 1/4-inch smaller than raceway inside diameter.

3.02 POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING

A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below:

1. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping turns, covering area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide.

2. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors. 3. Colors:

System Conductor Color

All Systems Equipment Grounding Green

240/120 Volts, Single-Phase, Three-Wire

Grounded Neutral One Hot Leg

Other Hot Leg

White Black Red

208Y/120 Volts, Three-Phase, Four-Wire

Grounded Neutral Phase A Phase B Phase C

White Black Red Blue

240/120 Volts, Three-Phase, Four-Wire, Delta, Center Tap, Ground on Single-Phase

Grounded Neutral Phase A

High (wild) Leg Phase C

White Black

Orange Blue

697482A.GN1


System Conductor Color

480Y/277 Volts, Three-Phase, Four-Wire

Grounded Neutral Phase A Phase B Phase C

White Brown Orange Yellow

Note: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation.

4. Tracer: Outer covering of white with identifiable colored strip, other than green, in accordance with NFPA 70.

3.03 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify power, instrumentation, and control conductor circuits at each termination, and in accessible locations such as manholes, handholes, panels, switchboards, motor control centers, pull boxes, and terminal boxes.

B. Circuits Appearing in Circuit Schedules: Identify using circuit schedule designations.

C. Circuits Not Appearing in Circuit Schedules:

1. Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit. 2. Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than one

circuit, add number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to make it unique.

D. Method:

1. Conductors 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves or heat bond markers.

2. Cables and Conductors 2 AWG and Larger: a. Identify with marker plates or tie-on cable marker tags. b. Attach with nylon tie cord.

3. Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted.

3.04 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

A. Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring in lighting and receptacle circuits.

B. Do not splice incoming service conductors and branch power distribution conductors 6 AWG and larger, unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer.

697482A.GN1


C. Connections and Terminations:

1. Install wire nuts only on solid conductors. Wire nuts are not allowed on stranded conductors.

2. Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation and control, circuit conductors.

3. Install self-insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection of power circuit conductors 12 AWG and smaller.

4. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation, control, and power circuit conductors 4 AWG through 2/0 AWG.

5. Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit conductors 3/0 AWG and larger.

6. Install uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuit conductors 10 AWG and larger.

7. Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure connection.

8. Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer.

9. Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used. 10. Compression Lugs:

a. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. Tool shall provide complete, controlled crimp and shall not release until crimp is complete.

b. Do not use plier type crimpers.

D. Do not use soldered mechanical joints.

E. Splices and Terminations:

1. Insulate uninsulated connections. 2. Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape or single wall heat

shrink. 3. Outdoors, Dry Locations: Use flame retardant, cold- and weather-

resistant tape or single wall heat shrink. 4. Below Grade and Wet or Damp Locations: Use dual wall heat shrink.

F. Cap spare conductors with UL listed end caps.

G. Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers:

1. Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure. 2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal,

remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors.

697482A.GN1


H. Control and Instrumentation Wiring:

1. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and instrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated, locking-fork compression lugs.

2. Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with terminal manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips.

4. Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made under Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, leave pigtails of adequate length for bundled connections.

5. Cable Protection: a. Under Infinite Access Floors: May install without bundling. b. All Other Areas: Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex

conduit under floor or grouped into bundles at least 1/2 inch in diameter.

c. Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables. d. Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over

shield.

I. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install minimum 6 feet of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet in other assemblies.

3.05 CONDUCTOR ARC AND FIREPROOFING

A. Install arc and fireproofing tape on 600-volt single conductors and cables, except those rated Type TC throughout entire exposed length in manholes, handholes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations.

B. Wrap conductors of same circuit entering from separate conduit together as single cable.

C. Follow tape manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Secure tape at intervals of 5 feet with bands of tapebinder. Each band to consist of a minimum of two wraps directly over each other.

3.06 UNDERGROUND DIRECT BURIAL CABLE

A. Install in trench as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

B. Warning Tape: Install approximately 12 inches above cable, aligned parallel to, and within 12 inches of centerline of the run.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 GROUNDING AND BONDING FEBRUARY 7, 2019 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code. (NEC).

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Product data for the following:

1) Exothermic weld connectors. 2) Mechanical connectors. 3) Compression connectors. 4) Specialty tools.



1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, provide material and equipment labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL: a. Confirm conformance with UL standards. b. Supply with an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUND ROD

A. Material: Copper. Copper-clad.

B. Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch.

C. Length: 10 feet.

697482A.GN1

GROUNDING AND BONDING PW\DEN003\697482 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 05 26 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

2.02 GROUND CONDUCTORS

A. As specified in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

2.03 CONNECTORS

A. Exothermic Weld Type:

1. Outdoor Weld: Suitable for exposure to elements or direct burial. 2. Indoor Weld: Use low-smoke, low-emission process. 3. Manufacturers:

a. Erico Products, Inc.; Cadweld and Cadweld Exolon. b. Thermoweld.

B. Compression Type:

1. Compress-deforming type; wrought copper extrusion material. 2. Single indentation for conductors 6 AWG and smaller. 3. Double indentation with extended barrel for conductors 4 AWG and

larger. 4. Barrels prefilled with oxide-inhibiting and antiseizing compound and

sealed. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy Corp.; Hyground Irreversible Compression. b. Thomas and Betts Co. c. ILSCO.

C. Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloy material.

1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy Corp. b. Thomas and Betts Co.

2.04 GROUNDING WELLS

A. Ground rod box complete with cast-iron riser ring and traffic cover marked “GROUND ROD”.

B. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Christy Co.; No. G5. 2. Lightning and Grounding Systems, Inc.; I-R Series.

697482A.GN1


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Grounding: In compliance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.

B. Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment with grounding electrode conductor to grounding electrode system.

C. Ground each separately derived system neutral with common grounding electrode conductor to grounding electrode system.

D. Bond together all grounding electrodes that are present at each building or structure served to form one common grounding electrode system.

E. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways, ground conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connections, and metal piping systems.

F. Shielded Power Cables: Ground shields at each splice or termination in accordance with recommendations of splice or termination manufacturer.

G. Shielded Instrumentation Cables:

1. Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal. 2. Expose shield minimum 1 inch at termination to field instrument and

apply heat shrink tube. 3. Do not ground instrumentation cable shield at more than one point.

3.02 WIRE CONNECTIONS

A. Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power conductors and control circuits above 50 volts.

B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

C. Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings.

D. Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment containing a ground bus.

E. Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus.

F. Bolt connections to equipment ground bus.

G. Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to intermediate metallic enclosures.

697482A.GN1


H. Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment grounding system with grounding clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inch machine screws.

I. Metallic Equipment Enclosures: Use furnished ground lug; if none furnished, tap equipment housing and install solderless terminal connected to box with machine screw. For circuits greater than 20 amps use minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt.

3.03 MOTOR GROUNDING

A. Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor feeder raceway; connect to motor frame.

B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

C. Motors Less Than 10 hp: Use furnished ground lug in motor connection box. If none furnished, provide compression, spade-type terminal connected to conduit box mounting screw.

D. Motors 10 hp and Above: Use furnished ground lug in motor connection box. If none furnished, tap motor frame or equipment housing; furnish compression, one-hole, lug type terminal connected with minimum 5/16-inch brass threaded stud with bolt and washer.

E. Circuits 20 Amps or Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing. Install solderless terminal with minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt.

3.04 GROUND RODS

A. Install full length with conductor connection at upper end.

B. Install with connection point below finished grade, unless otherwise shown.

C. Space multiple ground rods by one rod length.

D. Install to 8 feet below local frost depth.

3.05 GROUNDING WELLS

A. Install for ground rods located inside buildings, asphalt and paved areas, and where shown on Drawings.

B. Install riser ring and cover flush with surface.

C. Place 12 inches of crushed rock in bottom of each well.

697482A.GN1


3.06 CONNECTIONS

A. General:

1. Abovegrade Connections: Install exothermic weld, mechanical, or compression-type connectors; or brazing.

2. Belowgrade Connections: Install exothermic weld or compression type connectors.

3. Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at connection points to allow good metal-to-metal contact.

4. Notify Engineer prior to backfilling ground connections.

B. Exothermic Weld Type:

1. Wire brush or file contact point to bare metal surface. 2. Use welding cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. 3. Avoid using badly worn molds. 4. Mold to be completely filled with metal when making welds. 5. After completed welds have cooled, brush slag from weld area and

thoroughly clean joint.

C. Compression Type:

1. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Install connectors of proper size for grounding conductors and ground

rods specified. 3. Install using connector manufacturer’s compression tool having proper

sized dies and operate per manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Mechanical Type:

1. Apply homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust and corrosion inhibitor before making connection.

2. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Do not conceal mechanical connections.

3.07 MOTOR GROUNDING

A. Extended equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor feeder raceway; connect to motor frame.

B. Nonmetallic Raceway and flexible Tubing: Install an equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

C. Motors less than 10 hp: Use furnished ground lug in motor connection box; if none furnished, provide compression, spade-type terminal connected to conduit box mounting screw.

697482A.GN1


D. Motors 10 hp and above. Use furnished ground lug in motor connection box; if none furnished, tap motor frame or equipment housing; furnish compression, one-hole, lug tap terminal connected with minimum 5/16 inch brass threaded stud with bolt and washer.

E. Circuits 20 Amps and Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; install solderless terminal with minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt.

3.08 METAL STRUCTURE GROUNDING

A. Bond metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements to grounding system.

B. Bond electrical equipment supported by metal platforms to the platforms.

C. Provide electrical contact between metal frames and railings supporting pushbutton stations, receptacles, and instrument cabinets, and raceways carrying circuits to these devices.

3.09 MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE GROUNDING

A. Install one ground rod inside each manhole and handhole larger than 24-inch by 24-inch inside dimensions.

B. Ground Rod Floor Protrusion: 4 inches to 6 inches above floor.

C. Make connections of grounding conductors fully visible and accessible.

D. Connect all noncurrent-carrying metal parts and any metallic raceway grounding bushings to ground rod with 6 AWG copper conductor.

3.10 TRANSFORMER GROUNDING

A. Bond neutrals of transformers within buildings to system ground network and to any additional indicated grounding electrodes.

B. Bond neutrals of pad-mounted transformers to four locally driven ground rods and buried ground wire encircling transformer and system ground network.

3.11 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS

A. Bond lightning protection system ground terminals to building or structure grounding electrode system.

3.12 SURGE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Connect surge arrestor ground terminals to equipment ground bus.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 RACEWAY AND BOXES FEBRUARY 8, 2019 26 05 33 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): HB, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped

Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. c. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and

Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

d. C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

e. D149, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies.

3. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 569B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

4. National Electrical Contractor’s Association, Inc. (NECA): Installation standards.

5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). c. C80.3, Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). d. C80.5, Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC). e. C80.6, Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC). f. RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized

Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. g. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. h. TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC

Conduit and Tubing. i. TC 6, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for

Underground Installation. j. TC 14, Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and

Fittings. k. VE 1, Metallic Cable Tray Systems.

697482A.GN1

RACEWAY AND BOXES PW\DEN003\697482 26 05 33 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 1, Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 5, Standard for Safety for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings. c. 6, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel. d. 6A, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit –

Aluminum, Red Brass and Stainless. e. 360, Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. f. 514B, Standard for Safety for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable

Fittings. g. 651, Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC

Conduit and Fittings. h. 651A, Standard for Safety for Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit

and HDPE Conduit. i. 797, Standard for Safety for Electrical Metallic Tubing – Steel. j. 870, Standard for Safety for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and

Associated Fittings. k. 1242, Standard for Safety for Electrical Intermediate Metal

Conduit – Steel. l. 1660, Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic

Conduit. m. 1684, Standard for Safety for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin

Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. n. 2024, Standard for Safety for Optical Fiber and Communication

Cable Raceway.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer’s Literature: a. PVC Schedule 40 conduit. b. PVC Schedule 80 conduit. c. PVC-coated rigid conduit submittal to include copy of

manufacturer’s warranty. d. Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit. e. Flexible, nonmetallic, liquid-tight conduit. f. Flexible metal, nonliquid-tight conduit. g. Conduit fittings. h. Wireways. i. Device boxes for use in hazardous areas. j. Junction and pull boxes used at or below grade. k. Large junction and pull boxes. l. Terminal junction boxes.

697482A.GN1


2. Precast Manholes and Handholes: a. Dimensional drawings and descriptive literature. b. Traffic loading calculations. c. Accessory information.

3. Equipment and machinery proposed for bending metal conduit. 4. Method for bending PVC conduit less than 30 degrees. 5. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by

Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 6. Conduit Layout:

a. Provide drawings for conduit installations underground and concealed conduits including, but not limited to ductbanks, under floor slabs, concealed in floor slabs, and concealed in walls.

b. Provide plan and section showing arrangement and location of conduit and duct bank required for: 1) Low and medium voltage feeder and branch circuits. 2) Instrumentation and control systems. 3) Communications systems. 4) Empty conduit for future use.

c. Reproducible; scale not greater than 1 inch equals 20 feet.



1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Stainless Steel Rigid Conduit (SSRC):

1. ANSI C80.1, UL6A, ASTM A-312/SA-312. 2. Fittings: Threaded type. 3. Type 316 stainless steel. Schedule 40.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.5 and UL 6A. 2. Material: Type 6063, copper-free aluminum alloy.

697482A.GN1


C. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. 2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed

or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors. 3. Furnish without factory-formed bell.

D. PVC Schedule 80 Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. 2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed

or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.

E. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:

1. UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors. 2. Material: Galvanized steel with extruded PVC jacket.

F. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of UL 1. 2. Material: Galvanized steel.

G. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Material: PVC core with fused flexible PVC jacket. 2. UL 1660 listed for:

a. Dry Conditions: 80 degrees C insulated conductors. b. Wet Conditions: 60 degrees C insulated conductors.

3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Carlon; Carflex or X-Flex. b. T & B; Xtraflex LTC or EFC.

2.02 FITTINGS

A. Rigid Stainless Steel Conduit:

1. General: a. Meet requirements of UL 514B. b. Type: Threaded, Type 316 stainless steel. Set screw fittings not

permitted. 2. Insulated Bushing:

a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel, with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C.

b. Manufacturer: Calbrite.

697482A.GN1


3. Grounding Bushing: a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel with integral insulated throat,

rated for 150 degrees, with solderless lugs. b. Manufacturer: Calbrite.

4. Conduit Hub: a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel, with insulated throat. b. UL listed for use in wet locations. c. Manufacturers: Calbrite.

5. Conduit Bodies: a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Manufacturer: Calbrite.

6. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer. 7. Conduit Sealing Fitting:

a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Manufacturer: Calbrite.

8. Drain Seal: a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Manufacturer: Calbrite.

9. Drain/Breather Fitting: a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Manufacturer: Calbrite.

10. Expansion Fitting: a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Manufacturer: Calbrite.

11. Cable Sealing Fittings: a. To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit. b. Bushing: Neoprene at connector entry. c. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. d. Manufacturer: Calbrite.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit:

1. General: a. Meet requirements of UL 514B. b. Type: Threaded, copper-free. Set screw fittings not permitted.

2. Insulated Bushing: a. Material: Cast aluminum, with integral insulated throat, rated for

150 degrees C. b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type AB.

3. Grounding Bushing: a. Material: Cast aluminum with integral insulated throat, rated for

150 degrees, with solderless lugs. b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type ABLG.

4. Conduit Hub: a. Material: Cast aluminum, with insulated throat. b. UL listed for use in wet locations.

697482A.GN1


c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) O-Z/Gedney; Type CHA. 2) Thomas & Betts; Series 370AL. 3) Meyers; Series SA.

5. Conduit Bodies: a. Manufacturers and Products (For Normal Conditions):

1) Appleton; Form 85 threaded unilets. 2) Crouse-Hinds; Mark 9 or Form 7-SA threaded condulets. 3) Killark; Series O electrolets.

b. Manufacturers (For Hazardous Locations): 1) Appleton. 2) Crouse-Hinds. 3) Killark.

6. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer. 7. Conduit Sealing Fitting Manufacturers and Products:

a. Appleton; Type EYF-AL or EYM-AL. b. Crouse-Hinds; Type EYS-SA or EZS-SA. c. Killark; Type EY or EYS.

8. Drain Seal Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type EYDM-A. b. Crouse-Hinds; Type EYD-SA or EZD-SA.

9. Drain/Breather Fitting Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type ECDB. b. Crouse-Hinds; ECD.

10. Expansion Fitting Manufacturers and Products: a. Deflection/Expansion Movement: Steel City; Type DF-A. b. Expansion Movement Only: Steel City; Type AF-A.

11. Cable Sealing Fittings: To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit. a. Bushing: Neoprene at connector entry. b. Manufacturer: Appleton; CG-S.

C. PVC Conduit and Tubing:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 3. 2. Type: PVC, slip-on.

D. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing rated for 105 degrees C.

2. Insulated throat and sealing O-rings. 3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Thomas & Betts; Series 5331. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series 4Q.

697482A.GN1


E. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Body: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Throat: Nylon insulated. 4. 1-1/4-Inch Conduit and Smaller: One screw body. 5. 1-1/2-Inch Conduit and Larger: Two screw body. 6. Manufacturer and Product: Appleton; Series 7400.

F. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Type: High strength plastic body, complete with lock nut, O-ring,

threaded ferrule, sealing ring, and compression nut. 3. Body/compression nut (gland) design to ensure high mechanical pullout

strength and watertight seal. 4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Carlon; Type LT. b. O-Z/Gedney; Type 4Q-P. c. Thomas & Betts; Series 6300.

G. Flexible Coupling, Hazardous Locations:

1. Approved for use in atmosphere involved. 2. Rating: Watertight and UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1 and 2

areas. 3. Outer bronze braid and an insulating liner. 4. Conductivity equal to a similar length of rigid metal conduit. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Crouse-Hinds; Type ECGJH or Type ECLK. b. Appleton; EXGJH or EXLK.

H. Watertight Entrance Seal Device:

1. New Construction: a. Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body with sealing ring,

pressure ring, grommet seal, and pressure clamp. b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type FSK or

Type WSK, as required. 2. Cored-Hole Application:

a. Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene sealing ring, and membrane clamp.

b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Series CSM.

697482A.GN1


2.03 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES

A. Cast Stainless Steel:

1. Material: a. Box: Cast, Type 316 Stainless steel. b. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, cast stainless steel with stainless

steel screws. 2. Hubs: Threaded. 3. Lugs: Cast mounting. 4. Manufacturers: Calbrite.

B. Cast Aluminum:

1. Material: a. Box: Cast, copper-free aluminum. b. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, cast copper-free aluminum with

stainless steel screws. 2. Hubs: Threaded. 3. Lugs: Cast mounting. 4. Manufacturers and Products, Nonhazardous Locations:

a. Crouse-Hinds; Type FS-SA or Type FD-SA. b. Appleton; Type FS or Type FD. c. Killark.

5. Manufacturers and Products, Hazardous Locations: a. Crouse-Hinds; Type GUA-SA. b. Appleton; Type GR.

C. Cast Stainless Steel:

1. Material: a. Box: Cast, Type 316 stainless steel. b. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, cast stainless steel with stainless

steel screws. 2. Hubs: Threaded. 3. Lugs: Cast mounting. 4. Manufacturers: Calbrite.

D. Nonmetallic:

1. Box: PVC. 2. Cover: PVC, weatherproof, with stainless steel screws. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Carlon; Type FS or Type FD, with Type E98

or Type E96 covers.

697482A.GN1


2.04 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Outlet Box Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under Article Outlet and Device Boxes.

B. Conduit Bodies Used as Junction Boxes: As specified under Article Fittings.

C. Large Cast Metal Box:

1. NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Box: Cast malleable iron, or ferrous metal, electrogalvanized finished,

with drilled and tapped conduit entrances and exterior mounting lugs. 3. Cover: Hinged with screws. 4. Gasket: Neoprene. 5. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Manufacturers and Products, Surface Mounted Nonhinged Type:

a. Crouse-Hinds; Series W. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series Y.

7. Manufacturer and Product, Surface Mounted, Hinged Type: O-Z/Gedney; Series YW.

8. Manufacturers and Products, Recessed Type: a. Crouse-Hinds; Type WJBF. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series YR.

D. Large Cast Metal Box, Hazardous Locations:

1. NEMA 250 Type 7 or Type 9 as required for Class, Division, and Group involved.

2. Box: Cast ferrous metal, electro-galvanize finished or copper-free aluminum with drilled and tapped conduit entrances.

3. Cover: Hinged with screws. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Crouse-Hinds; Type EJB. b. Appleton; Type AJBEW.

E. Large Cast Aluminum Box:

1. NEMA 250 Type 4. 2. Box: Cast copper-free aluminum, with drilled and tapped conduit

entrances and exterior mounting lugs. 3. Cover: Nonhinged. 4. Gasket: Neoprene. 5. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.

697482A.GN1


6. Manufacturers and Products, Surface Mounted Type: a. Crouse-Hinds; Series W-SA. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series YS-A, YL-A. c. Killark.

F. Large Stainless Steel Box:

1. NEMA 250 Type 4X. 2. Box: 14-gauge, ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316 stainless steel, with

white enamel painted interior mounting panel. 3. Cover: Hinged with screws. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Robroy Industries. c. Wiegman.

2.05 TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX

A. Cover: Hinged, unless otherwise shown.

B. Interior Finish: Paint with white enamel or lacquer.

C. Terminal Blocks:

1. Separate connection point for each conductor entering or leaving box. 2. Spare Terminal Points: 50 percent, minimum.

2.06 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Meet requirements of UL 870.

B. Type: Aluminum-enclosed, lay-in type.

C. Cover: Hinged with friction latch.

D. Rating: NEMA 4X.

E. Finish: Rust inhibiting phosphatizing primer and gray baked enamel.

F. Hardware: Plated to prevent corrosion; screws installed toward the inside protected by spring nuts or otherwise guarded to prevent wire insulation damage.

G. Knockouts: Without knockouts, unless otherwise indicated.

697482A.GN1


H. Manufacturers:

1. Circle AW. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D.

2.07 PRECAST MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A. Concrete Strength: Minimum, 3,000 psi compressive, in 28 days.

B. Loading: AASHTO, H-20 in accordance with ASTM C857.

C. Access: Provide cast concrete 6-inch or 12-inch risers and access hole adapters between top of manhole and finished grade at required elevations.

D. Drainage:

1. Slope floors toward drain points, leaving no pockets or other nondraining areas.

2. Provide drainage outlet or sump at low point of floor constructed with a heavy, cast iron, slotted or perforated hinged cover, and a minimum 4-inch outlet and outlet pipe. Provide no drainage outlet.

E. Raceway Entrances:

1. Provide on all four sides. 2. Provide knockout panels or precast individual raceway openings. 3. At entrances where raceways are to be installed by others, provide

minimum 12-inch-high by 24-inch-wide knockout panels for future raceway installation.

F. Embedded Pulling Iron:

1. Material: 3/4-inch-diameter stock, fastened to overall steel reinforcement before concrete is placed.

2. Location: a. Wall: Opposite each raceway entrance and knockout panel for

future raceway entrance. b. Floor: Centered below manhole or handhole cover.

G. Cable Racks:

1. Arms and Insulators: Adjustable, of sufficient number to accommodate cables for each raceway entering or leaving manhole, including spares.

2. Wall Attachment: a. Adjustable inserts in concrete walls. Bolts or embedded studs not

permitted.

697482A.GN1


b. Insert Spacing: Maximum 3 feet on center for inside perimeter of manhole.

c. Arrange in order that spare raceway ends are clear for future cable installation.

H. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Material: Machined cast iron. 2. Diameter: 32 inch. 3. Cover Type: Indented, solid top design, with two drop handles each. 4. Cover Loading: AASHTO H-20. 5. Cover Designation: Cast, on upper side, in integral letters, minimum

2 inches in height, appropriate titles: a. 600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV. b. ANALOG. c. DISCRETE.

I. Handhole Frames and Covers:

1. Material: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized. 2. Cover Type: Solid, -on, nonskid design. 3. Cover Loading: AASHTO H-20. 4. Cover Designation: Burn by welder, on upper side in integral letters,

minimum 2 inches in height, appropriate titles: a. 600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV. b. ANALOG. c. DISCRETE.

J. Hardware: Stainless steel.

K. Furnish knockout for ground rod in each handhole and manhole.

L. Manufacturers:

1. Utility Vault Co. 2. Penn-Cast Products, Inc. 3. Concrete Conduit Co. 4. Associated Concrete Products, Inc. 5. Pipe, Inc.

2.08 ACCESSORIES

A. Duct Bank Spacers:

1. Modular Type: a. Nonmetallic, interlocking, for multiple conduit sizes. b. Suitable for all types of conduit.

697482A.GN1


c. Manufacturers: 1) Underground Device, Inc. 2) Carlon.

2. Template Type: a. Nonmetallic, custom made one-piece spacers. b. Suitable for all types of conduit. c. Material: HDPE or polypropylene, 1/2-inch minimum thickness. d. Conduit openings cut 1 inch larger than conduit outside diameter. e. Additional openings for stake-down, rebar, and concrete flow

through as required. f. Manufacturer and Product: SP Products; Quik Duct.

B. Identification Devices:

1. Raceway Tags: a. Material: Permanent, nonferrous metal. b. Shape: Round. c. Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved. d. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not permitted.

2. Warning Tape: a. Material: Polyethylene, 4-mil gauge with detectable strip. b. Color: Red. c. Width: Minimum 6 inches. d. Designation: Warning on tape that electric circuit is located below

tape. e. Identifying Letters: Minimum 1-inch-high permanent black

lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. f. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Panduit; Type HTDU. 2) Reef Industries; Terra Tape.

3. Buried Raceway Marker: a. Material: Sheet bronze, consisting of double-ended arrows,

straight for straight runs and bent at locations where runs change direction.

b. Designation: Engrave to depth of 3/32 inch; ELECTRIC CABLES, in letters 1/4-inch high.

c. Minimum Dimension: 1/4-inch thick, 10 inches long, and 3/4-inch wide.

C. Raceway Coating: Clean and paint in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

D. Heat Shrinkable Tubing:

1. Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin. 2. Semi-flexible with meltable adhesive inner liner.

697482A.GN1


3. Color: Black. 4. Manufacturers:

a. Raychem. b. 3M.

E. Wraparound Duct Band:

1. Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin, precoated with hot-melt adhesive.

2. Width: 50 mm minimum. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type TWDB.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Conduit and tubing sizes shown are based on use of copper conductors. Reference Section 26 05 05, Conductors, concerning conduit sizing for aluminum conductors.

B. Comply with NECA Installation Standards.

C. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted.

D. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.

E. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dust-tight seals until time for pulling in conductors.

F. Aluminum Conduit: Do not install in direct contact with concrete. Install in PVC sleeve or cored hole through concrete walls and slabs.

G. Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate may collect above sealing fitting.

H. Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit runs, provide junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point.

I. Group raceways installed in same area.

J. Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from parallel runs.

K. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid obstruction of passageways.

L. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of vertical planes.

697482A.GN1


M. Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course or vertical cell with reinforcing steel.

N. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.

O. Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, conduit installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound.

P. Metal conduit shall be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of conductors, wires, or cables.

Q. Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams without Engineer approval.

R. Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under slab, with no part embedded within slab.

S. Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed.

T. Install conduits for fiber optic cables, telephone cables, and Category 6 data cables in strict conformance with the requirements of TIA 569B.

3.02 REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUITS

A. Where Drawings indicate existing conduits may be reused, they may be reused only where they meet the following criteria.

1. Conduit is in useable condition with no deformation, corrosion, or damage to exterior surface.

2. Conduit is sized per the NEC. 3. Conduit is of the type specified in Contract Documents. 4. Conduit is supported as specified in Contract Documents.

B. Conduit shall be reamed with wire brush, then with a mandrel approximately 1/4-inch smaller than raceway inside diameter then cleaned prior to pulling new conductors.

3.03 INSTALLATION IN CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

A. Minimum Cover: 2 inches, including fittings.

B. Conduit placement shall not require changes in reinforcing steel location or configuration.

C. Provide nonmetallic support during placement of concrete to ensure raceways remain in position.

697482A.GN1


D. Conduit larger than 1 inch shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, walls, foundations, columns, or beams unless approved by Engineer.

E. Slabs and Walls (Requires Engineer Approval):

1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of slab or wall thickness. 2. Install within middle two-fourths of slab or wall. 3. Separate conduit less than 2-inch trade size by a minimum ten times

conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise shown. 4. Separate conduit 2-inch and greater trade size by a minimum eight times

conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise shown. 5. Cross conduit at an angle greater than 45 degrees, with minimum

separation of 1 inch. 6. Separate conduit by a minimum six times the outside dimension of

expansion/deflection fittings at expansion joints. 7. Conduit shall not be installed below the maximum water surface

elevation in walls of water holding structures.

F. Columns and Beams (Requires Engineer Approval):

1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of beam thickness. 2. Conduit cross-sectional area not to exceed 4 percent of beam or column

cross section.

3.04 CONDUIT APPLICATION

A. Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch.

B. Exterior, Exposed: Rigid aluminum.

C. Interior, Exposed:

1. Rigid aluminum.

D. Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete):

1. Rigid aluminum. 2. PVC Schedule 40.

E. Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete Walls, Ceilings, or Floors:

1. Rigid stainless steel. 2. PVC Schedule 40.

F. Direct Earth Burial: PVC Schedule 80 for ac circuits stainless steel for dc and AFD circuits.

697482A.GN1


G. Concrete-Encased Ductbank:

1. PVC Schedule 40. 2. Rigid stainless steel for dc and AFD circuits.

H. Under Slabs-On-Grade: PVC Schedule 40 for ac circuits, Rigid stainless steel for dc and AFD circuits.

I. Transition from Underground or Concrete Embedded to Exposed: Stainless steel conduit.

J. Under Equipment Mounting Pads: PVC Schedule 40 conduit.

K. Exterior Light Pole Foundations: PVC-coated rigid stainless steel conduit.

L. Corrosive Areas: Rigid aluminum.

M. Hazardous Gas Areas: Rigid aluminum.

3.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type transformers, electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and other locations approved by Engineer where flexible connection is required to minimize vibration:

1. Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible, liquid-tight conduit. 2. Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible. 3. Wet or Corrosive Areas: Flexible, nonmetallic or flexible metal liquid-

tight. 4. Dry Areas: Flexible, metallic liquid-tight. 5. Hazardous Areas: Flexible coupling suitable for Class I, Division 1

and 2 areas.

B. Suspended Lighting Fixtures in Dry Areas: Flexible steel, nonliquid-tight conduit.

C. Outdoor Areas, Process Areas Exposed to Moisture, and Areas Required to be Oiltight and Dust-Tight: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.

D. Flexible Conduit Length: 18 inches minimum, 60 inches maximum; sufficient to allow movement or adjustment of equipment.

3.06 PENETRATIONS

A. Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown.

697482A.GN1


B. Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams, not permitted.

C. Fire-Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Firestop openings around penetrations to maintain fire-resistance rating using fire penetration seal as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.

D. Apply heat shrinkable tubing to metallic conduit protruding through concrete floor slabs to a point 2 inches above and 2 inches below concrete surface.

E. Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide nonshrink grout dry-pack, or use watertight seal device.

F. Entering Structures:

1. General: Seal raceway at first box or outlet with oakum or expandable plastic compound to prevent entrance of gases or liquids from one area to another.

2. Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor: a. Provide a watertight seal. b. Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal

device on each side. c. With Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device

on accessible side. d. Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight entrance seal

device into construction with one or more integral flanges. e. Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight entrance seal

device in a permanent, watertight manner. 3. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment:

a. Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer. b. Terminate conduit with flexible metal conduit at junction box or

condulet attached to exterior surface of equipment prior to penetrating equipment.

c. Seal penetration with Type 5 sealant, as specified. 4. Corrosive-Sensitive Areas:

a. Seal conduit entering equipment panel boards and field panels containing electronic equipment.

b. Seal penetration with Type 5 sealant, as specified. 5. Existing or Precast Wall (Underground): Core drill wall and install

watertight entrance seal device. 6. Nonwaterproofed Wall or Floor (Underground, without Concrete

Encasement): a. Provide Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe sleeve, or watertight

entrance seal device. b. Fill space between raceway and sleeve with expandable plastic

compound or oakum and lead joint, on each side.

697482A.GN1


7. Manholes and Handholes: a. Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings. b. Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall. c. Install such that raceways enter as near as possible to one end of

wall, unless otherwise shown.

3.07 SUPPORT

A. Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70 requirements. Do not exceed 8 feet in any application. Do not support from piping, pipe supports, or other raceways.

B. Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze. For trapeze-supported conduit, allow 25 percent extra space for future conduit.

C. Application/Type of Conduit Strap:

1. Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Rigid Steel or EMT Conduit: aluminum or malleable iron. 3. Nonmetallic Conduit: Nonmetallic.

D. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows:

1. Wood: Wood screws. 2. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. 3. Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by

powder charge, with lock washers and nuts. 4. Steelwork: Machine screws. 5. Location/Type of Hardware:

a. Dry, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel. b. Wet, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel. c. Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel.

E. Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway not permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or hangers.

F. Support aluminum conduit on concrete surfaces with stainless steel or nonmetallic spacers, or aluminum or nonmetallic framing channel.

3.08 BENDS

A. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance.

697482A.GN1


B. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in conduits and ducts being installed for fiber optic cables shall be not less than 20 times cable diameter, 15 inches minimum.

C. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.

D. Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending.

E. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so that bends are parallel.

F. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of run, and raceways are same size.

G. PVC Conduit:

1. Bends 30 Degrees and Larger: Provide factory-made elbows. 2. 90-Degree Bends: Provide stainless steel elbows, PVC-coated where

direct buried. 3. Use manufacturer’s recommended method for forming smaller bends.

H. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor bending radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility.

3.09 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS

A. Provide on raceways at structural expansion joints and in long tangential runs.

B. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 25 degrees F maximum temperature variation.

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.10 PVC CONDUIT

A. Solvent Welding:

1. Apply manufacturer recommended solvent to joints. 2. Install in order that joint is watertight.

B. Adapters:

1. PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type. 2. PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit: PVC female adapter.

697482A.GN1


C. Belled-End Conduit: Bevel unbelled end of joint prior to joining.

3.11 WIREWAYS

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Locate with cover on accessible vertical face of wireway, unless otherwise shown.

C. Applications:

1. Metal wireway in indoor dry locations. 2. Nonmetallic wireway in indoor wet, outdoor, and corrosive locations.

3.12 TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES

A. Cast Metal Enclosure: Install manufacturer’s premolded insulating sleeve inside metallic conduit terminating in threaded hubs.

B. Nonmetallic, Cabinets, and Enclosures:

1. Terminate conduit in Type 316 stainless steel Myers hubs conduit hubs, maintaining enclosure integrity.

2. Metallic Conduit: Provide ground terminal for connection to maintain continuity of ground system.

C. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:

1. General: a. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is

not required. b. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal

boxes having threaded hubs. c. Utilize sealing locknuts or threaded hubs on sides and bottom of

NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures. d. Terminate conduits at threaded hubs at the tops of NEMA 3R and

NEMA 12 boxes and enclosures. e. Terminate conduits at threaded conduit hubs at NEMA 4 and

NEMA 4X boxes and enclosures. 2. Aluminum and Stainless Steel Conduit:

a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure. b. Install grounding bushing at source enclosure. c. Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment

ground bus or ground pad. 3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable

iron connectors.

697482A.GN1


4. Flexible, Nonmetallic Conduit: Provide nonmetallic, liquid-tight strain relief connectors.

5. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter with lock nut, except where threaded hubs required above.

D. Motor Control Center and Free-Standing Enclosures:

1. Terminate metal conduit entering bottom with grounding bushing; provide grounding jumper extending to equipment ground bus or grounding pad.

2. Terminate PVC conduit entering bottom with bell end fittings.

3.13 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS

A. Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one manhole, handhole, or pull box to the next, or from a high point between them, depending on surface contour.

B. Cover: Maintain minimum 2-foot cover above conduit and concrete encasement, unless otherwise shown.

C. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.

D. Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are not in same transverse line.

E. Union type fittings not permitted.

F. Spacers:

1. Provide preformed, nonmetallic spacers designed for such purpose, to secure and separate parallel conduit runs in a trench or concrete encasement.

2. Install at intervals not greater than that specified in NFPA 70 for support of the type conduit used, but in no case greater than 10 feet.

G. Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete placement.

H. Transition from Underground to Exposed: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

I. Installation with Other Piping Systems:

1. Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation. 2. Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation. 3. Installation over valves or couplings not permitted.

697482A.GN1


J. Metallic Raceway Coating: At couplings and joints, apply wraparound duct band with one-half tape width overlap to obtain two complete layers.

K. Provide expansion fittings that allow minimum of 4 inches of movement in vertical conduit runs from underground where exposed conduit will be fastened to or will enter building or structure.

L. Provide expansion/deflection fittings in conduit runs that exit building or structure belowgrade. Conduit from building wall to fitting shall be galvanized rigid steel.

M. Concrete Encasement:

1. As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Concrete Color: Red.

N. Backfill:

1. As specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill. Backfill material to within 12 inches of surface.

2. Do not backfill until inspected by Engineer.

3.14 UNDER SLAB RACEWAYS

A. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.

B. Support raceways so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete placement.

C. Install raceways with no part embedded within slab and with no interference with slab on grade construction.

D. Raceway spacing, in a single layer or multiple layers:

1. 3 inches clear between adjacent 2-inch or larger raceway. 2. 2 inches clear between adjacent 1-1/2-inch or smaller raceway.

E. Multiple Layers of Raceways: Install under slab on grade in trench below backfill zone, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

F. Individual Raceways and Single Layer Multiple Raceways: Install at lowest elevation of backfill zone with spacing as specified herein. Where conduits cross at perpendicular orientation, installation of conduits shall not interfere with placement of under slab fill that meets compaction and void limitations of earthwork specifications.

697482A.GN1


G. Under slab raceways that emerge from below slab to top of slab as exposed, shall be located to avoid conflicts with structural slab rebar. Coordinate raceway stub ups with location of structural rebar.

H. Fittings:

1. Union type fittings are not permitted. 2. Provide expansion/deflection fittings in raceway runs that exit building

or structure below slab. Locate fittings 18 inches, maximum, beyond exterior wall. Raceway type between building exterior wall to fitting shall be PVC-coated rigid steel.

3. Couplings: In multiple raceway runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are not in same traverse line.

3.15 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES

A. General:

1. Install plumb and level. 2. Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in

wiring or raceway system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements. 3. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required;

seal unused openings. 4. Install stainless steel mounting hardware in industrial areas.

B. Size:

1. Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural conditions. Box extensions not permitted. a. Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such

that conduit knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space. 2. Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal device box, unless otherwise

required for installed fixture. 3. Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch device box.

C. Locations:

1. Drawing locations are approximate. 2. To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features,

relocate outlets as directed by Engineer. 3. Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout,

unless otherwise shown.

D. Mounting Height:

1. General: a. Dimensions given to centerline of box.

697482A.GN1


b. Where specified heights do not suit building construction or finish, adjust up or down to avoid interference.

c. Do not straddle CMU block or other construction joints. 2. Light Switch:

a. 48 inches above floor. b. When located next to door, install on lock side of door.

3. Thermostat: 54 inches above floor. 4. Telephone Outlet:

a. 15 inches above floor. b. 6 inches above counter tops. c. Wall Mounted: 52 inches above floor.

5. Convenience Receptacle: a. General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor. b. General Interior Areas (Counter Tops): Install device plate bottom

or side flush with top of backsplash, or 6 inches above counter tops without backsplash.

c. Industrial Areas, Workshops: 48 inches above floor. d. Outdoor Areas: 24 inches above finished grade.

6. Special-Purpose Receptacle: 48 inches above floor or as shown. 7. Switch, Motor Starting: 48 inches above floor, unless otherwise

indicated on Drawings.

E. Flush Mounted:

1. Install with concealed conduit. 2. Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of

boxes flush with finished surface. 3. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive

box.

F. Supports:

1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member.

2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows: a. Wood: Wood screws. b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields. c. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. d. Steelwork: Machine screws.

3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.

4. Provide plaster rings where necessary. 5. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally

supported.

697482A.GN1


G. Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where required by fixture terminal temperature.

H. Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate strength to support fixture.

3.16 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. General:

1. Install plumb and level. 2. Installed boxes shall be accessible. 3. Do not install on finished surfaces. 4. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and

allowed by applicable codes. 5. Use conduit bodies as junction and pull boxes where no splices are

required and allowed by applicable codes. 6. Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate

conductor installation. 7. Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or

redirect multiple conduit runs. 8. Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of

three right-angle bends.

B. Flush Mounted:

1. Install with concealed conduit. 2. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive

box. 3. Make edges of boxes flush with final surface.

C. Mounting Hardware:

1. Noncorrosive Dry Areas: Stainless steel. 2. Noncorrosive Wet Areas: Stainless steel. 3. Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel.

D. Supports:

1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member.

2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows: a. Wood: Wood screws. b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields. c. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. d. Steelwork: Machine screws.

697482A.GN1


3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.

4. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported.

E. At or Below Grade:

1. Install boxes for below grade conduit flush with finished grade in locations outside of paved areas, roadways, or walkways.

2. If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure surface just above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location.

3. Obtain Engineer’s written acceptance prior to installation in paved areas, roadways, or walkways.

4. Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights.

F. Install Drain/breather fittings in NEMA 250 Type 4 and Type 4X enclosures.

3.17 TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLET

A. Provide empty 4-11/16-inch square, deep outlet box.

B. Provide blank single gang raised device cover if cables are not installed.

3.18 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A. Excavate, shore, brace, backfill, and final grade in accordance with Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

B. Do not install until final raceway grading has been determined.

C. Install such that raceway enters at nearly right angle and as near as possible to end of wall, unless otherwise shown.

D. Grounding: As specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

E. Identification: Field stamp covers with manhole or handhole number as shown. Stamped numbers to be 1-inch minimum height.

3.19 EMPTY RACEWAYS

A. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.

B. Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end bells.

C. Provide nylon pull cord.

697482A.GN1


D. Identify, as specified in Article Identification Devices, with waterproof tags attached to pull cord at each end, and at intermediate pull point.

3.20 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Raceway Tags:

1. Identify origin and destination for exposed raceways, install tags at each terminus, near midpoint, and at minimum intervals of every 50 feet, whether in ceiling space or surface mounted.

2. Install tags at each terminus for concealed raceways. 3. Provide noncorrosive wire for attachment.

B. Warning Tape: Install approximately 12 inches above underground or concrete-encased raceways. Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of, centerline of run.

C. Buried Raceway Marker:

1. Install at grade to indicate direction of underground raceway. 2. Install at bends and at intervals not exceeding 100 feet in straight runs. 3. Embed and secure to top of concrete base, sized 14 inches long, 6 inches

wide, and 8 inches deep; top set flush with finished grade.

3.21 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction.

B. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over conduit openings during construction.

C. Touchup painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars.

D. Touchup coating damage to PVC-coated conduit with patching compound approved by manufacturer. Compound shall be kept refrigerated according to manufacturers’ instructions until time of use.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 05 70 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 05 70 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. C57.12.00, Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers.

b. 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.

c. 399, Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System Analysis.

d. 1584, Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Z535.4,

Product Safety Signs and Labels. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.

5. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA): 29 CFR, Part 1910 Subpart S, Electrical.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Short circuit study. 2. Protective Device Coordination Study: Submit within 90 days after

approval of short circuit study. 3. Harmonic study. 4. Arc Flash Study: Submit initial study with protective Device

Coordination Study. Submit final study prior to equipment energization. 5. Arc flash warning labels; submit sample with initial study. 6. Electronic files of final studies including all engineering software input

files, output reports, and libraries.


A. Short circuit and protective device coordination and arc flash studies shall be prepared, and signed and sealed by manufacturer furnishing Main Breaker, ATS, and MCC a professional electrical engineer registered in the State of Alabama.

697482A.GN1

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS PW\DEN003\697482 26 05 70 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Initial complete short circuit study shall be submitted and reviewed before Engineer will review Shop Drawings for overcurrent protective equipment. It is imperative that the electrical subcontractor begin this work immediately after award of the contract. Failure of the electrical subcontractor to provide the initial complete short circuit study before any Shop Drawing for any overcurrent protective equipment will result in rejection of the Shop Drawing without review.

B. Initial complete protective device coordination and arc flash studies shall be submitted within 90 days after approval of initial short circuit study.

C. Initial complete arc flash study shall be submitted and accepted prior to energization of the electrical equipment.

D. Revised short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash studies, and arc flash labels shall be submitted 10 days before energizing electrical equipment.

E. Final short circuit, protective device coordination, harmonic, and arc flash studies shall be completed prior to Project Substantial Completion. Final version of study shall include as-installed equipment, materials, and parameter data or settings entered into equipment based on study.

F. Submit final arc flash labels described herein and in compliance with NEMA Z535.4 prior to Project Substantial Completion.

1.05 GENERAL STUDY REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment and component titles used in the studies shall be identical to equipment and component titles shown on Drawings.

B. Perform studies using one of the following electrical engineering software packages:

1. SKM Power Tools for Windows. 2. ETAP. 3. Paladin. 4. Easy Power.

C. Perform complete fault calculations for each proposed and ultimate source combination. Source combination may include present and future power company supply circuits, large motors, or generators.

D. Utilize proposed load data for study obtained from Contract Documents

697482A.GN1


E. Existing System and Equipment:

1. Extent of existing system to be included in study is all of the existing system and equipment.

2. Include fault contribution of existing motors and equipment in study. 3. Include impedance elements that affect new system and equipment. 4. Include protective devices in series with new equipment.

F. Device coordination time-current curves for low voltage distribution system; include individual protective device time-current characteristics.

1.06 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY

A. General:

1. Prepare in accordance with IEEE 399. 2. Use cable impedances based on copper conductors, except where

aluminum conductors are specified or shown. 3. Use bus impedances based on copper bus bars, except where aluminum

bus bars are specified or shown. 4. Use cable and bus resistances calculated at 25 degrees C. 5. Use medium-voltage cable reactances based on use of typical

dimensions of shielded cables with 133 percent insulation levels. 6. Use 600-volt cable reactances based on use of typical dimensions of

THHN/THWN conductors. 7. Use transformer impedances 92.5 percent of “nominal” impedance

based on tolerances specified in IEEE C57.12.00.

B. Provide:

1. Calculation methods and assumptions. 2. Typical calculation. 3. Tabulations of calculated quantities. 4. Results, conclusions, and recommendations. 5. Selected base per unit quantities. 6. One-line diagrams. 7. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault

contribution characteristics. 8. Impedance diagrams. 9. Zero-sequence impedance diagrams.

C. Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) duties for an assumed three-phase bolted fault at each:

1. Electric utility’s supply termination point. 2. Service Entrance Rated Main Breaker.

697482A.GN1


3. Motor control centers. 4. Standby Emergency generators. 5. Branch circuit panelboards. 6. Future load contributions as shown on one-line diagram.

D. Provide bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as defined for three-phase bolted fault short circuit study.

E. Provide bolted line-to-line fault current study for areas as defined for three-phase bolted fault short circuit study.

F. Verify:

1. Equipment and protective devices are applied within their ratings. 2. Adequacy of Service Entrance Rated Main Breaker, and motor control

centers bus bars to withstand short circuit stresses. 3. Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short circuit stresses. 4. Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short circuit heating, in

addition to normal load currents.

G. Tabulations:

1. General Data: a. Short circuit reactances of rotating machines. b. Cable and conduit material data. c. Bus data. d. Transformer data. e. Circuit resistance and reactance values.

2. Short Circuit Data (for each source combination): a. Fault impedances. b. X to R ratios. c. Asymmetry factors. d. Motor contributions. e. Short circuit kVA. f. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

3. Equipment Evaluation: a. Equipment bus bracing, equipment short circuit rating,

transformer, cable, busway. b. Maximum fault current available.

H. Written Summary:

1. Scope of studies performed. 2. Explanation of bus and branch numbering system. 3. Prevailing conditions. 4. Selected equipment deficiencies.

697482A.GN1


5. Results of short circuit study. 6. Comments or suggestions.

I. Suggest changes and additions to equipment rating and/or characteristics.

J. Notify Engineer in writing of existing circuit protective devices improperly rated for new fault conditions.

K. Revise data for “as-installed” condition.

1.07 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. General:

1. Prepare in accordance with IEEE 242. 2. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves for

distribution system, graphically displayed on conventional log-log curve sheets. a. Provide separate curve sheets for phase and ground fault

coordination for each scenario. b. Each curve sheet to have title and one-line diagram that applies to

specific portion of system associated with time-current curves on that sheet. Limit number of devices shown to four to six.

c. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, recommended tap, time delay, instantaneous and other settings recommended.

d. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed.

e. Apply motor protection methods that comply with NFPA 70.

B. Plot Characteristics on Curve Sheets:

1. Electric utility’s relays. 2. Electric utility’s fuses including manufacturer’s minimum melt, total

clearing, tolerance, and damage bands. 3. Medium-voltage equipment relays. 4. Medium-voltage and low-voltage fuses including manufacturer’s

minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands. 5. Low-voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including

manufacturers tolerance bands. 6. Pertinent transformer full-load currents at 100 percent. 7. Transformer magnetizing inrush currents. 8. Transformer damage curves; appropriate for system operation and

location. 9. ANSI transformer withstand parameters.

697482A.GN1


10. Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. 11. Motor overload relay settings for motors greater than 40 hp. 12. Ground fault protective device settings. 13. Other system load protective devices for largest branch circuit and

feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center.

C. Primary Protective Device Settings for Delta-Wye Connected Transformer:

1. Secondary Line-to-Ground Fault Protection: Primary protective device operating band within transformer’s characteristics curve, including a point equal to 58 percent of IEEE C57.12.00 withstand point.

2. Secondary Line-to-Line Faults: 16 percent current margin between primary protective device and associated secondary device characteristic curves.

D. Separate medium voltage relay characteristics curves from curves for other devices by at least 0.4-second time margin.

E. Tabulate Recommended Protective Device Settings:

1. Relays: a. Current tap. b. Time dial. c. Instantaneous pickup. d. Electronic settings data file.

2. Circuit Breakers: a. Adjustable pickups. b. Adjustable time-current characteristics. c. Adjustable time delays. d. Adjustable instantaneous pickups. e. I2t In/Out. f. Zone interlocking. g. Electronic settings data file.

F. Written Summary:

1. Scope of studies performed. 2. Summary of protective device coordination methodology. 3. Prevailing conditions. 4. Selected equipment deficiencies. 5. Results of coordination study. 6. Appendix of complete relay and circuit breaker electronic setting files ,

submit electronic data files from manufacturer’s software. 7. Comments or suggestions.

697482A.GN1


1.08 HARMONIC STUDY

A. Reference Section 26 29 23, Low Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System for harmonic study requirements.

1.09 ARC FLASH STUDY

A. Perform arc flash hazard study after short circuit and protective device coordination study has been completed, reviewed and accepted.

B. Perform arc flash study in accordance with NFPA 70E, OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1910 Subpart S, and IEEE 1584.

C. Base Calculation: For each major part of electrical power system, determine the following:

1. Flash hazard protection boundary. 2. Limited approach boundary. 3. Restricted approach boundary. 4. Incident energy level. 5. Glove class required.

D. Produce arc flash warning labels that list items in Paragraph Base Calculation and the following additional items.

1. Bus name. 2. Bus voltage.

E. Produce bus detail sheets that list items in Paragraph Base Calculation and the following additional items:

1. Bus name. 2. Upstream protective device name, type, and settings. 3. Bus line-to-line voltage.

F. Produce arc flash evaluation summary sheet listing the following additional items:

1. Bus name. 2. Upstream protective device name, type, settings. 3. Bus line-to-line voltage. 4. Bus bolted fault. 5. Protective device bolted fault current. 6. Arcing fault current. 7. Protective device trip/delay time. 8. Breaker opening time. 9. Solidly grounded column.

697482A.GN1


10. Equipment type. 11. Gap. 12. Arc flash boundary. 13. Working distance. 14. Incident energy.

G. Analyze short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash calculations and highlight equipment that is determined to be underrated or causes incident energy values greater than 40 cal/cm2. Propose approaches to reduce energy levels.

H. Prepare report summarizing arc flash study with conclusions and recommendations which may affect integrity of electric power distribution system. As a minimum, include the following:

1. Equipment manufacturer’s information used to prepare study. 2. Assumptions made during study. 3. Reduced copy of one-line drawing; 11 inches by 17 inches maximum. 4. Arc flash evaluations summary spreadsheet. 5. Bus detail sheets. 6. Arc flash warning labels printed in color on thermally bonded adhesive

backed UV and weather-resistant labels.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. Arc flash warning labels printed in color on thermally bonded adhesive backed, UV-and weather-resistant labels. An example label is located following end of section in Figure 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to values established by coordination study.

B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. Notify Engineer in writing of required major equipment modifications.

D. Provide laminated one-line diagrams (minimum size 11 inches by 17 inches) to post on interior of electrical room doors.

E. Provide arc flash warning labels on equipment as specified in this section.

697482A.GN1


3.02 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of this Specification:

1. Figure 1: Example Arc Flash Label.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 05 70 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

Figure 1 Example Arc Flash Label

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 COMMISSIONING OF FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 26 08 00 - 1

SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D877, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of

Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes. b. D923, Standard Practice for Sampling Electrical Insulating

Liquids. c. D924, Standard Test Method for Dissipation Factor (or Power

Factor) and Relative Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) of Electrical Insulating Liquids.

d. D971, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Oil Against Water by the Ring Method.

e. D974, Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by Color-Indicator Titration.

f. D1298, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), or API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method.

g. D1500, Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products (ASTM Color Scale).

h. D1524, Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field.

i. D1533, Standard Test Method for Water in Insulating Liquids by Coulometric Karl Fischer Titration.

j. D1816, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin Using VDE Electrodes.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 43, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulating Resistance of

Rotating Machinery. b. 48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-

Current Cable Terminators Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5kV through 500kV.

c. 81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System.

d. 95, Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of AC Electric Machinery (2300V and Above) with High Direct Voltage.

e. 386, Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V.

697482A.GN1

COMMISSIONING OF PW\DEN003\697482 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 08 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

f. 400, Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems.

g. 450, Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications.

h. C2, National Electrical Safety Code. i. C37.20.1, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Power

Circuit Breaker Switchgear. j. C37.20.2, Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear. k. C37.20.3, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear. l. C37.23, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Bus. m. C62.33, Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge-

Protective Devices. 3. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):

a. S-93-639, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cables for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy.

b. S-94-649, Concentric Neutral Cables Rated 5 through 46 kV. c. S-97-682, Standard for Utility Shielded Power Cables Rated

5 through 46 kV. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. AB 4, Guidelines for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications.

b. PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. c. WC 74, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the

Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy. 5. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA): ATS, Acceptance

Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment

Maintenance. c. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. d. 101, Life Safety Code.

7. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET).

8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): CFR 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational Submittals:

1. Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests: a. Schedule for performing inspection and tests. b. List of references to be used for each test.

697482A.GN1


c. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s). d. Sample copy of individual device test form. e. Sample copy of individual system test form.

2. Energization Plan: Prior to initial energization of electrical distribution equipment; include the following: a. Owner’s representative sign-off form for complete and accurate

arc flash labeling and proper protective device settings for equipment to be energized.

b. Staged sequence of initial energization of electrical equipment. c. Lock-Out-Tag-Out plan for each stage of the progressive

energization. d. Barricading, signage, and communication plan notifying

personnel of newly energized equipment. 3. Submit test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item

tested within 30 days after completion of test: 4. Operation and Maintenance Data:

a. In accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

b. After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by Engineer and returned, insert a copy of each in Operation and Maintenance Manual.

5. Programmable Settings: At completion of Performance Demonstration Test, submit final hardcopy printout and electronic files on compact disc of as-left setpoints, programs, and device configuration files for: a. Protective relays. b. Intelligent overload relays. c. Variable frequency drives. d. Power metering devices. e. Uninterruptible power supplies. f. Electrical communications modules.


A. Testing Firm Qualifications:

1. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority.

2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of electrical equipment and systems being tested.

3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems.

4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist by NICET or NETA and having a minimum of 5 years’ testing experience on similar projects.

5. Technicians certified by NICET or NETA.

697482A.GN1


6. Assistants and apprentices assigned to Project at ratio not to exceed two certified to one noncertified assistant or apprentice.

7. Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive Project report outlining services performed, results of such services, recommendations, actions taken, and opinions.

8. In compliance with OSHA CFR 29, Part 1910.7 criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories or a full member company of NETA.

B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to or greater than requirements established by NETA ATS.

C. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS.


A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment listed herein has been installed.

B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.

C. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be:

1. Scheduled with Owner prior to de-energization. 2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating

plant equipment.

D. Notify Owner at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Perform tests in accordance with requirements of Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

B. Tests and inspections shall establish:

1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer’s tolerances and standards.

2. Installation operates properly. 3. Equipment is suitable for energization. 4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and

NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 101, and IEEE C2.

697482A.GN1


C. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Set, test, and calibrate, circuit breakers power monitoring meters, and other applicable devices in accordance with values established by short circuit, coordination, and harmonics studies as specified in Section 26 05 70, Electrical Systems Analysis.

E. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts of equipment for free mechanical movement.

F. Adjust and set electromechanical electronic relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents and approved Submittals.

H. Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness.

I. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored.

J. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque wrench/screw driver to manufacturer’s recommendations, or as otherwise specified in NETA ATS.

K. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer.

L. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts.

M. Inform Engineer of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70.

N. Investigate and repair or replace:

1. Electrical items that fail tests. 2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions. 3. Damaged electrical equipment.

O. Electrical Enclosures:

1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior. 2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior. 3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces. 4. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer door and panel sections

having dented surfaces. 5. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer poor fitting doors and

panel sections.

697482A.GN1


6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices.

7. Replace missing or damaged hardware. 8. Finish:

a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars. b. If required because of extensive damage, as determined by

Engineer, refinish entire assembly.

P. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the Contract Documents or approved Submittals.

3.02 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP

A. Voltage Field Test:

1. Check voltage at point of termination of power company supply system to Project when installation is essentially complete and is in operation.

2. Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded and unloaded conditions.

3. Record supply voltage (all three phases simultaneously on same graph) for 24 hours during normal working day. a. Submit Voltage Field Test Report within 5 days of test.

4. Unbalance Corrections: a. Make written request to power company to correct condition if

balance (as defined by NEMA) exceeds 1 percent, or if voltage varies throughout the day and from loaded to unloaded condition more than plus or minus 4 percent of nominal.

b. Obtain written certification from responsible power company official that voltage variations and unbalance are within their normal standards if corrections are not made.

B. Equipment Line Current Tests:

1. Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment. 2. Make line current check after power company has made final

adjustments to supply voltage magnitude or balance. 3. If phase current for a piece of equipment is above rated nameplate

current, prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies cause of problem and corrective action taken.

3.03 PANELBOARDS

A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work:

1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance with requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules.

697482A.GN1


2. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction manual.

3. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components.

4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper torque values.

5. Perform visual and mechanical inspection for overcurrent protective devices.

B. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with

NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Each phase of each bus section. c. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute. d. With breakers open. e. With breakers closed. f. Control wiring except that connected to solid state components. g. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values

established by manufacturer. 2. Ground continuity test ground bus to system ground.

3.04 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Physical and insulator damage. 2. Proper winding connections. 3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless

otherwise specified by manufacturer. 4. Defective wiring. 5. Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices. 6. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing. 7. Free and properly installed resilient mounts. 8. Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages. 9. Verify tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under

normal operating conditions. 10. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground

after energization and prior to loading.

697482A.GN1


B. Electrical Tests:


NETA ATS, Table 100.5 for each: 1) Winding-to-winding. 2) Winding-to-ground.

b. Test Duration: 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes.

c. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14.

d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer.

e. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings.

2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by manufacturer.

3.05 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM


1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 6 and larger for: a. Physical damage. b. Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram. c. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer’s minimum

allowable bending radius where applicable. d. Color coding conformance with specification. e. Proper circuit identification.

2. Mechanical Connections For: a. Proper lug type for conductor material. b. Proper lug installation. c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12,

unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables For:

a. Proper shield grounding. b. Proper terminations. c. Proper circuit identification.

4. Control Cables For: a. Proper termination. b. Proper circuit identification.

5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals and grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices.

697482A.GN1


B. Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 6 and Larger:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 600-volt insulated

conductors and 500-volt dc megohmmeter for 300-volt insulated conductors.

b. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors for 1 minute.

c. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type.

d. Investigate values less than 50 megohms. 2. Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable

connections.

C. Low-voltage cable tests may be performed by installer in lieu of independent testing firm.

3.06 SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM


1. Proper blade pressure and alignment. 2. Proper operation of switch operating handle. 3. Adequate mechanical support for each fuse. 4. Proper contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse. 5. Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS,

Table 100.12. 6. Proper phase barrier material and installation. 7. Verify fuse sizes and types correspond to one-line diagram or approved

Submittals. 8. Perform mechanical operational test and verify electrical and

mechanical interlocking system operation and sequencing.



NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole. c. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values

established by manufacturer. 2. Contact Resistance Tests:

a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse holder.

b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles or similar switches.

697482A.GN1


3.07 MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 70 amperes and larger and to motor circuit protector breakers rated 50 amperes and larger.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Proper mounting. 2. Proper conductor size. 3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram. 4. Cracked casings. 5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS,

Table 100.12. 6. Operate breaker to verify smooth operation. 7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or

one-line diagram. 8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated

conductors.

C. Electrical Tests:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt

circuit breakers and 500-volt dc megohmmeter for 240-volt circuit breakers.

b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute.

c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute.

d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. 2. Contact Resistance Tests:

a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles

and similar breakers. 3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:

a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay. b. Short-time pickup and delay. c. Ground fault pickup and delay. d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method. e. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within

manufacturer’s published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.

f. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-3. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.7.

g. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-4. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.8.

697482A.GN1


3.08 LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS


1. Proper mounting, cell fit, and element alignment. 2. Proper operation of racking interlocks. 3. Check for damaged arc chutes. 4. Proper contact condition. 5. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 6. Perform mechanical operational and contact alignment tests in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 7. Check operation of closing and tripping functions of trip devices by

activating ground fault relays, undervoltage shunt relays, and other auxiliary protective devices.

8. Verify primary and secondary contact wipe, gap setting, and other dimensions vital to breaker operation are correct.

9. Check charging motor, motor brushes, associated mechanism, and limit switches for proper operation and condition.

10. Check operation of electrically operated breakers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

11. Check for adequate lubrication on contact, moving, and sliding surfaces.


1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt

circuit breakers. b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for

1 minute. c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for

1 minute. d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.

2. Contact Resistance Tests: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles

and similar breakers. 3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:

a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay. b. Short-time pickup and delay. c. Ground fault pickup and delay. d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method. e. Trip characteristic when adjusted to setting sheet parameters shall

be within manufacturer’s published time-current tolerance band.

697482A.GN1


3.09 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS


1. Visually check current, potential, and control transformers for: a. Cracked insulation. b. Broken leads or defective wiring. c. Proper connections. d. Adequate clearances between primary and secondary circuit

wiring. 2. Verify Mechanically:

a. Grounding and shorting connections have good contact. b. Withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation, when

applicable, operate properly. 3. Verify proper primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential

transformers.


1. Current Transformer Tests: a. Insulation resistance test of transformer and wiring-to-ground at

1,000 volts dc for 30 seconds. b. Polarity test.

2. Potential Transformer Tests: a. Insulation resistance test at test voltages in accordance with

NETA ATS, Table 100.9, for 1 minute on: 1) Winding-to-winding. 2) Winding-to-ground.

b. Polarity test to verify polarity marks or H1-X1 relationship as applicable.

3. Insulation resistance measurement on instrument transformer shall not be less than that shown in NETA ATS, Table 100.5.

3.10 METERING


1. Verify meter connections in accordance with appropriate diagrams. 2. Verify meter multipliers. 3. Verify meter types and scales conform to Contract Documents. 4. Check calibration of meters at cardinal points. 5. Check calibration of electrical transducers.

697482A.GN1


3.11 GROUNDING SYSTEMS


1. Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control center, and panelboard, assemblies for proper connection and tightness.

2. Ground bus connections in motor control center, and panelboard, assemblies for proper termination and tightness.

3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding. 4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and

tightness. 5. Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds

were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained.


1. Fall-of-Potential Test: a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of

main ground system’s resistance. b. Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no

greater than 1 ohm(s). 2. Two-Point Direct Method Test:

a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement of ground resistance between main ground system, equipment frames, and system neutral and derived neutral points.

b. Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system resistance by 0.50 ohm.

3. Neutral Bus Isolation: a. Test each neutral bus individually with neutral bonding jumper

removed at service entrance or separately derived system. b. Evaluate ohmic values by measuring resistance between ground

bus and neutral bus. c. Investigate values less than 50 megohms.

3.12 GROUND FAULT SYSTEMS

A. Inspection and testing limited to:

1. Zero sequence grounding systems. 2. Residual ground fault systems.

B. Visual and Manual Inspection:

1. Neutral main bonding connection to ensure: a. Zero sequence sensing system is grounded ahead of neutral

disconnect link. b. Ground strap sensing system is grounded through sensing device. c. Neutral ground conductor is solidly grounded.

697482A.GN1


2. Verify control power has adequate capacity for system. 3. Manually operate monitor panels for:

a. Trip test. b. No trip test. c. Nonautomatic rest.

4. Zero sequence system for symmetrical alignment of core balance transformers about current carrying conductors.

5. Relay check for pickup and time under simulated ground fault conditions.

6. Verify nameplate identification by device operation.


1. Test system neutral insulation resistance with neutral ground link removed; minimum 1 megohm.

2. Determine relay pickup by primary current injection at the sensor. Relay pickup current within plus or minus 10 percent of device dial or fixed setting.

3. Test relay timing by injecting 300 percent of pick-up current or as specified by manufacturer. Relay operating time in accordance with manufacturer’s time-current characteristic curves.

4. Test system operation at 55 percent rated control voltage, if applicable. 5. Test zone interlock system by simultaneous sensor current injection and

monitoring zone blocking functions.

3.13 AC INDUCTION MOTORS

A. General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 3 horsepower and larger.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Proper electrical and grounding connections. 2. Shaft alignment. 3. Blockage of ventilating air passageways. 4. Operate motor and check for:

a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise. b. Overheating. c. Correct rotation. d. Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or

motor inherent protectors for functionability and proper operation. e. Excessive vibration, in excess of values in NETA ATS,

Table 100.10. 5. Check operation of space heaters.

697482A.GN1



1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. In accordance with IEEE 43 at test voltages established by

NETA ATS, Table 100.1 for: 1) Motors above 200 horsepower for 10-minute duration with

resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes.

2) Motors 200 horsepower and less for 1-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds and 60 seconds.

b. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturers.

2. Calculate polarization index ratios for motors above 200 horsepower. Investigate index ratios less than 1.5 for Class A insulation and 2.0 for Class B insulation.

3. Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full-load amperes.

5. Overpotential Tests: a. Applied dc voltage in accordance with IEEE 95. b. Limited to 2,300-volt motors rated 1,000 horsepower and greater. c. Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis.

3.14 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


1. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation. 2. Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices. 3. Proper overload protection for each motor. 4. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages. 5. Proper operation of drawout elements. 6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system. 7. Check door and device interlocking system by:

a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OPEN position. b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED

position. 8. Check key interlocking systems for:

a. Key captivity when device is in ON or CLOSED position. b. Key removal when device is in OFF or OPEN position. c. Closure attempt of device when key has been removed. d. Correct number of keys in relationship to number of lock

cylinders. e. Existence of other keys capable of operating lock cylinders;

destroy duplicate sets of keys.

697482A.GN1


9. Check nameplates for proper identification of: a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram. b. Pushbuttons. c. Control switches. d. Pilot lights. e. Control relays. f. Circuit breakers. g. Indicating meters.

10. Verify fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents.

11. Verify current and potential transformer ratios conform to Contract Documents.

12. Check bus connections for high resistance by low-resistance ohmmeter and calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted joints. a. Ohmic value to be zero. Bolt torque level in accordance with

NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.

b. Thermographic survey temperature gradient of 2 degrees C, or less per NETA ATS, Table 100.18.

13. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by: a. Closure attempt for locked open devices. b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices. c. Key exchange to operate devices in OFF-NORMAL positions.

14. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part of motor control center.

15. Control Wiring: a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective

devices with elementary diagrams. b. Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling. c. Check for proper conductor identification. d. Check for proper conductor lugs and connections.

16. Exercise active components. 17. Inspect contactors for:

a. Correct mechanical operations. b. Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure. c. Correct torque of connections.

18. Compare overload heater rating with full-load current for proper size. 19. Compare motor protector and circuit breaker with motor characteristics

for proper size. 20. Perform phasing check on double-ended motor control centers to ensure

proper bus phasing from each source.

697482A.GN1




NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on

each phase. c. Contactor phase-to-ground and across open contacts for 1 minute

on each phase. d. Starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on each phase

with starter contacts closed and protective devices open. e. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.

2. Current Injection through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor Full-Load Current and Monitor Trip Time: a. Trip time in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. b. Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds.

3. Control Wiring Tests: a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal board and each

device terminal. c. Insulation resistance test at 1,000 volts dc on control wiring,

except that connected to solid state components; 1 megohm minimum insulation resistance.

4. Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation.

3.15 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES


1. Check doors and panels for proper interlocking. 2. Check connections for high resistance by low-resistance ohm meter

calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted joints. 3. Check positive mechanical and electrical interlock between normal and

alternate sources. 4. Check for proper operation:

a. Manual transfer function switch. b. Generator under load and nonload conditions. c. Auto-exerciser of generator under load and no-load conditions.

5. Verify settings and operation of control devices.



NETA ATS, Table 100.1, for each phase with switch CLOSED in both source positions.

b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute. c. Test values in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.

697482A.GN1


2. Contact Resistance Test: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade for both

source positions. b. Investigate values exceeding 500 micro-ohms. c. Investigate values deviating from adjacent pole by more than

50 percent. 3. Set and calibrate in accordance with Specifications, manufacturer’s

recommendations, and Coordination Study. a. Voltage and frequency sensing relays. b. Time delay relays. c. Engine start and shutdown relays.

4. Perform automatic transfer tests by: a. Simulating loss of normal power. b. Return to normal power. c. Simulating loss of alternate power. d. Simulating single-phase conditions for normal and alternate

sources. 5. Monitor and verify operation and timing of:

a. Normal and alternate voltage sensing relays. b. Engine-start sequence. c. Timing delay upon transfer and retransfer. d. Engine cool down and shutdown. e. Interlocks and limit switch functions. f. Engine cool down and shutdown feature.

3.16 BATTERY SYSTEM


1. Physical damage and electrolyte leakage. 2. Evidence of corrosion. 3. Intercell bus link integrity. 4. Battery cable insulation damage and contaminated surfaces. 5. Operating conditions of ventilating equipment. 6. Visual check of electrolyte level.


1. Measure: a. Bank charging voltage. b. Individual cell voltage. c. Electrolyte specific gravity in each cell. d. Measured test values to be in accordance with manufacturer’s

published data.

697482A.GN1


2. Verify during recharge mode: a. Charging rates from charger. b. Individual cell acceptance of charge.

3. Load tests for integrity and capacity; test values in accordance with IEEE 450.

3.17 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTING DEVICE


1. Adequate clearances between arrestors and enclosures. 2. Ground connections to ground bus electrode.


1. Varistor Type Arrestors: a. Clamping voltage test. b. Rated RMS voltage test. c. Rated dc voltage test. d. Varistor arrestor test values in accordance with IEEE C62.33,

Section 4.4 and Section 4.9.

3.18 STANDBY EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEMS


1. Proper grounding. 2. Blockage of ventilating passageways. 3. Proper operation of jack water heaters. 4. Integrity of engine cooling and fuel supply systems. 5. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise. 6. Overheating of engine or generator. 7. Proper installation of vibration isolators. 8. Proper cooling liquid type and level. 9. Operate engine-generator and check for:

a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise. b. Overheating. c. Correct rotation. d. Check resistance temperature detectors or generator inherent

thermal protectors for functionability and proper operation. e. Excessive vibration.

10. Verify voltage regulator and governor operation will cause unit speed and output voltage to stabilize at proper values within reasonable length of time.

11. Proper operation of meters and instruments.

697482A.GN1


12. Compare generator nameplate rating and connection with one-line diagram or approved Submittal.

13. Verify engine-generator operation with adjustable frequency drives energized and operating under normal load conditions.

B. Electrical and Mechanical Tests:

1. Cold start test by interrupting normal power source with test load consisting of connected building load to verify: a. Transfer switch operation. b. Automatic starting operation. c. Operating ability of engine-generator. d. Overcurrent devices capability to withstand inrush currents.

2. Phase rotation tests. 3. Test engine protective shutdown features for:

a. Low oil pressure. b. Overtemperature. c. Overspeed.

4. Vibration baseline test on generator sets rated above 300 kW; levels in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. Load bank test with reactors and resistors adjusted to 80 percent power factor for each load step. Record voltage, frequency, load current, oil pressure, and engine coolant temperature at 15-minute intervals: a. 25 percent applied load for 30 minutes. b. 50 percent applied load for 30 minutes. c. 75 percent applied load for 30 minutes. d. 100 percent applied load for 3 hours. e. Load test results to demonstrate ability of unit to deliver rated load

for test period. 6. One-Step Rated kW Load Pickup Test:

a. Perform test immediately after performing load bank test. b. Apply rated load, minus largest rated hp motor, to generator. c. Start largest rated horsepower motor and record voltage drop for

20 cycles minimum with high-speed chart recorder or digital storage oscilloscope.

d. Compare voltage drop with maximum allowable voltage dip for specified starting situation.

3.19 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY

A. Provide thermographic survey per NETA ATS Table 100.18 of connections associated with incoming service conductors, bus work, and branch feeder conductors No. 4 and larger at each:

1. Service Entrance Rated Main Breaker. 2. Low Voltage Motor Control Center. 3. Panelboard.

697482A.GN1


B. Provide thermographic survey of feeder conductors No. 4 and larger terminating at:

1. Motors rated 75 hp and larger. 2. Low voltage disconnect switches. 3. Transfer switches. 4. Engine-generators.

C. Remove necessary enclosure metal panels and covers prior to performing survey.

D. Perform with equipment energized during periods of maximum possible loading per NFPA 70B, Section 20.17.

E. Do not perform survey on equipment operating at less than 40 percent of rated load. If plant load is insufficient, perform test with supplemental load bank producing rated load on item being measured.

F. Utilize thermographic equipment capable of:

1. Detecting emitted radiation. 2. Converting detected radiation to visual signal. 3. Detecting 1 degree C temperature difference between subject area and

reference point of 30 degrees C.

G. Temperature Gradients:

1. 3 degrees C to 7 degrees C indicates possible deficiency that warrants investigation.

2. 7 degrees C to 15 degrees C indicates deficiency that is to be corrected as time permits.

3. 16 degrees C and above indicates deficiency that is to be corrected immediately.

H. Provide written report of:

1. Areas surveyed and the resultant temperature gradients. 2. Locations of areas having temperature gradients of 3 degrees C or

greater. 3. Cause of heat rise and actions taken to correct cause of heat rise. 4. Detected phase unbalance.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 20 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 20 00 LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section applies to low-voltage AC induction motors, whether or not referenced by a motor-driven equipment specification. If the equipment specification section deviates from this section in requirements such as, application, horsepower, enclosure type, mounting, shaft type, or synchronous speed, then those listed requirements shall take precedence over this section.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and

Generators. b. 620, Guide for the Presentation of Thermal Limit Curves for

Squirrel Cage Induction Machines. c. 841, Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry—Premium

Efficiency Severe Duty Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors—Up to and Including 370 kW (500 hp).

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts

Maximum). b. C50.41, Polyphase Induction Motors for Power Generating

Stations. c. MG 1, Motors and Generators.


5. UL: a. 83, Standard for Safety for Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and

Cables. b. 674, Standard for Safety for Electric Motors and Generators for

Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. c. 2111, Standard for Safety for Overheating Protection for Motors.

697482A.GN1

LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS PW\DEN003\697482 26 20 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. CISD-TEFC: Chemical industry, severe-duty enclosure.

B. DIP: Dust-ignition-proof enclosure.

C. EXP: Explosion-proof enclosure.

D. Inverter Duty Motor: Motor meeting applicable requirements of NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Parts 30 and 31.

E. Inverter Ready Motor: Motor meeting applicable requirements of NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31.4.4.2.

F. Motor Nameplate Horsepower: That rating after any derating required to allow for extra heating caused by the harmonic content in the voltage applied to the motor by its controller.

G. ODP: Open drip-proof enclosure.

H. TEFC: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled enclosure.

I. TENV: Totally enclosed, nonventilated enclosure.

J. VPI: Vacuum pressure impregnated.

K. WPI: Open weather protected enclosure, Type I.

L. WPII: Open weather protected enclosure, Type II.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Descriptive information. 2. Nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 3. Additional Rating Information:

a. Service factor. b. Locked rotor current. c. No load current. d. Safe stall time for motors 10 hp and larger. e. Adjustable frequency drive motor load classification (for example,

variable torque) and minimum allowable motor speed for that load classification.

f. Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency and power factor. 4. Enclosure type and mounting (such as, horizontal, vertical). 5. Dimensions and total weight.

697482A.GN1


6. Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70.

7. Bearing type. 8. Bearing lubrication. 9. Bearing life. 10. Space heater voltage and watts. 11. Description, ratings, and wiring diagram of motor thermal protection. 12. Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 13. Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the

motor. 14. Description and rating of submersible motor moisture sensing system. 15. Anchorage and bracing data sheets and drawings as required by



1. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

2. Factory test reports, certified. 3. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as

required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

4. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

5. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:

1. Baldor. 2. General Electric. 3. Reliance Electric. 4. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc., Motors and Drives Division. 5. U.S. Electrical Motors. 6. TECO-Westinghouse Motor Co. 7. Toshiba International Corp., Industrial Division. 8. WEG Electric Motors Corp.

697482A.GN1


2.02 GENERAL

A. For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish identical motors and accessories of a single manufacturer.

B. In order to obtain single source responsibility, use a single supplier to provide drive motor, its driven equipment, and specified motor accessories.

C. Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1.

D. For motors used in hazardous (classified) locations, Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D, and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G provide motors that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark.

E. Provide motors specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with a NEMA design letter classification to fit the application.

F. Lifting lugs on motors weighing 100 pounds or more.

G. Operating Conditions:

1. Maximum ambient temperature not greater than 50 degrees C. 2. Provide motors suitable for operating conditions without reduction in

nameplate rated horsepower or exceeding rated temperature rise. 3. Overspeed in either direction in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

2.03 HORSEPOWER RATING

A. As designated in motor-driven equipment specification.

B. Adjustable Frequency and Adjustable Speed Applications (Inverter Duty Motor, Inverter Ready Motor): Driven equipment brake horsepower at any head capacity point on pump curve not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding service factor.

2.04 SERVICE FACTOR

A. Inverter-Duty Motors: 1.0 at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.

B. Other Motors: 1.15 minimum at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.

2.05 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RATING

A. System Frequency: 60 Hz.

697482A.GN1


B. Voltage Rating: Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven equipment specification:

Voltage Rating

Size Voltage Phase

1/2 hp and smaller 115 1

3/4 hp through 400 hp 460 3

450 hp and larger 4,000 3

C. Suitable for full voltage starting.

D. 85 hp and larger also suitable for reduced voltage starting with 65 percent or 80 percent voltage tap settings on reduced inrush motor starters.

E. Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter supply terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage.

2.06 EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR

A. For all motors except single-phase, under 1 hp, multispeed, short-time rated and submersible motors, or motors driving gates, valves, elevators, cranes, trolleys, and hoists:

1. Efficiency: a. Tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59. b. Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with

NEMA MG 1 Table 12-12, Full-load Efficiencies for NEMA Premium Efficiency Electric Motors Rated 600 Volts or Less (Random Wound), or as indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.

2. Power Factor: Guaranteed minimum at full load shall be manufacturer’s standard or as indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.

2.07 LOCKED ROTOR RATINGS

A. Locked rotor kVA Code For lower, if motor horsepower not covered by NEMA MG 1 tables.

B. Safe Stall Time: 12 seconds or greater.

697482A.GN1


2.08 INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Single-Phase, Fractional Horsepower Motors: Manufacturer’s standard winding insulation system.

B. Motors Rated Over 600 Volts: VPI windings in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

C. Three-phase and Integral Horsepower Motors: Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven equipment specification, Class F with Class B rise at nameplate horsepower and designated operating conditions, except provide Class B with Class B rise insulation for EXP and DIR motors.

2.09 ENCLOSURES

A. Conform to NEMA MG 1.

B. TEFC and TENV: Furnish with drain hole with porous drain/weather plug.

C. Explosion-Proof (EXP):

1. TEFC listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I, Division 1, Group C and D hazardous locations.

2. Drain holes with drain and breather fittings. 3. Integral thermostat opening on excessive motor temperature in

accordance with UL 2111 and NFPA 70. 4. Terminate thermostat leads in terminal box separate from main terminal

box.

D. Submersible: In accordance with Article Special Motors.

2.10 TERMINAL (CONDUIT) BOXES

A. Oversize main terminal boxes for motors.

B. Diagonally split, rotatable to each of four 90-degree positions. Threaded hubs for conduit attachment.

C. Except ODP, furnish gaskets between box halves and between box and motor frame.

697482A.GN1


D. Minimum usable volume in percentage of that specified in NEMA MG 1, Section 1, Paragraph 4.19 and NFPA 70, Article 430:

Terminal Box Usable Values

Voltage Horsepower Percentage

Below 600 15 through 125 500



Above 600 All sizes 200

E. Terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in each terminal box.

F. Coordinate motor terminal box conduit entries versus size and quantity of conduits shown on Drawings.

2.11 BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION

A. Horizontal Motors:

1. 3/4 hp and Smaller: Permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings, or regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs.

2. 1 through 400 hp: Regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs.

3. Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life for ball and roller bearings as defined in ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.

B. Vertical Motors:

1. Thrust Bearings: a. Anti-friction bearing. b. Manufacturer’s standard lubrication 100 hp and smaller. c. Oil lubricated 125 hp and larger. d. Minimum 50,000 hours L-10 bearing life.

2. Guide Bearings: a. Manufacturer’s standard bearing type. b. Manufacturer’s standard lubrication 200 hp and smaller. c. Oil lubricated 250 hp and larger. d. Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life.

C. Regreasable Antifriction Bearings:

1. Readily accessible, grease injection fittings. 2. Readily accessible, removable grease relief plugs.

697482A.GN1


D. Oil Lubrication Systems:

1. Oil reservoirs with sight level gauge. 2. Oil fill and drain openings with opening plugs. 3. Provisions for necessary oil circulation and cooling.

E. Inverter Duty Rated Motors Larger than 50 hp, Bearing Isolation: Provide electrically isolated bearings to prevent stray current damage.

2.12 NOISE

A. Measured in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

B. Maximum Sound Level for Motors Controlled by Adjustable Frequency Drive Systems: 3 dBA higher than NEMA MG 1.

2.13 BALANCE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

A. In accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 7.

2.14 EQUIPMENT FINISH

A. Protect Motor for Service Conditions:

1. Other Enclosures: Outdoor industrial atmospheres, including moisture and direct sunlight exposure.

B. External Finish: Prime and finish coat manufacturer’s standard.

C. Internal Finish: Bore and end turns coated with clear polyester or epoxy varnish.

2.15 SPECIAL FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Screen Over Air Openings: Corrosion-resistant stainless steel on motors with ODP, WPI, and WPII enclosures meeting requirements for guarded machine in NEMA MG 1, and attached with stainless steel screws.

B. Winding Thermal Protection:

1. Thermostats: a. Motors for adjustable speed application 25 and larger. b. Bi-metal disk or rod type thermostats embedded in stator

windings. c. Automatic reset contacts rated 120 volts ac, 5 amps minimum,

opening on excessive temperature. (Provide manual reset at motor controller.)

d. Leads extending to separate terminal box for motors 100 hp and larger.

697482A.GN1


C. Vibration detection relay mounted in NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure on side of motor.

D. Nameplates:

1. Raised or stamped letters on stainless steel or aluminum. 2. Display motor data required by NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 10.39 and

Paragraph 10.40 in addition to bearing numbers for both bearings. 3. Premium efficiency motor nameplates to display NEMA nominal

efficiency, guaranteed minimum efficiency, full load power factor, and maximum allowable kVAR for power factor correction capacitors.

E. Anchor Bolts: Provide meeting manufacturer’s recommendations and of sufficient size and number for specified seismic condition.

2.16 SPECIAL MOTORS

A. Requirements in this article take precedence over conflicting features specified elsewhere in this section.

B. Severe-duty Explosion-proof: Meet requirements for EXP enclosures and CISD-TEFC motors.

C. Multispeed: Meet requirements for speeds, number of windings, and load torque classification indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.

D. Inverter Duty Motor:

1. Motor Supplied Power by Adjustable Voltage and Adjustable Frequency Drives: Inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA Parts 30 and 31.

2. Provide winding insulation rated 1,600 peak volts, minimum. 3. Meet or exceed NEMA MG 1 corona inception voltage rating. 4. Provide one insulated bearing. 5. Suitable for operation over entire speed range indicated. 6. Provide forced ventilation where speed ratio is greater than published

range for motor provided. 7. When installed in Division 1 hazardous (classified) location, provide

motor identified by manufacturer as suitable use with a variable speed drive in a Division 1 location.

E. Submersible Pump Motor:

1. Manufacturers: a. Xylem Flygt Corp b. Reliance Electric.

697482A.GN1


2. At 100 Percent Load:

Submersible Pump Motors

Horsepower Guaranteed

Minimum Efficiency Guaranteed Minimum

Power Factor

5 through 10 80 82

10.1 through 50 85 82

50.1 through 100 87 82

Over 100 89 82

3. Insulation System: Manufacturer’s standard Class B or Class F. 4. Motor capable of running dry continuously. 5. Enclosure:

a. Hermetically sealed, watertight, for continuous submergence up to 65-foot depth.

b. Listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I, Division 1, Group C & D hazardous atmosphere.

c. Seals: Tandem mechanical. 6. Bearing and Lubrication:

a. Permanently sealed and lubricated, replaceable antifriction guide and thrust bearings.

b. Minimum 15,000 hours L-10 bearing life. 7. Inrush kVA/horsepower no greater than NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70,

Code F. 8. Winding Thermal Protection:

a. Thermal sensor and switch assembly, one each phase, embedded in stator windings and wired in series.

b. Switches normally closed, open upon excessive winding temperature, and automatically reclose when temperature has cooled to safe operating level.

c. Switch contacts rated at 5 amps, 120V ac. 9. Motor Seal Failure Moisture Detection:

a. Probes or sensors to detect moisture beyond seals. b. Probe or sensor monitoring module for mounting in motor

controller, suitable for operation from 120V ac supply. c. Monitoring module with control power transformer, probe test

switch and test light, and two independent 120V ac contacts, one opening and one closing when flux of moisture is detected.

10. Bearing Overtemperature Protection for Motors Larger than 100 hp: a. Sensor on lower bearing housing monitoring bearing temperature. b. Any monitoring relay necessary to provide 120V ac contact

opening on bearing overtemperature.

697482A.GN1


11. Winding thermal protection, moisture detection, and bearing overtemperature specified above may be monitored by single device providing two independent 120V ac contacts, one closing and one opening on malfunction.

12. Connecting Cables: a. One cable containing power, control, and grounding conductors. b. Each cable suitable for hard service, submersible duty with

watertight seal where cable enters motor. c. Length: 50 feet minimum. d. UL 83 listed and sized in accordance with NFPA 70.

2.17 FACTORY TESTING

A. Tests:

1. In accordance with IEEE 112 for polyphase motors. 2. Routine (production) tests in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Test

multispeed motors at all speeds. 3. For energy efficient motors, test efficiency and power factor at

50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of rated horsepower: a. In accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B, and NEMA MG 1,

Paragraph 12.59. and Paragraph 12.60. b. For motors 500 hp and larger where facilities are not available to

test by dynamometer (Test Method B), determine efficiency by IEEE 112, Test Method F.

4. Vibration (balance). 5. Provide certified test reports for all polyphase motors polyphase motors

100 hp and larger.

B. Test Report Forms:

1. Routine Tests: IEEE 112, Form A-1. 2. Efficiency and power factor by Test Method B, IEEE 112, Form A-2,

and NEMA MG 1, Table 12-11 Table 12-12. 3. Efficiency and power factor by Test Method F, IEEE 112, Forms F-1,

F-2, and F-3. 4. Temperature Test: IEEE 112, Form A-2.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

B. Align motor carefully and properly with driven equipment.

C. Secure equipment to mounting surface with anchor bolts.

697482A.GN1



A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative at Site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for installation assistance, inspection, equipment testing, and startup assistance for motors larger than 80 hp.

B. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 22 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 10 CFR Part 431, DOE 2016 efficiency.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C57.96, Guide for Loading Dry Type Transformers.

3. National Electrical Contractor’s Association (NECA): 409, Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers.

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ST 20, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications.


6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with

Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors. b. 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case

Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. c. 1561, Standard for Dry-Type, General Purpose, and Power

Transformers.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Descriptive information. 2. Dimensions and weight. 3. Transformer nameplate data, including efficiency. 4. Schematic and connection diagrams. 5. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by




2. Test Report: Sound test certification for dry type power transformers (0 volt to 600 volt, primary).

697482A.GN1

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PW\DEN003\697482 26 22 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

3. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. UL 1561, NEMA ST 20, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Dry-type, self-cooled, two-winding, with copper windings.

C. Units larger than 5 kVA suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.

D. Efficiency: Meet or exceed DOE 2016 efficiency requirements.

E. Maximum Sound Level per NEMA ST 20:

1. 40 decibels for 0 kVA to 9 kVA. 2. 45 decibels for 10 kVA to 50 kVA. 3. 50 decibels for 51 kVA to 150 kVA. 4. 55 decibels for 151 kVA to 300 kVA. 5. 60 decibels for 301 kVA to 500 kVA.

F. Overload capability: Short-term overload per IEEE C57.96.

G. Wall Bracket: For single-phase units, 15 kVA to 37-1/2 kVA, and for three-phase units, 15 kVA to 30 kVA.

H. Vibration Isolators:

1. Rated for transformer’s weight. 2. Isolation Efficiency: 99 percent, at fundamental frequency of sound

emitted by transformer. 3. Less Than 30 kVA: Isolate entire unit from structure with external

vibration isolators. 4. 30 kVA and Above: Isolate core and coil assembly from transformer

enclosure with integral vibration isolator.

I. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Co. 2. Square D Co. 3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 22 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

2.02 MINI-POWER CENTER (MPC)

A. General: Transformer, primary, and secondary main circuit breakers, and secondary panelboard section enclosed in NEMA 250, Type 4X, Type 316 stainless steel enclosure.

B. Transformer:

1. Insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturer’s standard. 2. Efficiency: Manufacturer’s standard (DOE 2016 efficiency). 3. Core and Coil: Encapsulated. 4. Full capacity, 5 percent voltage taps, two below normal voltage. 5. Primary Voltage: 480, three phase. 6. Secondary Voltage: 208/120 volts, three-phase, four-wire.

C. Panelboard: Full, UL 489, short-circuit current rated.

1. Type: Thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, indicating, with noninterchangeable molded case circuit breakers.

2. Number and Breaker Ampere Ratings: As required.

2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMER

A. Insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturer’s standard.

B. Core and Coil:

1. Encapsulated for single-phase units 1/2 kVA to 25 kVA and for three-phase units 3 kVA to 15 kVA.

2. Thermosetting varnish impregnated for single-phase units 37.5 kVA and above, and for three-phase units 30 kVA and above.

C. Enclosure:

1. Single-Phase, 3 kVA to 25 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated. 2. Single-Phase, 37-1/2 kVA and Above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated. 3. Three-Phase, 3 kVA to 15 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated. 4. Three-Phase, 30 kVA and Above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated. 5. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 6. Corrosive Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R stainless steel.

D. Voltage Taps:

1. Three-Phase, 3 kVA to 15 kVA: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating.

2. Three-Phase, 30 kVA and Above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating.

E. Impedance: 4.5 percent minimum on units 75 kVA and larger.

697482A.GN1

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PW\DEN003\697482 26 22 00 - 4 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NECA and manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Load external vibration isolator such that no direct transformer unit metal is in direct contact with mounting surface.

C. Provide moisture-proof, flexible conduit for electrical connections.

D. Connect voltage taps to achieve (approximately) rated output voltage under normal plant load conditions.

E. Provide wall brackets for three-phase units, 15 kVA to 30 kVA.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PANELBOARDS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 24 16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. National Electrical Contractor’s Association (NECA): 407, Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. 289, Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. c. KS 1, Enclosed Switches. d. PB 1, Panelboards. e. PB 1.1, General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and

Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical

Code (NEC). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. 67, Standard for Panelboards. b. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. c. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with

Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors. d. 489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and

Circuit Breaker Enclosures. e. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. f. 870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings. g. 943, Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. h. 1699, Standard for Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer’s data sheets for each type of panelboard, protective device, accessory item, and component.

2. Manufacturer’s shop drawings including dimensioned plan, section, and elevation for each panelboard type, enclosure, and general arrangement.

3. Tabulation of features for each panelboard to include the following: a. Protective devices with factory settings. b. Provisions for future protective devices. c. Space for future protective devices. d. Voltage, frequency, and phase ratings. e. Enclosure type.

697482A.GN1

PANELBOARDS PW\DEN003\697482 26 24 16 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

f. Bus and terminal bar configurations and current ratings. g. Provisions for circuit terminations with wire range. h. Short circuit current rating of assembled panelboard at system

voltage. i. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of auxiliary

components. j. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by




2. Manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions. 3. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as



A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this section that are listed and labeled as defined in NEC Article 100.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS


1. Square D Co 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 3. Siemens.

B. Panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer as equipment furnished under Section 26 24 19, Low-Voltage Motor Control.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Provide low voltage panelboards for application at 600V or less in accordance with this section, including panelboards installed in other equipment specified in Section 26 32 13.13, Diesel Engine Generator Set.

B. Provide equipment in accordance with NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, and UL 67.

697482A.GN1


C. Wire Terminations:

1. Provide panelboard assemblies, including protective devices, suitable for use with 75 degrees C or greater wire insulation systems at NFPA 70, 75 degrees C conductor ampacity, and in accordance with UL 486E.

2. Lugs for termination of conductors shall comply with Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

3. Lugs for termination of copper feeder phase and neutral conductors shall be replaceable, bolted crimp compression type only.

D. Load Current Ratings:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, load current ratings for panelboard assemblies, including bus and circuit breakers, are non-continuous as defined by NEC. Continuous ratings shall be 80 percent of non-continuous rating.

2. Where indicated “continuous” or “100 percent”, selected components and protective devices shall be rated for continuous load current at value shown.

E. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Integrated equipment short circuit rating for each panelboard assembly shall be no less than the indicated SCCR. following:

1. Minimum SCCR at 208Y/120 or 120/240 volts shall be 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical.

2. Minimum SCCR at 480Y/277 volts shall be 42,000 amperes rms symmetrical.

2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Overcurrent Device Mounting and Arrangement: Design panelboards to accommodate device installation and replacement without disturbing adjacent devices and without removing main bus.

B. Overcurrent Protective Devices: In accordance with NEMA KS 1, UL 98, and UL 489. Protective devices shall be adapted to panelboard installation.

C. Provisions for Future Overcurrent Device:

1. Provide space, mountings and bus connections such that like device may be installed without additional hardware.

2. Panel openings shall be closed with individual removable cover for each provision for future device.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, “spaces” in panelboards shall be fully equipped provision for future like devices.

697482A.GN1


4. Provisions for future devices shall be suitable devices rated no less than 60 amperes.

D. Protective Device Locking: Furnish provisions for handle padlocking for main, sub-feed, and branch devices where indicated.

E. Branch Protective Devices:

1. Provide Wire Lug Load Connections: Mechanical or crimp compression type Crimp compression type only, removable/replaceable, and suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating switch nor conductor ampacity.

2. Provide a nameplate for each circuit, blanks for spares.

2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General: Thermal-magnetic unless otherwise indicated, quick-make, quick-break, molded case, of indicating type showing ON/OFF and TRIPPED positions of operating handle. Circuit breakers shall comply with Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

B. Bus Connection: Bolt-on circuit breakers in all panelboards.

C. Trip Mechanism:

1. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. 2. Electronic trip with LSIG adjustable settings for frames greater than

100 amps. 3. Two and three pole, common trip. 4. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole. 5. Test button on cover. 6. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise.

D. Unacceptable Substitution:

1. Do not substitute single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties for multi-pole breakers.

2. Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single-pole spaces.

E. Specialty Breakers: Where indicated, provide breakers with the following features:

1. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Rated to trip on 5-mA ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity, for protection of personnel). Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker. Breaker shall include push-to-test and reset buttons.

697482A.GN1


2. Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI): Where indicated, equip breaker with arc fault sensor to detect and trip the circuit breakers when an arcing fault occurs (UL 1699 listed).

3. Heating and Air Conditioning Rated (HACR): Where indicated, provide breaker UL listed for the protection of such equipment.

F. Solid State Trip Units: Where indicated, equip breakers with solid state trip units in accordance with Section 26 24 29, Low Voltage Motor Control Center.

1. Long (Time) Short (Time) Instantaneous (LSI): Electronic trip unit with fixed long-time trip, adjustable short-time trip and delay, and adjustable instantaneous trip settings.

2. Long (Time) Short (Time) Instantaneous Ground (Fault) (LSIG): Electronic trip unit as above and also with adjustable ground fault trip and delay settings.

2.05 ENCLOSURES

A. General:

1. Provide as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

2. Type 1, Type 3R, and Type 3S material code-gauge, hot-dip galvanized sheet steel with reinforced steel frame.

3. Provide surface-mount panelboard from trim with same dimensions as box front.

B. Finish: Rust inhibitor prime followed by manufacturer’s standard gray baked enamel or lacquer.

C. NEMA 250 Type 1 Branch Panelboard Enclosure:

1. Secure front trim to box with concealed trim clamps. 2. Overlap flush panelboards front trims with box nominal 3/4 inch on all

sides. 3. Provide door in panelboard front trim, with concealed hinges, to access

protective device operating handles. 4. Provide multi-point latching for doors over 30 inches in height. 5. Door Lock: Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock; all panelboards

keyed alike, with two milled keys each lock. 6. Circuit Directory: Metal frame with transparent plastic face and

enclosed card, mounted inside each panel door. 7. Hinged Front Cover (Door In Door): Entire front trim hinged to surface

box with standard door within hinged trim cover.

697482A.GN1


D. Multi-Section Panelboards: Where more than one section is required, provide multiple panelboard sections with separate fronts.

1. Sections shall be suitable for individual mounting to be field interconnected to form a single electrical unit.

2. Recessed-mount sections of the same panel shall all have the same size tubs and flush covers.

3. Surface-mount multi-section panelboards may be comprised of sections of unequal heights.

4. Provide feed-through and main lugs in individual sections as required for field assembly of a complete multi-section panelboard. Unless otherwise indicated, provide feed-through lugs on each section but last.

5. Provide neutral and ground terminal bars in each section.

2.06 BUSSING AND TERMINAL BARS

A. Bus:

1. Material: tin-plated copper full sized throughout length. 2. Provide for mounting of future protective devices along full length of

bus regardless of number of units and spaces shown. Machine, drill, and tap as required for current and future positions.

B. Equipment Ground Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of ground conductors, and bonded to box.

1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole positions.

2. Provide individual termination points for all other grounding conductors such as feeder, grounding electrode, etc.

3. Termination points shall be bolted crimp compression lugs for conductors 6 AWG and larger.

C. Neutral Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of neutral conductors, and isolated from box.

1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole positions.

2. Provide individual termination points for all other neutral conductors. 3. Termination Points: Bolted crimp compression lugs for conductors

6 AWG and larger. 4. Oversize Neutral: Provide oversized neutral terminal bus as indicated.

D. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances for future protective device ampere ratings indicated.

697482A.GN1


E. Surge Protection Devices:

1. Comply with Section 26 43 00, Surge Protection Devices. 2. Provide protective device within panelboard as disconnecting means

and short circuit protection per manufacturer’s recommendation. 3. Provide factory mounting within panelboard utilizing UL-recognized

mounting device.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install in accordance with NECA 407, NEMA PB 1.1, and manufacturers’ written installation instructions.

B. Install securely, plumb, in-line and square with walls.

C. Install top of cabinet trim 78 inches above floor, unless otherwise shown. Install cabinet so tops of protective device operating handles are no more than 78 inches above the floor.

D. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle and wrap with nylon wire ties.

G. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish.

H. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard.

I. In addition to conduit or nipples otherwise required for feeder and branch circuit wiring between multi-section panelboard sections, provide nipples for branch circuits two trade sizes larger than required for installed branch circuit wires or an empty 2-inch nipple, or a 1-1/4-inch trade size conduit if tubs are more than 24 inches apart.

J. Provide engraved identification for each protective device.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 24 19 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 24 19 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which shall be followed for this section:

1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). b. C37.20.7, Guide for Testing Metal Enclosed Switchgear Rated up

to 38 kV for Internal Arcing Faults. 2. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 402, Standard for

Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum). b. ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements. c. ICS 2, Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated

600 Volts. d. ICS 2.3, Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600V.

e. ICS 18, Motor Control Centers. f. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment

Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical

Code (NEC). 5. UL:

a. 98, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. b. 489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and

Circuit Breaker Enclosures. c. 845, Motor Control Centers.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

B. N.C.: Normally Closed.

C. N.O.: Normally Open.

D. SPD: Surge Protection Device.

E. THD: Total Harmonic Distortion.

697482A.GN1

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL PW\DEN003\697482 26 24 19 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Descriptive information. 2. Itemized Bill of Material. 3. Dimensional drawings. 4. Front Panel Elevations. 5. Conduit entrance locations. 6. Bus data. 7. Protective Devices: Copies of time-current characteristics. 8. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by

Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 9. Anchoring instructions and details. 10. Anchoring instructions and details. 11. Typed Tabulation:

a. Motor name; tag (equipment) numbers as shown on Drawings. b. Motor horsepower. c. Nameplate full load current. d. Measured load current and voltage. e. Overload model number and setting. f. Protective device trip settings. g. Manufacturer’s solid state starter switch or dip switch or program

settings. h. Attach above typed, tabulated data to a copy of starter

manufacturer’s overload relay or setting selection tables for starters provided.

12. Control diagrams. 13. One-line diagrams. 14. Schematic (elementary) diagrams. 15. Outline diagrams. 16. Interconnection diagrams.



2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3. Factory test reports, certified. 4. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Provide products manufactured within scope of UL that conform to UL Standards and have applied UL Listing Mark.

697482A.GN1



A. Shipping Splits: Established by Contractor to facilitate ingress of equipment to final installation location within building.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section manufactured by:

1. Schneider Electric/Square D Services 2. Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer. 3. Allen-Bradley. 4. Siemens.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Like Items of Equipment: End product of one manufacturer and same manufacturer as low voltage motor control center and panelboards for standardization.

B. Make adjustments necessary to wiring, conduit, disconnect devices, motor starters, branch circuit protection, and other affected material or equipment to accommodate motors actually provided under this Contract.

C. Controllers: NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, Class A.

D. Control Transformer:

1. Two winding, 120-volt secondary, primary voltage to suit. 2. Two current-limiting fuses for primary circuit. 3. One fuse in secondary circuit with blown fuse indicator. 4. Mount within starter unit.

E. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.

F. Lifting lugs on equipment and devices weighing over 100 pounds.

G. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized seismically by a licensed structural engineer registered in the State where equipment is to reside, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

H. Seismic Zone and Importance Factor: As specified in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

697482A.GN1


I. Operating Conditions:

1. Ambient Temperature: Maximum 40 degrees C. 2. Altitude: 100 feet above sea level. 3. Equipment to be fully rated.

J. Enclosures: In accordance with NEMA 250.

K. Equipment Finish:

1. Electrocoating process applied over rust-inhibiting phosphated base coating.

2. Exterior Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

2.03 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

A. General:

1. In accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 18, and UL 845.

2. Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 3. Provide an Ethernet/IP communications network within the motor

control center to interconnect all metering devices equipped with communications.

B. Enclosure:

1. Type: NEMA 250 Type 12, indoor, dust-tight. 2. Vertical Section Standard Indoor Dimensions for NEMA 1 Type:

a. Nominal, 90 inches high, 20 inches wide, 16 inches deep. b. Alternative width dimensions of 24 inches and 30 inches are

acceptable for oversize devices or panels. c. Do not exceed space shown.

3. Construction: a. Sheet steel reinforced with channel or angle irons. b. Butt sections flush, end-to-end against similar section without

bolts, nuts, or cover plates causing interference. c. Removable top cover plates and bottom cover plates. d. Removable plates on end panels for future bus extension.

4. Section Mounting: Removable formed-steel channel sills and lifting angles.

5. Horizontal Wiring Compartments: Accessible from front, full width, top and bottom.

6. Vertical Wiring Compartment: a. Full height, isolated from unit starters with separate hinged door

and tie supports. b. No terminal blocks allowed in vertical wireway compartment. c. Provide separate low level signal/network raceway in wireway.

697482A.GN1


7. Unit Compartment: Individual compartments separated by steel barriers for each starter, feeder, or other unit capable of being wired from front without unit removal.

8. Compartment Doors: Separate hinged doors for each starter, feeder, or other unit.

9. Door Interlocking: Mechanically interlock starter and feeder doors so doors cannot be opened with unit energized. Provide defeater mechanism to allow intentional access and energizing at any time by qualified individual.

10. External disconnect handles with ON/OFF and trip positions showing, padlockable in OFF position with up to three-lock capability.

11. Cable Entrance: Main leads enter from bottom; control and feeder circuits enter from bottom.

C. Bus:

1. Horizontal Power Bus: a. Three-phase tin-plated, copper, entire width of control center,

rated as shown. b. Completely insulate the horizontal bus prevent arc flash events

from being triggered on the horizontal bus. c. Tin or silver-plated at joints. d. Construct to allow future extension of additional sections. e. Pressure type solderless lugs for each incoming line cable. f. Isolated from top horizontal wireway. g. Provide Belleville washers on bus connection bolts.

2. Vertical Power Bus: a. Three-phase tin-plated, copper, full height of section, rated

600 amperes minimum. b. Tin-plated at joints. c. Sandwich type bus insulation providing deadfront construction

with starter units removed except for bus stab openings. d. Insulated and isolated barrier, complete with shutters. e. Provide Belleville washers on bus connection bolts.

3. Neutral Bus: None. 4. Ground Bus:

a. Copper, tin-plated rated 600 amperes, entire width of control center.

b. Provide Belleville washers on bus connection bolts. 5. Bus Bracing: 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical. 6. Circuit Breaker:

a. Meet requirements of UL 489. b. Molded case with manufacturer’s recommended trip setting for

maximum motor protection. c. Thermal-magnetic trip or magnetic trip only as shown.

697482A.GN1


d. Tripping indicated by operating-handle position. e. Interrupting capacity required for connection to system with short-

circuit capacity indicated.

D. Main Protective Device and Feeder Unit:

1. Incoming Service Feeder: As shown. 2. Instantaneous Trip Mode Selector Switch: Provide switch on main

circuit breaker for bypassing long and short time trip settings, and lowered instantaneous trip settings for incident energy reduction during maintenance. In addition, provide the following: a. Mode Status Light. b. Output contact, rated 5A at 120V ac, for remote Mode status to

Plant Control System. 3. Solid State Trip Circuit Breaker:

a. In accordance with UL 489. b. Main and feeder protective device where shown on the Drawings. c. UL labeled as suitable for service entrancewhere shown on the

Drawings. d. Insulated or molded case breakers with ambient insensitive solid-

state trips and having current sensors and logic circuits integral in breaker frame.

e. Solid-state current control with adjustable ampere setting, adjustable long-time delay, adjustable short-time trip and delay band, fixed or adjustable instantaneous trip, and adjustable ground fault trip and delay band.

f. Setting adjustments to be covered by a sealable, tamper-proof, transparent cover (insulated case breakers only) or by compartment door for other breakers).

g. Locate trip button on front cover of breaker to permit mechanical simulation overcurrent tripping for test purposes and to trip breaker quickly in emergency situation.

4. Molded Case Circuit Breaker: a. In accordance with UL 489. b. Main and feeder protective device where shown on the Drawings. c. UL labeled as suitable for service entrance where shown on the

Drawings. d. Thermal-magnetic trip and interrupting capacity required for

connection to system with short circuit capacity indicated. e. Indicate tripping by operating-handle position. f. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NEC 75 degrees C

ampacity. 5. Fused Switches:

a. Heavy-duty, motor rated, load-break, quick-make, quick-break type, meeting requirements of UL 98 and NEMA KS 1.

697482A.GN1


b. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NEC 75 degrees C ampacity.

c. Current-limiting fuses with rejection clips. 6. Phase Monitoring Relay:

a. Three-phase monitoring relay to protect against low voltage, voltage unbalance, and phase reversal.

b. Manufacturer and Product: Schneider Electric/Square D; Class 8430 Type MPS or Class 8430 Type MPD.

E. Automatic Transfer Switches: As specified in Section 26 36 23, Automatic Transfer Switch.

F. SPD: As specified in Section 26 43 00, Surge Protection Devices.

G. Transformers: As specified in Section 26 22 00, Low-Voltage Transformers.

H. Panelboards: As specified in Section 26 24 16, Panelboards.

I. Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches, Elapsed Time Meters, Control Relays, Time-Delay Relays, and Reset Timers: As specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

J. Nameplates:

1. As specified in Section 26 05 02, Basic Electrical Requirements. 2. Provide for each motor control center and each unit. 3. Engrave with inscription shown on single-line diagram. 4. Provide blank nameplates on spaces for future units. 5. Attach with stainless steel panhead screws on face of control center.

K. Space Heaters: Thermostatically controlled. Locate in bottom of each vertical section for operation from 120-volt power source derived internal to MCC.


A. Factory Testing:

1. Applicable Standards: NEMA ICS 18, UL 845, and NEC Article 430, Part VIII.

2. Perform standard factory inspection and tests in accordance with NEMA requirements to verify components have been designed to Specification, assembled in accordance with applicable standards, and each unit functions in accordance with electrical diagrams.

3. Actual operation shall be performed wherever possible. Otherwise, inspect and perform continuity checks.

4. Verify component devices operated correctly in circuits as shown on diagrams or as called for in Specification.

697482A.GN1


5. Control Circuits and Devices: a. Energize circuit at rated voltage. b. Operate control devices. c. Perform continuity check.

6. Instruments, Meters, Protective Relays, and Equipment: a. Verify devices functioned by energizing potential to rated values

with connection to devices made at outgoing terminal blocks. b. Verify protective relays operated for functional checks and trips

manually initiated to verify functioning of operation for indicator and associated circuits.

7. Perform dielectric tests on primary circuits and equipment, except potential transformers. a. Tests: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-around with 60-cycle test

voltages applied for 1 second at 2,640 volts. 8. Verify equipment passed tests and inspection. 9. Provide standard factory inspection and test checklists, and final

certified and signed test report.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install equipment in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3, IEEE C2, NECA 402, Submittals, and manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

2. Secure equipment to mounting pads with anchor bolts of sufficient size and number adequate for specified seismic conditions.

3. Install equipment plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall. 4. Coordinate terminal connections with installation of secondary feeders. 5. Grout mounting channels into floor or mounting pads. 6. Retighten current-carrying bolted connections and enclosure support

framing and panels to manufacturer’s recommendations. 7. Motor Data: Provide typed, self-adhesive label attached inside each

motor starter enclosure door displaying the following information: a. Motor served by tag number and equipment name. b. Nameplate horsepower. c. Motor code letter. d. Full load amperes. e. Service factor. f. Installed overload relay catalog number.

697482A.GN1


B. Circuit Breakers:

1. Field adjust trip settings of motor starter magnetic-trip-only circuit breakers.

2. Adjust to approximately 11 times motor rated current. 3. Determine motor rated current from motor nameplate following

installation.

C. Thermal Overload Relay:

1. Select and install overload relays and apply settings after actual nameplate full-load current rating of motor has been determined.

2. Initial Settings: In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.


A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for the following services at Job Site or classroom as designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:

1. 1 person-day for installation assistance, and inspection of installation. 2. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing. 3. 1 person-day for plant startup. 4. 1 person-day for training of Owner’s personnel.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 WIRING DEVICES FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 27 26 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

2. Federal Specifications (FS): a. W-C-596G, General Specification for Connector, Electrical,

Power. b. W-S-896F, Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted

(General Specification). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits.

b. C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits.

4. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 1, Standard Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.

5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. FB 11, Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors of the Pin and Sleeve

Type for Hazardous Locations. c. WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. d. WD 6, Wiring Devices – Dimensional Specifications.


7. UL: a. 498, Standard for Safety for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. b. 508, Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Equipment. c. 943, Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. d. 1010, Standard for Safety for Receptacle-Plug Combinations for

Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. e. 1436, Standard for Safety for Outlet Circuit Testers and Similar

Indicating Devices. f. 1449, Standard for Safety for Surge Protective Devices (SPD).

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer’s product data for wiring devices.

697482A.GN1

WIRING DEVICES PW\DEN003\697482 26 27 26 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SWITCHES

A. Switch, General Purpose:

1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-S-896F. 2. Totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switch and screw terminal. 3. Rivetless one-piece brass or copper alloy contact arm with silver alloy

contact. 4. Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent

lamp loads. 5. Rating: 20 amps, 120/277 volts. 6. Automatic grounding clip and integral grounding terminal on mounting

strap. 7. Special Features: Provide the following features in comparable devices

where indicated: a. Three-way and four-way.

8. Manufacturers and Products, Industrial Grade: a. Cooper Arrow Hart; AH1200 AH1220 Series. b. Bryant; 4801, 4901 Series. c. Hubbell; 1201, 1221 Series. d. Leviton; 1201, 1221 Series.

2.02 RECEPTACLES

A. Receptacle, General Purpose:

1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-C-596G. 2. Duplex, two-pole, three-wire grounding type with screw type wire

terminals. 3. Impact resistant nylon cover and body, with finder grooves in face,

unless otherwise indicated. 4. One-piece mounting strap with integral ground contact (rivetless

construction). 5. Contact Arrangement: Contact to be made on two sides of each inserted

blade without detent. 6. Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps, unless

otherwise indicated. 7. Size: For 2-inch by 4-inch outlet box. 8. Special Features: Provide the following features in comparable devices

where indicated: a. Listed weather-resistant per NEC 406.8 for installation in damp or

wet locations. 9. Industrial Grade Manufacturers and Products:

a. Cooper Arrow Hart; 5262, 5362 Series. b. Hubbell Bryant; HBL5262, HBL5362 Series. c. Leviton; 5262 5362 Series.

697482A.GN1


B. Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter:

1. Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle. 2. Listed Class A to UL 943, tripping at 5 mA. 3. Rectangular smooth face with push-to-test and reset buttons. 4. Listed weather-resistant per NEC 406.8 for installation in damp or wet

locations. 5. Feed-through Capability: 20 amps. 6. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Hubbell Bryant; GFTR20 Series. b. Cooper Arrow Hart WRVGF20 Series. c. Leviton; 7899 Series.

C. Receptacle, Corrosion-Resistant:

1. Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle. 2. Nickel coated metal parts. 3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Hubbell Bryant; HBL52, CM62, HBL53, CM62 Series. b. Leviton; 52CM-62, 53CM-62 Series. c. Cooper Arrow Hart; 5262CR, 5362CR Series.

2.03 TELEPHONE AND DATA JACK

A. Compatible with Category 6 cable, and backwards compatible with Category 5 and Category 5e.

1. High-impact thermoplastic body. 2. Termination Type:

a. IDC with pair separation towers. b. Compatible with 110-style termination tool.

3. Snap-on cap to secure connections. 4. Listed UL 1863. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Hubbell; HXJ6 Series. b. Leviton; 61110 Series.

B. Receptacles, General:

1. Contain integral switch which must be closed to energize circuit. 2. Design shall permit only an approved plug to be energized.

a. Actuation of switch shall require plug be inserted and rotated approximately 45 degrees.

b. Plug shall lock into this position preventing unintended disengagement.

c. To remove, plug shall be turned opposite direction as engagement and pulled straight out.

697482A.GN1


2.04 DEVICE PLATES

A. Sectional type plate not permitted.

B. Nylon:

1. Material: Specification grade, 0.10-inch minimum thickness, noncombustible, thermosetting.

2. Color: To match associated wiring device. 3. Mounting Screw: Oval-head metal, color matched to plate.

C. Stainless Steel:

1. Material: Specification grade, one-piece, 0.040-inch nominal thickness stainless steel.

2. Finish: ASTM A167, Type 302/304, satin. 3. Mounting Screw: Oval-head, finish matched to plate.

D. Cast Metal:

1. Material: Copper-free aluminum, with gaskets. 2. Screw: Oval-head stainless steel.

E. Weatherproof:

1. Receptacle, Weatherproof Type 1: a. Gasketed, cast-aluminum, with individual cap over each

receptacle opening. b. Mounting Screw and Cap Spring: Stainless steel. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Crouse-Hinds; Type WLRD-1. 2) Appleton; Type FSK-WRD.

2. Receptacle, Weatherproof Type 2: a. UL listed for wet location while in use. b. Die cast metal cover. c. Locking type. d. Manufacturer and Product: TayMac; Type Multi-Mac.

3. Switch: a. Gasketed, cast-metal or cast-aluminum, incorporating external

operator for internal switch. b. Mounting Screw: Stainless steel. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Crouse-Hinds; DS-181 or DS-185. 2) Appleton; FSK-1VTS or FSK-1VS.

F. Raised Sheet Steel: 1/2-inch high zinc- or cadmium-plated steel designed for one-piece drawn type sheet steel box.

697482A.GN1


2.05 FINISHES

A. Wiring device catalog numbers specified in this section do not designate device color. Unless otherwise indicated, or required by code, provide colors as specified below.

B. Wiring Device Connected to Normal Power System:

1. Other Areas: Gray.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Ensure device and its box are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device box and do not cut holes for box with router that is guided by riding against outside of box.

2. Keep outlet box free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device box in brick or block wall such that cover plate does not cross a joint, unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated or directed to cross joint, trowel joint flush with face of wall.

4. Install wiring device after wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. Length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and

foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided outlet box is

large enough.

697482A.GN1


D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in length.

5. Use torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

6. When conductors larger than 12 AWG are installed on 15-amp or 20-amp circuits, splice 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

7. Tighten unused terminal screws on device. 8. Device Plates:

a. Do not use oversized or extra deep plate. b. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet box when standard device

plate does not fit flush or does not cover rough wall opening.

3.02 SWITCH INSTALLATION

A. Switch, General Purpose:

1. Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. 2. Install with switch operation in vertical position. 3. Install single-pole, two-way switch such that toggle is in up position

when switch is on.

3.03 RECEPTACLE INSTALLATION

A. Duplex Receptacle:

1. Install with grounding slot up, except where horizontal mounting is shown, in which case install with neutral slot down.

2. Ground receptacle to box with grounding wire only. 3. Weatherproof Receptacle:

a. Install in cast metal box. b. Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle

opening. 4. Ground Fault Interrupter: Install feed-through model at locations where

ground fault protection is specified for “downstream” conventional receptacles.

5. Special-Purpose Receptacle: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

697482A.GN1


3.04 DEVICE PLATE INSTALLATION

A. Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure tight fit to box.

B. Flush Mounted: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surface without use of mat or similar material. Plaster fillings will not be acceptable.

C. Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box, unless plate has no sharp corners or edges.

D. Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch.

E. Type (Exterior):

1. Switch: Weatherproof. 2. Receptacle in Damp Location: Weatherproof Type 1. 3. Receptacle in Wet Location: Weatherproof Type 2.

F. Type (Interior):

1. Other Areas: Stainless steel. 2. Flush Mounted Box: Stainless steel. 3. Surface Mounted, Metal Box:

a. General Purpose Areas (Dry, Non-process): Sheet Steel. b. Other Areas: Cast metal.

4. Surface Mounted, Aluminum Box: a. General Purpose Areas: Stamped. b. Other Areas: Cast metal.

5. Surface Mounted, Sheet Steel Box: Raised sheet steel. 6. Surface Mounted, Cast Box: Cast. 7. Surface Mounted, Nonmetallic Box: Manufacturer’s standard. 8. Receptacle Shown as Weatherproof on Drawings: Weatherproof Type 1.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. Use tape labels for identification of individual receptacles in dry indoor locations.

1. Degrease and clean device plate surface to receive tape labels. 2. Use 3/16-inch Kroy black letters on white background, unless otherwise

indicated. 3. Identify panelboard and circuit number from which item is served on

face of plate.

B. Identify conductors with durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes where more than one circuit is present.

697482A.GN1


3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections, and prepare test reports.

B. Test Instrument for 125-Volt 20-Amp Receptacle: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

C. Using test plug, verify device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

D. Line Voltage Range: 105 volts to 132 volts.

E. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-Amp Load: Less than 6 percent; 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.

F. Ground Impedance: 2 ohms, maximum.

G. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

H. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 LOW VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FEBRUARY 7, 2019 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 26 29 23 - 1

SECTION 26 29 23 LOW VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA), Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 359-1, Special Colors.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and

Generators. b. 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic

Control in Electric Power Systems. c. C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-

Voltage AC Power Circuits. 3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):

a. CP 1, Shunt Capacitors. b. MG 1, Motors and Generators. c. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts

Maximum). d. WC-57, Control Cables.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Terms that may be used in this section:

1. VFD: Variable frequency drive. 2. CMOS: Complementary metal oxide semiconductor. 3. GTO: Gate Turn-Off Thyristor. 4. MPR: Motor protection relay. 5. MTBF: Mean time between failure 6. PWM: Pulse width modulation. 7. ROM: Read only memory. 8. RTD: Resistance temperature detector. 9. Rated Load: Load specified for the equipment. 10. Rated Speed: Nominal rated (100 percent) speed specified for the

equipment. 11. TDD: Total demand distortion. 12. THD: Total harmonic distortion. 13. TTL: Transistor logic.

697482A.GN1

LOW VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE PW\DEN003\697482 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 29 23 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements:

1. This Specification covers supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Adjustable Frequency Drives. As a minimum, all drives larger than 100 hp shall be 18-pulse, and 100 hp and less shall be 6-pulse, as long as the harmonic requirements of this specification are met. Manufacturer may choose to provide higher pulse converters or harmonic filters as required to meet the current and voltage distortion limits.

2. Rated Continuous Operation Capacity: Not less than 1.15 times full load current rating of driven motor, as indicated on the motor nameplates, and suitable for continuous operation at any continuous overload which may be imposed on motor by driven pump operating over specified speed range.

3. Basis for Harmonic Computations: Compute individual and total current and voltage distortion. At the incoming line terminals of Motor Control Centers MCC-2, VFD-D, VFD E, VFD-F and VFD,G reference Drawings 050-E-601. Furnish harmonic filters, line reactors, isolation transformers, or higher pulse converter arrangements required to meet current/voltage distortion limits.

4. Normal Source Current Harmonic Distortion: a. Compute normal source individual and total current harmonic

distortion. At the incoming Line Terminals of Motor Control Centers MCC-2, VFD-D, VFD E, VFD-F and VFD,G in accordance with IEEE Standard 519. Although the short circuit ratios of the motor control centers may be higher than 20, the harmonic distortion limits specified below are deliberately specified for ratio of less than 20, which will be the case in future. Individual current harmonic distortion and the total demand distortion expressed as percent of maximum demand load current IL shall not exceed values specified in Table 1 below:

Table 1

Individual Harmonic Order (Odd Harmonics)

Harmonic Current Distortion

Percent of Max. Demand Load Current IL

h <11 1

11< = h<17 0.5

17< = h<23 0.375 (2.598 percent for h=17,19)

697482A.GN1


Table 1




23< = h<35 0.15

35< = h 0.075 (0.520 percent for h=35,37)

Total Demand Distortion (TDD) 5

b. Limits specified in Table 1 are for drives utilizing 18-pulse rectifiers.

c. For harmonic computations, assume all drives running at full load. 5. Normal Source Voltage Harmonic Distortion: The individual voltage

harmonic distortion computed at incoming line terminals of the Motor Control Centers MCC-2, VFD-D, VFD E, VFD-F and VFD,G shall be less than 3 percent and the total voltage harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5 percent.

6. Standby Source Current Harmonic Distortion: a. Compute standby source individual and total current harmonic

distortion at the incoming line terminals of motor control centers MCC-2, VFD-D, VFD E, VFD-F and VFD,G, in accordance with IEEE Standard 519. Although the short circuit ratios indicated on the one line diagram for most of the PCC locations are higher than 20, the harmonic distortion limits specified below are deliberately specified for ration of less than 20, which will be the case in future. Individual current harmonic distortion and total demand distortion expressed as percent of maximum demand load current IL shall not exceed values specified in Table 2 below.

Table 2




h <11 1.0

11< = h<17 0.5

17< = h<23 0.375 (2.598 percent for h=17, 19)

23< = h<35 0.15

35< = h 0.075 (0.520 percent for h=35, 37

697482A.GN1


Table 2




Total Demand Distortion (TDD) 5

b. Limits specified in Table 2 are for drives utilizing 18-pulse rectifiers.

c. For harmonics calculations, assume all drives running at full load. 7. Standby Source Voltage Harmonic Distortion: The individual voltage

harmonic distortion computed at the incoming line terminals of motor control centers MCC-2, VFD-D, VFD E, VFD-F and VFD-G, shall be less than 3 percent and the total harmonic voltage distortion shall not exceed 5 percent at all three PCC locations.

8. Furnish isolating transformers or series reactors, harmonic filters, or other devices necessary for proper system operation. Furnish necessary devices and circuits to prevent operation of one drive from adversely affecting operation of other drives supplied from same transformer or same bus.

9. When isolation transformers are used, design to meet K-factor requirements of drive(s) connected.

10. Furnish confirmation statement from the electrical Utility (Alabama Power), that the plants Total Harmonic Distortion is within their requirements.

B. Design Requirements:

1. Design and provide drive system consisting of adjustable frequency controller, drive motor, certain auxiliary items, and components necessary for complete operating system.

2. Furnish VFDs rated on basis of actual motor full load nameplate current rating. (VFDs rating = 1.15* full load motor name plant current.)

3. Drive System: Convert incoming three-phase, 60-Hz ac power to variable voltage, adjustable frequency output for adjustable speed operation of a standard ac induction squirrel-cage motor, using the pulse-width-modulation (PWM) technique to produce the adjustable frequency output.

4. System rated for continuous industrial duty and suitable for use with Standard NEMA MG 1, Design B motors.

5. Incoming Line Circuit Breaker: Provide positive means of disconnecting incoming power, and overcurrent protection for the drive system.

6. Incoming Line Reactor: Design to minimize harmonic distortion on the incoming power feeder.

697482A.GN1


7. Output Reactor or dV/Dt Filter: Design to minimize voltage spikes at motor where long motor leads are indicated.

8. All soft starters shall be equipped with 3 SCR’s. 9. Soft Starter Voltage Bypass: Provide output isolation and bypass

contactors with DRIVE/OFF/BYPASS selector switch as shown on Drawings.

10. Line Isolation Contractor: Provide line contactor to remove power from the VFD controller when in bypass mode as shown on Drawings.

11. The equipment furnished, including filters, transformed reactors, and contractors, must fit within the enclosures dimensions on the Drawings.

12. The VFD shall include a full wave diode bridge rectifier and maintain a displacement power factor of near unity regardless of speed and load.

13. The VFD shall utilize an output voltage-vector switching algorithm, or equivalent, in both variable and constant torque modes. Shall provide rated RMS fundamental voltage from the VFD. This allows the motor to operate at a lower temperature rise, extending its thermal life. VFD’s that cannot produce rated RMS fundamentals output voltage or require the input voltage to be increased above motor nameplate value to achieve rated RMS fundamental output voltage are not acceptable. VFD’s that utilize Sine-Coded PWM or Look-up tables shall not be acceptable.

14. The VFD selected must be able to source the motor’s full load nameplate amperage (fundamental RMS) on a continuous basis, and be capable of running the motor at its nameplate RMS, voltage, current, and slip without having to utilize the service factor of the motor.

15. The VFD shall offer a programmable motor parameter that allows the total number of poles of a motor to be programmed to optimize motor performance.

16. VFD shall automatically boost power factor at lower speeds. 17. An automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided in

the VFD to minimize energy consumption in variable torque applications. This features shall optimize motor magnetization voltage and shall dynamically adjust output voltage in response to load, independent of speed. Output voltage adjustment based on frequency alone is not acceptable for single motor variable torque configurations.

18. An initial ramp function shall be available to provide a user-selectable ramp, up to 60 seconds, for applications requiring a faster or slower ramp than the normal ramp.

19. An Auto-tuning PI controller output feature shall provide automated PI controller settings. Once the user accepts the settings, the VFD will save the settings to memory.

20. VFD shall offer a motor spinning test that will run the motor at 5 Hz until the OK button is pressed. This features will allow the user to determine if the motor is running in the correct direction.

21. Switching the input power to the VFD shall be possible without interlocks or damage to the VFD at a minimum interval of 2 minutes.

697482A.GN1


22. It shall not be necessary to spin the motor shaft or de-couple the motor from the load to accomplish this optimization. Additionally, the parameters for the motor resistance and motor reactance shall be user-programmable.

23. The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fans for quiet operation, minimized internal losses, and greatly increased fan life.

24. VFD shall provide full torque to the motor, given input voltage fluctuations of up to plus 10 percent to minus 10 percent of the rated input voltage (380 to 480V ac). Line frequency variation of plus or minus 2 percent shall be acceptable.

25. Protective Features: a. VFD shall include circuitry to detect phase imbalance and phase

loss on the input side of the VFD. b. VFD shall auto-derate the output voltage and frequency to the

motor if an input phase is lost. This result will maintain operation without decreasing the life expectancy of the VFD. The use of this feature shall be user selectable and export a warning during the event.

c. Printed circuit boards shall be conformal coated to reduce the corrosion effect from environmental gases and other conditions. The conformal coating must meet IEC 61721-3-3, Class 3C2 as standard and the VFD shall have an optional 6121-3-3, Class 3C3 coation available.

d. VFD shall auto-derate the output voltage and frequency to the motor in the presence of sustained ambient temperatures higher than the normal operation range, so as not to trip on an inverter temperature fault. The use of this features shall be user-selectable. And a warning will be exported during the event. Function shall reduce switching frequency before reducing motor speed.

e. VFD shall auto-derate the output frequency by limiting the output current before allowing the VFD to trip on overload. The speed of the load can be reduced, but not stopped.

f. VFD shall auto-derate the output voltage and frequency to the motor if an input phase is lost. This result will maintain operation without decreasing the life expectancy pf the VFD. The use of this feature shall be user selectable and export a warning during the event.

g. The VFD shall have the option of an integral RFI filter. VFD enclosures shall be made of metal to minimize RFI and provide immunity.

697482A.GN1


26. Interface Features: a. VFD shall provide an alphanumeric backlit display keypad (LCP)

which may be remotely mounted using a standard 9-pin cable. VFD may be operated with keypad disconnected or removed entirely. Keypad may be disconnected during normal operation without the need to stop the motor or disconnect power to the VFD.

b. VFD Keypad shall feature a key that, when pressed, shall display the contents of the programming manual for the parameter that is currently viewed on the display. The description shall explain the feature and how the settings can be made by the operator.

c. VFD shall display all faults in plain text; VFD’s which can display only fault codes are not acceptable.

d. The keypad shall feature a 6-line graphical display and be capable of digitally displaying up to five separate operational parameters or status values simultaneously (including process values with the appropriate engineering unit) in addition to Hand/Off/Auto, Local/Remote, and operating status.

e. Two lines of the display shall allow "free text programming” so that a site description or the actual name of the equipment being controlled by the VFD can be entered into the display.

f. Keypad shall provide an integral H-O-A (Hand-Off-Auto) and Local-Remote selection capability, and manual control of speed locally without the need for adding selector switches, potentiometers, or other devices.

g. All VFD's shall be of the same series, and shall utilize a common control card and LCP (keypad/display unit) throughout the rating range. The control cards and keypads shall be interchangeable through the entire range of drives used on the project.

h. VFD keypad shall be capable of storing drive parameter values in non-volatile RAM uploaded to it from the VFD, and shall be capable of downloading stored values to the VFD to facilitate programming of multiple drives in similar applications, or as a means of backing up the programmed parameters.

i. VFD Display shall have the ability to display 5 different parameters pertaining to the VFD or the load including: current, speed, DC bus voltage, output voltage, input signal in mA, or other values from a list of 92 different user-selectable parameters.

j. VFD display shall indicate which digital inputs are active and the status of each relay. It shall be possible to toggle between three status read-out screens by pressing the (Status) key. Various operating variables, even with different formatting, can be shown in each status screen.

697482A.GN1


k. VFD display shall indicate the value of any voltage or current signal, including the engineering units of measurement, connected to the analog input terminals. VFD display shall indicate the value of the current at the analog output terminals, including the engineering units of measurement.

l. A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-ON light shall be provided. These indications shall be visible both on the keypad and on the VFD when the keypad is removed.

m. Two-level password protection shall be provided to prevent unauthorized changes to the programming of the VFD. The parameters can be locked via a digital input and/or the unit can be programmed not to allow an unauthorized user to change the parameter settings.

n. A quick setup menu with factory preset typical parameters shall be provided on the VFD to facilitate commissioning. Use of macros shall not be required.

o. A digital elapsed time meter and kilowatt hour meter shall be provided in the display. VFD shall offer as standard an internal clock. The internal clock can be used for: Timed Actions, Energy Meter, Trend Analysis, date/time stamps on alarms, Logged data, Preventive maintenance, or other uses. It shall be possible to program the clock for Daylight Saving Time / summertime, weekly working days or non-working days including 20 exceptions (holidays, etc.). It shall be possible to program a Warning in case the clock has not been reset after a power loss.

p. A battery back-up option shall be provided to maintain internal clock operation during power interruptions. Battery life shall be no less than 10 years of normal operation.

q. VFD shall provide full galvanic isolation with suitable potential separation from the power sources (control, signal, and power circuitry within the drive) to ensure compliance with PELV requirements and to protect PLC's and other connected equipment from power surges and spikes.

r. All inputs and outputs shall be optically isolated. Isolation boards between the VFD and external control devices shall not be required.

s. There shall be six fully programmable digital inputs for interfacing with the systems external control and safety interlock circuitry. Two of these inputs shall be programmable as inputs or outputs.

t. The VFD shall have two analog signal inputs. Inputs shall be programmable for either 0-10V or 0/4-20 mA.

697482A.GN1


u. One programmable analog output shall be provided for indication of the drive status. This output shall be programmable for output speed, voltage, frequency, motor current and output power. The analog output signal shall be 0/4-20 mA. The VFD shall provide two user programmable relays with 75 selectable functions. Two form ‘C’ 230V ac/2A rated dry contact relay outputs shall be provided.

v. Floating point control interface shall be provided to increase/decrease frequency in response to external switch closures.

w. The VFD shall accept a N.C. motor temperature over-temperature switch input, as well as possess the capability to accept a motor thermistor input.

x. The VFD shall store in memory the last 10 faults with time stamp and recorded data.

y. Run permissive circuit shall be provided to accept a “system ready" signal to ensure that the VFD does not start until isolation valves, seal water pumps or other types of auxiliary equipment are in the proper state for VFD operation. The run permissive circuit shall also be capable of sending an output signal as a start command to actuate external equipment before allowing the VFD to start.

z. The VFD shall be equipped with a standard RS-485 serial communications port and front-of-drive accessible USB port. Danfoss FC or ModBus RTU communications shall be integrally mounted.

aa. A Windows® compatible software program to display all monitoring, fault, alarm, and status signals shall be available. This software program shall allow parameter changes, storage of all VFD operating and setup parameters, and remote operation of the VFD.

27. Adjustments: a. The VFD shall have an adjustable output switching frequency. b. Four complete programming parameter setups shall be provided,

which can be locally selected through the keypad or remotely selected via digital input(s), allowing the VFD to be programmed for up to four alternate control scenarios without requiring parameter changes.

c. In each programming set up, independent acceleration and deceleration ramps shall be provided. Acceleration and deceleration time shall be adjustable over the range from 0 to 3,600 seconds to base speed.

d. The VFD shall have four programmable “Bypass frequencies" with adjustable bandwidths to prevent the driven equipment from running at a mechanically resonant frequency. The feature shall offer a Semi-Automatic program to simplify the setup.

697482A.GN1


e. VFD shall include an automatic acceleration and deceleration ramp-time function to prevent nuisance tripping and simplify startup.

f. In each programming setup, independent current limit settings, programmable between 50 percent and 110 percent of the drives output current rating, shall be provided.

g. PID parameter settings shall be adjustable while the VFD is operating, to aid in tuning the control loop at start up. The VFD will also be capable of simultaneously displaying set-point reference and feedback values with appropriate engineering units, as well as output frequency, output current, and run status while programming the PID function.

h. The VFD will include a “loss of follower" function to detect the loss of process feedback or reference signals with a live-zero value and a user-selectable choice of responses (go to set speed, min speed, max speed, stop, stop, and trip).

i. An integral motor alternation function shall be provided to enable the output of the drive to alternate between two motors. The alternation interval shall be user- programmable in hours. This function shall operate external relays as required to control the motor alternation sequence. A dwell time shall be integral to the function and can prevent damage to the motor contactors.

j. The VFD will include a user-selectable Reset function, which enables the selection of between zero and twenty restart attempts after any self-clearing fault condition (under-voltage, over-voltage, current limit, inverter overload, and motor overload), or the selection of an infinite number of restart attempts. The time between restart attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 600 seconds.

k. An automatic “on-delay” function may be selected from 0 to 120 seconds. The VFD will include a user-selectable Auto-Restart function that enables the VFD to power up in a running condition after a power loss, to prevent the need to manually reset and restart the VFD.

l. VFD shall catch a rotating motor operating either in forward or reverse at up to full speed.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Overall drive system operating data, including efficiencies, input currents, and power factors, at driven equipment actual load and rated system input voltage, at 0, 40, 60, 80, 100, and 110 percent of rated speed.

697482A.GN1


2. Individual and total harmonic content (voltage and current) reflected in system normal source supply at driven equipment actual load at 70 and 100 percent of rated speed at the incoming line terminals of the motor control centers MCC-2. Show that the computed valves of individual and total current and voltage harmonic distortion are below the specified limits.

3. Individual and total current and voltage harmonic content reflected in STANDBY power source, at driven equipment actual load at 70 and 100 percent of rated speed at the incoming line terminals of the motor control centers MCC-2. Show that the computed values of individual and total current and voltage harmonic distortion are below the specified limits.

4. AFD output pulse maximum peak voltage, pulse rise time and pulse rate of rise, including any justification for proposed deviation from specified values. Include motor manufacturer’s certification that motor insulation will withstand long-term overvoltages caused at motor terminals due to specified output pulse data or any proposed deviation from this data.

5. Data on the shelf life of “dc link” capacitor. 6. Complete system rating, including all nameplate data, continuous

operation load capability throughout speed range of 0 to 120 percent of rated speed.

7. Complete adjustable frequency controller rating coordinated with motor full load nameplate current rating; list any controller special features being supplied.

8. Controller, input line reactor, and output reactor (if applicable) dimensional drawings; information on size and location of space for incoming and outgoing conduit.

9. Maximum heat dissipation from enclosure. 10. Layout of controller face showing pushbuttons, switches, instruments,

indicating lights, etc. 11. Complete system operating description. 12. Complete system schematic (elementary) wiring diagrams. 13. Complete system interconnection diagrams between controller, drive

motor, and all related components or controls external to system, including wire numbers and terminal board point identification.

14. One-line diagram of system, including component ratings. 15. Description of diagnostic features being provided. 16. Descriptive literature for all control devices such as relays, selector

switches, contactors, timers, etc. 17. Itemized bill-of-materials listing all system components. 18. Specific description of provisions, such as filters and harmonic

suppression, being made to ensure proper system operation when system is supplied from standby engine generator specified in these Documents.

19. Provide information on PROFIBUS-DP interface with PLC.

697482A.GN1



1. Statement of Supplier qualifications. 2. Factory functional test reports. 3. Certified copy of test report for identical motor tested in accordance

with NEMA MG 1-12.53a and IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B, showing rated load, rated speed efficiency meeting or exceeding specified values; motors not as specified will be rejected.

4. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 5. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 6. Field test reports. 7. Manufacturer’s Certification of Proper Installation. 8. Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for a period

of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information.

9. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.



A. Supplier: Minimum 5 years’ experience in furnishing similar size and type adjustable frequency, controlled speed, drive systems.


A. Furnish for each drive unit:

1. Complete set of components likely to fail in normal service. 2. Plug-in subassemblies. 3. Printed circuit boards. 4. Potentiometers. 5. Integrated circuits. 6. One complete power bridge and one spare printed circuit card for each

modular, plug-in type card in controller.

1.07 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. The ambient operating temperature of the VFD shall be minus 10 degrees C to 50 degrees C (14 to 122 degrees F), with a 24-hour average not to exceed 45 degrees C. Storage temperatures shall be minus 13 degrees F (minus 25 degrees C) to 149/158 degrees F (65/70 degrees C).

B. 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

697482A.GN1


C. Elevation to 3,300 feet (1000 meters) without derating.

D. VFD's shall be rated for line voltage of 525 to 690V ac, 380 to 480V ac, or 200 to 240V ac; with plus 10 to minus 10 percent variations. Line frequency variation of plus or minus 2 percent shall be acceptable.

E. No side clearance shall be required for cooling of the units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Components and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:

1. Danfoss VLT AQUA Series. 2. No substitutions allowed.


A. Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 104 degrees F.

B. Storage Temperature: Minus 40 to 158 degrees F.

C. Humidity: 0 to 95 percent relative (noncondensing).

D. Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet.

E. Frequency Stability: Plus or minus 0.1 percent of maximum frequency.

F. Atmosphere: Corrosive.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Drive Units:

1. Incorporate a switching power supply operating from a dc bus, to produce a PWM output waveform simulating a sine wave and providing power loss ride through of 2 milliseconds at full load, full speed.

2. Current-limiting semiconductor fuses for protection of internal power semiconductors.

3. Employ a diode bridge rectifier providing a constant displacement power factor of 0.95 minimum at all operating speeds and loads.

4. Use transistors for output section, providing a minimum 97 percent drive efficiency at full speed, full load.

5. Employ dc power discharge circuit so that after removal of input power dc link capacitor voltage level will decay below 50 volts dc within 1 minute after de-energizing following NEMA CP 1 and NFPA 79. Design dc link capacitor for a MTBF of 5 years.

697482A.GN1


6. Operate with an open circuited output. 7. Input Voltage: 480V ac plus or minus 10 percent. 8. Output Voltage: 0 to 480 volts, three-phase, 0 to 66-Hz, minimum. 9. Maximum peak voltage of PWM AFD output pulse of 1,000 volts, with

pulse rise time of not less than 2 microseconds, and a maximum rate of rise of 500 volts per microsecond. Maximum frequency of PWM AFD output pulse (carrier) frequency of 3,000-Hz. Should magnitudes of these characteristics be more stressful to motor insulation than specified values, furnish insulation systems on the motors suitable for the proposed values.

10. Motor Audible Noise Level: When operating throughout speed range of PWM AFD, no more than 3 dBA above that designated in NEMA MG 1 for same motor operated at constant speed with a 60-Hz supply voltage.

11. Short-Time Overload Capacity: 125 percent of rated load in rms current for 1 minute following full load, full speed operation.

12. Equipment Short-Circuit Rating: Suitable for connection to system with maximum source three-phase, bolted fault, short-circuit available of 35,000 amps rms symmetrical at 480 volts.

13. Furnish drives with output current-limiting reactors mounted within equipment enclosure.

14. Diagnostics: Comprehensive for drive adjustment and troubleshooting: a. Memory battery backup; 100-hour minimum during a power loss. b. Status messages will not stop drive from running but will prevent

it from starting. c. Fault Condition Messages and History: First fault protection

function to be activated, ability to store six successive fault occurrences in order. Minimum faults numerically: 1) Overcurrent (time and instantaneous). 2) Overvoltage. 3) Undervoltage (dc and ac). 4) Overtemperature (drive, motor windings, motor bearing,

pump bearing). 5) Serial communication fault. 6) Short-circuit/ground fault (motor and drive). 7) Motor stalled. 8) Semiconductor fault. 9) Microprocessor fault. 10) Single-phase voltage condition.

15. Drive Protection: a. Fast-acting semiconductor fuses. b. Overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent trip. c. Dc undervoltage protection, 70 percent dropout. d. Dc overvoltage protection, 130 percent pickup. e. Overtemperature, drive, inverter, converter, and dc link

components. f. Overtemperature, motor, and pump.

697482A.GN1


g. Single-phase protection. h. Reset overcurrent protection (manual or automatic reset). i. Active current limit/torque limit protection. j. Semiconductor fault protection. k. Short-circuit/ground fault protection. l. Serial communication fault protection. m. Microprocessor fault. n. Surge protection for transient overvoltage (6,000 volts, 80 joule

surge, tested per IEEE C62.41). o. Visual display of specific fault conditions.

16. Operational Features: a. Use manufacturer’s standard unless otherwise indicated. b. Sustained power loss. c. Momentary power loss. d. Power interruption. e. Power loss ride through (0.1 second). f. Start on the fly. g. Electronic motor overload protection. h. Stall protection. i. Slip compensation. j. Automatic restart after power return (ability to enable/disable

function). k. Critical frequency lockout (three selectable points minimum, by

1.5-Hz steps in 10-Hz bands, to prevent resonance of system). l. Drive maintenance system software for complete programming

and diagnostics. m. Ground fault protection, drive, and motor. n. Operate with no motor connected to output terminals.

B. Rectifier: Three-phase 18-pulse (larger 100hp), full wave diode bridge rectifier to provide a constant dc voltage to the drive’s dc bus.

C. Furnish series choke and capacitors on dc bus to reduce ripple in rectifier output and to reduce harmonic distortion reflected into incoming power feeders.

D. Controller: Microprocessor-controller PWM inverter to convert to dc voltage to variable voltage, adjustable frequency three-phase ac output. The output voltage shall vary proportionally with the frequency to maintain a constant ratio of volts to hertz up to 60-Hz. Above 60-Hz, the voltage shall remain constant, with the drive operating in a constant horsepower output mode. Provide filters in the inverter output circuit to minimize the impact of fast rise time switching pulses associated with PWM drives.

697482A.GN1


E. Conformal Coating Requirements: All electronic circuit boards and components shall have a UL recognized conformal coating that meets the Military’s MIL-I-46058C specification. The coating shall provide for moisture and environmental protection. All electronic circuit boards shall be impervious to moisture, fungus, dust and corrosive atmospheres such as Hydrogen Sulfide and other environmental contaminants. Terminal pins and connectors shall be masked off such that the coating shall not impede operation. The coating shall be applied to both sides and all edges of the electronic circuit boards.

F. Enclosure:

1. NEMA 250, Type 12, freestanding, enclosure for mounting against wall, completely front accessible, and hinged doors. Properly sized to dissipate heat generated by controller within limits of specified operating conditions (including ambient temperature and ambient airflow). Enclosure not to exceed dimensions shown on Drawings.

2. Furnish drive complete with cable termination compartment door interlocked main circuit breaker, defeatable (lockable in the open position), emergency stop pushbutton, alphanumeric keypad and display, and operator’s controls. Components and controls specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

3. Wire drive from below and above for power and control wiring. 4. Size forced-ventilation for periodic operation to cool each unit with

maximum room ambient temperature of 95 degrees F. Furnish redundant fans such that if one fan fails remaining fans furnish adequate ventilation for the drive when operating at maximum capacity. Furnish filters on ventilation intakes.

5. Bundle stranded copper wiring neatly with nylon tie wraps or with continuous plastic spiral binding; label each terminal for permanent identification of leads; identify each wire at each end with imprinted mylar adhesive-back wire markers; incorporate in as-installed wiring diagrams for wire and terminal numbers shown; wiring across door hinges use 19-strand, NEMA WC-57 Class C stranding looped for proper twist rather than bending at hinge; wire connections internal to panels by crimp-on terminal types. For multiple enclosure systems, complete interconnection wiring with gasketed enclosure openings for wiring; multipoint plug receptacles for any control wiring crossing equipment shipping splits.

6. Selector switches, indicating lights, potentiometers, instruments, protective devices, major system components, etc., identified by means of mechanically attached, engraved, laminated nameplates.

697482A.GN1


G. Operator Interface:

1. Controls: Mount drive local control on front door of enclosure and include control switch and membrane type keypad for the following operator functions: a. Start (when in local mode). b. Stop (when in local mode). c. Speed increase (when in local mode). d. Speed decrease (when in local mode). e. Parameter mode selection (recall programmed parameters). f. LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE control selection (in remote, furnish for

remote RUN command and speed increase/decrease via PROFIBUS-DP communication interface).

g. Fault reset, manual for all faults (except loss of ac voltage which is automatic upon return).

h. RUN/preset speed. i. Parameter lock (password or key switch lockout of changes to

parameters). j. Start disable (key switch or programmed code).

2. 120 volts, single-phase, 60-Hz circuits for control power and operator controls from internal control power transformer. Furnish power for motor space heaters rated 120 volts. Switch motor space heater circuits on when drive is not running.

3. Arrange component and circuit such that failure of any single component cannot cause cascading failure(s) of any other component(s).

4. Alphanumeric Display: During normal operation and routine test, the following parameters shall be available: a. Motor current (percent of motor full load current). b. Motor torque (percent of motor full load torque). c. Output frequency (Hertz). d. Output voltage. e. Running time. f. Local/remote indicator. g. Status of digital inputs and outputs. h. Analog input and output values. i. Output motor current per leg. j. All test points.

5. Adjustable Parameters: Set drive operating parameters and indicate in a numeric form. Potentiometers may not be used for parameter adjustment. Minimum setup parameters available: a. Frequency range, minimum, maximum. b. Adjustable acceleration/deceleration rate. c. Volts per Hertz (field weakening point). d. Active current limit/torque limit, 0 to 140 percent of drive rating. e. Adjustable voltage boost (IR compensation). f. Preset speed (adjustable, preset operating point).

697482A.GN1


g. Provision for adjustment of minimum and maximum pump speed to be furnished as function of 4 to 20 mA remote speed signal.

6. Control Diagrams: For control logic and interlock requirements, see applicable control diagrams shown on Contract Drawings.

H. Signal Interface: Wire from field devices shall be hard-wired into AFD, and CP-210.

1. Digital Input: High temperature contact closure input from field mounted motor temperature monitoring relay.

2. Communication Interface: All standalone drives shall interface with PLC CP-210.

1. Coordinate data exchange from the drives to the PLC CP-210 with PICS Subcontractor. a. Data noted on Instrumentation and Control Legend Sheet 1,

drawing 001-G-114, shall be mapped into user map variables to optimize communications. The selection shall be made cooperatively with the PICS Supplier, see section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Controls. Selection may be dictated by PICS functional requirement.

b. Data noted on motor control diagrams shall be mapped into user map variables to optimize communications.

c. Data to be mapped on each device is displayed on motor control diagrams. 1) Data found in multiple motors shall be mapped to the same

location in user map variables. For example, the motor running status shall appear in the same mapping location for all motors.

d. Provide PIC subcontractor with the network address of all device and mapping of data in the device at least two week prior to factory testing of the MCC. Mapping shall use tags used on motor control diagrams. For example, LSL for level switch low.

I. Provide output reactor or dV/Dt filter limit voltage spikes at the motor as recommended by manufacturer and/or as shown on the Drawings.

J. Accessories:

1. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location.

2. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds. 3. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment

manufacturer, and as specified in Section 05 50 0, Metal Fabrications.

697482A.GN1


2.04 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Enclosure:

1. Primer: One coat of rust-inhibiting coating. 2. Finish:

a. Interior: One coat white enamel. b. Exterior: One coat manufacturer’s standard gray enamel or

TIA/EIA 359-1, No. 61.

2.05 PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

A. For additional requirements, refer to Contract Drawings.


A. Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function.

B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test one control panels identical to that furnished.

C. Record test data for report.

D. Functional Test: Perform manufacturer’s standard.

E. Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low Voltage AC Induction Motors.

F. Using a laptop with PROFIBUS interface, verify and document successful data exchange between laptop and drive; for example:

1. Issue RUN command and speed commands from laptop and observe response to drive HMI.

G. Observe ON status and speed indication feedback at the laptop.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.


A. Functional Test:

1. Conduct on each controller.

697482A.GN1


2. Inspect controller for electrical supply termination connections, interconnections, proper installation, and quiet operation.

3. Vibration Test: Complete assembly, consisting of motor, load, and flexible shafting, connected and in normal operation, shall not develop amplitudes of vibration exceeding limits recommended by current edition of Hydraulic Institute Standards. Where loads and drives are separated by intermediate flexible shafting, measure vibration both at top motor bearing and at two points on top pump bearing, 90 degrees apart.

4. Record test data for report.

B. Performance Test:

1. Conduct on each controller. 2. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions. 3. Test for continuous 12-hour period without malfunction. 4. Demonstrate performance by operating the continuous period while

varying the application load, as the input conditions allow, to verify system performance.

5. Record test data for report. 6. With plant load connected to normal utility source, measure the

following to show parameters within specified limits: a. Total and individual current harmonic distortion (up to and

including 35th harmonic) at Incoming Line Terminals of Motor Control Center MCC-2 under following load conditions: 1) AFDs running at full load and half load. 2) Half of the specified AFDs running at full load and half

load. b. Power factor at input side of each drive. Documented verification

that power factor is maintained at 95 percent as speed of drive goes down from 100 percent to 33 percent.

c. Individual and total voltage harmonic distortion at Incoming Line Terminals of Motor Control Center MCC-2, under following conditions: 1) AFDs running at full load and half load. 2) Half of specified AFDs running at full load and half load.

7. With plant load connected to standby power sources, measure the following to show parameters within specified limits: a. Total and individual current harmonic distortion (up to and

including 35th harmonic) at Incoming Line Terminals of Motor Control Centers MCC-2, under following load conditions: 1) AFDs running at full load and half load. 2) Half of the specified AFDs running at full load and half

load.

697482A.GN1


b. Power factor at input side of each drive. Documented verification that power factor is maintained at 95 percent as speed of drive goes down from 100 percent to 33 percent.

c. Individual and total voltage harmonic distortion at Incoming Line Terminals of Motor Control Centers MCC-2 under following conditions: 1) AFDs running at full load and half load. 2) Half of specified AFDs running at full load and half load.

C. Test Equipment:

1. Provide diagnostic plug-in test card complete with instructions, multi-position selector switch, and meters or built-in diagnostic control panel or ROM-based processor for monitoring ac, dc, and digital signals to assist in troubleshooting and startup of drive.

2. Use Dranete/BMI, Model No. 658, disturbance analyzer or equivalent instrument to document results.

3. The test setup for the disturbance analyzer shall include any PTs, CTs, and other auxiliaries required to properly record harmonic disturbance data.

D. Performance Test:

1. Conduct on each controller. 2. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions. 3. Test for continuous 12-hour period without malfunction. 4. Demonstrate performance by operating the continuous period while

varying the application load, as the input conditions allow, to verify system performance.

5. Record test data for report.

3.03 MANUFACTURERS’ SERVICES

A. Manufacturer’s Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:

1. 1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion of

Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. 1/2 person-day for pre-startup classroom or Site training. 4. 1/2 person-day for facility startup. 5. 1/2 person-day for post-startup training. Training shall not commence

until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been reviewed by Engineer.

B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET FEBRUARY 8, 2019 26 32 13.13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 32 13.13 DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Covers the work necessary to furnish, install, connect, and test once completely factory-assembled skid mounted diesel engine generator set with a minimum Stand-By rating of 800 kW / 1,000 kVA for Three Mile Creek Severe Weather Attenuation Tank in Mobile, Alabama. The engine generator set shall be complete and inclusive of an engine control panel and a weatherproof marine grade aluminum sound attenuated enclosure, and landing with steps (ladder) as shown on 80-E-201. The engine generator set and enclosure, and subbase tank shall be skid mounted and designed to rest directly on a concrete pad.

B. See Section 26 36 23, Automatic Transfer Switch for interface requirements.

C. See Section 26 29 23, Low Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive for power and interface requirements

D. See P&ID Drawing 008-N-601 for additional control and instrumentation requirements.

1.02 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Electrical Subcontractor (EC) shall be responsible for furnishing and installing the complete engine generator system described herein and shown on the Drawings. The EC shall be responsible for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, and coordinating the interface to piping connections and other electrical equipment.

B. The Electrical Subcontractor (EC) shall be responsible for furnishing, installing, and testing the Service Entrance Rated Main Breaker, Automatic Transfer Switch as specified in Section 26 36 23, Automatic Transfer Switch, and Section 26 24 29, Motor Control Center for coordinating its operation with the engine generator set.

C. The Electrical Subcontractor (EC) shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all incidental materials not specifically shown on the Drawings or described in these Specifications, and for the testing required for the complete and operational system as specified.

697482A.GN1

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET PW\DEN003\697482 26 32 13.13 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

D. The Electrical Subcontractor (EC) is responsible for supplying the diesel engine generator set, the sound-attenuated enclosure, the engine control panel, and landing with steps (ladder) as specified herein. All equipment and materials shall be completely integrated as a single unit.


A. The engine generator system shall be comprised of a completely wired and operating system to automatically or manually start one diesel engine generator unit, with provisions for full system protection as outlined in this Specification.

B. The generator system will be nameplate rated as a standby power source as required during emergency conditions. All protection and control systems required to meet this requirement shall be provided. The protection and control scheme proposed by the Manufacturer shall be subject to the Contractor and Owner's review and approval.

C. The new generator set shall be a totally assembled package, unit mounted on its own rigid base, supplied with spring type vibration isolators as recommended by the engine generator manufacturer. They shall be free of harmful critical speeds and torsional vibrations within the operating range of speed and capacity.

D. The generator set shall include, but not be limited to, the diesel engine, generator, generator circuit breaker, battery system, control system, unit instrumentation, sound-insulated weather-proof marine grade aluminum enclosure, stainless steel exhaust silencer, and electrical accessories as specified herein.

E. The PLC based Automatic Transfer Switch Control requirements are specified in Section 26 36 23, Automatic Transfer Switch.

F. The engine generator system is required to supply a significant nonlinear load (Adjustable Frequency Drives) as shown on the single line diagram. Provide the generator with features that allow satisfactory operation in presence of high harmonic content. Harmonic content may range between 50 percent and 75 percent of the total demand.

G. The generator shall be designed to start and maintain the Plant’s priority loads specified on Supplement 3, Project sizing report, without exceeding the specified voltage drop limits.

697482A.GN1


H. The fully integrated mechanical and electrical components that constitute this system shall be designed to enable either a fully automatic mode of operation from the ATS or a fully manual system that can be started, governed, and protected with safety shutdown for low oil pressure, high water or oil temperature, over-speed and other indicated conditions.

1.04 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): A335/A335M, Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service.

2. California Air Resources Board (CARB). 3. Code of Federal Regulations (CRF): Title 40 Volume 18, Control of

Emissions from New and In-Use Non-road Compression-Ignition Engines.

4. International Organization for Standardization (DIN/ISO): 9001, Quality Management Systems—Fundamentals and Vocabulary.

5. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts

Maximum). b. MG 1, Motors and Generators.

6. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 404, Recommended Practice for Installing Generator Sets.

7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 37, Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and

Gas Turbines. b. 70, National Electric Code. c. 110, Emergency and Standby Power Systems.

8. SAE International (SAE): J1074, Engine Sound Level Measurement. 9. UL:

a. 142, Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids.

b. 508, Industrial Control Equipment. c. 1236, Battery Chargers for Charging Engine-Starter Batteries. d. 2085, Protected Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and

Combustible Liquids. e. 2200, Stationary Engine Generator.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


1. Dimensioned outline drawing showing plan and elevations of engine generator set and drive system.

697482A.GN1


2. Paragraph by paragraph specification compliance statement, describing differences between specified and proposed equipment.

3. Engine and generator weight, and anchoring requirements. 4. Catalog information and technical description; include materials for

block, heads, valves, rings, cylinders, pistons, crankshaft, and major bearings and wear surfaces.

5. Complete list of accessories provided. 6. Performance curves showing engine efficiency (fuel consumed per kWh

output), gross fuel consumption rate, and kW output at design rated output, one-half load, and one-quarter load. Account for design altitude, temperature corrections, and engine parasitic loads.

7. Transient and sub-transient reactances per unit. 8. Output waveform and telephone interference factor (TIF). 9. Circuit breaker data, including make model, catalog number, settings,

and time current curves and enclosure size. 10. Cable termination lug data sheets. 11. Control panel instrument identification inscriptions. 12. Sample guarantee. 13. Electrical schematic and wiring diagrams for the following:

a. Generator control panel. b. Main generator. c. Voltage regulator. d. Battery charging system. e. Governing system. f. Interconnection wiring diagram for automatic transfer switch

specified in Section 26 36 23, Automatic Transfer Switch. g. Enclosed electrical components.

14. Engine generator set motor starting capability and percent voltage dip curve.

15. Block heater size and voltage. 16. Jacket water heater size and voltage. 17. Subbase tank size and dimensions. 18. Noise data for enclosed engine generator at 50 percent, 75 percent, and

full load. 19. Exhaust system silencer pipe supports. 20. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by




2. Generator set manufacturer qualifications. 3. Generator set UL 2200 certification documentation or independent

certification.

697482A.GN1


4. Certification, copies of analyses, or test reports demonstrating appropriate vibration analysis and design in all modes.

5. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

6. Certified Factory Test Report. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data. 8. Description of parts and service availability. 9. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with

Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services. 10. Special guarantee.



1. Provide Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, provide material and equipment labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Provide materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL in conformance with those standards documented with an applied UL listing mark.

B. Manufacturer Special Requirements:

1. Generator Set: Listed to UL 2200 or submitted to an independent third party certification process to verify compliance as installed.

2. Generator Set Manufacturer: Certified to ISO 9001 with third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO 9001.

3. A complete, engine-generator package shall be the product of one manufacturer, hereinafter referred to as the "Manufacturer," who has been regularly engaged in the production of complete generating systems for at least 5 years. All components shall have been designed to achieve optimum physical and performance compatibility with each other and prototype tested to prove integrated design capability. The complete system shall have been factory fabricated, assembled, and production tested.

697482A.GN1


1.07 WARRANTY/MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

A. A complete engine-generator package including control equipment shall be covered by the system manufacturer for a period of 5 years after acceptance of the system by the Owner. This warranty shall cover all materials provided, labor, and miscellaneous disposal items. Warrantee/Maintenance Agreement shall include quarterly maintenance checks, yearly preventive maintenance checks, and a 4-hour load bank test at the end of the agreement.

B. The system Manufacturer shall provide complete contract information to the Owner for purchasing an extended warranty of a 10-year duration.

C. The system Manufacturer shall provide complete contract information on extended maintenance agreements renewable on a 1-year basis that would be in addition to the maintenance requirements contained herein.

D. The costs for services described in Paragraphs B and C, will be by construction Change Order or by separate Contract at the Owner's discretion.


A. Fire Extinguisher:

1. A fire extinguisher shall be provided and shall be portable, multi-purpose dry chemical, 10-pound charge, complete with wall mounting weatherproof cabinet manufactured for the purpose, and shall be permanently mounted near but not on the generator in a capacious and readily accessible location.

2. Fire extinguisher shall be U.S. Coast Guard rated for 2A20BC duty.

B. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and special tools:

Item Quantity

Diesel fuel line filter elements 3 complete sets

Lubricating oil filter elements with gasket

3 complete sets

Air cleaner filter element 1 complete set

Cooling fan drive belt (if applicable)

2 complete sets

Hydrometer 1 each

Two-pronged battery voltmeter 1 each

697482A.GN1


Item Quantity

Spare fuses, if used in control panel

1 complete set

Spare indicating lamps (if applicable)

4 each type used

Touch up paint 1 quart each color used

Special tools required to maintain or dismantle engine generator set

1 complete set

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials and equipment specified in this section shall be products of:

1. Kohler Power Series. 2. Caterpillar. 3. Cummins.


A. Ambient Temperature at Air Intake: 104 degrees F maximum.

B. Ambient Temperature at Engine Generator Set: 104 degrees F maximum.

2.03 GENERAL

A. Ratings:

1. Operate at 1,800 rpm. 2. Rated at 1000kW / 1250kVA at 0.8 PF, based on specified service

conditions. 3. Voltage: 480 / 277 volts, three-phase, four-wire, 60-Hz. 4. Rated based on standby service.

B. Emissions:

1. Engines: Meet emission requirements specified in 40 CFR Chapter I Part 89 for off-highway Internal Combustion (IC) engines.

C. Vibration Design:

1. Use vibration analytical techniques to determine shaft critical speeds, and to develop bearing design and shaft balancing to mitigate vibration.

2. Apply torsional analysis and design to mitigate torsional vibration.

697482A.GN1


3. Engine and generator, individually, shall not exhibit vibration in any plane exceeding 10 mils at continuous rating point, when measured at attachment points to common steel subbase.

2.04 ENGINE

A. General:

1. Manufacturer’s standard design, unless otherwise specified. 2. Engine parts designed with adequate strength for specified duty.

B. Type:

1. Diesel Cycle, 4-stroke type with unit mounted radiator and fan cooling. 2. Minimum Displacement: As recommended by generator manufacturer. 3. Minimum Number of Cylinders: Twelve.

C. Starting System:

1. Type: Automatic, using 12-volt or 24-volt battery-driven starter acting in response to control panel.

2. Starter: Capable of three complete cranking cycles without overheating. 3. Batteries:

a. Sized as recommended by engine manufacturer. b. Lead-acid type. c. Capable of providing 15 seconds minimum of cranking current at

0 degree C and three complete 15-second cranking cycles at 40 degrees C.

d. Housed in acid-resistant frame isolated from engine generator main frame.

e. Located such that maintenance and inspection of engine is not hindered.

f. Complete with battery cables and connectors. 4. Battery Charger:

a. UL 1236 listed and labeled. b. 10-amp automatic float, taper and equalize charge type, with plus

or minus 1 percent voltage regulation over a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage variation.

c. Temperature compensated to operate over an ambient range of minus 30 degrees C to 50 degrees C.

d. Located by generator manufacturer in automatic transfer switch, generator control panel, or wall mounted in generator enclosure.

e. Include: 1) Ammeter and voltmeter. 2) Fused ac input and dc output. 3) Power ON pilot light.

697482A.GN1


4) AC failure relay and light. 5) Low and high dc voltage alarm relay and light.

f. Alarm relay dry contacts rated 4 amps at 120V ac. g. Wire battery charger status and alarm contacts back to generator

control panel, terminate and identify contacts.

D. Fuel System:

1. Engine driven, mechanical, positive displacement fuel pump. 2. Fuel filter with replaceable spin-on canister element. 3. Provide fuel cooler, suitable for operation of generator set at full rated

load in ambient temperature specified if required for operation due to design of engine and installation.

E. Governing System:

1. Electro-mechanical or electro-hydraulic type. 2. Regulates speed as required to hold generating frequency within

tolerable limits and within 5 percent of nominal design speed. 3. Accessories:

a. Manual speed control device. b. Positive overspeed trip switch.

F. Jacket Water Cooling System:

1. Radiator: a. Consisting of jacket water pump, fan assembly, fan guard, and

duct flange outlet. b. Cooling System: Rated for full load operation in 122 degrees F

(50 degrees C) ambient as measured at alternator air inlet. c. Fan: Suitable for use in a system with 0.5 in H2O restriction. d. Sized based on a core temperature that is 20 degrees F higher than

rated operation temperature. 2. Engine Thermostat: As recommended by manufacturer to regulate

engine water temperature. 3. Jacket Water Heater:

a. Suitable for operation on 120–volt, single-phase, 60-Hz current. b. Maintain engine water temperature at 120 degrees F with an

ambient temperature of 50 degrees F. c. Thermostatically controlled.

4. Engine Cooling Liquid: Fill cooling system with a 50/50-ethylene glycol/water mixture prior to shipping.

G. Lubrication System:

1. Type: Full-pressure.

697482A.GN1


2. Accessories: a. Pressure switch to initiate shutdown on low oil pressure. b. Oil filter with replaceable element. c. Bayonet type oil level stick. d. Valved oil drain extension.

3. Oil Cooling System: Water-cooled heat exchanger utilizing jacket water.

H. Exhaust System:

1. Muffler: Rated as recommended by generator manufacturer to meet noise requirements in self-contained units specified under Article Sound Attenuation.

2. Wrap exposed length of exhaust pipe and silencer with thermal insulating wrap.

3. Exhaust Pipe: ASTM A53, ASTM A106, standard wall, with fittings selected to match piping materials.

4. Pipe Connections: Welded. 5. Engine Connection:

a. Flanged, flexible, corrugated, Type 321 stainless steel expansion fitting, specifically suited for diesel exhaust service.

b. Length as required for flexibility and expansion in piping arrangement shown on Drawings.

I. Air Intake System: Equip with dry type air cleaner with filter service (restriction) indicator.

2.05 GENERATOR

A. General:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1. 2. Synchronous type with 2/3 pitch, revolving field, drip-proof

construction, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan. 3. Stator Windings:

a. Skewed for smooth voltage waveform. b. Reconnectable, 12 lead.

4. Overspeed Capability: 125 percent. 5. Waveform Deviation from Sine Wave: 5 percent maximum. 6. Telephone Interference Factor: 50 maximum. 7. Total Harmonic Current and Voltage Distortion: 5 percent maximum,

measured at generator main circuit breaker.

697482A.GN1


B. Insulation System:

1. Class H, with a maximum rise of 155 degrees C over 40 degree C ambient in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

2. Vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI).

C. Excitation System:

1. Field brushless type or permanent magnet generator (PMG) exciter. 2. PMG and Controls: Capable of providing regulated current, at a rate of

300 percent of nameplate current, to a single-phase or three-phase fault for 10 seconds.

D. Voltage Regulation:

1. Solid state, three-phase sensing type. 2. Adjustable output voltage level to plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Provisions for proper voltage regulation for existing or future adjustable

frequency drives as part of generator load.

E. Voltage and Frequency Regulation Performance:

1. Steady State Voltage Regulation: Less than plus or minus 1 percent from no load to continuous rating point.

2. NEMA MG 1 Defined Transient Voltage Dip: a. Less than 20 percent at rapid application of rated load. b. Recovery to rated voltage and frequency within 2 seconds

following initial load application. 3. Steady State Frequency Regulation: Plus or minus 1.5-Hz overload

range.

F. Short Circuit Capabilities: Sustain 300 percent of rated current for 10 seconds for external three-phase bolted fault without exceeding rated temperatures.

G. Main Circuit Breaker:

1. Type: Molded Case. 2. Current Rating: 1200A. 3. Interrupt Rating: 35,000 amps RMS symmetrical at 480 volts. 4. Short Time Rating: 35,000 amps RMS symmetrical. 5. Compression lugs for all feeder conductors including neutral and

ground. 6. Trips:

a. Thermal-magnetic with inverse time characteristics and adjustable magnetic pickup.

b. Solid state, RMS sensing.

697482A.GN1


c. Adjustable Functions: 1) Long-time current pickup. 2) Long-time delay. 3) Normal range instantaneous short-time pickup. 4) Short-time delay with I2t function. 5) Ground fault pickup. 6) Ground fault delay.

7. Enclosure: a. Rating: NEMA 250, Type 12. b. Mounted with vibration isolation from engine generator set.

8. Surge Protective Devices: Three-phase capacitors and arresters mounted in terminal compartment.

9. Oversize enclosure to accommodate multiple parallel feeder conductors.

2.06 BASEPLATE

A. Mount engine generator set on a rigid common steel base frame.

B. Stiffen base frame to minimize deflections.

2.07 INTEGRAL SUBBASE FUEL TANK

A. General:

1. Full load operation of generator set for 48 hours. 2. UL 142 listed and labeled. 3. Installation: In compliance with NFPA 37. 4. Double-walled, steel construction including the following features:

a. Emergency tank and basin vents. b. Mechanical level gauge. c. Fuel supply and return lines, connected to generator set with

flexible fuel lines as recommended by engine manufacturer and in compliance to UL 2200 and NFPA 37 requirements.

d. Leak detection provisions, wired to generator set control for local and remote alarm indication.

e. High and low level float switches to indicate fuel level. Wire switches to generator control for local and remote indication of fuel level.

f. Basin drain. g. Integral lifting provisions.

2.08 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Performance: Meet code requirements specified in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

697482A.GN1


B. Provide vibration isolators, spring/pad type.

C. Include seismic restraints if required by Site location.

2.09 AUTOMATIC LOAD TRANSFER CONTROL

A. Provide automatic run controls suitable for remote interface and control by automatic transfer switch. Engine generator set shall start and run upon closure of a remote dry contact provided in Section 26 36 23, Automatic Transfer Switch.

2.10 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Control Panel:

1. Rating: NEMA 250, Type 12. 2. Material: 316 stainless steel. 3. Instrument Identification: Face label or engraved, black, laminated

plastic nameplate with white 1/4-inch-high letters, attached with Type 422 stainless steel screws.

4. UL 508 listed. 5. Tested to meet or exceed IEEE 587 requirements for voltage surge

resistance. 6. Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor based. 7. Control Panel: Designed and built by generator manufacturer to provide

operating, monitoring, and control functions for generator set. 8. Control Panel Mounting Height: 6 feet 6 inches maximum above where

personnel will access panel, modify mounting height if a sub-base fuel tank is used.

B. Instrumentation:

1. Type: Suitable for engine-mounted vibration environment. 2. Mounting: Nonshock mounted. 3. Alarm and Signal Contacts: Rated 5 amps at 120V ac, dry. 4. Fault Indication Lamps: Push-to-test type. 5. Meters: Digital with analog display, plus or minus 2 percent accuracy.

C. Operator Controls and Indicators:

1. HANDCRANK/STOP/AUTO/ENGINE TEST selector switch. 2. Generator voltage adjustment. 3. Voltmeter PHASE SELECTOR switch. 4. Ammeter PHASE SELECTOR switch. 5. Voltmeter. 6. Ammeter.

697482A.GN1


7. Kilo-Watts (kW). 8. Percent kW. 9. Power Factor. 10. FREQUENCY meter. 11. Engine OIL PRESSURE indicator. 12. Engine jacket WATER TEMPERATURE indicator. 13. Engine SPEED indicator (RPM). 14. Engine OIL TEMPERATURE indicator. 15. RUNNING TIME indicator. 16. DC battery voltage. 17. Emergency Stop button.

D. Alarm Indicators with Manual Pushbutton RESET:

1. Low oil pressure. 2. High jacket water temperature. 3. Engine overspeed. 4. Engine overcrank. 5. Low/high dc voltage.

E. External Interfaces:

1. Furnish a single, common DPDT relay output upon occurrence of alarm condition.

2. Output: Dry contact rated 5 amps at 120V ac. 3. Accept remote dry start contact closure from automatic transfer switch,

rated 10 amps at 32V dc.

F. Functional Requirements:

1. LCD text display of alarm/event descriptions. 2. Re-cranking Lockout: When engine fires, starting control shall

automatically disconnect cranking control to prevent re-cranking for a preset period of time after engine stop.

3. Over-cranking Lockout: Initiate after four cranking cycles of 10 seconds on and 10 seconds off or provide continuous cranking cycle with crank time limiter.

4. Cooldown timer, adjustable from 5 minutes to 60 minutes. 5. Alarms:

a. Low coolant level. b. Low fuel level. c. Low battery voltage d. High battery voltage. e. Battery charger failure.

6. Engine shutdown upon any of the following conditions: a. Engine overspeed.

697482A.GN1


b. Emergency stop button depressed. c. High jacket water temperature alarm setpoint and shutdown

setpoint. d. Low oil pressure alarm setpoint and shutdown setpoint.

7. Air Inlet Damper Opening: a. Upon engine start sequence initiation, a normally closed, dry

contact, rated 5 amps at 120V ac, from engine start circuit shall open to provide a signal to open air inlet dampers.

b. Air Inlet Dampers: Fail open.

G. Special Requirements: Mount battery charger instrumentation on face of control panel and match generator instrumentation.

H. Power Requirements: 120 volts, single-phase.

2.11 SOUND ATTENUATED WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE

A. Provide a walk-in sound attenuated weatherproof (not "weather protective") generator set enclosure, for the engine generator set, complete in every detail and requiring no additional in-field modifications or assembly except where specifically allowed by these specifications. The enclosure is to be accurately dimensioned to be in compliance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) for clearance of all specified items included therein, and all applicable fire codes for a structure and application of this type. The enclosure and landings with steps (ladder) shall be designed and signed/sealed by a Professional Structural Engineer (P.E) registered in the State of Alabama.

B. Dimensions: Enclosure dimensions shall be such that a minimum of 36 inches along each side of the engine and 48 inches in front of the generator control panel and circuit breaker shall be kept as walking clearance for maintenance and operating personnel. The height of the enclosure shall provide a minimum of 6-foot 8-inch head room along the interior access.

C. Design: The enclosure shall be fabricated from anodized marine grade (6063) aluminum alloy and Type 316 stainless steel. A minimum thickness of 14-gauge shall be used for all component parts. The roof of the enclosure shall be strengthened to support the exhaust silencer recommended by the manufacturer for this application. The enclosure shall have a wind load rating of 150 mph.

697482A.GN1


D. Doors: All doors on the enclosure shall be located to allow ease of maintenance on the generator set and allow access to instruments, controls, engine gauges, etc. The doors shall be minimum 36 inches wide and fitted with stainless steel hinges with stainless steel pins. Nylon wear bushings shall also be provided. Personnel door shall be fully gasketed to form a weathertight perimeter seal. A three-point latching assembly with interior latch release and exterior padlocking provisions shall also be provided together with stainless steel, flush mounted, adjustable key latches.

E. Enclosure Access: Provide a fixed 4-foot by 4-foot landing with steps (ladder) on each side of the landing running parallel to the enclosure at each door for easy inspection and entrance into the enclosure.

F. Louvers: All louvers shall have sufficient free area to allow for 120 percent of the total engine/generator cooling air requirements used in this application. Designed to prevent the entrance of rain when the unit is operating and the wind direction is at 90 degrees to the air intake at 150 mph. Louvers shall be of all aluminum fixed blade construction with insect screen, impact rated for 150 mph wind speed, as manufactured by Ruskin or Cesca. The combined air inlet and discharge system shall be designed to maintain a combined total static pressure drop/air restriction of no more than 0.15 inch of water gauge through the enclosure at full rated load.

G. Details: Provide stainless steel mounting brackets for the exhaust silencer specified. In addition, a stainless steel tail pipe extension terminating in a horizontal plane, cut at a 45-degree angle and fitted with a bird screen shall also be supplied. All components of the enclosure shall be assembled utilizing 0.375-inch minimum stainless steel bolts, nuts, and lock washers. In addition, watertight neoprene washers shall be used on all roof bolts.

H. Finish: White.

I. Sound Attenuation (Minimum 30 dB reduction): The entire enclosure including the louvered openings shall have sound attenuation material mechanically attached to the interior surfaces of the unit. Sound absorbing material shall be held in place by a perforated metal liner, painted white, to form a removable section easily inspected by maintenance personnel. The sound attenuation material and fastening system shall apply to the enclosure roof as well as side panels and doors, and shall consist of sound insulation fiberglass covered by sound insulating foam. The louvered openings shall be equipped with sound attenuating tubes, baffles, or hoods as required to meet the specified air flow and decibel ratings noted herein. The sound rating of the unit shall not exceed 85 db at 15 feet from any point of the enclosure when operating at full load.

697482A.GN1


J. Internal Wiring: All wiring within each enclosure shall be in aluminum conduits specifically manufactured for electrical use. All connections at the generator set shall be flexible, and all shall be provided and installed prior to shipment to the installation site.

K. Interior Lighting (DC): A battery-operated light deriving its power from other than the engine cranking batteries shall be installed in a strategic location within each enclosure and shall be controlled by a switch located by one of the doors. The light shall be large enough to provide illumination in an emergency situation to both the instrument control panel and the engine cranking battery. The switch controlling this light shall be a wind-up timer type which automatically shuts off after a preset interval not to exceed one hour. A means to automatically charge the emergency light battery shall be included.

L. Interior Lighting (AC): Provide a minimum of six LED luminaries with 4-foot long impact-resistant polycarbonate, fully-gasketed clear polycarbonate lens, 120-volt, electronic LED driver(10 percent THD), 4,000 lumens output, 400k, self-contained emergency battery pack, and UL listed for wet locations (Lithonia VAP LED series or equal). The Luminaries shall be strategically located on both sides of the generator set to provide a minimum of 40 foot-candles (fc) of uniform light throughout the enclosure. They shall be ceiling mounted and parallel to the length of the unit, properly secured against harmful vibrations. Two 3-way light switches shall operate all of the luminaries and shall be located on the inside on the enclosure adjacent to the enclosure doors. The luminaries shall be wired to the power center.

M. Interior Receptacles: Provide a minimum of four 20-amp, 120-volt, duplex GFI receptacles located inside the enclosure (two on each side of the enclosure space a minimum of 12 feet apart), wired to the power center.

N. Exterior Lighting: Each enclosure shall be equipped with LED lights on the exterior of the structure, wired into the commercial power supply load center and activated automatically by way of photoelectric cells which will switch the lights on during evening hours and off during daylight hours. The fixtures for the lights shall be of vandal-proof design, and mounted above each entrance door of the enclosure. Each light shall be equipped with a switch to bypass the photoelectric cell controlling its automatic operation.

O. Low-Voltage Power: The enclosure shall be equipped with a 480-volt, 3-phase, 3-wire 12 pole power panel and a 15kVA, 480-208/120V ac, single-phase, 12 pole mini-power center. Loads to be powered include, but are not limited to, the battery charger, jacket water heater, lighting, receptacles, etc., as specified and as shown on the Drawings. The power panel, and mini power center shall be mounted within the enclosure and allow for site condition conduit entry. The placement of the panels and mini power center

697482A.GN1


shall be shown on the Submittal Drawings. All internal wiring and conduit runs to the various ancillary equipment supplied with the package shall be prewired at the factory in accordance with all governing codes pursuant to this application. The power panel shall be considered as part of the emergency load and shall derive its power source as shown on the Drawings. Refer to Section 26 24 16, Panelboards for additional power panel requirements. Refer to Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage Transformers for additional mini-power center requirements.

P. Running Beacon: A weatherproof, rotating beacon light shall be mounted atop the enclosure and wired to operate off generator output voltage or battery voltage each time the generator runs. This beacon shall be amber in color.

Q. Fault Beacon: A weatherproof, rotating beacon light shall be mounted atop the enclosure and wired to operate off battery voltage in the event of an engine fault or alarm condition. This beacon will be red in color, and shall be wired to the alarm silence switch in the generator control panel.

R. Oil and Water Drains: All necessary fittings, hoses, shutoff valves, etc., shall be provided to facilitate lube oil and water drain at the exterior of the enclosure. In addition, engines equipped with crankcase breather tubes shall have this tube terminate at the exterior of the enclosure directly under the radiator air discharge louver.

S. Enclosure Flooring: The floor of the enclosure shall be designed and constructed in such a manner as to prevent the entrance of rodents. This shall be accomplished with solid metal or "diamond plate" and must be capable of fully supporting any ancillary equipment specified which may be secured to it plus the anticipated weight of maintenance personnel and their tools. Minimum floor thickness shall be 1/4-inch steel.

T. Skin Cooling: Under no circumstances shall the floor area or any of its parts be considered for cooling air intake or discharge requirements of the generator set or its associated equipment, nor shall its properties as a "heat sink" or heat dissipating medium be utilized in any manner whatsoever in this application.

U. Ventilation: Provide exhaust fan and intake and exhaust louvers for ventilation when engine/generator is not running. Size to maintain temperature within 5 degrees above the maximum ambient temperature specified in Paragraph Service Conditions. Provide backdraft damper on exhaust louver and motorized damper on intake louver. Control fan and motorized damper with an adjustable thermostat located near a doorway.

V. See Generator Layout Drawing.

697482A.GN1


2.12 PLATFORM

A. Features:

1. Cantilever supported off base with 10-gauge formed steel frame, toe plates, railing posts (pipes), rails, and grate assemblies coated with powder black.

2. Do not connect platform to subbase tank. 3. Laser cut structural materials to a tolerance of 1/16 inch, allowing no

sharp edges. 4. Bolts: 5/16-inch diameter, minimum. 5. Design platform to provide access to generator enclosure service doors

for maintenance and inspection and, at minimum, wrap around sides and back of generator.

6. Provide ship’s ladder to access platform. 7. Platform Height: No greater than 1.5 inches above bottom of generator

base frame. 8. Walkway Tread: 1-inch vertical steel grating, black powder coated, on

1-3/16-inch centers, connected by horizontal steel rods on 4-inch centers. Cover cut grate edges with 14-gauge, black powder coated, 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch angled steel.

9. Handrails: Horizontal, 42 inches above walkway. 10. Steel Component Coating: Pressure wash clean with an iron phosphate

solution and apply 3 mils of high gloss black powder baked paint. 11. Platform, Walkway, and Ladder: Meet requirements of OSHA 3124. 12. Manufacturer: Generator System Support, Inc.


A. Engine Generator Set and Instrument Panel: Factory-applied primer and two finish coats of manufacturer’s standard heat-resistant engine paint.

2.14 FACTORY TESTS

A. General: Conform to NFPA 110.

B. Steady Load Test: Test engine generator set at steady load run of 60 minutes minimum duration at 100 percent full-rated load.

C. Transient Load Test: Conduct transient load test to demonstrate ability to meet load pickup and load release requirements specified.

D. Harmonic Test: Conduct at full load conditions on the actual unit or one of the same model and size.

697482A.GN1


E. Record and Report:

1. Strip chart recording and full harmonic analysis measuring up to 50th harmonic for both voltage and current and three phases simultaneously.

2. Transient response. 3. Load/speed stability. 4. Engine fuel consumption. 5. Power output. 6. Harmonic analysis.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Level and securely mount engine generator set in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Install in accordance with NECA 404.

C. Where applicable, mount engine generator set on vibration isolators in accordance with isolator manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.02 FIELD FINISHING

A. Touch up damaged coating with paint system compatible to existing.

3.03 FIELD TESTS BY GENERATOR MANUFACTURER

A. General:

1. Conform to NFPA 110. 2. Fuel provided by Contractor. 3. Top off fuel after testing.

B. Performance Test:

1. Perform upon completion of installation. 2. Operate 2 hours minimum, 1 hour at 50 percent load and 1 hour at full

load. a. Manufacture shall provide a resistive load bank and all required

connecting materials for the load testing. 3. Manufacturer’s representative shall make necessary adjustments. 4. Demonstrate ability of engine generator set to carry specified loads. 5. Demonstrate engine generator set safety shutdowns.

697482A.GN1


C. Test Report: Record and report the following:

1. Electric load on generator. 2. Fuel consumption. 3. Exhaust temperature. 4. Ambient air temperature. 5. Safety shutdown performance results. 6. Noise levels at 7 meters, property line.

D. Post-test Requirements:

1. Make final adjustments. 2. Replace fuel and oil filters. 3. Check belt drive tensions. 4. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment, including automatic

operation with control from automatic transfer switch, to Engineer and Owner.

3.04 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES

A. Manufacturer's Onsite Services shall Include:

1. Assistance during product (system, subsystem, or component) installation to include observation, guidance, instruction of Contractor's assembly, erection, installation or application procedures.

2. Inspection, checking, and adjustment as required for product (system, subsystem, or component) to function as warranted by manufacturer and necessary to furnish Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.

3. Revisiting the site as required to correct problems and until installation and operation are acceptable to Contractor.

4. Resolution of assembly or installation problems attributable to, or associated with, respective manufacturer's products and systems.

5. Assistance during functional and performance testing, and facility startup and evaluation.

6. Training of Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of respective product as required.

7. Additional requirements may be specified elsewhere.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation:

1. A Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation form, a copy of which is attached to this specification shall be completed and signed by the equipment manufacturer's representative.

2. Such form shall certify that the signing party is a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, is empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate their equipment and is authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the equipment is complete and operational.

697482A.GN1


C. Training:

1. Furnish manufacturers' representatives for detailed classroom and hands-on training to Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of specified product (system, subsystem, component).

2. Furnish trained, articulate personnel to coordinate and expedite training, to be present during training coordination meetings with Owner, and familiar with operation and maintenance manual information specified in Paragraph Operation and Maintenance Data.

3. Manufacturer's representative shall be familiar with facility operation and maintenance requirements as well as with specified equipment.

4. Furnish complete training materials, to include operation and maintenance data, to be retained by each trainee.

D. Onsite Services:

1. Present at Site or classroom designated by Contractor, the minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: a. 3 person-days for installation assistance and inspection. b. 3 person-days for functional and performance testing and

completion of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation including testing via plant PLC system.

c. 3 person-days for pre-startup classroom onsite training. d. 3 person-days for facility startup.

3.05 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplement listed below, following “END OF SECTION,” is part of this Specification.

1. Supplement 1, Project Sizing Report.

END OF SECTION

Summary sizing report

Report prepared by: Edgar Carrasco

Software version: 1.0028.4.64 Wednesday, July 25, 2018

1

Project name: 3 Mile Creek Customer’s name: Customer contact:

The analysis provided from Power Solutions Center are for reference only. The installer must work with the local distributor and technician to confirm actual requirements when planning the installation. Kohler Co. reserves the right to change design or specifications without notice and without any obligation or liability whatsoever. Kohler Co. expressly disclaims any responsibility for consequential damages.

Voltage: 277/480

Phase: 3

Frequency: 60Hz

Alt. Temp. Rise Duty: 130°C Standby

Qty of Gensets: 1

Fuel type: Diesel

Country : United States

Application: Water Utilities

Genset Application: Stationary emergency

Altitude: 100 Feet

Max. Ambient Temp.: 90 Degrees F

Min. Genset Loading : 25 %

Max. Genset Loading : 80 %

Running kW: 594.49 Running kVA: 688.32 Running P.F.: 0.86

Max. Starting kW: 348.43 in step 1 Max. Starting kVA: 918.91 in step 1

Genset Model: KD800

Engine: KD27V12

Emission level: EPA Tier 2

BHP: 1,195.00

Displacement: 1,648.00

RPM: 1800

Alternator: KH04070TO4D

Alternator Leads: 12 Lead

Alt. Starting kVA at 35% V dip:

3,774.00

Excitation System :

PMG

Rated kW : 800.00

Site Rated kW : 800.00

UL 2200 Certified

Voltage Dip Limit: 30.00 % Frequency Dip Limit: 10.00 % Harmonic Distortion Limit:

10.00 %

Calculated Voltage Dip: 16.76 % Calculated Frequency Dip: 4.11 % Calculated Harmonic Distortion:

5.52 %

Calculated Genset % Loaded: 74.31 %

Project information

Site requirements

Generator selection

Generator Performance Summary

Site load requirements summary

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 36 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 36 23 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C37.90.1, Standard for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems:

General Requirements. b. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors,

and Overload Relays not more than 2000 volts ac or 750 volts ac. c. ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures 250,

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical

Code (NEC). 4. UL: 1008, Transfer Switch Equipment.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Descriptive product information. 2. Dimensional drawings. 3. Control diagrams. 4. Conduit entrance locations. 5. Equipment ratings. 6. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by




2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

3. Factory certified test reports. 4. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as



697482A.GN1

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PW\DEN003\697482 26 36 23 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL



1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. ASCO.

B. Eaton.

C. Russelectric.

D. No “or-equal” or substitute products will be considered.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Transfer switch to be product of a single manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer’s service.

B. In accordance with applicable standards of NFPA 70, NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 6, IEEE C37.90.1, and UL 1008.

C. Transfer switch consisting of inherently double-throw power switch unit with interconnected control module.

D. Rated 100 percent, in amperes, for total system transfer of motor, electric heating, discharge lamp loads, and tungsten-filament lamp loads.

1. Switches rated 400 amperes and below suitable for 100 percent tungsten-filament lamp loads.

2. Switches rated above 400 amperes suitable for 30 percent tungsten-filament lamp loads.

E. Main and arcing contacts visible for inspection with cabinet door and barrier covers removed.

697482A.GN1


F. Number of Switched Poles: As shown on one-line drawing.

G. Nominal Voltage, Full Load Current, and Short Circuit Withstand Current Rating: As shown on one-line drawing. Provide a three-cycle Withstand Current Rating, unless a longer time period is shown on the one-line drawing.

H. Switch Rating: As shown on one-line drawing.

I. Current carrying capacity of arcing contacts shall not be used to determine the transfer switch rating.

J. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.

K. Operating Conditions:

1. Ambient Temperature: Maximum 40 degrees C. 2. Equipment to be fully rated without any derating for operating

conditions listed above.

2.03 ENCLOSURE

A. Type: NEMA 250, Type 12 with enclosure grounding terminal.

B. Dead front, front accessible cabinet with 14-gauge welded steel construction.

C. Continuously hinged single door, with handle and lock cylinder.

D. Finish: Baked enamel applied over rust-inhibiting, phosphate based coating.

1. Exterior and Interior Color: Provide Manufacturer’s standard gray. 2. Unpainted Metal Parts: Plated for corrosion resistance.

E. Type: Stand-alone enclosure.

2.04 TRANSFER SWITCH

A. Type: Electrically operated, mechanically held, double-throw.

B. Momentarily energized, single-electrically operated mechanism energized from source to which load is to be transferred.

C. Locking mechanism to maintain constant contact pressure.

D. Mechanical interlock switch to ensure only one of two possible switch positions or time delay in neutral position.

E. Silver alloy contacts protected by arcing contacts.

697482A.GN1


F. Main and arcing contacts visible when door is open and barrier covers removed.

G. Manual operating handle for transfer in either direction under unloaded conditions.

H. Internal control wire connections made with ring or spade type terminals, lock washers, and sleeve type marking labels.

2.05 CONTROL MODULE

A. Completely enclosed and mounted separately from the transfer switch unit.

B. Microprocessor for sensing and logic control with inherent digital communications capability.

C. Plug-in, industrial grade interfacing relays with dust covers.

D. Connected to transfer switch by wiring harness having keyed disconnect plug.

E. Plug-in printed circuit boards for sensing and control logic.

F. Adjustable solid state undervoltage sensors for all three phases of normal and for three phases of standby emergency source:

1. Pickup 85 percent to 100 percent nominal. 2. Dropout 75 percent to 98 percent of pickup setting.

G. Adjustable frequency sensors for standby emergency source:

1. Pickup 90 percent to 100 percent nominal. 2. Dropout 87 percent to 89 percent of pickup setting.

H. Control module with adjustable time delays:

1. 0.5-second to 6-second engine start delay. 2. 0-minute to 5-minute load transfer to emergency delay. 3. 0-minute to 30-minute retransfer to normal delay. 4. 0-minute to 30-minute unload running time delay. 5. 0-minute to 5-minute time delay neutral on retransfer to normal source. 6. Switch to bypass any of the above time delays during testing.

I. Form-C start contacts, rated 10 amperes, 32-volt dc, for two-wire engine control, wired to terminal block.

J. Exerciser, adjustable in 15-minute increments, 7-day dial clock to automatically exercise generator without load transfer.

K. Adjustable 0-minute to 5-minutes time delay relay for engine starting signal.

697482A.GN1


2.06 METERING INSTRUMENTS

A. Connect meters to load side of transfer switch.

B. Show voltage, current, and kW on an average and per-phase basis, and track and record peak kW.

2.07 INDICATORS

A. Type: Clustered light-emitting diodes.

B. Green lens to indicate switch position for normal utility power source.

C. Red lens to indicate switch position for standby emergency power source.

D. Green lens to indicate normal utility power source is available within parameters established by pickup and dropout settings.

E. Red lens to indicate standby emergency power source is available within parameters established by pickup and dropout settings.

F. Provide one normally open and one normally closed, 5 amperes, 120-volt contact for remote indication when transfer switch is in either position.

2.08 FACTORY TESTS

A. Test to ensure correct:

1. Operation of individual components. 2. Sequence of operation. 3. Transfer time, voltage, frequency, and time delay settings.

B. Dielectric strength test per NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Secure enclosure to floor using anchor bolts of sufficient size and number adequate for specified seismic conditions.

697482A.GN1



A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for the following services at Site, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:

1. 1 person-days for installation assistance, final adjustment, and initial energization of equipment.

2. 1 person-days for functional and performance testing. 3. 1 person-days for adjustment of relay settings.

B. Furnish startup services and training of Owner’s personnel at such times as requested by Owner.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 41 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 41 00 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI): 175, Standard of Practice. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.

3. UL: a. 96, Standard for Lightning Protection Components. b. 96A, Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning

Protection Systems.


A. Related work specified under other sections: Section 26 41 00, Surge Protective Devices.


A. Provide lightning protection system design for the following structures:

1. Site pole mounted lights. 2. SWAT Storage Tanks. 3. Electrical Building. 4. Generator.

B. Design lightning protection system to comply with applicable provisions of LPI 175, UL 96, UL 96A, and NFPA 780.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Signed and Sealed Drawings by an Alabama Professional Engineer (PE): a. Lightning protection system layout. b. Component locations. c. Detailed plans. d. Down conductor. e. Connecting conductor.

697482A.GN1

FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION PW\DEN003\697482 26 41 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

2. Bond strap. 3. Air terminals. 4. Fittings. 5. Connectors. 6. Ground rods.


1. Field test report. 2. Ground Witness Certification-Form LPI-175A. 3. Post-Installation Certification-Form LPI-175B. 4. UL 96 Master Label “C” Certification.


A. Designer: Lightning protection system design shall be prepared by and signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered (PE) in the State of Alabama.

B. System components shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of lightning protection components in accordance with UL 96.

C. Lightning protection system shall be installed under direct supervision of an LPI 175 Certified Master Installer.

D. Inspection of final installation and grounding connection shall be performed by an LPI-certified inspector.

E. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

F. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS


1. Thompson Lightning. 2. IPC Protection.

697482A.GN1


3. Erico Eritech Lightning Protection Systems. 4. VFC, Inc.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Complete system shall bear UL 96 Master Label C.

B. System Material: Aluminum, unless otherwise specified.

C. Material shall comply in weight, size, and composition for the class of structure to be protected as established by NFPA 780.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Air Terminal:

1. Material: Solid aluminum with tapered or blunt points as required for application.

2. Length: Sufficient to extend minimum 10 inches above object being protected.

3. UL 96 Label B applied to each terminal.

B. Conductors:

1. Lightning System Conductors: Bare medium hard-drawn stranded copper, or stranded aluminum as required for the application.

2. Main Down Conductor: Smooth twist stranding. 3. Connecting Conductor: Concentric stranding. 4. Bonding Conductor: Flexible strap. 5. Main down and connecting conductors shall bear the UL 96 Label A,

applied every 10 feet. 6. Grounding Conductors: Stranded bare copper.

C. Cable Fastener and Accessories: Capable of withstanding minimum pull of 100 pounds.

D. Fittings:

1. Heavy-duty. 2. Bolts, Screws, and Related Hardware: Stainless steel.

E. Ground Rods:

1. Material: Copper-clad. 2. Length: 10 feet.

697482A.GN1


F. Grounding Connections:

1. Welds: Exothermic process. 2. Fasteners: Bolted clamp type, corrosion-resistant copper alloy. 3. Hardware: Silicone bronze.

G. Cable Connections and Splicers:

1. Welds: Exothermic process. 2. Fasteners: Bolted clamp type, corrosion-resistant copper alloy. 3. Through-Roof Connectors: Straight or right angle with bronze and lead

seal flashing washer.

H. Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC, as specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Workmanship to comply with all applicable provisions of LPI 175, UL 96, UL 96A, and NFPA 780.

B. Aluminum materials shall be used where required to meet the galvanic corrosion requirements of UL 96A.

C. Provide pitch-pockets or method compatible with roofing to waterproof roof penetrations.

D. Install system in inconspicuous manner so components blend with building aesthetics.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify conditions prior to installation. Actual conditions may require adjustments in air terminal and ground rod locations.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Air Terminals:

1. Supports: Brackets or braces. 2. Parapet Bracket Attachment: Lag or expansion bolts. 3. Secure base to roof surface with adhesive or pitch compatible with

roofing bond. 4. Provide terminal flashing at roof penetrations.

697482A.GN1


5. Perimeter Terminals: a. Maximum Spacing: 20 feet. b. Maximum Distance From Outside Edge of Building: 2 feet.

6. Roof Ridge Terminals: Maximum spacing 20 feet. 7. Mid-Roof Terminals: Maximum spacing 50 feet. 8. Provide blunt point air terminals for applications exposed to personnel.

B. Conductors:

1. Conceal whenever practical. 2. Provide 1-inch PVC conduit in building walls or columns for main

downleads and roof risers. 3. Support: Maximum spacing for exposed conductors.

a. Vertical: 3 foot. b. Horizontal: 4 foot.

4. Maintain horizontal and vertical conductor courses free from dips or pockets.

5. Bends: Maximum 90 degrees, with minimum 8-inch radius. 6. Install air terminal conductors on the structural roof surface before

roofing composition is applied.

C. Bonding:

1. Bond to Main Conductor System: a. Roof-mounted ventilators, fans, air handlers, masts, flues, cooling

towers, handrails, and other sizeable metal objects. b. Roof flashing, gravel stops, insulation vents, ridge vents, roof

drains, soil pipe vents, and other small metal objects if located within 6 feet of main conductors or another grounded object.

2. Bond each steel column or major framing members to grounding system.

3. Bond each main down conductor to grounding system.

D. Grounding System:

1. Grounding Conductor: a. Completely encircle building structure. b. Bury minimum 1 foot below finished grade. c. Minimum 2 feet from foundation walls.

2. Interconnect ground rods by direct-buried copper cables. 3. Maximum Resistance: 5 ohms when connected to ground rods. 4. Connections:

a. Install ground cables continuous between connections. b. Exothermic welded connections to ground rods, cable trays,

structural steel, handrails, and buried and non-accessible connections.

697482A.GN1


c. Provide bolted clamp type mechanical connectors for all exposed secondary connections.

d. Use bolted offset parapet bases or through-roof concealed base assemblies for air terminal connections.

e. Provide interconnections with electrical and telephone systems and all underground water and metal pipes.

f. Provide electric service arrestor ground wire to building water main.


A. Field Testing:

1. Isolate lightning protection system from other ground conditions while performing tests.

2. Resistance: Test ground resistance of grounding system by the fall-of-potential method. a. Test Resistance to Ground: Maximum 5 ohms. b. Install additional ground rods as required to obtain maximum

allowable resistance. 3. Test Report:

a. Description of equipment tested. b. Description of test. c. Test results. d. Conclusions and recommendations. e. Appendix, including appropriate test forms. f. Identification of test equipment used. g. Signature of responsible test organization authority.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 43 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 43 00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Department of Defense: MIL-STD-220C, Test Method Standard –

Method of Insertion Loss Measurement. 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. C62.41.1, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits.

b. C62.41.2, IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits.

c. C62.45, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits.


5. UL: a. 497A, Standard for Secondary Protectors for Communications

Circuits. b. 1283, Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. c. 1449, Standard for Surge Protective Devices.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data on each suppressor type, indicating component values, part numbers, and conductor sizes. Include dimensional drawing for each, showing mounting arrangements.

2. Electrical single-line diagram showing location of each SPD. 3. Manufacturer’s UL certified test data and nameplate data for each surge

protective device (SPD).


A. UL Compliance and Labeling:

1. SPDs for Power and Signal Circuits: Comply with UL 1449 and complimentary listed to UL 1283 as an electromagnetic interference filter. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.

2. SPDs for Telephone Circuit Protection: Comply with UL 497A.

697482A.GN1

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PW\DEN003\697482 26 43 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

B. ANSI Compliance: Use SPD devices in compliance with the recommendations of IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, and IEEE C62.45.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Critec TDX200M Modular Series.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Unless indicated otherwise, provide direct bus-connected and factory-installed SPDs inside distribution equipment.

B. SPD Operating Conditions: Capable of performing at ambient temperatures between minus 40 degrees C and 60 degrees C, at relative humidity ranging from 0 percent to 95 percent, and at altitudes ranging from sea level to 12,000 feet.

C. Connect SPDs through a fused switch or circuit breaker as selected by manufacturer. Provide overcurrent protection to allow full surge handling capabilities and afford safety protection from thermal overloads and short circuits.

D. SPD Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): No less than the SCCR of distribution equipment.

E. Design SPD devices to protect all modes (L-L, L-N, L-G, N-G) of electrical system being used.

F. Power Filter: Include a high-frequency extended range power filter for each SPD complimentary listed to UL 1283 as an electromagnetic interference filter.

G. Provide SPDs with the following monitoring and diagnostics:

1. LED-type indication lights to show normal and failed status of each protected phase.

2. Surge event counter. 3. Form C dry contact which operates when unit fails.

H. Provide UL Type 2 SPDs.

I. EMI/RFI Noise Suppression: -50dB attenuation at 100 kHz, tested per MIL-STD 220C.

697482A.GN1


J. Voltage Protection Rating (VPR):

Voltage Rating L-N N-G L-G L-L

208Y/120 800 800 800 1200

480Y/277 1200 1200 1200 2000

240 ∆ -- -- 1200 1200

480 ∆ -- -- 2000 2000

2.03 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND DISTRIBUTION SPD

A. Provide SPD meeting IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2 Location in accordance with Category C.

B. Surge Current Capacity:

1. Service Entrance: a. 240 kA per phase. b. 120 kA per mode.

2. Distribution: a. 160 kA per phase. b. 80 kA per mode.

C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): Not less than 115 percent of nominal system voltage.

D. Nominal Discharge Current (IN): 20kA.

2.04 PANELBOARD SPD

A. Provide SPD meeting IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2 Location in accordance with Category B.

B. Surge Current Capacity:

1. Distribution: 120 kA per phase; 60 kA per mode. 2. Branch: 80 kA per phase; 40 kA per mode

C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): Not less than 125 percent of the nominal system voltage.

D. Nominal Discharge Current (IN): 10kA.

697482A.GN1

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PW\DEN003\697482 26 43 00 - 4 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

2.05 PAIRED CABLE DATA LINE INTERIOR SUPPRESSORS

A. Provide units meeting IEEE C62.41, Location Category A.

B. Use bi-polar 1,500-watt silicon avalanche diodes between protected conductor and earth ground.

C. Provide units with a maximum single impulse current rating of 80 amperes (10 by 1,000 microsecond-waveform).

D. Breakdown voltage shall not exceed 36 volts.

2.06 PAIRED CABLE DATA LINE EXTERIOR SUPPRESSORS

A. Provide units meeting IEEE C62.41, Location Category A.

B. Design Requirements: A hybrid design with a minimum of three stages, using solid-state components and operating bi-directionally.

C. Meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. Maximum single impulse current rating of 10,000 amperes (8 by 20 microsecond-waveform).

2. Pulse Life Rating: 3,000 amperes (8 by 20 microsecond-waveform); 2,000 occurrences.

3. Maximum clamping voltage at 10,000 amperes (8 by 20 microsecond current waveform), shall not exceed the peak of normal applied signal voltage by 200 percent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide SPDs when indicated on Drawings or in the equipment specifications.

B. Provide factory-installed SPDs as integral components to new switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards and transfer switches. Externally mounted SPDs are not acceptable for new distribution equipment.

C. Externally mounted SPDs are acceptable for SPDs added to existing equipment as described below.

D. Electronic Equipment Paired Cable Conductors: Install data line suppressors at the low voltage input and output of each piece of equipment, including telephone cable entrance.

1. Use secondary protectors on lines that do not exit the structure. 2. Use primary protectors on lines that exit and enter the structure.

697482A.GN1


3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install suppressors according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Install suppressors directly to the cabinet which houses the circuit to be protected so that the suppressor leads are straight and short, with conductors laced, running directly to the point of connection within the panel, without loops or bends. If bends are unavoidable, no bend may exceed 90 degrees and bending radius may not be less than 6 inches.

C. Provide connecting wires as short as possible with gently twisted conductors, tied together, to prevent separation.

1. Maximum Length: 24 inches.

D. Field Installed Conductors: As specified for building wire, not smaller than 8 AWG and not larger than 4 AWG. Provide device leads not longer than the maximum length recommended by manufacturer, unless specifically reviewed and approved by manufacturer.

E. Provide dedicated disconnecting means for SPD devices installed at main service entrance location, switchgear, and motor control centers. Provide dedicated 30-60-ampere circuit breakers (size dependent upon wire size used) with number of poles as required, as disconnecting means for SPD devices. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity equal to that specified for other breakers at that location.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 LIGHTING FEBRUARY 7, 2019 26 50 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)

on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. A572/A572A, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-

Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. d. A588/A588M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-

Alloy Structural Steel, with 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. [100-mm] Thick.

e. A595/A595M, Standard Specification for Steel Tubes, Low-Carbon or High-Strength Low-Alloy, Tapered for Structural Use.

f. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

g. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.

h. D6576, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Rubber Chemically Blown.

i. G154, Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.

2. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): M6, Brands Used on Forest Products.

3. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 4. Certified Ballast Manufacturer (CBM). 5. Federal Communications Commission (FCC). 6. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA).

a. HB-9, Lighting Handbook. b. LM-79, IES Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-

State Lighting Products. c. LM-80, IESNA Approved Method for Measuring Lumen

Maintenance of LED Light Sources. d. RP (Recommended Practices) Series. e. TM-21, Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light

Sources.

697482A.GN1

LIGHTING PW\DEN003\697482 26 50 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 9. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 10. ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures. 11. National Energy Policy Act. 12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical

Code (NEC) – Softbound Version. 13. Rural Utilities Service (RUS): 1728F-700, Specification for Wood

Poles, Stubs and Anchor Logs. 14. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. 773, UL Standard for Safety Plug-In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting - Fourth Edition; Reprint with Revisions Through and Including March 08, 2002.

b. 844, Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

c. 924, Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. d. 1598, UL Standard for Safety Luminaires. e. 2108, UL Standard for Safety Low Voltage Lighting

Systems - First Edition; Reprint with Revisions through and Including February 24, 2014.

f. 8750, UL Standard for Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products - First Edition; Reprint with Revisions Through and Including April 1, 2015.

15. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and U.S. Department of Energy: Energy Star.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. General:

1) Provide catalog data sheets and pictures for all products listed below.

2) Proposed Luminaire Substitutions (Interior and Exterior): Provide an electronic photometric file in standard ‘.ies’ file format per the Illumination Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) for any proposed luminaire substitution not identified on the project Luminaire Schedule. Obtain file from the luminaire manufacturer or approved independent photometric testing laboratory. Include the proposed substitute luminaire with all options identified on the project Luminaire Schedule.

697482A.GN1


b. Interior Luminaires: 1) Catalog data sheets with pictures. 2) Luminaire material, finish, dimensions, and metal gauge. 3) Lens material, pattern, and thickness. 4) Candle power distribution curves in two or more planes. 5) Candle power chart 0 degree to 90 degrees. 6) Lumen output chart. 7) Average maximum brightness data in foot lamberts. 8) Coefficients of utilization for zonal cavity calculations. 9) Mounting or suspension details.

c. Exterior Luminaires: 1) Catalog data sheets with pictures. Luminaire material,

finish, dimensions, and metal gauge. 2) Lens material, pattern, and thickness. Filters. 3) IESNA lighting classification (BUG rating). 4) Isolux diagram. 5) Lighting distribution data and lighting distribution

classification type as defined in IESNA HB 9. 6) Fastening details to wall, pendant, or pole. 7) Ballast type, location, and method of fastening. 8) For light poles, submit catalog sheet, wind loading, pole

deflection with fixture attached, total weight, all accessories, complete dimensions, and finish.

9) For concrete poles, include section and details to indicate quantities and position of prestressing steel, spiral steel, inserts, and through holes, initial prestressing steel tension, and concrete strengths at release and at 28 days.

10) Brackets and supports. 11) Pole foundations.

d. LED Source Systems: 1) General:

a) IESNA LM-80 test reports. b) IESNA TM-21 ratings. c) Operating temperature range. Data sheet (chart/graph)

describing life as a function of temperature. d) Warranty: Light engine and driver. e) Rated life. f) Surge protection. g) Thermal control device, heat sink. h) Enclosure and wiring information. i) Operating voltage range.

2) Electronic Module/Light Engine: a) Correlated Color Temperature (CCT). b) Color Rendering Index (CRI).

697482A.GN1


3) Drivers: a) Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion. b) Power factor. c) Sound rating.

e. Time Switches: 1) Wiring diagram. 2) Contact ratings. 3) Functional features. 4) Programmable capabilities. 5) Enclosure type, dimensions.

f. Lighting Contactor: 1) Type (mechanically or electrically held). 2) Enclosure. 3) Contact ratings and configuration. 4) Coil operating voltage.

g. Photoelectric Switches (Photocells): 1) Voltage. 2) Power consumption. 3) Load capacity (watts). 4) Contact ratings and configuration. 5) Time delay. 6) Light operating level controls. 7) Enclosure type and dimensions. 8) Mounting type. 9) Temperature range. 10) Features and options.

h. Photo Sensors/Controls for Daylight Harvesting Control: 1) System description, overall functionality. 2) Each component. 3) Electrical ratings (voltage, amperage, watts). 4) Wiring diagrams. 5) Programming. 6) Testing.

i. Wall box dimmers. j. Dimming systems. k. Occupancy Sensors:

1) Type. 2) Switching capacity. 3) Coverage. 4) Time delay AUTO/OFF adjustment.

l. Low Voltage Remote Control Wiring System: 1) Type. 2) Switching capacity. 3) Voltage rating. 4) Wiring diagrams.

m. Outdoor Motion Sensors.

697482A.GN1


n. Emergency Shunt Relay. o. High mast lighting. p. Standby lighting panel. q. Luminaire lowering device. r. Landscape Lighting:

1) Luminaires. 2) Controls. 3) Transformers. 4) Wiring.

s. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.



2. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,




1. Provide Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, provide material and equipment labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Provide materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. in conformance with those standards and with an applied UL listing mark.

B. Standard Products:

1. Provide materials and equipment of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of products specified in this section and that are of equal material, design, and workmanship.

2. Provide products that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to Bid opening in similar applications under similar circumstances and of similar size. Provide products that have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers’ catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

3. Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date: Do not use products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to Site.

697482A.GN1



A. Concrete Poles:

1. Do not store poles on ground. 2. Support poles so they are at least 1 foot above ground level and growing

vegetation. 3. Ship poles with bolt circle template, base cover, handhold cover, and

shaft cap or tenon.

B. Aluminum Poles:

1. Provide manufacturer’s standard protection for the finish during shipment and installation. At minimum, spirally wrap each pole shaft with protective paper secured with tape, and ship small parts in boxes.

2. Do not store poles on ground. 3. Support poles so they are at least 1 foot above ground level and growing

vegetation. 4. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before

installing pole. 5. Ship poles with bolt circle template, base cover, handhold cover, and

shaft cap or tenon.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMINAIRES

A. Specific requirements relative to execution of the Work of this section are located in Luminaire Schedule on Drawings.

B. Provide luminaires and components tested, listed, and labeled by UL, or other approved testing agency.

C. Provide luminaires with Illumination Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) formatted photometric files, “.ies” format, certified by the luminaire manufacturer for use with lighting software.

D. Luminaire Labels:

1. External label per ANSI C136.15. 2. Internal label per ANSI C136.22.

E. Provide luminaires rated by the manufacturer to start and operate to their full lumen capacity for rated life of the luminaire at the minimum low and maximum high ambient temperatures as defined in the Contract Documents at their installation location.

697482A.GN1


F. Feed-through type, or separate junction box.

G. Wire Leads: Minimum 18 AWG.

H. Component Access: Accessible and replaceable without removing luminaire from ceiling.

I. Soffit Installations (Interior or Exterior Damp Locations):

1. UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR DAMP LOCATIONS.

J. Exterior Installations:

1. UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS. 2. Ballast: Removable, prewired. 3. When factory-installed photocells are provided, entire assembly shall

have UL label.

K. Marine Environments:

1. UL Labeled: MARINE, OUTSIDE TYPE. 2. Housing: Copper-free, aluminum in accordance with UL 595.

L. Illuminated Exit Signs:

1. Body: As scheduled. 2. Face: Stencil.

a. Letters: 1) 6-inch high by 3/4-inch stroke. 2) Color: Red.

3. Mounting: As indicated. 4. Directional Arrows: As indicated on Drawings.

2.02 LED SOURCE SYSTEMS

A. General:

1. Provide IESNA LM-80 test reports. 2. Provide Energy Star compliance for solid state luminaires. 3. Listed To: UL 8750 Standard for Safety for Light Emitting Diode

(LED) Equipment for use in Lighting Products. 4. Provide RoHS compliant LED light source(s) and driver(s). 5. Rated operating temperature range as indicated on the Luminaire

Schedule. 6. Warranty: 5 years minimum.

697482A.GN1


B. Electronic Module/Light Engine:

1. Mount all components to a single plate and factory prewired with quick-disconnect plugs.

2. Include a driver, thermal control device, thermal protector device, and surge protector device. a. Provide surge protector tested in accordance with

IEEE/ANSI C62.41.2 to Category C Low. 3. Provide LEDs mounted to a metal-core circuit board and aluminum heat

sink for optimal thermal management and long life. 4. Light Engine Rating per TM-21: 60,000 at 65 degrees C, L84. 5. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): As indicated on the Luminaire

Schedule. 6. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Minimum of 80.

C. Drivers:

1. Expected life of 60,000 hours at 65 degrees C. 2. Provide drivers mounted in an all metal can. 3. Operating Voltage Range: 50/60-Hz input source, voltage range as

indicated on the Luminaire Schedule with sustained variations of plus or minus 10 percent voltage with no damage to the driver.

4. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 20 percent up to 50 percent of full load rating.

5. Power Factor: Greater than 0.90 for primary application up to 50 percent of full load rating.

6. Sound rating: Class A. 7. Comply with NEMA 410 for inrush current limits.

2.03 LIGHTING CONTROL

A. Time Switch, Electromechanical Dial Type:

1. Plain 24-hour dial with skip-a-day feature. 2. Bypass Switch: Prewired, externally operated ON/AUTO/OFF, for each

circuit shown. 3. Contact Configuration and Rating for Circuits:

a. Rating: 30 amps at 480V ac for operation on LED driver loads. b. Configuration: DPDT.

4. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. 5. Wired for use with photocell specified. 6. Manufacturers:

a. Tork. b. Intermatic. c. Paragon Electric Company.

697482A.GN1


B. Lighting Contactor:

1. Features: a. Mechanically held contactor. b. Contacts Rating 480 volts, 30 amperes, and single pole. c. Enclosure: NEMA 4 conforming to NEMA ICS 6. d. Coil clearing contacts for mechanically held contactor and shall

require no arcing contacts. e. Provide contactor with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC

ON/OFF/AUTO selector switch.

2.04 POLES

A. General:

1. Design for wind load as specified in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, while supporting luminaires and other appurtenances. Use effective projected areas (EPA) of luminaires and appurtenances in calculations specific to the actual products proposed on each pole.

2. Poles 40 feet and Shorter: One-piece construction. 3. Pole Height: As indicated on Luminaire Schedule. 4. Handhole:

a. Provide oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 inches by 5 inches.

b. Secure cover with stainless steel captive screws. c. Metal Poles: Provide an internal grounding connection accessible

from handhole near bottom of each pole. 5. Do not install scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles.

B. Concrete Poles:

1. Cross-Sectional Shape: Round. 2. Steel Reinforcing:

a. Prestressed Concrete Pole Shafts: Reinforce with steel prestressing members.

b. Design for internal longitudinal loading by either pre-tensioning or post-tensioning of longitudinal reinforcing members.

3. Tensioned Reinforcing: a. Primary Reinforcement Steel Used for a Prestressed Concrete

Pole Shaft: Tension to between 60 percent and 70 percent of its ultimate strength.

b. Design reinforcement so that when reinforcement is tensioned to 70 percent of its ultimate strength, the total resultant tensile force does not exceed the minimum section compressive strength of the concrete.

697482A.GN1


4. Coating and Sleeves for Reinforcing Members: a. Where minimum internal coverage cannot be maintained next to

required core openings, such as handhole and wiring inlet, protect reinforcing with a vapor-proof noncorrosive sleeve over the length without the 1/2-inch concrete coverage.

b. Coat each steel reinforcing member to be post-tensioned with a nonmigrating slipper coating prior to the addition of concrete to ensure uniformity of stress throughout length of such member.

5. Strength Requirement: a. Naturally cured to achieve a 28-day compressive strength of

7,000 psi. b. Do not subject to severe temperature changes during curing

period. 6. Shaft Preparation:

a. Completed Prestressed Concrete Pole Shaft Surface: 1) Hard, smooth, and nonporous. 2) Resistant to soil acids, road salts, and attacks of water and

frost. 3) Clean, smooth, and free of surface voids and internal

honeycombing. b. Install a minimum of 15 days after manufacture.

C. Aluminum Poles:

1. Manufactured of corrosion-resistant aluminum alloys. Seamless extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 0.188-inch wall thickness.

2. Shape: Round. 3. Provide pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis

when used with copper ground wire. 4. Shaft Top: Fitted with cap. 5. Base:

a. Anchor bolt mounted and machined to receive lower end of shaft. b. Welded joint between shaft and base. c. Base Cover: Cast aluminum alloy. d. Hardware, Except Anchor Bolts: either anodized aluminum alloy

or stainless steel. e. Handhole.

6. Provide pole cast-in-place foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end.

7. Provide base covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts.

8. Pole and Bracket Finish: Dark bronze finish to match fixture.

697482A.GN1


2.05 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS

A. Features:

1. Not less than 1-1/4-inch aluminum secured to pole. 2. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but coordinate

brackets to luminaires provided. Provide identical brackets for use with one type of luminaire.

3. Select brackets for pole-mounted street lights to correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated.

4. Mount brackets not less than 24 feet above street. 5. Provide special mountings or brackets as indicated on Drawings

fabricated of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head.

2.06 POLE FOUNDATIONS

A. Anchor Bolts: Steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; at minimum, galvanize the top 12 inches of the rod.

B. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2.07 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Manufacturer’s Nameplate: Provide each item of equipment with a nameplate bearing manufacturer’s name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; nameplate of distributing agent will not be acceptable.

B. Provide clear markings located to be readily visible to service personnel.

2.08 FACTORY FINISH

A. Provide electrical equipment with factory-applied painting systems that, at minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.


A. Flexural Strength and Deflection Test: Test loading shall be as a cantilever beam with pole butt as fixed end and a force simulating wind load at the free end.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LUMINAIRES

A. General:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Provide proper hangers, pendants, and canopies as necessary for

complete installation.

697482A.GN1


3. Provide additional ceiling bracing, hanger supports, and other structural reinforcements to building and to concrete pole bases required to safely mount.

4. Install plumb and level. 5. Install each luminaire outlet box with galvanized stud.

B. Mounting:

1. General: a. Coordinate mounting, fastening, and environmental conditions

with Section 26 05 02, Basic Electrical Requirements. b. Refer to Fastener Schedule in Section 05 50 00, Metal

Fabrications. 2. Wall Mounted: Measure mounting heights from center of mounting

plate to finished floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable. 3. Pendant Mounted:

a. Provide swivel type hangers and canopies to match luminaires, unless otherwise noted.

b. Space single-stem hangers on continuous-row fluorescent luminaires nominally 48 inches apart.

c. Provide twin-stem hangers on single luminaires. d. Measure mounting heights from bottom of luminaire to finished

floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable. 4. Pole Mounted: Provide precast concrete base.

C. Swinging Type: Provide, at each support, safety cable capable of supporting four times vertical load from structure to luminaire.

D. Finished Areas:

1. Install symmetrically with tile pattern. 2. Locate with centerlines either on centerline of tile or on joint between

adjacent tile runs. 3. Install recessed luminaires tight to finished surface such that no spill

light will show between ceilings and sealing rings. 4. Combustible Low Density Cellulose Fiberboard: Provide spacers and

mount luminaires 1-1/2 inches from ceiling surface, or use fixtures suitable for mounting on low density ceilings.

5. Junction Boxes: a. Flush and Recessed Luminaires: Locate minimum 1-foot from

luminaire. b. In concealed locations, install junction boxes to be accessible by

removing luminaire. 6. Wiring and Conduit:

a. Provide wiring of temperature rating required by luminaire. b. Provide flexible steel conduit.

697482A.GN1


7. Provide plaster frames when required by ceiling construction. 8. Independent Supports:

a. Provide each recessed fluorescent luminaire with two safety chains or two No. 12 soft-annealed galvanized steel wires of length needed to secure luminaire to building structure independent of ceiling structure.

b. Select chain or wire with tensile strength and method of fastening to structure adequate to support luminaire weight.

c. Fasten chain or wire to each end of luminaire.

E. Unfinished Areas: Locate luminaires to avoid conflict with other building systems or blockage of luminaire light output.

1. Fixture Suspension: Provide 1/4-inch threaded steel hanger rods. Scissor type hangers not permitted.

2. Attachment to Steel Beams: Provide flanged beam clips and straight or angled hangers.

F. Building Exterior: Flush-mounted back box and concealed conduit, unless otherwise indicated.

3.02 LIGHTING CONTROL

A. Outdoor Luminaires: Photocells switch time clock ON at dusk with time clock switching lights OFF at preset time.

3.03 POLES

A. Electrical Installations: Conform to IEEE C2 and requirements specified herein.

B. Pole Setting:

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or footing detail. 2. Install poles in straight runs in a straight line.

C. Concrete Poles: Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions.

D. Aluminum: Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions.

1. Provide precast concrete base.

E. Grounding: Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

697482A.GN1


3.04 FIELD FINISHES

A. Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Paint as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. Upon completion of installation, verify equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section.

B. Coordinate lighting and controls installation and testing with commissioning as specified in Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Remove labels and markings, except UL listing mark.

B. Wipe luminaires inside and out to remove construction dust.

C. Clean luminaire plastic lenses with antistatic cleaners only.

D. Touch up painted surfaces of luminaires and poles with matching paint ordered from manufacturer.

E. Replace defective lamps at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SITE CLEARING FEBRUARY 8, 2019 31 10 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Interfering or Objectionable Material: Trash, rubbish, and junk; vegetation and other organic matter, whether alive, dead, or decaying.

B. Clearing: Removal of interfering or objectionable material lying on or protruding above ground surface.

C. Grubbing: Removal of vegetation and other organic matter including stumps, buried logs, and roots greater than 2-inch caliper to a depth of 12 inches below subgrade.

D. Stripping: Removal of topsoil and sod.

E. Scalping: Removal of upper soil layer by mechanical means in a 2 to 3 feet wide by 2 to 4-inch deep furrow.

F. Project Limits: Areas, as shown or specified, within which Work is to be performed.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Drawings clearly showing clearing, grubbing, and stripping limits.


A. Obtain Engineer’s approval of staked clearing, grubbing, and stripping limits, prior to commencing clearing, grubbing, and stripping.

1.04 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING

A. Prepare Site only after adequate erosion and sediment controls are in place. Limit areas exposed uncontrolled to erosion during installation of temporary erosion and sediment controls to maximum of 1/2 acres.

697482A.GN1

SITE CLEARING PW\DEN003\697482 31 10 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Clear, grub, and strip areas actually needed for borrow or Site improvements within limits shown or specified.

B. Do not injure or deface vegetation that is not designated for removal.

3.02 LIMITS

A. As follows, but not to extend beyond Project limits.

1. Excavation Excluding Trenches: 5 feet beyond top of cut slopes. 2. Trench Excavation: 3 feet from outer edges of trench width. 3. Fill:

a. Clearing and Grubbing: 5 feet beyond toe of permanent fill. b. Stripping: 2 feet beyond toe of permanent fill.

4. Structures: 10 feet outside footprint of new structures. 5. Roadways: Clearing and grubbing: 5 feet from outer edges of proposed

road. 6. Overhead Utilities:

a. Clearing and Grubbing: Entire width of easements and rights-of-way. Stripping and Scalping: Wherever grading is required.

7. Other Areas: As shown.

B. Remove rubbish, trash, and junk from entire area within Project limits.

3.03 CLEARING

A. Clear areas within limits shown or specified.

B. Fell trees so that they fall away from facilities and vegetation not designated for removal.

C. Completely remove and dispose of tree stumps under proposed structures, yard piping, electric duck banks, pads and roadways.

D. Stumps not under proposed facilities can remain, but must be cut to a minimum of 12 inches below finished ground surface.

E. Cut off shrubs, brush, weeds, and grasses to within 3 inches of ground surface.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SITE CLEARING FEBRUARY 8, 2019 31 10 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

3.04 GRUBBING

A. Grub areas within limits shown or specified.

3.05 STRIPPING

A. Strip areas within limits shown or specified.

B. Store topsoil on site for reuse in areas approved by the Engineer.

3.06 SCALPING

A. Scalp areas within limits shown or specified.

3.07 TREE REMOVAL

A. Remove Within Project Limits and as specified on the Drawings:

1. Dead, dying, leaning, or otherwise unsound trees that may strike and damage Project facilities in falling.

2. Trees designated by Engineer.

B. Completely remove and dispose of tree stumps under proposed structures, yard piping, electric duck banks, pads and roadways.

C. Stumps not under proposed facilities can remain, but must be cut to a minimum of 12 inches from ground surface.

3.08 SALVAGE

A. Saleable log timber may be sold to Contractor’s benefit. Promptly remove from Project Site.

3.09 DISPOSAL

A. Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping Debris:

1. Dispose of debris offsite. 2. Burning of debris onsite will not be allowed. 3. Woody debris may be chipped. Chips may be sold to Contractor’s

benefit or used for landscaping onsite as mulch or uniformly mixed with topsoil, provided that resulting mix will be fertile and not support combustion. Maximum dimensions of chipped material used onsite shall be 1/4 inch by 2 inches. Dispose of chips that are unsaleable or unsuitable for landscaping or other uses with unchipped debris.

4. Limit offsite disposal of clearing and grubbing debris to locations that are approved by federal, state, and local authorities.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SUBGRADE PREPARATION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 31 23 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 31 23 13 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Optimum Moisture Content: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

B. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and scarification and compaction of subgrade.

C. Relative Compaction: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

D. Relative Density: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

E. Subgrade: Layer of existing soil after completion of clearing, grubbing, stripping of topsoil prior to placement of fill, roadway structure or base for floor slab.

F. Proof-Rolling: Testing of subgrade by compactive effort to identify areas that will not support the future loading without excessive settlement.


A. Complete applicable Work specified in Sections 02 41 00, Demolition; 31 10 00, Site Clearing; and 31 23 16, Excavation, prior to subgrade preparation.


A. Notify Engineer when subgrade is ready for compaction or proof-rolling or whenever compaction or proof-rolling is resumed after a period of extended inactivity.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Keep subgrade free of water, debris, and foreign matter during compaction or proof-rolling.

B. Bring subgrade to proper grade and cross-section and uniformly compact surface.

697482A.GN1

SUBGRADE PREPARATION PW\DEN003\697482 31 23 13 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

C. Do not use sections of prepared ground surface as haul roads. Protect prepared subgrade from traffic.

D. Maintain prepared ground surface in finished condition until next course is placed.

3.02 COMPACTION

A. Under Earthfill: Minimum three passes with three-wheeled power roller weighing minimum 10 tons. After rolling, test compaction to confirm the upper 6 inches of the subgrade has achieved a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.

B. Under Roadways, Compacted Earthen Roads, Slabs On-Grade, or Granular Fill Under Structures: Minimum three passes with three-wheeled power roller weighing minimum 10 tons. After rolling, test compaction to confirm the upper 6 inches of the subgrade has achieved a minimum of 98 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.

3.03 MOISTURE CONDITIONING

A. Dry Subgrade: Add water, then mix to make moisture content uniform throughout.

B. Wet Subgrade: Aerate material by blading, discing, harrowing, or other methods, to hasten drying process.

3.04 TESTING

A. Proof-roll subgrade with equipment specified in Article Compaction to detect soft or loose subgrade or unsuitable material, as determined by Engineer.

B. Measure the in-place density of the prepared subgrade using ASTM D1556 or D6938.

1. Testing frequency: One test per 2,000 square feet of prepared subgrade, with a minimum of 1 test per proposed structure, slab-on-grade, mat foundations, or spread footings.

2. Acceptance Criteria: Subgrade shall be within 2 percent of the laboratory maximum dry density and 2 percent of the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SUBGRADE PREPARATION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 31 23 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

3.05 SUBGRADE PROTECTION UNDER STRUCTURES

A. Protect prepared or compacted subgrade from weather and traffic by installing a 6-inch layer of aggregate base course, meeting the requirements of Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses.

B. Protective layer under foundations and pavements, shall be compacted to minimum 98 percent of the soil’s maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557.

3.06 CORRECTION

A. Soft or Loose Subgrade:

1. Adjust moisture content and recompact, or 2. Over excavate as specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and replace

with suitable material from the excavation, as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

B. Unsuitable Material: Over excavate as specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and replace with suitable material from the excavation, as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 EXCAVATION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 31 23 16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 31 23 16 EXCAVATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Common Excavation: Removal of material not classified as rock excavation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Excavation Plan, Detailing: a. Methods and sequencing of excavation. b. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material. c. Proposed onsite and offsite spoil disposal sites. d. Numbers, types, and sizes of equipment proposed to perform

excavations. e. Anticipated difficulties and proposed resolutions.


A. Provide adequate survey control to avoid unauthorized overexcavation.

1.04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS

A. Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than 32 degrees F shall not be used as fill or backfill until material completely thaws.

B. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction.


A. Demolition: Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, prior to excavating.

B. Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping: Complete applicable Work specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, prior to excavating.

C. Dewatering: Conform to applicable requirements of Section 31 23 19.01, Dewatering, prior to initiating excavation.

697482A.GN1

EXCAVATION PW\DEN003\697482 31 23 16 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

D. Excavation Support: Install and maintain, as specified in Section 31 41 00, Shoring, as necessary to support sides of excavations and prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed Work.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions shown and as necessary to accomplish Work. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot, except where dimensions or grades are shown or specified as maximum or minimum. Allow for forms, working space, granular base, topsoil, and similar items, wherever applicable. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be deposited against earth.

B. Do not overexcavate without written authorization of Engineer.

C. Remove or protect obstructions as shown and as specified in Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Protection of Work and Property.

3.02 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION

A. Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type, nature, or condition of the materials encountered.

3.03 STRUCTURAL OVER-EXCAVATION

A. Over-excavate beneath the proposed Generator Facility and Electrical Building to a depth of 5 feet below the existing ground elevation or to a depth indicated by Engineer. The bottoms of the over-excavation area shall be 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the structure’s footprint. Over-excavate beneath the proposed Lift Station Valve Vault to a depth of 2 feet below the bottom of foundation elevation and to the perimeter of the structure’s footprint.

B. Stockpile the over-excavated material for classification and reuse.

C. Compact the bottom of the excavation as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

D. Bottom of over-excavation shall be inspected by a geotechnical engineer.

E. Backfill over-excavation as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 EXCAVATION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 31 23 16 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

3.04 TRENCH WIDTH

A. Minimum Width of Trenches:

1. Pipes: As shown in pipe trench Detail 3123-110. 2. Conduits, Direct-Buried Cables, and Duct Banks:

a. Less than 4-inch Outside Diameter or Width: 18 inches. b. Greater than 4-inch Outside Diameter or Width: 18 inches greater

than outside diameter or width of pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank.

3. Multiple Pipes, Conduits, Cables, or Duct Banks in Single Trench: 18 inches greater than aggregate width of pipes, conduits, cables, duct banks, plus space between.

4. Increase trench widths by thicknesses of sheeting.

B. Maximum Trench Width: Unlimited, unless otherwise shown or specified, or unless excess width will extend beyond property lines or cause damage to existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work.

3.05 EMBANKMENT AND CUT SLOPES

A. Shape, trim, and finish cut slopes to conform with lines, grades, and cross-sections shown, with proper allowance for topsoil or slope protection, where shown.

B. Remove stones and rock that exceed 3-inch diameter and that are loose and may roll down slope. Remove exposed roots from cut slopes.

C. Round tops of cut slopes in soil to not less than a 6-foot radius, provided such rounding does not extend offsite or outside easements and rights-of-way, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work.

3.06 STOCKPILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until material is needed.

B. Do not stockpile excavated material adjacent to trenches and other excavations, unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads.

C. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work, if weight of stockpiled material could induce excessive settlement.

697482A.GN1

EXCAVATION PW\DEN003\697482 31 23 16 - 4 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

3.07 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL

A. Dispose of excavated materials, which are unsuitable or exceed quantity needed for fill or backfill, offsite.

B. Dispose of debris resulting from removal of underground facilities as specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, for demolition debris.

C. Dispose of debris resulting from removal of organic matter, trash, refuse, and junk as specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, for clearing and grubbing debris.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 DEWATERING FEBRUARY 8, 2019 31 23 19.01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 31 23 19.01 DEWATERING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS


1. Water control plan. 2. Well permits. 3. Discharge permits. 4. Water Level Elevations Observed in Observation Wells: Submit same

day measured. 5. Settlement Benchmark Elevations: Submit weekly record.

1.02 WATER CONTROL PLAN

A. As a minimum, include:

1. Descriptions of proposed groundwater and surface water control facilities including, but not limited to, equipment; methods; standby equipment and power supply, pollution control facilities, discharge locations to be utilized, and provisions for immediate temporary water supply as required by this section.

2. Drawings showing locations, dimensions, and relationships of elements of each system.

3. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed dewatering systems and components.

B. If system is modified during installation or operation revise or amend and resubmit Water Control Plan.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Continuously control water during course of construction, including weekends and holidays and during periods of work stoppages, and provide adequate backup systems to maintain control of water.

3.02 SURFACE WATER CONTROL

A. See Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Temporary Controls.

697482A.GN1

DEWATERING PW\DEN003\697482 31 23 19.01 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

B. Remove surface runoff controls when no longer needed.

3.03 DEWATERING SYSTEMS

A. Provide, operate, and maintain dewatering systems of sufficient size and capacity to permit excavation and subsequent construction in dry and to lower and maintain groundwater level a minimum of 2 feet below the lowest point of excavation. Continuously maintain excavations free of water, regardless of source, and until backfilled to final grade.

B. Dewatering systems shall include wells or well points, and other equipment and appurtenances installed outside structural limits or limits of excavations and sufficiently below lowest point of excavation, or to maintain specified groundwater elevation.

C. Design and Operate Dewatering Systems:

1. To prevent loss of ground as water is removed. 2. To avoid inducing settlement or damage to existing facilities, completed

Work, or adjacent property. 3. To relieve artesian pressures and resultant uplift of excavation bottom.

D. Provide sufficient redundancy in each system to keep excavation free of water in event of component failure.

E. Provide 100 percent emergency power backup with automatic startup and switchover in event of electrical power failure.

F. Provide supplemental ditches and sumps only as necessary to collect water from local seeps. Do not use ditches and sumps as primary means of dewatering.

3.04 MONITORING FLOWS

A. Monitor volume of water pumped per calendar day from excavations, as Work progresses. Also monitor volume of water introduced each day into excavations for performance of Work. Monitor flows using measuring devices acceptable to Engineer. For dewatering discharge flow monitoring, a daily log of pump run times and approximate pumping rate shall be an acceptable means of flow monitoring.

3.05 DISPOSAL OF WATER

A. Obtain discharge permit for water disposal from authorities having jurisdiction.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 DEWATERING FEBRUARY 8, 2019 31 23 19.01 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

B. Treat water collected by dewatering operations, as required by regulatory agencies, prior to discharge.

C. Discharge water as required by discharge permit and in manner that will not cause erosion or flooding, or otherwise damage existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property.

D. Remove solids from treatment facilities and perform other maintenance of treatment facilities as necessary to maintain their efficiency.

E. Dewatering discharges may be directed to the temporary sedimentation basins provided that the installed skimmer can pass the flows inclusive of stormwater flows without overtopping the basin except during storm events. A sediment filter bag on the end of the discharge immediately upstream of a vegetated area is also an accepted discharge method.

3.06 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

A. Make assessment of potential for dewatering induced settlement. Provide and operate devices or systems, including but not limited to reinjection wells, infiltration trenches and cutoff walls, necessary to prevent damage to existing facilities, completed Work, and adjacent property.

B. Securely support existing facilities, completed Work, and adjacent property vulnerable to settlement due to dewatering operations. Support shall include, but not be limited to, bracing, underpinning, or compaction grouting.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 FILL AND BACKFILL FEBRUARY 7, 2019 31 23 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 31 23 23 FILL AND BACKFILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Relative Compaction:

1. Ratio, in percent, of as-compacted field dry density to laboratory maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.

2. Apply corrections for oversize material to either as-compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer.

B. Optimum Moisture Content:

1. Determined in accordance with ASTM Standard specified to determine maximum dry density for relative compaction.

2. Determine field moisture content on basis of fraction passing 3/4-inch sieve.

C. Relative Density: Calculated in accordance with ASTM D4254 based on maximum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and minimum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4254.

D. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation.

E. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of Work.

F. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material.

G. Geosynthetics: Geotextiles or geogrids.

H. Influence Area: Area within planes sloped downward and outward at 60-degree angle from horizontal measured from:

1. 1 foot outside outermost edge at base of foundations or slabs. 2. 1 foot outside outermost edge at surface of roadways or shoulder. 3. 0.5 foot outside exterior at spring line of pipes or culverts.

I. Borrow Material: Material from required excavations or from designated borrow areas on or near Site.

697482A.GN1

FILL AND BACKFILL PW\DEN003\697482 31 23 23 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

J. Selected Backfill Material: Materials available onsite that Engineer determines to be suitable for specific use.

K. Imported Material: Materials obtained from sources offsite, suitable for specified use.

L. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other facilities.

M. Embankment Material: Fill materials required to raise existing grade in areas other than under structures.

N. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the Alabama Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, 2012 Edition.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Precast structures manufacturer’s recommendations for backfill around each structure.


1. Manufacturer’s data sheets for compaction equipment. 2. Certified test results from independent testing agency including, but not

limited to, the following information: a. Test locations, including elevation or depth and horizontal

location shown on a site plan. b. Description of material tested. Identify the material using the

Unified Soil Classification System, ASTM D2487. c. Type of compaction equipment and method used. d. Test results certified by a Professional Engineer or Geologist

licensed in the state of Alabama.


A. Notify Engineer when:

1. Structure is ready for backfilling, and whenever backfilling operations are resumed after a period of inactivity.

2. Soft or loose subgrade materials are encountered wherever embankment or site fill is to be placed.

3. Fill material appears to be deviating from Specifications.

697482A.GN1



A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition; Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing; Section 31 23 16, Excavation; and Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation, prior to placing fill or backfill.

B. Backfill against concrete structures only after concrete has attained compressive strength, specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of concrete work and attained strength prior to placing backfill.

C. Backfill around water-holding structures only after completion of satisfactory leakage tests as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in Place Concrete.

D. Do not place granular base, subbase, or surfacing until after subgrade has been prepared as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Gradation Tests:

1. As necessary to locate acceptable sources of imported material. 2. During production of imported material, test as follows:

a. Earthfill: 2 tests per source. b. Granular Fill: 2 tests per source. c. Structural Fill: 2 tests per source. d. Granular Drain Material: 2 tests per source. e. Soil Cover Over Geotextiles: 2 tests per source. f. Soil Cover Over Geogrids: 2 tests per source.

2.02 EARTHFILL

A. Excavated material from required excavations free from rocks or concrete debris larger than 3 inches, from roots and other organic matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and other deleterious materials.

B. Material containing more than 10 percent gravel, stones, or shale particles is unacceptable.

C. Provide imported material of equivalent quality, if required to accomplish Work.

697482A.GN1


2.03 STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL

A. Onsite excavated material or imported material meeting the following requirements:

1. USCS Classification: SP, SP-SM in accordance with ASTM D2487. 2. Free from rocks larger than 3 inches, from roots and other organic

matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and other deleterious materials. 3. Maximum Gravel Content: 10 percent. 4. Maximum fine Content (Percent Passing No. 200 sieve): 15. 5. Non-Plastic.

B. Material containing more than 10 percent gravel, stones, or shale particles is unacceptable.

C. Provide imported material of equivalent quality, if required to accomplish Work.

2.04 GRANULAR FILL

A. Free from rocks larger than 1-1/2 inches, from dirt, clay balls, and organic material and other deleterious materials.

B. Well-graded sand from coarse to fine and containing sufficient fines to bind material when compacted, but with maximum 8 percent by weight passing No. 200 sieve.

2.05 GRANULAR DRAIN MATERIAL

A. Clean or gravelly sand with less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve, as determined in accordance with ASTM D1140.

2.06 WATER FOR MOISTURE CONDITIONING

A. Free of hazardous or toxic contaminates, or contaminants deleterious to proper compaction.

2.07 ROADWAY BASE COURSE ROCK

A. As specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses.

2.08 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION ROCK

A. Crushed rock or pit run rock.

B. Uniformly graded from coarse to fine.

C. Free from excessive dirt and other organic material.

D. Maximum 2-1/2-inch particle size.

697482A.GN1


2.09 SOIL COVER OVER GEOTEXTILES OR GEOGRIDS

A. Structural fill or earthfill material.

B. Particle Size: Maximum 1 inch.

C. Free of sharp angular pieces that may damage geotextile or geogrid.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials.

B. Place and spread fill and backfill materials in horizontal lifts of uniform thickness, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement surfaces drained of water.

C. During filling and backfilling, keep level of fill and backfill around each structure and buried tank even.

D. Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen, or if surface upon which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen.

E. If pipe, conduit, duct bank, or cable is to be laid within fill or backfill:

1. Fill or backfill to an elevation 2 feet above top of item to be laid. 2. Excavate trench for installation of item. 3. Install bedding, if applicable, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15,

Trench Backfill. 4. Install item. 5. Backfill envelope zone and remaining trench, as specified in

Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill, before resuming filling or backfilling specified in this section.

F. Tolerances:

1. Final Lines and Grades: Within a tolerance of 0.1 foot unless dimensions or grades are shown or specified otherwise.

2. Grade to establish and maintain slopes and drainage as shown. Reverse slopes are not permitted.

G. Settlement: Correct and repair any subsequent damage to structures, pavements, curbs, slabs, piping, and other facilities, caused by settlement of fill or backfill material.

697482A.GN1


3.02 BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND STRUCTURES

A. Under Facilities: Within influence area beneath structures, slabs, pavements, curbs, piping, conduits, duct banks, and other facilities, backfill with structural fill material or granular fill material, unless otherwise shown. Place material in lifts of 6-inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum of 95 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.

B. Other Areas: Backfill with earthfill to lines and grades shown, with proper allowance for topsoil thickness where shown. Place in lifts of 8-inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum 92 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.

3.03 FILL

A. Outside Influence Areas beneath Structures, Manholes, Tanks, Pavements, Curbs, Slabs, Piping, and Other Facilities: Unless otherwise shown, place earthfill as follows:

1. Allow for 6-inch thickness of topsoil where required. 2. Maximum 8-inch thick lifts. 3. Place and compact fill across full width of embankment. 4. Compact to minimum 92 percent relative compaction as determined in

accordance with ASTM D1557. 5. Dress completed embankment with allowance for topsoil, crest

surfacing, and slope protection, where applicable.

3.04 SITE TESTING

A. Gradation:

1. One sample from each 500 tons of finished product or more often as determined by Engineer, if variation in gradation is occurring, or if material appears to depart from Specifications.

2. If test results indicate material does not meet Specification requirements, terminate material placement until corrective measures are taken.

3. Remove material placed in Work that does not meet Specification requirements.

697482A.GN1


B. In-Place Density Tests: In accordance with ASTM D1556 or D6938. At least one sand cone test (ASTM D1556) shall be conducted for each five nuclear density test (ASTM D6938). The sand cone test shall be taken at the general location and elevation as one of the five nuclear density tests to verify accuracy of the nuclear test results.

1. During placement of materials, test as follows: a. Embankment Fill Material: One test every 24 vertical inches of

lift per 5,000 square feet or 370 cubic yards of material placed, whichever is more restrictive.

b. Fill and Backfill Under Structures: One test every 18 vertical inches of lift per 2,500 square feet, with minimum of 1 test per structure.

c. Graded Aggregate Base Material: As specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses.

d. Fill and Backfill demolition excavations: One test every two lifts (16 inches), per excavated area or every 2,000 square feet of backfill area, whichever produces more tests.

2. Test results showing less than the specified relative compaction are not acceptable. Removal and re-compaction of the unacceptable fill shall be done. Retesting is required.

3.05 GRANULAR BASE, SUBBASE, AND SURFACING

A. Place and Compact as specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses.

3.06 REPLACING OVEREXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. Replace excavation carried below grade lines shown or established by Engineer as follows:

1. Beneath Footings: Granular Fill material. 2. Beneath Fill or Backfill: Same material as specified for overlying fill or

backfill. 3. Beneath Slabs-On-Grade: Granular Fill material. 4. Trenches:

a. Unauthorized Overexcavation: Either trench stabilization material or pipe bedding material, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

b. Authorized Overexcavation: Trench stabilization material, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

5. Permanent Cut Slopes (Where Overlying Area is Not to Receive Fill or Backfill): a. Flat to Moderate Steep Slopes (3:1, Horizontal Run: Vertical Rise

or Flatter): Earthfill.

697482A.GN1


b. Steep Slopes (Steeper than 3:1): 1) Correct overexcavation by transitioning between overcut

areas and designed slope adjoining areas, provided such cutting does not extend offsite or outside easements and right-of-ways, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work.

2) Backfilling overexcavated areas is prohibited, unless in Engineer’s opinion, backfill will remain stable, and overexcavated material is replaced as compacted earthfill.

3.07 ACCESS ROAD SURFACING AND OTHER GRAVELED AREAS

A. Place and compact as specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses.

3.08 DEMOLITION EXCAVATION BACKFILL

A. Backfill excavations done to demolished existing buried structures with Structural Fill Material as defined above. Backfilling excavation with demolition debris is not authorized.

B. Place and compact backfill material per 3.02 Backfill Under and Around Structures.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 TRENCH BACKFILL FEBRUARY 7, 2019 31 23 23.15 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 31 23 23.15 TRENCH BACKFILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Bedding Material: Granular material upon which pipes, conduits, cables, or duct banks are placed.

B. Imported Material: Material obtained by Contractor from source(s) offsite.

C. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material.

D. Pipe Zone: Backfill zone that includes full trench width and extends from prepared trench bottom to an upper limit above top outside surface of pipe, conduit, cable or duct bank.

E. Prepared Trench Bottom: Graded trench bottom after excavation and installation of stabilization material, if required, but before installation of bedding material.

F. Relative Compaction: The ratio, in percent, of the as-compacted field dry density to the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Corrections for oversize material may be applied to either as-compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer.

G. Relative Density: As defined by ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254.

H. Selected Backfill Material: Material available onsite that Engineer determines to be suitable for a specific use.

I. Well-Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes producing a material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. Satisfying both of the following requirements, as defined in ASTM D2487:

1. Coefficient of Curvature: Greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3.

2. Coefficient of Uniformity: Greater than or equal to 4 for materials classified as gravel, and greater than or equal to 6 for materials classified as sand.

697482A.GN1

TRENCH BACKFILL PW\DEN003\697482 31 23 23.15 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature for marking tapes.


1. Certified Gradation Analysis: Submit not less than 30 days prior to delivery for imported materials or anticipated use for excavated materials, except for trench stabilization material that will be submitted prior to material delivery to Site.

2. Controlled Low Strength Material: Certified mix design and test results. Include material types and weight per cubic yard for each component of mix.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GEOTEXTILE

A. As specified in Section 31 32 19.16, Geotextile.

2.02 MARKING TAPE

A. Nondetectable:

1. Inert polyethylene, impervious to known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in soil.

2. Thickness: Minimum 5 mils. 3. Width: 3 inches. 4. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering

imprinted continuously over entire length. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape. b. Mutual Industries; Non-detectable Tape. c. Presco; Non-detectable Tape.

B. Detectable:

1. Solid aluminum foil, visible on unprinted side, encased in protective high visibility, inert polyethylene plastic jacket.

2. Foil Thickness: Minimum 0.35 mils. 3. Laminate Thickness: Minimum 5 mils. 4. Width: 3 inches. 5. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering

imprinted continuously over entire length. 6. Joining Clips: Tin or nickel-coated furnished by tape manufacturer.

697482A.GN1


7. Manufacturers and Products: a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape, Sentry Line Detectable. b. Mutual Industries; Detectable Tape. c. Presco; Detectable Tape.

C. Color: In accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code.

Color* Facility

Red Electric power lines, cables, conduit, and lightning cables

Orange Communicating alarm or signal lines, cables, or conduit

Yellow Gas, oil, steam, petroleum, or gaseous materials

Green Sewers and drain lines

Blue Potable water

Purple Reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry lines

*As specified in NEMA Z535.1, Safety Color Code.

2.03 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL

A. 1-1/2 inch minus crushed gravel or crushed rock, with gradation similar to ALDOT No. 57 or No. 89 stone.

2.04 BEDDING MATERIAL AND PIPE ZONE MATERIAL

A. Unfrozen, friable, and no clay balls, roots, or other organic material.

B. Clean or gravelly sand with less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve, as determined in accordance with ASTM D1140, or gravel or crushed rock within maximum particle size and other requirements as follows unless otherwise specified.

1. Duct Banks: 3/4-inch maximum particle size. 2. PVC Irrigation System Piping and Ductile Iron Pipe with Polyethylene

Wrap: 3/8-inch maximum particle size. 3. Pipe Under 18-Inch Diameter: 3/4-inch maximum particle size, except

1/4 inch for stainless steel pipe, copper pipe, tubing, and plastic pipe under 3-inch diameter.

4. Pipe 18-Inch Diameter and Greater: 1-1/2-inch maximum particle size for ductile iron pipe, concrete pipe, welded steel pipe, and pretensioned or prestressed concrete cylinder pipe.

5. Perforated Pipe: Granular drain material, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Fill and Backfill.

697482A.GN1


6. Conduit and Direct-Buried Cable: a. Sand, clean or clean to silty, less than 12 percent passing No. 200

sieve. b. Individual Particles: Free of sharp edges. c. Maximum Size Particle: Pass a No. 4 sieve. d. If more than 5 percent passes No. 200 sieve, the fraction that

passes No. 40 sieve shall be nonplastic as determined in accordance with ASTM D4318.

2.05 EARTH BACKFILL

A. As specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill, for earthfill.

2.06 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)

A. Select and proportion ingredients to obtain compressive strength between 50 psi and 150 psi at 28 days in accordance with ASTM D4832.

B. Materials:

1. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or Type II. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, Size 7. 3. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class F or Class C fly ash in accordance with

ASTM C618, except as modified herein: a. ASTM C618, Table 1, Loss on Ignition: Unless permitted

otherwise, maximum 3 percent. 4. Water: Clean, potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides.

2.07 CONCRETE BACKFILL

A. Provide as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2.08 GRAVEL SURFACING ROCK

A. As specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses.

2.09 TOPSOIL

A. As specified in Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation.


A. Perform gradation analysis in accordance with ASTM C136 for:

1. Earth backfill material. 2. Trench stabilization material. 3. Bedding and pipe zone material.

697482A.GN1


B. Certify Laboratory Performance of Mix Designs:

1. Controlled low strength material. 2. Concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TRENCH PREPARATION

A. Water Control:

1. Promptly remove and dispose of water entering trench as necessary to grade trench bottom and to compact backfill and install manholes, pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank. Do not place concrete, lay pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank in water. Dewatering shall be performed as specified in Section 31 23 19.01, Dewatering.

2. Remove water in a manner that minimizes soil erosion from trench sides and bottom.

3. Provide continuous water control until trench backfill is complete.

B. Remove foreign material and backfill contaminated with foreign material that falls into trench.

3.02 TRENCH BOTTOM

A. Firm Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed material, and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth. Allow space for bedding material if shown or specified.

B. Soft Subgrade: If subgrade is encountered that may require removal to prevent pipe settlement, notify Engineer. Engineer will determine depth of overexcavation, if any required.

3.03 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL INSTALLATION

A. Rebuild trench bottom with trench stabilization material.

B. Place material over full width of trench in 6-inch lifts to required grade, providing allowance for bedding thickness.

C. Compact each lift so as to provide a firm, unyielding support for the bedding material prior to placing succeeding lifts.

3.04 BEDDING

A. Furnish imported bedding material where, in the opinion of Engineer, excavated material is unsuitable for bedding or insufficient in quantity.

B. Place over full width of prepared trench bottom in two equal lifts when required depth exceeds 8 inches.

697482A.GN1


C. Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface.

D. Minimum Thickness: As follows:

1. Pipe 15 Inches and Smaller: 4 inches. 2. Pipe 18 Inches to 36 Inches: 6 inches. 3. Pipe 42 Inches and Larger: 8 inches. 4. Conduits, Direct-Buried Cables and Duct Banks: 3 inches.

E. Check grade and correct irregularities in bedding material. Loosen top 1 inch to 2 inches of compacted bedding material with a rake or by other means to provide a cushion before laying each section of pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank.

F. Install to form continuous and uniform support except at bell holes, if applicable, or minor disturbances resulting from removal of lifting tackle.

G. Bell or Coupling Holes: Excavate in bedding at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of joint and to provide uniform bearing along barrel of pipe or conduit.

3.05 BACKFILL PIPE ZONE

A. Upper limit of pipe zone shall not be less than following:

1. Pipes: 12 inches, unless shown otherwise. 2. Conduits: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise. 3. Direct-Buried Cable: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise. 4. Duct Bank: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise.

B. Restrain pipe, conduit, cables, and duct banks as necessary to prevent their movement during backfill operations.

C. Place material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of pipe and, if applicable, between pipes, conduit, cables, and duct banks installed in same trench.

1. Pipe 10-Inch and Smaller Diameter: First lift less than or equal to 1/2 pipe diameter.

2. Pipe Over 10-Inch Diameter: Maximum 6-inch lifts.

D. Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld tamping bars supplemented by “walking in” and slicing material under haunches with a shovel to ensure voids are completely filled before placing each succeeding lift.

E. Do not use power-driven impact compactors to compact pipe zone material.

697482A.GN1


F. After full depth of pipe zone material has been placed as specified, compact material by a minimum of three passes with a vibratory plate compactor only over area between sides of pipe and trench walls. Each lift shall be compacted with a minimum of two passes by either a vibratory plate compactor or a power-driven impact compactor. Take care to avoid damaging pipe and pipe coating.

3.06 MARKING TAPE INSTALLATION

A. Continuously install marking tape along centerline of buried piping, at top of pipe zone. Coordinate with piping installation drawings.

1. Detectable Marking Tape: Install with nonmetallic piping and waterlines.

2. Nondetectable Marking Tape: Install with metallic piping.

3.07 BACKFILL ABOVE PIPE ZONE

A. General:

1. Process excavated material to meet specified gradation requirements. 2. Adjust moisture content as necessary to obtain specified compaction. 3. Do not allow backfill to free fall into trench or allow heavy, sharp

pieces of material to be placed as backfill until after at least 2 feet of backfill has been provided over top of pipe.

4. Do not use power driven impact type compactors directly on top of the pipe for compaction until at least 4 feet of backfill is placed over top of pipe.

5. Backfill to grade with proper allowances for topsoil, crushed rock surfacing, wherever applicable.

6. Backfill around structures with same class backfill as specified for adjacent trench, unless otherwise shown or specified.

7. Place in lifts not exceeding thickness of 8 inches. 8. Mechanically compact each lift prior to placing succeeding lifts to a

minimum of 95 percent relative compaction as determined by ASTM D1557 prior to placing succeeding lifts.

B. Concrete Backfill (where shown or required):

1. Place above bedding. 2. Minimum Concrete Thickness: 6 inches on top and sides of pipe. 3. Do not allow dirt or foreign material to become mixed with concrete

during placement. 4. Allow sufficient time for concrete to reach initial set before additional

backfill material is placed in trench. 5. Prevent flotation of pipe.

697482A.GN1


6. Begin and end concrete backfill within 4 inches of a pipe joint on each end.

7. Do not encase pipe joints except within the limits of the concrete backfill.

C. Controlled Low Strength Material (where shown or required):

1. Discharge from truck mounted drum type mixer into trench. 2. Place in lifts as necessary to prevent uplift (flotation) of new and

existing facilities.

3.08 REPLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL

A. Replace topsoil in top 6 inches of backfilled trench.

B. Maintain finished grade of topsoil even with adjacent area and grade as necessary to restore drainage.

3.09 MAINTENANCE OF TRENCH BACKFILL

A. After each section of trench is backfilled, maintain surface of backfilled trench even with adjacent ground surface until final surface restoration is completed.

B. Gravel Surfacing Rock: Add gravel surfacing rock where applicable and as necessary to keep surface of backfilled trench even with adjacent ground surface, and grade and compact as necessary to keep surface of backfilled trenches smooth, free from ruts and potholes, and suitable for normal traffic flow.

C. Topsoil: Add topsoil where applicable and as necessary to maintain surface of backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface.

D. Other Areas: Add excavated material where applicable and keep surface of backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface.

3.10 SETTLEMENT OF BACKFILL

A. Settlement of trench backfill, or of fill, or facilities constructed over trench backfill will be considered a result of defective compaction of trench backfill.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SOIL STABILIZATION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 31 32 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 31 32 00 SOIL STABILIZATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work in the section covers soil stabilization during and after land disturbance and construction activities to control erosion and sediment deposition. This includes, but not limited to, mulching, seeding, and matting and blankets.

B. Chemical stabilization, such as polyacryliamides and tackifiers, are prohibited.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Seed certifications. 2. Copies of delivery invoices or other proof of quantities of mulch, lime,

and fertilizer. 3. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Commercial products.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. As specified in Section 32 92 00, Turf and Grasses.



B. Prepare topsoil as specified in Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation, before starting Work of this section.

C. Complete soil preparation, seeding, liming, fertilizing, mulching and matting within 10 days after final grades have been reached.

D. Notify Engineer at least 3 days in advance of:

1. Materials delivery. 2. Start of planting/seeding activity.

E. Seeding: Perform under favorable weather conditions during seasons that are normal for such Work as determined by accepted local practice.

697482A.GN1

SOIL STABILIZATION PW\DEN003\697482 31 32 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.05 MAINTENANCE

A. Operations:

1. Perform during maintenance period to include: a. Watering: Keep seeded surface moist. b. Washouts: Repair by filling with topsoil, fertilizing, seeding, and

mulching. c. Mulch: Replace wherever and whenever washed or blown away. d. Reseed unsatisfactory areas or portions thereof immediately at end

of maintenance period if a satisfactory stand has not been produced.

e. Reseed during next planting season if scheduled end of maintenance period falls after September 15.

f. Reseed entire area if satisfactory stand does not develop by July 1 of the following year.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FERTILIZER


2.02 SEED


2.03 MULCH

A. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch:

1. Specially processed wood fiber containing no growth or germination inhibiting factors.

2. Dyed suitable color to facilitate inspection of material placement. 3. Manufactured such that after addition and agitation in slurry tanks with

water, material fibers become uniformly suspended to form homogenous slurry.

4. When hydraulically sprayed on ground, material will allow absorption and percolation of moisture.

B. Straw:

1. Threshed straw of oats, wheat, barley, or rye, free from seed of noxious weeds.

2. Suitable for spreading with mulch blower equipment. 3. Average Stalk Length: 6 inches. 4. Seasoned before baling or loading.

697482A.GN1


2.04 EROSION CONTROL MATTING

A. Meeting the minimum requirements stated in the Alabama Handbook for Erosion Control, Sediment Control and Stormwater Management on Construction Sites and Urban Areas (latest edition) for:

1. Class 2.D (Temporary application). 2. Class 5.A (Permanent application).

2.05 REINFORCED PLASTIC COVERING

A. Co-extruded, copolymer laminate reinforced with nonwoven grid of high strength nylon cord submersed in a permanently flexible adhesive media allowing for equal tear resistance in all directions.

B. Black in color and ultraviolet stabilized.

C. Physical Requirement (Minimum Average Roll Values):

1. Tear Strength: 130 pounds. 2. Elongation: 620 percent.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Reef Industries, Inc., Houston, TX. 2. Griffolyn Co., Houston, TX.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SOIL PREPARATION

A. As specified in Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation.

3.02 FERTILIZER

A. Apply as specified in Section 32 92 00, Turf and Grasses.

3.03 SEEDING


3.04 MULCHING

A. Apply uniformly on seeded areas. Do not apply mulch on seeded areas that will be immediately covered with erosion control matting.

697482A.GN1

SOIL STABILIZATION PW\DEN003\697482 31 32 00 - 4 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

B. Application: Sufficiently loose to permit penetration of sunlight and air circulation, and sufficiently dense to shade ground, reduce evaporation rate, and prevent or materially reduce erosion of underlying soil.

1. Straw: Apply by hand or mechanical means to minimum depth of 2 inches.

2. Wood Cellulose Fiber: 1,000 to 1,500 pounds per acre.

3.05 EROSION CONTROL MATTING

A. Place where shown on Drawings, staple/stake in place and with the appropriate overlap in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.

3.06 REINFORCED PLASTIC COVERING

A. Place on areas where hydroseeding and erosion control matting have not controlled erosion.

B. Install in single thickness, strips parallel to direction of drainage.

C. Maintain tightly in place by using sandbags on ropes with a maximum 10-foot grid spacing in all directions.

D. Tape or weight down full length, overlap seams at least 12 inches.

E. Remove at final acceptance, unless notified otherwise by Engineer.

3.07 SOIL STOCKPILE

A. Protect from erosion with silt fence around stockpile area.

B. Stockpiles not used for a period longer than 14 days shall be seeded and mulched.


A. Upon completion of maintenance period and on written notice from Contractor, Engineer or Owner will within 15 days of receipt, determine if a satisfactory stand has been established.

B. If a satisfactory stand has not been established, Engineer of the Owner will make another determination upon written notice from Contractor following the next growing season.

697482A.GN1


3.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Soil stabilization measures shall be maintained at all times until permanent stabilization of the Site is achieved.

B. Contractor shall install and add soil stabilization measures as determined by the Engineer or the Owner.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 TREE PROTECTION AND ROOT PRUNING FEBRUARY 7, 2019 31 32 10 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 31 32 10 TREE PROTECTION AND ROOT PRUNING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This item shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment required to protect those trees designated to remain on the site. Protection of designated trees shall include directing heavy construction work activity away from the protected trees. Section includes the protection, trimming, and pruning of trees that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work, whether demolition and temporary or new construction.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 31 10 00 Site Clearing, for removal of trees and other vegetation affected by new construction.

2. Section 31 32 20, Air Spading Excavation. 3. Sections 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill and 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill

for building utility trench excavation, backfilling, compacting and grading requirements, and soil materials.

4. Section 32 92 00, Turfs and Grasses. 5. Section 32 93 00, Plants. 6. Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule from certified arborist detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.

C. Qualification Data: For tree service firm and arborist, ISA certification required.

D. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly pruned and repaired when damaged.

E. Maintenance Recommendations: From certified arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completion of the Work.

F. Provide final log of work performed including any damage that occurred during construction and subsequent repairs or equal replacements, if deemed necessary.

697482A.GN1

TREE PROTECTION AND ROOT PRUNING PW\DEN003\697482 31 32 10 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL


A. Tree Service Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site on a full-time basis during execution of the Work.

B. Arborist Qualifications: An arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture.

C. Tree Pruning Standards: Comply with ANSI A300 (Part 1), “Trees, Shrubs, and other Woody Plant Maintenance—Standard Practices (Pruning).”

D. Pre-installation Conference: Before starting tree protection and trimming, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Architect, consultants, and other concerned entities to review tree protection and trimming procedures and responsibilities.

PARTS 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials for tree/vegetation protection barriers shall conform to the following requirements and AOBE:

1. Mesh Construction Fencing by Conwed or Approved Equal (orange or green color).

2. Cedar Posts (minimum length 6.0 feet). 3. No. 14 gauge steel wire.

B. Temporary Signs: White or yellow weatherproof material, 8-inch by 40-inch minimum, with 3-inch black letter: text – “Tree Protection Area – Do Not Enter”.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing around the tree protection zones designated on the Drawings or where directed by the Engineer to protect remaining vegetation from construction damage. Maintain temporary fence and remove when construction is complete.

B. Temporary Signs: Install temporary signs 60 feet apart, or two per protected tree, whichever is greater, on posts of temporary fencing. Maintain temporary signs and remove when construction is complete.

697482A.GN1


C. Tree Trunk Protection: The Contractor shall provide 2 inches by 8 inches by 8-foot boards, banded continuously around each trunk to prevent scarring of trees shown on the plans or designated by the Certified Arborist. For multi-stem trees, saplings, and shrubs to be protected within the area of construction, temporary fencing may be used for trunk protection. The Contractor shall repair or replace any and all damaged plant material determined by the Certified Arborist to any existing or newly installed plant material at its own expense. Unnecessary damage to ground cover or turf shall be repaired or replaced as specified for restoration of similar areas within the plans, or as directed by the Certified Arborist, and shall be at the Contractor's expense.

D. Root Zone Protection: During the entire construction period all reasonable efforts shall be made to protect from damage those trees and their root system designated to remain. Around the trees to be protected, the Contractor shall avoid excessive excavation or compaction and damage during the removal of trees and shrubs designated to be removed. All plant material designated to be saved, or outside of the limits of construction, shall be protected during subsequent construction work. Work under these items will include construction and maintenance of temporary fencing to protect the root zones of existing trees and other plantings, construction and maintenance of tree trunk protection.

1. A protection barrier or temporary fence of at least 4 feet in height shall be installed around each tree to be protected and preserved. The tree protection shall be installed prior to the actual construction start and maintained for the duration of the project.

2. Within this protection zone, construction materials shall not be stored, equipment operated and/or temporary storage buildings or work trailers placed.

3. The protection barrier shall be constructed of orange snow fencing securely fastened to fence posts spaced a maximum of 5 feet on center. Posts are 6 feet in length with 2 feet set into the ground and 4 feet extending above ground. The fencing shall be attached to the post with a minimum of 44 nylon-locking ties evenly placed at each post.

E. Placement of all protection fencing shall be located per the Drawings. If protection fencing cannot be placed per Drawings, the Landscape Architect shall be notified in writing, and a solution must be executed prior to any demolition or other construction work commences.

F. Left over materials shall be disposed of in accordance with specifications.

G. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.

697482A.GN1


H. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material inside tree protection zones. Do not permit vehicles or foot traffic within tree protection zones; prevent soil compaction over root systems.

I. Do not allow fires under or adjacent to remaining trees or other plants.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. Install shoring or other protective support systems to minimize shoring or benching of excavations.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks and comb soil to expose roots.

1. Relocate roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and relocate them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and relocation is not practical; cut roots approximately 3 inches back from new construction.

2. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect

3. Do not allow heavy equipment in tree protection areas. All excavation work is to be performed by hand.

D. Root Pruning: Do not cut main lateral roots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities or construction. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

E. When excavating, place excavated soil on opposite side of trench from tree.

3.03 ROOT PRUNING

A. Root pruning shall take place only where the roots of existing trees have been damaged by the Contractor during construction of the Project, as directed by the Certified Arborist.

B. If construction is to occur within the root zone of existing plant material, root pruning and special plant care including fertilizing and watering will be required, as directed by the Certified Arborist and hereinafter specified. Prior to root pruning, remove all weeds growing in existing tree mulch rings. Root pruning using an approved mechanical root pruning saw shall be performed prior to digging where noted on the plans, or directed by the Certified Arborist.

697482A.GN1


Air Spading excavation consisting of hand and/or pneumatic excavation may be required if indicated on plans or as directed by Certified Arborist. Whenever roots of plant material to remain are exposed during construction, the damaged root ends are to be removed by cutting them off cleanly.

C. Initial watering shall be performed on all trees, which are designated for root pruning. Water trees immediately by thoroughly saturating root balls and provide a horticultural watering bag, such as a Gator Bag or equivalent, filled with water to keep root balls thoroughly saturated during first three weeks following root pruning. Thereafter refill bags as required, according to weather conditions, to keep root balls in a moist condition during growing seasons, through the duration of the Project. Test root balls for optimal moisture once a week using a soil auger.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for location of all utilities prior to installation of trees. Notification of the local Utilities Alert Network is required for all planting sites.

E. All pruning shall be overseen by a professional arborist (someone whose principal occupation is the care and maintenance of trees). All pruning shall be done according to the National Arborist Association's Pruning Standards for Shade Trees Class 11 - Standard Pruning Specifications.

F. Any damage to the root zone, as determined by the Certified Arborist, will be compensated by pruning an equivalent amount of the top vegetative growth of the material within 1 week following root damage, fertilization and supplemental watering.

G. Fertilize damaged trees with fertilizer that promotes root growth. Fertilizer nutrients shall be applied within 48 hours after root damage occurs. Fertilizer nutrients shall be applied within 48 hours after root damage occurs. A fertilizer with a 1: 1: 1 ratio shall be applied at the rate of .5 pounds of nutrients per 1,000 square feet (2 kg per 90 square meters).

H. Application shall be accomplished by placing dry fertilizer in holes in the soil. The holes shall be 8 inches to 12 inches deep and spaced 24 inches apart in an area beginning 30 inches from the base of the plant. Holes can be punched with a punch bar, dug with a spade, drilled with an auger or any other method approved by the Certified Arborist.

I. Approximately 0.02 pounds of fertilizer nutrients shall be placed in each hole, 250 holes per 1,000 square feet. Fertilizer Nutrients shall not be measured for payment but considered incidental to root pruning. If the Certified Arborist determines that the whole method of fertilizer placement is not practical or desirable, an approved method of uniform surface application will be allowed. Neither separate measurement nor payment will be made for fertilization, but will be considered incidental to the cost of Tree Protection.

697482A.GN1


J. Supplemental water shall be applied within 48 hours of any root damage. The water shall be applied at the rate of 7 quarts per square yard of surface area within the root zone of plant material having sustained damage to the root zone. Root zone shall be calculated as the areas, which extend three meters beyond the limits of the crown’s branches. Subsequent weekly watering shall be applied if deemed necessary by the Certified Arborist. Neither separate measurement nor payment will be made for supplemental watering but will be considered incidental to the cost of Tree Protection.

K. The Contractor shall repair or replace any and all damage determined by the Certified Arborist to any existing or newly installed plant material at its own expense. Unnecessary damage to ground cover or turf shall be repaired or replaced as specified for restoration of similar areas within the plans, or as directed by the Certified Arborist, and shall be at the Contractor's expense.

L. Materials shall be disposed of in accordance with Specifications.

3.04 REGRADING

A. Do not fill within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where filling for new construction is required within drip line of trees, perform work by hand to minimize damage to root systems. Where existing grade is below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil by hand in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations.

3.05 TREE PRUNING

A. Prune trees to remain that are affected by temporary and permanent construction.

B. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1).

C. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. Clean all pruning instruments with antimicrobial solution between performing work on separate trees to avoid the potential spread of pathogens.

D. Chip removed tree branches and uses as organic mulch or dispose of offsite.

3.06 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist’s written instructions.

697482A.GN1


B. Remove and replace dead and damaged trees that arborist determines to be incapable of restoring to a normal growth pattern.

1. Provide new trees of a 6-inch caliber size and of a species selected by Landscape Architect when damaged trees more than 6-inch caliber size, measured at breast height, are required to be replaced. a. Planting New Trees: Comply with Details in Drawings. b. Warranty and Maintenance Period: One year.

C. Aerate surface soil, compacted during construction, 10 feet (3 m) beyond drip line. Drill 2-inch diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) deep at 24 inches o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and sand.

3.07 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Burning is not permitted.

B. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, and excess chips from Owner’s property. Disposal shall be in a legal manner.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 GEOTEXTILE FEBRUARY 7, 2019 31 32 19.16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 31 32 19.16 GEOTEXTILE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Fabric: Geotextile, a permeable geosynthetic comprised solely of textiles.

B. Maximum Average Roll Value (MaxARV): Maximum of series of average roll values representative of geotextile furnished.

C. Minimum Average Roll Value (MinARV): Minimum of series of average roll values representative of geotextile furnished.

D. Nondestructive Sample: Sample representative of finished Work, prepared for testing without destruction of Work.

E. Overlap: Distance measured perpendicular from overlapping edge of one sheet to underlying edge of adjacent sheet.

F. Seam Efficiency: Ratio of tensile strength across seam to strength of intact geotextile, when tested according to ASTM D4884.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer material specifications and product literature.


1. Certifications from each geotextile manufacturer that furnished products have specified property values. Certified property values shall be either minimum or maximum average roll values, as appropriate, for geotextiles furnished.

2. Field seam efficiency test results.


A. Deliver each roll with sufficient information attached to identify it for inventory and quality control.

B. Handle products in manner that maintains undamaged condition.

C. Do not store products directly on ground. Ship and store geotextile with suitable wrapping for protection against moisture and ultraviolet exposure. Store geotextile in way that protects it from elements. If stored outdoors, elevate and protect geotextile with waterproof cover.

697482A.GN1

GEOTEXTILE PW\DEN003\697482 31 32 19.16 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL


A. Where geotextile is to be laid directly upon ground surface, prepare subgrade as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation, first.

B. Notify Engineer whenever geotextiles are to be placed. Do not place geotextile without Engineer’s approval of underlying materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NONWOVEN GEOTEXTILE

A. Pervious sheet of polyester, polypropylene, or polyethylene fabricated into stable network of fibers that retain their relative position with respect to each other. Nonwoven geotextile shall be composed of continuous or discontinuous (staple) fibers held together through needle-punching, spun-bonding, thermal-bonding, or resin-bonding.

B. Geotextile Edges: Selvaged or otherwise finished to prevent outer material from pulling away from geotextile.

C. Unseamed Sheet Width: Minimum 12 feet.

D. Physical Properties: Conform to requirements in Table No. 2.

Table No. 2 Physical Property Requirements for Nonwoven Geotextile

Property Requirement Test Method

Water Permittivity 0.5 sec.-1, MinARV ASTM D4491 (Falling Head)

Apparent Opening Size (AOS)

No. 100 U.S. Standard Sieve Size

ASTM D4751

Grab Tensile Strength, Machine Direction

375 lb/in, MinARV ASTM D4632

Grab Elongation, Machine Direction

50 percent, MaxARV ASTM D4632

Puncture Strength 225 lb, MinARV ASTM D4833

Trapezoid Tear Strength 125 lb, MinARV ASTM D4533

Ultraviolet Radiation Resistance

70 percent strength retention, MinARV after 500 hours

ASTM D4355

697482A.GN1


2.02 SEWING THREAD

A. Polypropylene, polyester, or Kevlar thread.

B. Durability: Equal to or greater than durability of geotextile sewn.

2.03 SECURING PINS

A. Steel Rods or Bars:

1. 3/16-inch diameter. 2. Pointed at one end. 3. With head on other end sufficiently large to retain washer. 4. Minimum Length: 12 inches.

B. Steel Washers for Securing Pins:

1. Outside Diameter: Not less than 1.5 inches. 2. Inside Diameter: 1/4 inch. 3. Thickness: 1/8 inch.

C. Steel Wire Staples:

1. U-shaped. 2. 10-gauge. 3. Minimum Length: 6 inches.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LAYING GEOTEXTILE

A. Lay and maintain geotextile smooth and free of tension, folds, wrinkles, or creases.

3.02 SHEET ORIENTATION ON SLOPES

A. Orient geotextile with long dimension of each sheet parallel to direction of slope.

B. Geotextile may be oriented with long dimension of sheet transverse to direction of slope only if sheet width, without unsewn seams, is sufficient to cover entire slope and anchor trench and to extend at least 18 inches beyond toe of slope.

697482A.GN1


3.03 JOINTS

A. Unseamed Joints:

1. Overlapped. 2. Overlap, unless otherwise shown:

a. Foundation/Subgrade Stabilization: Minimum 18 inches. b. Riprap: Minimum 18 inches. c. Drain Trenches: Minimum 18 inches, except overlap shall equal

trench width if trench width is less than 18 inches. d. Other Applications: Minimum 12 inches.

B. Sewn Seams: Made wherever stress transfer from one geotextile sheet to another is necessary. Sewn seams, as approved by Engineer, also may be used instead of overlap at joints for applications that do not require stress transfer.

1. Seam Efficiency: a. Minimum 70 percent. b. Verified by preparing and testing minimum of one set of

nondestructive Samples per acre of each type and weight of geotextile installed.

c. Tested according to ASTM D4884. 2. Types:

a. Preferred: “J” type seams. b. Acceptable: Flat or butterfly seams.

3. Stitch Count: Minimum three to maximum seven stitches per inch. 4. Stitch Type: Double-thread chainstitch according to ASTM D6193. 5. Sewing Machines: Capable of penetrating four layers of geotextile. 6. Stitch Location: 2 inches from geotextile sheet edges, or more, if

necessary to develop required seam strength.

3.04 SECURING GEOTEXTILE

A. Secure geotextile during installation as necessary with sandbags or other means approved by Engineer.

B. Secure Geotextile with Securing Pins or Staples:

1. Insert securing pins with washers through geotextile. 2. Securing Pin Alignment:

a. Midway between edges of overlaps. b. 6 inches from free edges.

697482A.GN1


3. Spacing of Securing Pins:

Slope Maximum Pin Spacing

Steeper than 3:1 2 feet

3:1 to 4:1 3 feet

Flatter than 4:1 5 feet

4. Install additional pins across each geotextile sheet as necessary to prevent slippage of geotextile or to prevent wind from blowing geotextile out of position.

5. Push each securing pin through geotextile until washer bears against geotextile and secures it firmly to subgrade.

6. Where staples are used instead of securing pins, install in accordance with alignment and spacing above. Push in to secure geotextile firmly to subgrade.

3.05 PLACING PRODUCTS OVER GEOTEXTILE

A. If tears, punctures, or other geotextile damage occurs during placement of overlying products, remove overlying products as necessary to expose damaged geotextile. Repair damage as specified in Article Repairing Geotextile.

3.06 INSTALLING GEOTEXTILE IN TRENCHES

A. Place geotextile in a way to completely envelope granular drain material to be placed in trench and with specified overlap at joints. Overlap geotextile in direction of flow. Place geotextile in a way and with sufficient slack for geotextile to contact trench bottom and sides fully when trench is backfilled.

B. After granular drain material is placed to required grade, fold geotextile over top of granular drain material, unless otherwise shown. Maintain overlap until overlying fill or backfill is placed.

3.07 SILT FENCE APPLICATIONS

A. Install geotextile in one piece, or continuously sewn to make one piece, for full length and height of fence, including portion of geotextile buried in toe trench.

B. Install bottom edge of sheet in toe trench and backfill in a way that securely anchors geotextile in trench.

C. Securely fasten geotextile to wire mesh backing and each support post in a way that will not result in tearing of geotextile when fence is subjected to service loads.

D. Promptly repair or replace silt fence that becomes damaged.

697482A.GN1


3.08 REPAIRING GEOTEXTILE

A. Repair or replace torn, punctured, flawed, deteriorated, or otherwise damaged geotextile.

B. Repair Procedure:

1. Place patch of undamaged geotextile over damaged area and at least 18 inches in all directions beyond damaged area.

2. Remove interfering material as necessary to expose damaged geotextile for repair.

3. Sew patches or secure them with heat fusion tacking or with pins and washers, as specified above in Article Securing Geotextile, or by other means approved by Engineer.

3.09 REPLACING CONTAMINATED GEOTEXTILE

A. Protect geotextile from contamination that would interfere, in Engineer’s opinion, with its intended function. Remove and replace contaminated geotextile with clean geotextile.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SHORING FEBRUARY 7, 2019 31 41 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 31 41 00 SHORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS


1. Excavation support plan. 2. Movement monitoring plan. 3. Trench excavation plan. 4. Movement measurement and data and reduced results indicating

movement trends.


A. Provide surveys to monitor movements of critical facilities.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Design, provide, and maintain shoring, sheeting, and bracing as necessary to support the sides of excavations and to prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed the Work.

3.02 EXCAVATION SUPPORT PLAN

A. Prepare excavation support plan addressing following topics:

1. Details of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions for worker protection from hazards of caving ground.

2. Design assumptions and calculations. 3. Methods and sequencing of installing excavation support. 4. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material. 5. Minimum lateral distance from the crest of slopes for vehicles and

stockpiled excavated materials. 6. Anticipated difficulties and proposed resolutions.

697482A.GN1

SHORING PW\DEN003\697482 31 41 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

3.03 MOVEMENT MONITORING PLAN

A. Prepare movement monitoring plan addressing following topics:

1. Survey control. 2. Location of monitoring points. 3. Plots of data trends. 4. Interval between surveys.

3.04 REMOVAL OF EXCAVATION SUPPORT

A. Remove excavation support in a manner that will maintain support as excavation is backfilled.

B. Do not begin to remove excavation support until support can be removed without damage to existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property.

C. Remove excavation support in a manner that does not leave voids in the backfill.

3.05 TRENCHES

A. For trench excavation exceeding 5 feet in depth, provide adequate safety system meeting requirements of applicable state and local construction safety orders, and federal requirements.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES FEBRUARY 7, 2019 32 11 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 32 11 23 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Completed Course: Compacted, unyielding, free from irregularities, with smooth, tight, even surface, true to grade, line, and cross-section.

B. Completed Lift: Compacted with uniform cross-section thickness.

A. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the Alabama Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, Latest Edition.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Certified Test Results on Source Materials: Submit copies from commercial testing laboratory 15 days prior to delivery of materials to Project showing materials meeting the physical qualities specified.

2. Certified results of in-place density tests from independent testing agency.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

A. Meeting the requirements of Type A or B Crushed Aggregate Base Material in Section 825 of the ALDOT Standard Specifications.

B. For gravel surface applications, Type A crushed aggregate base material in accordance with Section 825 shall be used.


A. Perform tests necessary to locate acceptable source of materials meeting specified requirements.

B. Final approval of aggregate material will be based on test results of installed materials.

C. Should separation of coarse from fine materials occur during processing or stockpiling, immediately change methods of handling materials to correct uniformity in grading.

697482A.GN1

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES PW\DEN003\697482 32 11 23 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. As specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

B. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of subgrade before placing surface course.

C. Do not place surface course or surfacing materials in snow or on soft, muddy, or frozen subgrade.

3.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Compaction Equipment: Adequate in design and number to provide compaction and to obtain specified density for each layer.

3.03 HAULING AND SPREADING

A. Hauling Materials:

1. Do not haul over surfacing in process of construction. 2. Loads: Of uniform capacity. 3. Maintain consistent gradation of material delivered; loads of widely

varying gradations will be cause for rejection.

B. Spreading Materials:

1. Distribute material to provide required density, depth, grade, and dimensions with allowance for subsequent lifts.

2. Produce even distribution of material upon roadway or prepared surface without segregation.

3. Should segregation of coarse from fine materials occur during placing, immediately change methods of handling materials to correct uniformity in grading.

3.04 CONSTRUCTION OF COURSES

A. Untreated Aggregate Base Course:

1. Maximum Completed Lift Thickness: 8 inches. 2. Completed Course Total Thickness: As shown. 3. Spread lift on preceding course to required cross-section. 4. Lightly blade and roll surface until thoroughly compacted.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES FEBRUARY 7, 2019 32 11 23 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

5. Add keystone to achieve compaction and as required when aggregate does not compact readily due to lack of fines or natural cementing properties, as follows: a. Use leveling course or surfacing material as keystone. b. Spread evenly on top of surface course, using spreader boxes or

chip spreaders. c. Roll surface until keystone is worked into interstices of surface

course without excessive displacement. d. Continue operation until course has become thoroughly keyed,

compacted, and will not creep or move under roller. 6. Blade or broom surface to maintain true line, grade, and cross-section.

3.05 ROLLING AND COMPACTION

A. Commence compaction of each layer of surface after spreading operations and continue until density of 95 percent of maximum density has been achieved as determined by AASHTO T99.

B. Roll each layer of material until material does not creep under roller before succeeding layer is applied.

C. Commence rolling at outer edges and continue toward center; do not roll center of road first.

D. Apply water as needed to obtain specified densities.

E. Place and compact each lift to required density before succeeding lift is placed.

F. Surface Defects: Remedy by loosening and rerolling. Reroll entire area, including surrounding surface, until thoroughly compacted.

G. Finished surface shall be true to grade and crown before proceeding with surfacing.

3.06 SURFACE TOLERANCES

A. Blade or otherwise work surfacing as necessary to maintain grade and cross-section at all times, and to keep surface smooth and thoroughly compacted.

B. Finished Surface of Untreated Aggregate Surface Course: Within plus or minus 0.04 foot of grade shown at any individual point.

697482A.GN1

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES PW\DEN003\697482 32 11 23 - 4 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL


A. In-Place Density Tests:

1. Provide testing laboratory at least 2 hours advance notification prior to testing.

2. Refer to Table 1 for minimum sampling and testing requirements for aggregate surface course.

Table 1 Minimum Sampling and Testing Requirements

Property Test Method Frequency Sampling

Point

Gradation AASHTO T11 and AASHTO T27

One sample every 20 tons but at least every 4 hours of production

Roadbed after processing

Moisture Density (Maximum Density)

AASHTO T99, Method D

One test for every aggregate grading produced

Production output or stockpile

In-Place Density and Moisture Content

ALDOT-222 One for each 20 ton but at least every 2,000 sq ft of area

In-place completed, compacted area

3.08 CLEANING

A. Remove excess material from the Work area. Clean stockpile and staging areas of all excess aggregate.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 ASPHALT PAVING FEBRUARY 7, 2019 32 12 16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. M17, Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous

Paving Mixtures. b. M81, Standard Specification for Cut-Back Asphalt (Rapid Curing

Type). c. M82, Standard Specification for Cut-Back Asphalt (Medium

Curing Type). d. M140, Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt. e. M156, Standard Specification for Requirements for Mixing Plants

for Hot-mixed, Hot-laid Bituminous Paving Mixes. f. M208, Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. g. R35, Standard Practice for Superpave Volumetric Design for Hot

Mix Asphalt. h. T166, Standard Method of Test for Bulk Specific Gravity (Gmb)

of Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens.

i. T176 Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test.

j. T209, Standard Method of Test for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity (Gmm) and Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA).

k. T245, Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Asphalt Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus.

l. T246, Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Deformation and Cohesion of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) by Means of Hveem Apparatus.

m. T247, Standard Method of Test for Preparation of Test Specimens of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) by Means of California Kneading Compactor.

n. T283, Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) to Moisture-Induced Damage.

o. T304, Standard Method of Test for Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate.

p. T312, Standard Method of Test for Preparing and Determining the Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Specimens by Means of a Superpave Gyratory Compactor.

697482A.GN1

ASPHALT PAVING PW\DEN003\697482 32 12 16 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

2. Asphalt Institute (AI): a. Manual Series No. 2 (MS-2), Mix Design Methods for Asphalt

Concrete. b. Superpave Series No. 2 (SP-2), Superpave Mix Design.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D75, Standard Method of Test for Sampling of Aggregates. b. D140, Standard Method of Test for Sampling Bituminous

Materials. c. D979, Standard Method of Test for Sampling Bituminous Paving

Mixtures. d. D2041, Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific

Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures. e. D2489, Standard Method of Test for Determining Degree of

Particle Coating of Asphalt Mixtures. f. D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit,

and Plasticity Index of Soils. g. D4791, Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated

Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate. h. D5821, Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of

Fractured Particles in Coarse Aggregate. i. E329 REV A, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in

Construction Inspection Testing, or Special Inspection.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Combined Aggregate: All mineral constituents of asphalt concrete mix, including mineral filler and separately sized aggregates.

B. Maximum Aggregate Size: One sieve size larger than the nominal aggregate size.

C. Nominal Aggregate Size: One sieve size larger than the first sieve that retains more than 10 percent aggregate.

D. Prime Coat: Low viscosity cutback or emulsified asphalt applied to granular base in preparation of paving to coat and bond loose materials, harden the surface, plug voids, prevent moisture migration, and provide adhesion.

E. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP): Removed and/or processed pavement materials containing binder and aggregate.

F. Seal Coat: Term used for various applications of emulsified asphalt, with or without sand or aggregate, to protect the asphalt surface from aging due to wear, degradation from the sun, wind, and water. Also used to improve skid resistance and aesthetics. The term seal coat can be used to define fog seal, slurry seal, chip seal or sand seal, depending on application.

697482A.GN1


G. Standard Specifications: Alabama Department of Transportation (ALDOT), Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, latest edition. Tack Coat: Thin layer of emulsified asphalt applied to hard surfaces, including new pavement lifts, to promote adhesion and bonding.

H. Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA): Generic term used to describe reduction in production, paving and compaction temperatures achieved through application of one or combination of several WMA technologies. Technologies involve HMA plant foaming processes and equipment, mineral additives, or chemicals that allow reduction of mix production to temperatures between 185 degrees F to 275 degrees F (85 degrees C to 135 degrees C).

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Asphalt Concrete Mix Formula: a. Submittal to include the following information:

1) Gradation and portion for each aggregate constituent used in mixture to produce a single gradation of aggregate within specified limits.

2) Bulk specific gravity for each aggregate constituent. 3) Measured maximum specific gravity of mix at optimum

asphalt content determined in accordance with ASTM D2041.

4) Percent of asphalt lost due to absorption by aggregate. 5) Index of Retained Strength (TSR) at optimum asphalt

content as determined by AASHTO T283. 6) Percentage of asphalt cement, to nearest 0.1 percent, to be

added to mixture. 7) Optimum mixing temperature. 8) Optimum compaction temperature. 9) Temperature-viscosity curve of asphalt cement to be used. 10) Brand name of any additive to be used and percentage

added to mixture. 2. Test Report for Asphalt Cement: Show appropriate test method(s) for

each material and the test results.


A. Qualifications:

1. Independent Testing Laboratory: In accordance with ASTM E329 REV A.

2. Asphalt concrete mix formula shall be prepared by approved certified independent laboratory under the supervision of a certified asphalt technician.

697482A.GN1


1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Temperature: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when ground temperature is lower than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or air temperature is lower than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C). Measure ground and air temperature in shaded areas away from heat sources or wet surfaces.

B. Moisture: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when application surface is wet.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Prime Coat: Cutback asphalt, conform to Section of the Standard Specifications.

B. Tack Coat:

1. Emulsified Asphalt for Tack Coat or Seal Coat: conform to Section 405 of the Standard Specifications.

2.02 ASPHALT CONCRETE MIX

A. General:

1. Mix formula shall not be modified except with written approval of Engineer.

2. Source Changes: a. Should material source(s) change, establish new asphalt concrete

mix formula before new material(s) is used. b. Make adjustments in gradation or asphalt content as necessary to

meet design criteria.

B. Asphalt Concrete: Section 416-A Improved Bituminous Concrete from 1992 edition of ALDOT Standard Specifications and Standard Drawing 1 from the City of Mobile Right-of-Way Standard Drawings.

C. Composition: Hot-plant mix of aggregate, mineral filler if required, and paving grade asphalt cement. The several aggregate fractions shall be sized, uniformly graded, and combined in such proportions that resulting mixture meets grading requirements of mix formula.

697482A.GN1


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Traffic Control:

1. In accordance with Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls.

2. Minimize inconvenience to traffic, but keep vehicles off freshly treated or paved surfaces to avoid pickup and tracking of asphalt.

B. Driveways: Repave driveways from which pavement was removed. Leave driveways in as good or better condition than before start of construction.

3.02 LINE AND GRADE

A. Provide and maintain intermediate control of line and grade, independent of underlying base, to meet finish surface grades and minimum thickness.

B. Shoulders: Construct to line, grade, and cross-section shown.

3.03 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT

A. In accordance with Section 410 of the ALDOT Standard Specifications.

3.04 PREPARATION

A. Prepare subgrade as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

B. Existing Roadway:

1. Modify profile by grinding, milling, or overlay methods as approved, to provide meet lines and surfaces and to produce smooth riding connection to existing facility.

2. Remove existing material to a minimum depth of 1 inch (25 millimeters).

3. Paint edges of meet line with tack coat prior to placing new pavement.

C. Thoroughly coat edges of contact surfaces (curbs, manhole frames) with emulsified asphalt or asphalt cement prior to laying new pavement. Prevent staining of adjacent surfaces.

3.05 PAVEMENT APPLICATION

A. General: Place asphalt concrete mixture on approved, prepared base in conformance with Section 410 of the ALDOT Standard Specifications.

697482A.GN1


3.06 PAVEMENT OVERLAY

A. Preparation:

1. Remove fatty asphalt, grease drippings, dust, and other deleterious matter.

2. Surface Depressions: Fill with asphalt concrete mix, and thoroughly compact.

3. Damaged Areas: Remove broken or deteriorated asphalt concrete and patch as specified in Article Patching.

4. Portland Cement Concrete Joints: Remove joint filler to minimum 1/2 inch (12 millimeters) below surface.

B. Application:

1. Tack Coat: As specified in Section 410 of the ALDOT Standard Specifications.

2. Place and compact asphalt concrete as specified in Article Pavement Application.

3. Place first layer to include widening of pavement and leveling of irregularities in surface of existing pavement.

4. When leveling irregular surfaces and raising low areas, the actual compacted thickness of any one lift shall not exceed 2 inches (50 millimeters).

5. Actual compacted thickness of intermittent areas of 120 square yards (100 square meters) or less may exceed 2 inches (50 millimeters), but not 4 inches (100 millimeters).

6. Final wearing layer shall be of uniform thickness, and meet grade and cross-section as shown.

3.07 PATCHING

A. Preparation:

1. Remove damaged, broken, or unsound asphalt concrete adjacent to patches. Trim to straight lines exposing smooth, sound, vertical edges.

2. Prepare patch subgrade as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

B. Application:

1. Patch Thickness: 3 inches (75 millimeters) or thickness of adjacent asphalt concrete, whichever is greater.

2. Place asphalt concrete mix across full width of patch in layers of equal thickness.

3. Spread and grade asphalt concrete with hand tools or mechanical spreader, depending on size of area to be patched.

697482A.GN1


C. Compaction:

1. Roll patches with power rollers capable of providing compression of 200 pounds per linear inch to 300 pounds per linear inch (350 Newtons per linear centimeter to 525 Newtons per linear centimeter). Use hand tampers where rolling is impractical.

2. Begin rolling top course at edges of patches, lapping adjacent asphalt surface at least one-half the roller width. Progress toward center of patch overlapping each preceding track by at least one-half width of roller.

3. Make sufficient passes over entire area to remove roller marks and to produce desired finished surface.

D. Tolerances:

1. Finished surface shall be flush with and match grade, slope, and crown of adjacent surface.

2. Tolerance: Surface smoothness shall not deviate more than plus 1/4 inch (6 millimeters) or minus 0 inch when straightedge is laid across patched area between edges of new pavement and surface of old surfacing.


A. General: Provide services of approved certified independent testing laboratory to conduct tests.

B. Field Density Tests:

1. Perform tests from cores or sawed samples in accordance with AASHTO T166.

2. Measure with properly operating and calibrated nuclear density gauge in accordance with ASTM D2950.

3. Maximum Density: In accordance with ASTM D2041, using sample of mix taken prior to compaction from same location as density test sample.

C. Testing Frequency:

1. Quality Control Tests: a. Asphalt Content, Aggregate Gradation: Once per every 500 tons

(400 mg) of mix or once every 4 hours, whichever is greater. b. Mix Design Properties, Measured Maximum (Rice’s) Specific

Gravity: Once every 1,000 tons (900 mg) or once every 8 hours, whichever is greater.

2. Density Tests: Once every 500 tons (450 mg) of mix or once every 4 hours, whichever is greater.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 CURBS AND SIDEWALKS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 32 16 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 32 16 00 CURBS AND SIDEWALKS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): T 99, Standard Specification for the Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 kg (5.5 pound) Rammer and a 305 mm (12 inches) Drop.

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. b. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming

Compounds for Curing Concrete. c. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint

Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). 4. Standard Specification: Alabama Department of Transportation

(ALDOT) Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, latest edition.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational Submittals: Ready-mix delivery ticket for each truck in accordance with ASTM C94.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to the state of Alabama Standard Specifications for Highway Construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Curb and Gutter: Conform to the requirements of Section 623, Curb, Gutter and Combination Curb and Gutter, Standard Specification.

B. Sidewalks: Conform to Section 618, Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways, of the ALDOT Standard Specifications.

2.02 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER

A. Preformed asphalt-impregnated, expansion joint material meeting ASTM D994, 1/2-inch thick.

697482A.GN1

CURBS AND SIDEWALKS PW\DEN003\697482 32 16 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

2.03 CONCRETE

A. Curb and Gutter: Conform to the requirements of Section 623, Curb, Gutter and Combination Curb and Gutter, Standard Specification.

B. Sidewalks: Conform to Class A concrete from Section 501, Structural Portland Cement Concrete, of the ALDOT Standard Specifications.

2.04 CURING COMPOUND

A. Liquid membrane forming, clear or translucent, suitable for spray application and meeting ASTM C309, Type 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Perform Work in accordance with the referenced ALDOT Standard Specifications Sections 618 and 623.

3.02 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Prior to placing concrete, remove water from excavation and debris and foreign material from forms.

B. Place concrete as soon as possible, and within 1-1/2 hours after adding cement to mix without segregation or loss of ingredients, and without splashing.

C. Place, process, finish, and cure concrete in accordance with applicable requirements of ACI 304, and this section. Wherever requirements differ, the more stringent shall govern.

D. To compact, vibrate until concrete becomes uniformly plastic.

3.03 CURB CONSTRUCTION

A. Perform Work in accordance with the referenced ALDOT Standard Specifications Sections 623.

3.04 SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION

A. Perform Work in accordance with the referenced ALDOT Standard Specifications Sections 618.

B. Thickness: As specified on plans.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 FENCES AND GATES FEBRUARY 8, 2019 32 31 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 32 31 13 FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A121, Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel

Barbed Wire. b. A313/A313M, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring

Wire. c. A497/A497M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete. d. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain

Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. e. A780, Standard Specification for Repair of Damaged and

Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dipped Galvanized Coatings. f. A824, Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled

Tension Wire for Use with Chain Link Fence. g. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and

Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

h. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. i. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. j. C387, Standard Specifications for Packaged, Dry, Combined

Materials for Mortar and Concrete. k. F626, Standard Specification for Fence Fittings. l. F900, Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial

Swing Gates. m. F934, Standard Specification for Standard Colors for Polymer-

Coated Chain Link Fence Materials. n. F1043, Standard Specification for Strength and Protective

Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework. o. F1083, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-

Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. p. F1184, Standard Specifications for Industrial and Commercial

Horizontal Slide Gates. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Inc.: C2,

National Electrical Safety Code. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts max.).

697482A.GN1

FENCES AND GATES PW\DEN003\697482 32 31 13 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Terms as defined in ASTM F552.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components, and finishes for chain link fences and gates. 1) Fence, gate posts, rails, and fittings. 2) Gates and hardware.

b. Layout and details of corner, end post, gate, gate post, and baffle construction including types, sizes of members, fabric, fastenings and fittings.

c. Show gate leaf sizes and bracing, gate swings, which items of hardware are welded to gate leafs in shop, and the location of keepers and stops at the end of the swing

d. Show closer spacing of posts where narrower bays are needed to keep sloping bottom rails close to sloping grades.

2. Samples: Minimum 6 inches square sample of illustrating design, fabrication of workmanship, and selected color.

3. Test Reports: Field test result for compliance of installation of fence panels, posts, and gates.


1. Manufacturer’s data sheets on products used, with the following information: a. Preparation instructions and recommendations. b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. c. Recommended installation instructions.

2. Evidence of Supplier and installer qualifications. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,



A. Qualifications:

1. Supplier: 5 years’ experience. 2. Installer: Experienced installer who has completed ornamental fences

and gates similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project and whose work has resulted with a record of successful in-service performance with a minimum 3 years’ experience.

697482A.GN1


B. Design, supply of equipment and components, installation, and on-call service shall be product of individual company with record of installations meeting requirements specified.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project Site with gate installer to verify layout and operations of automatic gate operating system.


A. Deliver materials to Site in undamaged condition.

B. Store materials and/or products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging to protect finished surfaces until ready for installation.

C. Store components off the ground in a dry covered areas, protected from adverse weather conditions, and in a location to prevent damage from construction activities.


A. Complete necessary Site preparation and grading before installing ornamental fence and gates.

B. Interruption of Existing Utility Service: Notify owner of utility 72 hours prior to interruption of utility services. Do not proceed with interruption of utility service without written permission from utility owner.

1.07 SPECIAL GUARANTEE

A. Ornamental Fence: Provide manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of the following items found defective during a period of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in the General Conditions.

1. Deterioration of coatings, finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Manufacturer shall provide material replacing rusted components without paying for delivery, tax, or the labor of removing/replacing.

3. Damage from improper design or use, accidents, acts of God, and abuse are not covered under warranty.

697482A.GN1


B. Galvanized Chain Link Fence: Provide manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of the following items found defective during a period of 12 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in the General Conditions.

1. “Defective”: Galvanized steel chain link components that develop red rust over more than 5 percent of its surface during warranty period.

2. Manufacturer shall provide material replacing rusted components without paying for delivery, tax, or the labor of removing/replacing.

3. Damage from improper design or use, accidents, acts of God, and abuse are not covered under warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Ornamental Fence shall be supplied by the following manufacturer:

1. Alumi-Guard, Inc. 2401 Corporate Blvd. Brooksville, Florida 34604 Toll free (877) 258-6448 Phone (352) 754-8555

2. Substitutions are not permitted.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Components:

1. Posts: Aluminum extrusions of 6005-T-5 alloy in accordance with ASTM B221.

2. Pickets: Aluminum extrusions of 6063-T-52 alloy in accordance with ASTM B221.

3. Channel: Aluminum extrusions of 6005-T-5 alloy in accordance with ASTM B221.

B. Fasteners:

1. Screws of 410 and 18-8 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A276, with self-drilling head.

2. Screws painted to match the finish of fence.

697482A.GN1


C. Accessories: Post caps, wall brackets, scrolls, finials, flanges and other miscellaneous hardware fabricated of aluminum or other non-ferrous metal castings.

D. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2.03 ORNAMENTAL FENCING

A. General:

1. Municipal Grade: a. Aluminum Channel Sections: 1-1/2-inch deep and 1-inch wide

with top 0.055 inch and sidewalls 0.082-inch wall thickness, with decorative top corner.

b. Pickets 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch with a 0.005-inch wall thickness 2. Post Length: As required to allow setting of post into the ground with

approximately 1-3/4 inches (305 mm) between bottom of panel and ground.

B. Ornamental Fencing:

1. Style: Belmont. a. Grade: Commercial. b. Channel: Four Channel. c. Municipal Picket Spacing: Standard 3.875 inches. d. Panel Height: 96 inches. e. Posts: 3 inches by 3 inches.

1) 0.125-inch wall thickness. f. Panel Length: Inside posts.

1) Municipal Nominal 66.62 inches. 2) Municipal Nominal 91.75 inches.

C. Ornamental Gates: Provide to match ornamental style specified.

1. Height: 96 inches. 2. Opening Width: Inside posts.

a. Single: 60 inches. b. Double: Two 12-foot Leafs to make 24-foot Double Gate.

3. Hardware: a. Lockable Gravity Latch. b. Welded Barrel Hinges. c. Drop Rods on each leaf of Double Gate with Lock Point.

697482A.GN1


D. Fence and Accessory Finish:

1. SuperDurable Polyester Powder Coating: High performance polyester, medium gloss, applied to over 2 mils thickness and complying with AAMA 2604.

2. Fluoropolymers: Superior performance polyester powder coating, medium gloss, applied to 304 mils thickness and complying with AAMA 2604.

E. Color: Black.

F. Performance:

1. Meet or exceed a 4000-hour salt spray test. 2. SuperDurable Polyester Powder coating meets or exceeds a H-2H pencil

hardness in accordance with ASTM D3363. 3. Fluoropolymers meets or exceeds a 4H pencil harness in accordance

with ASTM D3363. 4. Meets or exceeds ASTM D3359 adhesion test.

2.04 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES

A. Description:

1. Fence and Baffles. Steel chain link fabric on galvanized steel pipe posts, with other steel pipe framing such as rails and bracing, with wires and fastenings and steel or iron fittings, all items galvanized.

2. Gates. Steel chain link fabric on welded steel pipe frames and bracing, with fastenings and steel hardware, all items galvanized.

3. Bollards associated with fence work. Concrete filled galvanized pipe with concrete foundations.

2.05 TEMPORARY FENCING

A. Posts and Bracing: At least NPS 1-1/2 line and NPS 2-1/2 end / corner / pull / gate posts, non-corroding, driven in compacted soil sufficient to hold fence in place against fabric stretching and wind forces, with rails and bracing.

1. Provide the posts and their bracing in quantity and spacing as needed to secure the site against unauthorized entry during construction.

2. Where soil does not keep posts vertical under forced entry, rain softening, or wind loads on fence, set posts in concrete footings.

B. Fabric: Non-corroding fabric with knuckled edges: 6 foot by 2-inch mesh by 11 gauge (0.120 in diameter) wire or heavier. Tie fabric to posts, bracing and rails so that fabric is within 2 inches of ground, using galvanized steel ties.

697482A.GN1


C. Gates: Provide 6-foot high, lockable, non-sagging gates in quantity and width as needed to give access to the site by authorized users.

2.06 CHAIN LINK FABRIC

A. Description. Hot-dip galvanized after weaving (GAW) steel chain link fabric.

1. Do not use: Aluminum, aluminum alloy wire, or aluminum coating. 2. Average zinc weight on wire: Not less than 2.0 ounces per square foot,

galvanized after weaving. 3. Wire size: 9 gauge, 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Breaking strength of 9-gauge wire: Not less than 1290 pounds;

ASTM A817. 5. Mesh: 2 inch. 6. Edges: Knuckle fabric at top and bottom of fence.

B. Standard:

1. Wire Strength: ASTM A817, Table 2. 2. Wire Coating: ASTM A123, Table 2, Coating Grade 85. 3. Fabric: ASTM A392, Class 2 zinc coating. Do not use Class 1

(1.2 ounces per square foot).

C. Supplier:

1. Master Halco. 2. Merchants Metals. 3. Stateside Steel and Wire. 4. Or approved equal.

2.07 CHAIN LINK POSTS, CAPS, AND FOOTINGS

A. Description. Zinc galvanized round steel pipe and pipe caps.

1. Steel pipe: ASTM F1043, Group IC, square yards equal 50,000 pounds per square inch.

2. Do not use: Channel-formed steel, square steel pipe, or aluminum posts. 3. Zinc coat: At least 1.8 ounces per square foot hot dip galvanizing after

forming; ASTM A123. 4. Post loop caps: Provide on line posts and where needed to let top rail

pass. 5. Post dome caps: Provide on corner, end, pull, and gate posts. 6. Pipe size convention: Nominal pipe size (NPS); ASME/ANSI B36.10.

B. Standard:

1. Post galvanizing: ASTM A123, Table 2, Coating Grade 85.

697482A.GN1


2. Post dimensions: ASTM F1083, Table 1, Standard Weight, Schedule 40. 3. Fence post sizes: ASTM A1043, from Table 3 or larger. 4. Gate post sizes: ASTM F567, from Table 2 or larger.

C. Line Post Size Schedule:

1. Height: 96 inches. 2. NPS (Nominal Pipe Size): 2. 3. Pipe outside diameter: 2.375 inches. 4. Pipe wall thickness: 0.154 inches. 5. Post spacing: 10 feet on-center. 6. Minimum footing depth: 30 inches. 7. Minimum footing diameter: 10 inches.

D. Corner, End, and Pull Post Schedule:

1. Height: 96 inches. 2. NPS (Nominal Pipe Size): 3-1/2. 3. Pipe outside diameter: 4 inches. 4. Pipe wall thickness: 0.226 inches. 5. Post spacing: 10 feet on-center. 6. Minimum footing depth: 36 inches. 7. Minimum footing diameter: 16 inches.

E. Gate Post Schedule:

1. Gate Leaf Height: 96 inches. 2. NPS (Nominal Pipe Size): 4 inches. 3. Pipe outside diameter: 4.5 inches. 4. Pipe wall thickness: 0.237 inches. 5. Minimum footing depth: 36 inches. 6. Minimum footing diameter: 18 inches.

F. Supplier:

1. Allied Fence/Tyco. 2. Master Halco. 3. Merchants Metals. 4. Sonco Worldwide. 5. Or approved equal.

2.08 CHAIN LINK FASTENINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Description. Zinc galvanized steel (or malleable iron) fastenings and accessories with rounded edges, galvanized after fabrication. Do not use aluminum.

1. Zinc Coat: At least 1.8 ounces per square foot hot dip galvanizing after forming; ASTM A123.

697482A.GN1


B. Rail and Brace Ends, Line Caps, Rail Sleeves, Tension and Brace Bands: Sized to fit posts and rails; ASTM F626.

C. Stretcher Bars, Tension Bars: At least 3/16 by 3/4-inch galvanized steel, 2-inches shorter than full height of fabric, One bar at gate or end posts, Two bars corner or pull posts.

D. Fastenings: Hot dip galvanized steel; ASTM F626.

1. Tie Wire: 9 gauge for attaching fabric to posts. 2. Clips: 9 gauge. 3. Bands: 12 gauge, at end corner, pull, and gate posts. 4. Hog rings: 12-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel. 5. Brace rods: Galvanized steel, with welded-on turnbuckles for

adjustment.

E. Tension Wire: Marcelled 7-gauge (0.177 inch) galvanized steel wire; ASTM A824, Type II.

1. Zinc coating: 2 ounces per square foot ASTM A817, Type II, Class 5. 2. Breaking strength of 7-gauge wire; Not less than 1,880 pounds;

ASTM A817.

F. Zinc Repair Compound, for use at missing or damaged zinc galvanizing. High adhesion, zinc rich, UV-resistant compound, such as ZRC.

G. Concrete: 2,500 cubic feet, 5-inch maximum slump; ASTM C94.

2.09 CHAIN LINK GATE FABRICATION AND HARDWARE

A. Framing Assembly. Galvanized steel pipe, together with fabric, bracing, hinges and latches, shop assembled and welded.

1. Gate heights: Match adjacent fence height, unless shown otherwise. 2. Gate framing and fixed bracing: At least NPS 2, galvanized, as specified

above. 3. Brace gates against sagging using brace rods and adjustable turnbuckles

in place of fixed bracing if more practical than fixed braces. 4. For gate leafs over 73 inches high, add one hinge to the number

specified. 5. Coat welds and bare spots with specified zinc repair compound.

B. Gate Hardware: Steel or malleable iron, zinc coated with at least 1.8 ounces per square foot hot dip galvanizing, for all items. Typical examples follow:

1. Hinges: Heavy duty, industrial grade, offset type, of ball and socket design, allowing gates to swing back parallel to the fence line, such as: a. 1746 / 1747 / 1748, by Semmerling Fence & Supply.

697482A.GN1


b. 422405 / 422406 / 422407, by Southeastern Wire. c. Or approved equal.

2. Latches, all heights: Lockable. 3. Latches for single leaf gates: Single gate latch assembly, with keeper. 4. Latches for twin leaf gates: Heavy duty gate stops with steel pipe

sleeves anchored in concrete so as to engage plunger of latch at the center of each opening. Latch and plunger shall not be removable without special tools.

5. Keepers: To automatically engage the gate leaf and hold it in the open position until manually released. Where A/E or Board determines that a keeper’s location presents a tripping hazard, provide a chained snap hook instead.

6. Stops: Set in a concrete base, located so as not to present a tripping hazard.

7. Rods with turnbuckles: Cut rods to length that gives maximum future adjustability and weld turnbuckles to rods and rods to gate frame.

8. Items for handicapped accessibility: Heavy-duty lever-type gate hardware or weatherproof push bar in place of latches.

C. Gate Hinge Schedule:

1. Gate Leaf Height: 96 inches. 2. Number of hinges: Four.

D. Barbed Wire Supporting Arms: Pressed steel with clips, slots, or other means for attaching strands of barbed wire integral with post cap for each post, with single 45-degree arms for supporting three strands of barbed wire. Arms shall withstand 250 pounds of downward pull at outermost ends of the arms without failure.

2.10 BARBED WIRE

A. Zinc-Coated Barbed Wire: ASTM A121, Chain Link Fence Grade:

1. Line Wire: Double strands of No. 12-1/2 gauge. 2. Do no use Aluminum, aluminum alloy wire, or aluminum coating. 3. Barbs:

a. Number of Points: Four. b. Length: 3/8-inch minimum. c. Shape: Round. d. Diameter: 14 gauge. e. Spacing: 5 inches.

2.11 GATES

A. General:

1. Gate Operation: Opened and closed easily by one person.

697482A.GN1


2. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F1043 and ASTM F1083 for materials and protective coatings.

3. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round galvanized steel tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F900.

4. Gate leaves more than 8-feet wide shall have intermediate tubular members and diagonal truss rods to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist.

5. Gate Fabric Height: Same as for adjacent fence height. 6. Welded Steel Joints: Paint with zinc-based paint. 7. Chain Link Fabric: Attached securely to gate frame at intervals not

exceeding 15 inches. 8. Gate Posts and Frame Members: Extend gateposts and frame end

members above top of chain-link fabric at both ends of gate frame to attach barbed wire assemblies.

9. Latches: Arranged for padlocking so padlock will be accessible from both sides of gate.

B. Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F900 for single and double swing gate types.

1. Leaf Width: As shown. 2. Hinges: Offset type, malleable iron.

a. Furnished with large bearing surfaces for clamping in position. b. Designed to swing either 180 degrees outward, 180 degrees

inward, or 90 degrees in or out, as shown, and not twist or turn under action of gate.

3. Latches: Plunger bar arranged to engage stop, except single gates of openings less than 10 feet wide may each have forked latch.

4. Gate Stops: Mushroom type or flush plate with anchors, suitable for setting in concrete.

5. Locking Device and Padlock Eyes: Integral part of latch, requiring one padlock for locking both leaves of double gate.

6. Hold-Open Keepers: Designed to automatically engage gate leaf and hold it in open position until manually released.

C. Cantilever and Overhead Horizontal Sliding Gates:

1. Comply with ASTM F1184 for single slide gate types II, Class or internal roller assemblies.

2. Cantilever Gate Support Posts: Spaced on maximum 10-foot centers. 3. Overhead Track Assembly: Manufacturer’s standard track, with

overhead framing supports, bracing, and accessories, designed to support size, weight, width, operation, and design of gate and roller assemblies.

4. Roller Guards: As required per ASTM F1184 for Type II, Class 1 gate.

697482A.GN1


5. Hangers, roller assemblies, and stops fabricated from galvanized malleable iron.

D. Rolling Gate:

1. Track Rollers: Malleable iron or heavy pressed steel with provision for grease lubrication.

2. Ground Rollers: Malleable iron or heavy pressed steel with provision for grease lubrication.

3. Support Posts: Spaced on maximum 7-foot centers. 4. Gates more than 8 feet in height shall have three tracks. 5. Frames: ASTM F1184, Type I. 6. Gate Accessories: ASTM F1184.

2.12 REMOVABLE FENCE PANELS

A. Panel Length:

1. Equal division of total length of removable fence section. 2. Maximum 10 feet.

B. Frames: ASTM F1184, Type I.

2.13 CONCRETE

A. Provide as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2.14 CONCRETE

A. Materials: ASTM C387, packaged, dry, combined ingredients with Type I cement.

B. Mixing: In a clean metal container, mix package of dry materials by hand or machine. Following manufacturer’s instructions, add clean water in sufficient quantity to produce a slump of 2 inches to 3 inches.

2.15 FENCE GROUNDING

A. Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger.

1. Material above Finished Grade: Copper. 2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper. 3. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1-inch wide, woven of No. 30

AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.

697482A.GN1


B. Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.

1. Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic welded type. 2. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install decorative fence as shown on drawings. Decorative fence shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as approved by Engineer.

B. Protect existing chain link fence where not shown to be removed.

C. New chain link fencing is not indicated on the plans. Owner may issue a chain link fence allowance allocation for fencing within the project site. If chain link fencing is required, it shall be in accordance with this specification.

D. Install chain link fences and gates in accordance with ASTM F567, except as modified in this section, and in accordance with fence manufacturer’s recommendations, as approved by Engineer. Erect fencing in straight lines between angle points.

E. Provide necessary hardware for a complete fence and gate installation.

F. Any damage to galvanized surfaces, including welding, shall be repaired with paint containing zinc dust in accordance with ASTM A780.

G. Drainage Crossings: Where the chain-link fence must cross drainage ditches or swales, the main fence shall be carried across a ditch or swale. A supplemental chain link fence shall be added below.

1. Frames and Bracing: The fence added below shall be fabricated with galvanized round steel pipe conforming to the requirements for top and brace rails.

2. The construction of the frame shall be welded or assembled with corner fittings. The frame shall be rigid and to the extent necessary to maintain a 2-inch clearance between bottom of the frame and finish grade. If necessary to maintain rigidity, attach to the frame a series of 3/8-inch diameter galvanized steel pipe stakes that are embedded a minimum of 2 feet to the sides and bottom of the ditch.

3. Attach chain link fabric securely to frame at intervals not exceeding 12 inches.

697482A.GN1


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clear area on either side of fence to the extent specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing. Eliminate ground surface irregularities along fence line to the extent necessary to maintain a 2-inch clearance between bottom of fabric and finish grade.

B. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

3.03 POST SETTING

A. Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacing indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. Driven posts are not acceptable. Postholes shall be clear of loose materials. Waste materials from postholes shall be removed from Site or regraded into slopes on Site.

B. Posthole Depth:

1. Minimum 3 feet below finished grade. 2. 2 inches deeper than post embedment depth below finish grade.

C. Set posts with minimum embedment below finished grade of 34 inches and with top rail at proper height above finished grade. Verify posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing. Brace posts, as necessary, to maintain correct position and plumbness until concrete sets.

D. Backfill postholes with concrete to 2 inches above finished grade. Vibrate or tamp concrete for consolidation. Protect above ground portion of posts from concrete splatter.

E. Before concrete sets, crown and finish top of concrete to readily shed water.

F. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more.

G. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet on centers between terminal end, corner, and gate posts.

697482A.GN1


3.04 POST BRACING

A. Install according to ASTM F567, maintaining plumb position, and alignment of fencing. Install braces at gate, end, pull, and corner posts diagonally to adjacent line posts to ensure stability. Install braces on both sides of corner and pull posts.

1. Locate horizontal braces at mid-height of fabric or higher, on fences with top rail, and 2/3-fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal truss rod assembly is under proper tension.

3.05 TOP RAILS

A. Install according to ASTM F567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps and terminating into rail end attached to posts or posts caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Install top rail sleeves with springs at 105 feet maximum spacing to permit expansion in rail.

3.06 BARBED WIRE SUPPORTING ARMS

A. Barbed wire supporting arms shall be installed as indicated and as recommended by manufacturer. Bolt or rivet supporting arm to top of post in a manner to prevent easy removal with hand tools. Angle single arms to outside of fence.

3.07 TENSION WIRE

A. Install according to ASTM F567 and ASTM F1916, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with tie wires at a maximum spacing of 24 inches on center.

B. Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire.

3.08 CHAIN LINK FABRIC

A. Do not install fabric until concrete has cured minimum 7 days.

B. Install fabric with twisted and barbed selvage at top.

C. Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Pull fabric taut to provide a smooth and uniform appearance free from sag, without permanently distorting fabric diamond or reducing fabric height. Tie fabric to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.

697482A.GN1


D. Splicing shall be accomplished according to ASTM F1916 by weaving a single picket into the ends of the rolls to be joined.

E. Leave 2 inches between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches on center.

G. Tie Wires: Fasten ties to wrap a full 360 degrees around rail or post and a minimum of one complete diamond of fabric. Twist ends of tie wire three full twists, and cut off protruding ends to preclude untwisting by hand.

1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches on center and to brace and top rails at 24 inches on center.

3.09 BARBED WIRE

A. Install barbed wire uniformly in configurations of three strands of barbed wire on supporting arms. Pull wire taut and install securely to supporting arms and secure to end terminal post or terminal arms.

3.10 GATES

A. Install gates according to manufacturer’s written instructions, level, plumb and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric and hardware to gate using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary so gates operate satisfactorily from open or closed position.

B. Set gate stops in concrete to engage center drop rod or plunger bar.

3.11 GATE OPERATOR SYSTEMS

A. Install gate operator systems in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, aligned and true to fence line and grade.

B. Furnish with equipment and accessories necessary for complete installation.

C. Hand excavate holes for pads in firm undisturbed soil to dimensions, depths, and locations as required by gate operator component manufacturer’s written instructions and as shown on the Drawings.

D. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Cut grooves in pavement and bury and seal wire loop according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Connect to equipment operated by detector.

697482A.GN1


3.12 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

A. Ground fences at a maximum interval of 1,000 feet in accordance with applicable requirements of IEEE C2, National Electrical Safety Code.

B. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing.

C. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at grounding location.

3.13 CLEANUP

A. Remove excess fencing materials and other debris from Site.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SOIL PREPARATION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 32 91 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work in this section covers soil preparation for seeding, sodding, and planting activities.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Certified Topsoil Analysis Reports: a. Indicate quantities of materials necessary to bring onsite topsoil

into compliance with textural/gradation requirements. b. Indicate quantity of lime, quantity and analysis of fertilizer, and

quantity and type of soil additive.


A. Topsoil Analysis/Testing: Perform by state soil testing service or approved certified independent testing laboratory.


A. Rough grade areas to be planted or seeded. Perform Work specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, prior to performing Work specified under this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TOPSOIL

A. General: Natural, friable, sandy loam, obtained from well-drained areas, free from objects larger than 1-1/2 inches maximum dimension, and free of subsoil, roots, grass, other foreign matter, hazardous or toxic substances, and deleterious material that may be harmful to plant growth or may hinder grading, planting, or maintenance.

B. Composition: In general accordance with ASTM D5268:

1. Gravel-Sized Fraction: Maximum 5 percent by weight retained on a No. 10 sieve.

2. Sand-Sized Fraction: Minimum 20 percent to 60 percent passing No. 10 sieve.

3. Silt and Clay-Sized Fraction: Minimum 35 percent to 70 percent.

697482A.GN1

SOIL PREPARATION PW\DEN003\697482 32 91 13 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

C. Organic Matter: Minimum 1.5 percent by dry weight as determined in accordance with ASTM D2974.

D. pH: Range 6.0 to 7.0.

E. Textural Amendments: Amend as necessary to conform to required composition by incorporating sand, peat, manure, or sawdust.

F. Source: Stockpile material onsite, in accordance with Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing. Import topsoil if onsite material is insufficient in quantity.

2.02 LIME

A. Composition: Ground limestone with not less than 85 percent total carbonates, ASTM C602.

B. Gradation:

1. Minimum 50 percent passing No. 100 sieve. 2. Minimum 90 percent passing No. 20 sieve. 3. Coarser material acceptable provided rates of application are

increased proportionately on basis of quantities passing No. 100 sieve.

2.03 SOIL ADDITIVES

A. Sawdust or Ground Bark:

1. Nontoxic, of uniform texture, and subject to slow decomposition when mixed with soil.

2. Nitrogen-treated, or if untreated mix with minimum 0.15 pound of ammonium nitrate or 0.25 pound of ammonium sulfate per cubic foot of loose material.

B. Peat:

1. Composition: Natural residue formed by decomposition of reeds, sedges, or mosses in a freshwater environment, free from lumps, roots, and stones. a. Organic Matter: Not less than 90 percent on a dry weight basis as

determined by ASTM D2974. b. Moisture Content: Maximum 65 percent by weight at time of

delivery.

C. Fertilizer: As specified in Section 32 92 00, Turf and Grasses.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SOIL PREPARATION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 32 91 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL


A. Topsoil Analysis/Testing: Performed by county or state soil testing service or approved certified independent testing laboratory.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Apply lime at the rate of 50 pounds per 1,000 square feet to subgrade before tilling.

B. Scarify subgrade to minimum depth of 6 inches where topsoil is to be placed.

C. Remove stones over 2-1/2 inches in any dimension, sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous material.

D. Limit preparation to areas which will receive topsoil within 2 days after preparation.

3.02 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT

A. Do not place topsoil when subsoil or topsoil is frozen, excessively wet, or otherwise detrimental to the Work.

B. Mix soil amendments, lime, and other soil additives, identified in analysis reports with topsoil before placement or spread on topsoil surface and mix thoroughly into entire depth of topsoil before planting or seeding. Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting or seeding will not occur within 3 days.

C. Place one-half of the total depth of topsoil and work into top 4 inches of subgrade soil to create a transition layer. Place remainder of topsoil to depth 6 inches where seeding and planting are scheduled.

D. Uniformly distribute to within 1/2 inch of final grades. Fine grade topsoil eliminating rough or low areas and maintaining levels, profiles, and contours of subgrade.

E. Remove stones exceeding 1-1/2-inch diameter, roots, sticks, debris, and foreign matter during and after topsoil placement.

F. Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from Site. Grade stockpile area as necessary and place in condition acceptable for planting or seeding.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 TURF AND GRASSES FEBRUARY 8, 2019 32 92 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Maintenance Period: Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue for a period of one year after all planting under this section is completed.

B. Satisfactory Stand: Seeded area of 3,000 square feet or larger that has:

1. No bare spots larger than 3 square feet. 2. Not more than 10 percent of total area with bare spots larger than

1 square foot. 3. Not more than 15 percent of total area with bare spots larger than

6 square inches.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Product labels/data sheets.


1. Seed: Certification of seed analysis, germination rate, and inoculation: a. Certify that each lot of seed has been tested by a testing laboratory

certified in seed testing, within 6 months of date of delivery. Include with certification: 1) Name and address of laboratory. 2) Date of test. 3) Lot number for each seed specified. 4) Test Results: (i) name, (ii) percentages of purity and of

germination, and (iii) weed content for each kind of seed furnished.

b. Mixtures: Proportions of each kind of seed. 2. Seed Inoculant Certification: Bacteria prepared specifically for legume

species to be inoculated. 3. Certification of sod; include source and harvest date of sod, and sod

seed mix. 4. Description of required maintenance activities and activity frequency.

697482A.GN1

TURF AND GRASSES PW\DEN003\697482 32 92 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Seed:

1. Furnish in standard containers with seed name, lot number, net weight, percentages of purity, germination, and hard seed and maximum weed seed content, clearly marked for each container of seed.

2. Keep dry during storage.

B. Sod:

1. Do not harvest if sod is excessively dry or wet to the extent survival may be adversely affected.

2. Harvest and deliver sod only after laying bed is prepared for sodding. 3. Roll or stack to prevent yellowing. 4. Deliver and lay within 24 hours of harvesting. 5. Keep moist and covered to protect from drying from time of harvesting

until laid.

C. Hydroseeding Mulch: Mark package of wood fiber mulch to show air dry weight.

1.04 WEATHER RESTRICTIONS

A. Perform Work under favorable weather and soil moisture conditions as determined by accepted local practice.


A. Complete Work specified in Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation, and Section 32 93 00, Plants before starting Work of this section.

B. Complete Work under this section within 10 days following completion of soil preparation, and after trees, shrubs, and herbaceous perennials have been installed.

C. Notify Engineer at least 3 days in advance of:

1. Each material delivery. 2. Start of planting activity.

1.06 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Contractor: Perform maintenance operations of all area disturbed during construction during maintenance period to include:

1. Watering: Keep surface moist, but not saturated.

697482A.GN1


2. Washouts: Repair by filling with topsoil, amending as necessary, fertilizing, seeding, and mulching.

3. Mulch: Replace wherever and whenever washed or blown away. 4. Mowing: Monthly from April through October. Up to three additional

mowings at Owner request from November through March. 5. Reseed unsatisfactory areas or portions thereof immediately at the end

of the maintenance period if a satisfactory stand has not been produced. 6. Reseed/re-sod entire area if satisfactory stand does not develop after

90 days following installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FERTILIZER

A. Commercial, uniform in composition, free-flowing, suitable for application with equipment designed for that purpose. Minimum percentage of plant food by weight.

B. Application Rates: Determined by soil analysis results.

C. Mix for Temporary Seed:

1. Nitrogen: 8. 2. Phosphoric Acid: 24. 3. Potash: 24.

D. Mix for Permanent Seed/Sod:

1. Nitrogen: 10. 2. Phosphoric Acid: 10. 3. Potash: 10.

2.02 SEED

A. Fresh, clean new-crop seed that complies with the tolerance for purity and germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America.

B. Seeds of Legumes: Inoculated with pure culture of nitrogen-fixing bacteria prepared specifically for legume species in accordance with inoculant manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Temporary Seeding Species:

1. Common Bermuda grass (Mar 15 – July 15). 2. Ryegrass (Sep 15 – Nov 15).

D. Permanent Seeding Species: See Drawings for seed mix species, percentage by weight, and application rate.

697482A.GN1


2.03 SEEDING

A. Start within 2 days of preparation completion.

B. Hydroseed slopes steeper than 3H:1V. Flatter slopes may be mechanically seeded.

C. Mechanical: Broadcast seed in two different directions, compact seeded area with cultipacter or roller.

1. Sow seed at uniform rate of: a. Common Bermuda: 10 pounds per acre. b. Ryegrass: 30 pounds per acre.

2. Use Brillion type seeder. 3. Broadcasting will be allowed only in areas too small to use Brillion type

seeder. Where seed is broadcast, increase seeding rate by 20 percent. 4. Roll with ring roller to cover seed, and water with fine spray.

D. Hydroseeding:

1. Apply on moist soil, only after free surface water has drained away. 2. Prevent drift and displacement of mixture into other areas. 3. Upon application, allow absorption and percolation of moisture into

ground. 4. Mixtures: Seed and fertilizer may be mixed together, apply within

30 minutes of mixing to prevent fertilizer from burning. 2.04 SOD

A. Certified, turf species: Zoysia or Tiffway 419 Bermuda.

B. Strongly rooted pads, capable of supporting own weight and retaining size and shape when suspended vertically from a firm grasp on upper 10 percent of pad.

1. Grass Height: 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inches. 2. Strip Size: Supplier’s standard. 3. Soil Thickness: Uniform; 1 inch plus or minus 1/4 inch at time of

cutting. 4. Age: Not less than 10 months or more than 30 months. 5. Condition: Healthy, green, moist; free of diseases, nematodes and

insects, and of undesirable grassy and broadleaf weeds. Yellow sod, or broken pads, or torn or uneven ends will not be accepted.

697482A.GN1


2.05 HYDROSEEDING MULCH

A. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch:

1. Specially processed wood fiber containing no growth or germination inhibiting factors.

2. Dyed a suitable color to facilitate inspection of material placement. 3. Manufactured such that after addition and agitation in slurry tanks with

water, the material fibers will become uniformly suspended to form homogenous slurry.

4. When hydraulically sprayed on ground, material will allow absorption and percolation of moisture.

2.06 NETTING

A. As specified in Section 31 32 00, Soil Stabilization.

2.07 TACKIFIER

A. As specified in Section 31 32 00, Soil Stabilization.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Grade areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture.

1. Roll and rake, remove ridges, fill depressions to meet finish grades. 2. Limit such Work to areas to be planted within immediate future. 3. Remove debris, and stones larger than 1-1/2-inch diameter, and other

objects that may interfere with planting and maintenance operations.

B. Moisten prepared areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry off before seeding. Do not create muddy soil.

C. Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after preparation and before planting.

3.02 FERTILIZER

A. Apply evenly over area in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Mix into top 2 inches of topsoil, when applied by broad cast method.

B. Application Rate:

1. Temporary Seeding: 800 pounds per acre. 2. Permanent Seeding/Sodding: 1,000 pounds per acre.

697482A.GN1


3.03 SEEDING

A. Start within 2 days of preparation completion.

B. Hydroseed slopes steeper than 3H:1V. Flatter slopes may be mechanically seeded.

C. Mechanical: Broadcast seed in two different directions, compact seeded area with cultipacter or roller.

1. Sow seed at uniform rate of: a. Common Bermuda: 10 pounds per acre. b. Ryegrass: 30 pounds per acre.

2. Use Brillion type seeder. 3. Broadcasting will be allowed only in areas too small to use Brillion type

seeder. Where seed is broadcast, increase seeding rate 20 percent. 4. Roll with ring roller to cover seed, and water with fine spray.

D. Hydroseeding:

1. Apply on moist soil, only after free surface water has drained away. 2. Prevent drift and displacement of mixture into other areas. 3. Upon application, allow absorption and percolation of moisture into

ground. 4. Mixtures: Seed and fertilizer may be mixed together, apply within

30 minutes of mixing to prevent fertilizer from burning seed.

A. Mulching: Apply uniform cover of straw mulch at a rate of 2 tons per acre or wood fiber mulch at rate of 1,500 pounds per acre.

B. Netting: Immediately after mulching, place over mulched areas with slopes steeper than 3:1, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Locate strips parallel to slope and completely cover seeded areas.

C. Tackifier: Apply over mulched areas as specified in Section 31 32 00, Soil Stabilization.

D. Water: Apply with fine spray after mulching to saturate top 4 inches of soil.

3.04 SODDING

A. Do not plant when ground is saturated.

B. Lay sod to form solid mass with tightly fitted joints; butt ends and sides, do not overlap.

1. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. 2. Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod.

697482A.GN1


3. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade; work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod, remove excess to avoid smothering adjacent grass.

4. Complete sod surface true to finished grade, even, and firm.

C. Fasten sod on slopes to prevent slippage with wooden pins 6 inches long driven through sod into subgrade, until flush with top of sod. Install at sufficiently close intervals to securely hold sod.

D. Water sod with fine spray immediately after planting. During first week, water daily or more frequently to maintain moist soil to depth of 4 inches.


A. Eight weeks after seeding and sodding are complete and on written notice from Contractor, Engineer will, within 15 days of receipt, determine if a satisfactory stand has been established.

B. If a satisfactory stand has not been established, Engineer will make another determination after written notice from Contractor 4 months before the end of the one-year maintenance period.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect from pedestrian traffic by erecting temporary fence around each newly seeded area.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PLANTS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 32 93 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Association of Nurserymen (AAN): Z60.1, Nursery Stock. 2. Federal Housing Administration (FHA), Section 1103-103. 3. Hortus Third, Liberty Hyde Bailey, Hortorium, 1976.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Measurement:

1. In size grading Balled and Burlapped (B & B), caliper takes precedence over height.

2. Take trunk caliper at Diameter at Breast Height (DBH) or 48 inches above the ground level (up to and including 4-inch caliper size specified trees).

3. Container Trees: Measure size of container-grown stock by height and width of plant.

4. Container Shrubs and Herbaceous Perennials: Measure pot size, not top growth.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Plant materials source list with supplier name, address, number of plants procured from each nursery, and order date. All plants shall be Florida grade No. 1 or better in quality or local grade equivalent.

2. Photographs showing a minimum of one plant specimen per species which generally represents overall size, health, and quality of all plants to be installed. Photographs shall be of specific plants to be installed. Stock photos will not be accepted.

3. Product data on manufactured products specified. 4. Subsoil Drainage Plan: For plant pits and beds if soil percolation testing

results in standing water after 24 hours in areas outside of stormwater basins.

5. Permanent Irrigation System Plan Layout: For all plants covered within this specification and as indicated on Drawings. Plan shall include proposed tap location, proposed zones, and all recommended system components, along with calculations and recommended products with sizing, for Engineer approval.

697482A.GN1

PLANTS PW\DEN003\697482 32 93 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

6. Mulch: For any off-site mulch sources provide a 1-quart (1-liter) volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished, provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.


1. Soil percolation test results. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data:

a. As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

b. Maintenance Plan for storage, planting, care, and general maintenance of each type of plant for 1-year period for climatic conditions in Mobile, Alabama.

3. Special guarantee.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association

2. Experience: Five years’ experience in landscape installation. 3. Installer’s Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an

experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network: Certified Landscape Technician – Exterior, with installation and maintenance specialty area(s).

5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. 2. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.

a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

697482A.GN1


C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

D. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain sizes.

1. Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip.

2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.


A. Cover plants during shipment with a tarpaulin or other suitable covering to minimize drying.

B. Balled and Burlapped Plants: Wrap each ball firmly with burlap and securely bind with twine, cord, or wire for shipment and handling. Drum-lace balls with a diameter of 30 inches or more.

C. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable.

D. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures or utilities. Materials shall not be stored on walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants that are to remain, be protected, and are not designated within construction staging limits.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk soil amendments with appropriate certificates.

E. Do not prune plants prior to delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie plants in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

697482A.GN1


F. Handle planting stock by root ball.

G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

H. As specified herein for transplanting.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.

B. Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary services or utilities according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption of each service or utility.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of services or utilities without Owner’s written permission.

C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.07 SPECIAL GUARANTEE

A. Provide extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for removal and replacement with new plants those transplanted or newly planted plants found defective or to be dead or not in a vigorous, thriving condition during a period of one year after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in the General Conditions.

B. Replace defective plants with new plants free of dead or dying branches and branch tips, and bearing foliage of a normal density, size, and color. Closely match new plants to adjacent specimens of the same species and meet requirements of this Specification.

697482A.GN1


C. Plant replacement plants that die during a season unfavorable for planting during first month of next favorable planting season.

1. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at the end of warranty period.

2. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

3. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period for replacement plant material.

4. Plants, planting areas, or planting accessories that have migrated or washed away shall be returned to conditions accepted at Substantial Completion, which may include replacement and/or relocation, for a period of 2 growing seasons after Substantial Completion.

D. Plants damaged or lost due to Project (or any part thereof) occupancy, vandalism, or acts of neglect by others are not subject to this special guarantee.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Commence to maintain plant life immediately after planting and maintain for a minimum of one year, and until plants are well established and exhibit a vigorous growing condition through special guarantee period.

B. In accordance with accepted Submittal on care and maintenance of plants and as follows:

1. Maintain by watering, pruning, cultivating, and weeding as required for healthy growth.

2. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required.

3. Remove guys, stakes, and other supports at end of hurricane season after the full year of maintenance service.

4. Maintenance includes temporary protection fences, barriers, and signs as required for protection.

5. Coordinate watering to provide deep root watering to newly installed trees.


A. Plant Deliveries: Notify Engineer at least 1 day in advance of each delivery.

B. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and before planting of lawns or grasses.

697482A.GN1


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Provide quantity, size, genus, species, and variety of trees and shrubs indicated; comply with applicable requirements of AAN Z60.1.

B. Nomenclature (Names of Plants): In accordance with “Hortus Third”.

C. Quality and Size:

1. Nursery-grown, habit of growth normal for species. Florida grade #1 or better.

2. Sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from insects, diseases, and injuries. 3. Equal to or exceeding measurements specified in plant list. Measure

plants before pruning with branches in normal position. Plants shall not be pruned to meet size specifications or form

4. Root System of Container-Grown Plants: Well developed and well distributed throughout the container, such that the roots visibly extend to the inside face of the growing container.

5. Perform necessary pruning at time of planting. 6. Sizes: Dimensional relationship requirements of AAN Z60.1 for kind

and type of plants required. 7. Balled and Burlapped Plants: Firm, intact ball of earth encompassing

enough of the fibrous and feeding root system to enable full plant recovery. a. Ball Size: AAN Z60.1.

8. Container-Grown Plants: Self-established root systems, sufficient to hold earth together after removal from container, without being root bound. a. Stock: Grown in delivery containers for at least 6 months but not

over 2 years. Roots shall not be root bound and not comprise more than 50 percent of root ball volume.

9. Label at least one tree and shrub of each variety with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.

D. Plant List: On Drawings.

E. Replacement Shrubs and Trees: Same species, size, and quality as specified for plant being replaced, except existing trees larger than 4-inch caliper may be replaced with 4-inch caliper trees.

2.02 ANTIDESICCANT

A. Provide transpiration retarding material to be used where any plant material is moved during the growing season.

697482A.GN1


B. Products:

1. Foliguard. 2. Wiltpruf. 3. Or approved equal.

2.03 GUYING, STAKING, AND WRAPPING MATERIALS

A. Wood Stake: Minimum 2 inches by 2 inches by 8 feet.

B. Tree Ties: No. 4 chain lock tree ties as manufactured by Green Brothers, Ltd.

C. Guy Wires: Galvanized, 12-gauge, ductile steel.

D. Flags:

1. Wood: 1/2 inch by 3 inches by 12 inches, with 3/8-inch hole centered 1-1/2 inches from each end, painted white.

2. Sheet Metal: 1-1/2 inch with clipped corners and both ends punched, painted white.

E. Hose: Two-ply, reinforced rubber garden hose, not less than 1/2-inch diameter, new or used.

F. Wrapping Material: Heavy crepe paper.

1. Burlap: Of first quality, minimum 8 ounces in weight, not less than 6 inches nor more than 10 inches in width.

G. Deadmen: 6 inches by 6 inches by 3 feet long pressure treated pine timbers.

2.04 MULCH

A. Shredded Recycled Hardwood Mulch: Well composted, stable, and weed free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight, 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25 mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 2 to 5 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.

B. See Drawings for depth.

C. Free from noxious weed seed and foreign material harmful to plant growth.

2.05 PEAT MOSS

A. Sphagnum peat moss, fibrous type with neutral pH.

697482A.GN1


2.06 HERBICIDE

A. Selective, pre-emergent, surface-applied.


1. Eli Lilly and Co.; Surflan. 2. Thompson-Hayward Chemical Co.; Casoron. 3. Or approved equal.

2.07 PLANTING SOIL MIX

A. Top soil shall be stockpiled and used as planting soil.

B. Proportion by Weight: 3/4 approved top soil with 1/4 approved organic matter.

2.08 FERTILIZER

A. Commercial, complete, of neutral character; in granular, packet, or pellet form, 35 to 80 percent of nitrogen slow release.

1. Minimum: 10 percent available nitrogen, 3 percent to 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 3 percent to 5 percent soluble potash.


A. Top Soil Analysis/Testing: As specified in Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PERCOLATION TESTS

A. Perform to determine subsoil drainage in planting areas by licensed engineer according to method specified in Minimum Property Standards For One- and Two-Unit Dwellings, FHA Section 1103-103.

B. Test Hole Depth: 30 inches.

3.02 LOCATION OF PLANTS

A. Locate new planting or stake positions as shown, unless obstructions are encountered, in which case notify Engineer.

B. See plant spacing detail on Drawings for required planting setbacks from pavement and structures.

C. Request Engineer observe locations and adjust as necessary before planting begins.

697482A.GN1


3.03 PREPARATION

A. Subsoil Drainage: Furnish for plant pits and beds after percolation test results are received. Areas within the stormwater basins will not require subsoil drainage.

B. Planting Soil: Delay mixing of amendments and fertilizer if planting will not follow preparation of planting soil within 2 days. For pit and trench type backfill, mix planting soil prior to backfilling and stockpile at Site.

C. Plants: Place on undisturbed existing soil or well-compacted backfill.

D. Trees and Shrubs:

1. Pits, Beds, and Trenches: Excavate with vertical and scarified sides. 2. B & B Trees and Shrubs: Make excavations at least twice as wide as

root ball. 3. Container-Grown Stock: Excavate as specified for B & B stock, adjust

for size of container width and depth. 4. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out prior to planting.

E. Ground Cover Beds:

1. Mix amendments and fertilizer with top soil prior to placing or apply on surface of top soil and mix thoroughly before planting.

2. Scarify top soil to a depth of 4 to 6 inches. 3. Establish finish grading of soil. Rake areas to smooth and create

uniform texture and fill depressions. 4. Moisten.

3.04 PLANTING

A. Plant trees before planting surrounding smaller shrubs and ground covers. Adjust plants with most desirable side facing toward the prominent view (towards Pleasant Avenue, Boltz Lane, and Three Mile Creek).

B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C. Place in pit by lifting and carrying by its ball (do not lift by branches or trunk). Lower into pit. Set straight and in pit center with top of rootball 1 to 2 inches above adjacent finish grade. Do not cover root flare with soil.

D. Container-Grown Plants: Remove containers, slash edges of rootballs from top to bottom at least 1-inch deep. Lower into pit. Set straight and in pit center with top of rootball 1 to 2 inches above adjacent finish grade. Do not cover root flare with soil.

697482A.GN1


E. Shrubs and Ground Covers: Set out and space ground covers and shrubs, as indicated on plans, in even rows with triangular spacing. Soldiering lines or grid spacing of plants will not be accepted.

F. Ground Covers: Dig planting holes through mulch with one of the following: hand trowel, shovel, bulb planter, or hoe. Split biodegradable pots or remove nonbiodegradable pots. Root systems of all potted plants shall be split or crumbled. Plant so roots are surrounded by soil below the mulch. Set potted plants so top of root ball is even with existing grade. Do not cover root flare with soil.

G. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

3.05 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill with planting soil, except where existing soil is suitable according to top soil analysis.

B. B & B Plants:

1. Partially backfill pit to support plant. Remove burlap and binding from sides and tops of B & B plants, do not pull burlap from under balls.

2. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill to eliminate air pockets even if it is raining. Finish backfilling pit sides.

3. Never cover top of root ball or root flare with soil.

3.06 GUYING, STAKING, AND WRAPPING

A. Support trees, only if they will not stand on their own, immediately after planting to maintain plumb position. Trees which can stand unassisted shall not be supported with guying and staking.

B. Guying: Support deciduous trees over 4 inches in caliper and all coniferous trees with four guys equally.

C. Staking: Support deciduous trees 4 inches in caliper or less with stakes spaced equally about each tree. Small trees shall have a minimum of three stakes. Large trees shall have a minimum of four stakes.

D. Wrapping: Spirally wrap palm tree trunks with a minimum of five layers palm trees under wood battens Wrap neatly and snug. Hold battens in place with a minimum two rows of bands or straps at top and bottom.

697482A.GN1


3.07 FERTILIZER

A. Add as top dressing depending on plant size and manufacturer’s recommendation.

B. Commercial:

1. Trees: 1/2 pound of 10:6:4 fertilizer per-inch of trunk diameter. 2. Shrubs: 1/4 pound of 10:6:4 fertilizer per foot of height or spread per

plant, or 3 to 5 pounds of 10:6:4 fertilizer per 100 square feet of bed area.

3. Ground Cover: 3 pounds of 10:6:4 fertilizer per 100 square feet of bed area.

3.08 MULCHING

A. Cover planting beds and area of saucer around each plant with 2-inch thick layer of Recycled Hardwood mulch within 2 days after planting. Saturate planting area with water.

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

1. Trees in Turf Areas: Apply mulch throughout plant bed to an average thickness of 2 inches. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of trunks.

2. Mulch in Planting Areas and Masses: Apply 2-inch thickness of mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not cover root flares with mulch.

3.09 PRUNING AND REPAIR

A. Prune only after planting and in accordance with standard horticultural practice to preserve natural character of the plant. Perform in presence of Engineer. Remove all dead wood, suckers, and broken or badly bruised branches. Use only clean, sharp tools. Do not cut lead shoot.

3.10 WEED CONTROL

A. Maintain a weed-free condition within planting areas. Apply pre-emergent selective herbicide to mulched beds at manufacturer’s recommended rate of application.

B. Undesirable plant removal will be completed by hand whenever practical or as specified in the specifications and permits. If herbicides will be required within 50-feet of Three Mile Creek, only herbicides labeled for application in aquatic sites shall be applied. Proper selective herbiciding procedures shall be performed by a trained and registered aquatic applicator, licensed in accordance with the applicable commercial laws/regulations of the State of

697482A.GN1


Alabama. No sooner than two weeks from the date of application the herbicide the Contractor shall completely remove the dead vegetation of the undesirable species and properly dispose of the dead vegetation off-site. Herbicide shall not be applied during dormancy of the target plant.

3.11 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

3.12 CLEAN UP

A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 MANHOLES FEBRUARY 7, 2019 33 05 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 33 05 13 MANHOLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings including details of construction, reinforcing and joints, anchors, lifting, erection inserts, and other items cast into members.

2. Product Data: a. Concrete mix design. b. Manhole frame to structure seals. c. Manhole frame to structure anchor bolt. d. Rubber gaskets and sealants. e. External joint wrap.


1. Experience Record: a. Precast concrete production capabilities. b. Evidence of current PCI plant certification.

2. Certificate of Compliance: Certify admixtures and concrete do not contain calcium chloride.

3. Test Reports: Precast manufacturer’s concrete test cylinders. 4. Certified load test data for precast manhole steps. 5. Manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions. 6. Field quality control report.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Precast Concrete and Precast Prestressed Concrete: Product of manufacturer with 3 years’ experience producing precast concrete products of quality specified.

2. Precast Plant: PCI certified plant with current certification.

697482A.GN1

MANHOLES PW\DEN003\697482 33 05 13 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Mobile Area Water and Sewer System (MAWSS) Standards:

1. Precast manholes (except as modified in the plans) shall be in accordance with Section 12 of the MAWSS Sanitary Sewer Standard Specifications.

2. Precast manholes shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-478, latest edition.

2.02 PRECAST MANHOLES

A. Riser Sections:

1. Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478. 2. Diameter: Minimum 48 inches or as shown on plans. 3. Wall Thickness: Minimum 5 inches or as specified on the plans. 4. Top and bottom surfaces shall be parallel. 5. Joints: Tongue-and-groove and confined O-ring with rubber gaskets

meeting ASTM C443.

B. Cone Sections:

1. Eccentric. 2. Same wall thickness and reinforcement as riser section. 3. Top and bottom surfaces shall be parallel.

C. Base Sections and Base Slab:

1. Base slab integral with sidewalls. 2. Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478.

D. Manhole Extensions:

1. Concrete grade rings; maximum 6 inches high. 2. Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478.

E. Joint Seal Manufacturers and Products:

1. As specified by Section 12 of the MAWSS Sanitary Sewer Standard Specifications.

2. Confined Plastic or Rubber O-Ring: As recommended by precasting manufacturer.

3. External Wrap: As specified by Section 12 of the MAWSS Sanitary Sewer Standard Specifications.

697482A.GN1


F. Polypropylene Steps: As specified by Section 12 of the MAWSS Sanitary Sewer Standard Specifications.

2.03 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVER

A. Castings: As specified by Section 12 of the MAWSS Sanitary Sewer Standard Specifications.

B. Cover: Owner’s Standard. True and seat within ring at all points. With the words SEWER or DRAIN in 2-inch raised letters. As specified by Section 12 of the MAWSS Sanitary Sewer Standard Specifications.

2.04 MANHOLE FRAME CONNECTION TO STRUCTURE

A. As specified by Section 12 of the MAWSS Sanitary Sewer Standard Specifications.

2.05 MORTAR

A. Standard premixed in accordance with ASTM C387/C387M, or proportion one part Portland cement to two parts clean, well-graded sand that will pass a 1/8-inch screen.

B. Admixtures: May be included; do not exceed the following percentages of weight of cement:

1. Hydrated Lime: 10 percent. 2. Diatomaceous Earth or Other Inert Material: 5 percent.

C. Mix Consistency:

1. Tongue-and-Groove Type Joint: Such that mortar will readily adhere to pipe.

2. Confined Groove (Keylock) Joint: Such that excess mortar will be forced out of groove and support is not provided for section being placed.

2.06 BACKFILL AROUND AND UNDER MANHOLE

A. Structural fill as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

2.07 FLEXIBLE JOINTS FOR SEALING PIPES IN MANHOLE


697482A.GN1



A. Prior to delivery of precast manhole sections to Site, yard permeability tests may be required at point of manufacture. Test specimens shall be mat tested and meet permeability test requirements of ASTM C14.

B. Concrete Testing: Test two concrete test cylinders for each manhole. Compressive strength shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M, ASTM C39/C39M, and ASTM C192/C192M.

C. Inspection:

1. Material Quality: a. Manufacturing process and finished sections shall be subject to

inspection and approval by Owner and Engineer. 1) Inspections may take place at manufacturer’s plant, at Site

after delivery, or at both. 2) Sections not meeting requirements of this Specification or

that are determined to have defects which may affect durability of structure are subject to rejection.

3) Sections rejected after delivery shall be removed and replaced.

4) Sections damaged after delivery will be rejected and if already installed shall be repaired to satisfaction of Owner and Engineer.

5) If structure cannot be repaired it shall be removed and replaced entirely at Contractor’s expense.

2. At the time of inspection, the sections will be carefully examined for compliance with ASTM C478 and with manufacturer’s drawings. Sections will be inspected for general appearance, dimensions, scratch strength, blisters, cracks, roughness, and soundness. Surface shall be dense and close textured.

3. Imperfections may be repaired, subject to approval of Engineer, after demonstration by manufacturer that strong and permanent repairs result.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Prior to installation inspect materials:

1. Sections not meeting requirements of this Specification or that are determined to have defects which may affect durability of structure are subject to rejection.

2. Sections damaged after delivery will be rejected and if already installed shall be repaired to satisfaction of Owner and Engineer.

3. Remove and replace structure that cannot be repaired.

B. If needed, dewater excavation during construction and testing operations.

697482A.GN1


3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Excavation: As specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation.

B. Backfill: As specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF PRECAST MANHOLES

A. Concrete Base:


2. Precast: a. Place on compacted structural fill. b. Properly locate, ensure firm bearing throughout, and plumb first

section.

B. Sections:

1. Inspect precast manhole sections to be joined. 2. Clean ends of sections to be joined. 3. Do not use sections with chips or cracks in tongue. 4. Locate precast steps in line with each other to provide continuous

vertical ladder.

C. Preformed Plastic Gaskets or Rubber O-Ring:

1. Use only pipe primer furnished by gasket manufacturer. 2. Install gasket material in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Completed Manhole: Rigid and watertight.

D. Mortar Joints:

1. Thoroughly wet joint with water prior to placing mortar. 2. Place mortar on groove of lower section prior to section installation. 3. Fill joint completely with mortar of proper consistency. 4. Trowel interior and exterior surfaces smooth on standard tongue-and-

groove joint. 5. Prevent mortar from drying out and cure by applying approved curing

compound or comparable approved method. 6. Do not use mortar mixed for longer than 30 minutes. 7. Chip out and replace cracked or defective mortar. 8. Completed Manhole: Rigid and watertight.

E. External Joint Wraps: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

697482A.GN1


F. Extensions:

1. Provide on manholes in streets or other locations where change in existing grade may be likely.

2. Install to height not exceeding 12 inches. 3. Lay grade rings in mortar with sides plumb and tops level. 4. Seal joints with mortar as specified for sections and make watertight.

3.04 MANHOLE INVERT

A. Construct with smooth transitions to ensure unobstructed flow through manhole. Remove sharp edges or rough sections that tend to obstruct flow.

B. Where full section of pipe is laid through manhole, break out top section and cover exposed edge of pipe completely with mortar. Trowel mortar surfaces smooth.

3.05 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS


B. Install concrete grade rings as required to set covers flush with surface of adjoining pavement or ground surface, unless otherwise shown or directed.

C. Anchor frame to manhole with specified bolts.

3.06 MANHOLE PIPING

A. Flexible Joints:

1. Provide in pipe not more than 1-1/2 feet from manhole walls. 2. Where last joint of pipe is between 1-1/2 feet and 6 feet from manhole

wall, provide flexible joint in manhole wall.


A. Hydrostatic Testing and Vacuum Testing:


2. Testing of manhole shall be in accordance with ASTM C-478, latest edition.

3. Provide testing documentation as specified Section 12 of the MAWSS Sanitary Sewer Standard Specifications.

4. Repair manholes that do not meet leakage test, or do not meet specified requirements from visual inspection.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PRECAST CONCRETE FEBRUARY 7, 2019 UTILITY STRUCTURE ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 33 05 16.13 - 1

SECTION 33 05 16.13 PRECAST CONCRETE UTILITY STRUCTURE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:

1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): HB-17, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Division 1 Section 3, Division I Design-Loads (Part A, Part B, Part C).

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A497/A497M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete. b. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain

Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. c. C387/C387M, Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry,

Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. d. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete

Manhole Sections. e. C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading

for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. f. C858, Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete

Utility Structures. g. D4101, Standard Specification for Propylene Injection and

Extrusion Materials. 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

a. 29 CFR 1910.27, Fixed Ladders. b. 29 CFR 1926.502, Fall Protection Systems Criteria and Practices.


A. Design, test, fabricate and install precast concrete utility structure in accordance with the design requirements provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements and herein. Precast concrete utility structure shall be designed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the state where Project will be constructed.

697482A.GN1

PRECAST CONCRETE PW\DEN003\697482 UTILITY STRUCTURE FEBRUARY 7, 2019 33 05 16.13 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Detailed drawings showing complete information for fabrication

including, but not limited to: 1) Member dimensions and cross sections; location, size, and

type of reinforcement, including additional reinforcement. 2) Layout dimensions and identification of each precast unit. 3) Welded connections indicated by AWS standard symbols. 4) Details of connections, joints, accessories, and openings or

inserts. 5) Watertight joint details. 6) Location and details of anchorage devices. 7) Access door details.

b. Product Data: 1) Precast concrete items; show materials of construction by

ASTM reference and grade. 2) Joint sealants.


1. Manufacturer’s data for lifting devices for handling and erection. 2. Manufacturer’s certification that vault design and manufacture comply

with referenced ASTMs (for example, ASTM C857 and ASTM C858). 3. Vault design calculations. 4. Manufacturer’s laboratory test reports including precast manufacturer’s

concrete test cylinders and inspection of assemblies, joints and seals.


A. Calculations required for Contractor design and shop drawings shall be sealed, signed and dated by a registered engineer licensed in state where Project will be constructed.


A. Store each unit in a manner that will prevent cracking, distortion, warping, straining and other physical damage, and in a manner to keep marking visible.

B. Lift and support each unit only at designated lifting points and supporting points as shown on Shop Drawings.

697482A.GN1


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VAULT MANUFACTURERS


1. Oldcastle Precast. 2. Jensen Precast. 3. Hanson Pipe and Precast.

2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS

A. Design Requirements:

1. In the event of a conflict between or among standards, the more stringent standard shall govern.

2. Comply with ASTM C858, except as modified herein. 3. Reinforcing Steel:

a. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60. b. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A497/A497M.

4. Nominal Dimensions: As shown on Drawings. 5. Construction: Rigid type and behave monolithically. Do not use panel-

type vaults. 6. Design Loads: As determined by ASTM C857, and by using Site-

specific values below. a. Unit Weight of Soil: As shown on Drawings. b. At-Rest Earth Pressure Coefficient: As shown on Drawings. c. Groundwater Level: As shown on Drawings. d. Live Loads: As shown on Drawings. e. Designed to avoid flotation with a factor of safety as shown on

Drawings. 7. Design shall accommodate additional stresses or loads that may be

imposed during factory precasting, transporting, erection, and placement.

8. Blockouts for penetrations shall be as shown on Drawings. 9. Sealant:

a. Nonswelling preformed joint sealants to provide a lasting, watertight bond.

b. Manufacturer and Product: Henry Company; RAM-NEK. 10. Mortar: Comply with ASTM C387/C387M, Type S or use nonshrink

grout as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Mark each member or element to indicate location in the structure, top surface, and date of fabrication.

C. Vault Floor: Slope of vault floor shall be as shown on Drawings.

697482A.GN1

PRECAST CONCRETE PW\DEN003\697482 UTILITY STRUCTURE FEBRUARY 7, 2019 33 05 16.13 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Floor Hatches: Conform to requirements of Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

B. Pipe Connections to Vault: Flexible joint conforming to requirements of Section 33 05 13, Manholes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Subgrade Preparation: Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation, prior to placing bedding material and structure.

B. Possible Settlement: If subgrade is encountered that may require removal to prevent structure settlement, notify Engineer. Engineer will determine depth of over excavation and means of stabilizing subgrade prior to structure installation.

C. Place 6-inch minimum thickness of structural fill or granular fill on prepared subgrade; thoroughly compact with a mechanical vibrating or power tamper. Meet requirements of Article Excavation and Backfill.


A. Remove and keep water clear from excavation during construction.

B. Excavation: As specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation.

C. Backfill: As specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill, and Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Concrete Base:

1. Place on prepared subgrade. 2. Properly locate, ensure firm bearing throughout, and plumb first section.

B. Sections:

1. Carefully inspect precast sections to be joined. 2. Thoroughly clean ends of sections to be joined. 3. Do not use sections with chips or cracks.

697482A.GN1


C. Joints:

1. Fill joints between precast sections per manufacturer’s recommendation. 2. Joints shall be watertight to prevent entrance of groundwater. 3. Joint Finish: Dry pack interior of joints to provide smooth finish.

D. Setting Precast Vault: Install vault to elevations shown on Drawings.

E. Watertight construction below grade with no open cracks or spalls. Cracking and defective areas of concrete shall be repaired per requirements of Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

3.04 PIPE CONNECTION TO VAULT

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK FEBRUARY 8, 2019 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 33 16 13.15 - 1

SECTION 33 16 13.15 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK

WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 117, Specification for Tolerance for Concrete Construction and

Materials. b. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. c. 305.1, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. d. 306.1, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. e. 308.1, Specification for Curing Concrete. f. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete

Structures. g. 350.1, Specification for Tightness Testing of Environmental

Engineering Concrete Containment Structures. h. 350.3, Seismic Design of Liquid-Containing Concrete Structures. i. 372R, Guide to Design and Construction of Circular Wire-and-

Strand-Wrapped Prestressed Concrete Structures. j. 506R, Guide to Shotcrete. k. 506.2, Specification for Shotcrete.

2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). a. ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Building and Other

Structures. 3. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A416/A416M, Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete.

b. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

c. A821/A821M, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Hard-Drawn for Prestressed Concrete Tanks.

d. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or zinc-iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

e. A1064/A1064M, Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete.

f. C31/C31M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.

g. C33/C33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

697482A.GN1

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK PW\DEN003\697482 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM FEBRUARY 8, 2019 33 16 13.15 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

h. C39/C39M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

i. C42/C42M, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.

j. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. k. C143/C143M, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-

Cement Concrete. l. C150/C150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. m. C172/C172M, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed

Concrete. n. C231/C231M, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly

Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. o. C260/C260M, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining

Admixtures for Concrete. p. C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures

for Concrete. q. C595/C595M, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic

Cements. r. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or

Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. s. C881/C881M, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base

Bonding Systems for Concrete. t. C989, Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete

and Mortars. u. C1012/C1012M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of

Hydraulic-Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution. v. C1017/C1017M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures

for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. w. C1074, Standard Practice for Estimating Concrete Strength by the

Maturity Method. x. C1077, Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and

Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation.

y. C1218/C1218M, Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete.

z. C1260, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method).

aa. C1293, Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction.

bb. C1567, Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method).

cc. C1602/C1602M, Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

dd. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

697482A.GN1


ee. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Special Inspection, or Testing Materials Used in Construction.

4. America Water Works Association (AWWA): D110, Wire- and Strand-Wound, Circular, Prestressed Concrete Water Tanks.

5. Federal Specifications: FS TT-P-0035(1), Paint, Cementitious, Powder, White and Colors (for Interior and Exterior Use).

6. International Building Code 2012 (IBC), as amended by the State of Georgia.

7. Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI): MNL-120, PCI Design Handbook-Precast and Prestressed Concrete.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Prestressed Tank System: AWWA D110 Type II, wire-wound prestressed concrete tank with galvanized diaphragm. Includes fine grading foundation as required with underdrain system and stone base specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation.

B. Shotcrete: Mortar projected jet directly upon intended surface.


A. Design shall conform to applicable portions of the following:

1. ACI 350. 2. ACI 372R. 3. AWWA D110. 4. ASCE 7. 5. IBC. 6. As specified elsewhere.

B. Obtain services of a qualified design engineer, as defined in Article Quality Assurance, to design and detail elements of Prestressed Tank System conforming to attributes specified in this section.

C. Membrane Floor Slab: Cast-in-place concrete membrane floor shall be minimum of 4 inches thick and have a minimum thickness of 8 inches of concrete over pipe encasements, around sumps, and pressure relief valves. A minimum percentage of 0.60 percent steel reinforcement shall be used in the membrane floor. The minimum percentage shall apply to all thickened sections and shall extend a minimum of 2 feet into the adjacent membrane floor. Floor slab shall include Integral Pressure relief valve system designed by tank manufacturer.

697482A.GN1


D. Roof: Cast-in-place concrete dome with minimum thickness of 4 inches and minimum reinforcing of 0.0025 times concrete section with a minimum area of reinforcing steel each way equal to 0.120 inch squared; or cast-in-place concrete flat slab roof with internal concrete columns, and minimum reinforcing of four at 12 inches each way top and bottom of slab.

E. Walls: Shotcrete core wall with continuous internal steel diaphragm or precast concrete core wall with steel diaphragm, vertical joint seals, and shotcrete coverings. Walls placed on elastomeric bearing pads, free to move radially, and plastic water stop connection between wall and footing. Satisfy allowable stress requirements when calculating wall thicknesses.

F. Resistance to floatation shall be achieved by the one of the following methods:

1. Dead weight of floor slab. 2. Pressure-relief valves.

G. Design Loads and Foundation Criteria:

1. Dead Loads: Self-weight. 2. Roof Live Load: See Design Criteria 001-G-006. 3. Wind Load: See Design Criteria 001-G-006. 4. Winter Temperature: Water 68 degrees F, and outside air 33 degrees F. 5. Summer Temperature: Water 80 degrees F, and outside air 96 degrees F. 6. Differential Drying Allowance: 10 degrees F shall be additive to

temperature differential during winter. 7. Net Allowable Foundation Bearing Pressure See Design

Criteria 001-G-006. 8. Lateral Earth Pressure: See Design Criteria 001-G-006 and tank

drawings. Include surcharge to account for vehicle loads adjacent to tank.

9. Design Ground Water Elevation: See Design Criteria 001-G-006, in combination with a safety factor for resistance to floatation of 1.25.

10. 100-Year Flood Elevation: See Design Criteria 001-G-006, in combination with a safety factor for resistance to floatation of 1.25.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Design Data:

1) Proposed details, concepts, stress calculations, and manhole opening for prestressed tank walls.

2) For design loads and foundation criteria, show calculations and details based on the code required loads including wind and seismic.

697482A.GN1


3) Details for sealing vertical joints of steel diaphragm shell. 4) Details of prestressed tank accessories. 5) Calculations stamped by professional engineer. 6) Design drawings stamped by the Contractor’s Licensed

Design Engineer. Design drawings shall include plan, elevation, and sectional views showing critical dimensions as follows: a) Size, location and number of steel reinforcement. b) Thickness of structural elements of the tank structure

including floor, core wall, dome, and covercoat. c) Prestressing schedule including number and

placement of prestressing wires on the new tank wall and total applied force per foot of wall height.

d) Location and details of all accessories required including pipe supports.

e) Base slab pressure relief system design including pressure relief valve cutsheet, locations, operation, and maintenance requirements, and foundation requirements.

7) Calculations for each type of pipe support, attachment and anchor that the drawings identify as being provided by the tank manufacturer.

b. Concrete Data: Submit concrete design mixes including ingredient proportions, minimum cementitious content, water/cementitious ratio, soluble chloride content, aggregate reactivity test results showing aggregate is non-reactive, and admixture data sheets in accordance with paragraphs 2.01 and 2.02 of this section.

c. Curing methods for dome concrete. d. Description of construction method and materials.

2. Coating Data: Submit color charts for review. Once color is chosen, submit actual drawdown samples prior to application of coating.


1. Warranty Document: In Owner’s name in accordance with paragraph 1.06 of this section.


3. Statements of Qualification: a. Tank Construction Company as required by paragraph 1.05. b. Registered professional engineer.

4. Written Test Reports of Each Test and Inspection: a. Concrete. b. Shotcrete. c. Mill test data for mild steel reinforcing.

697482A.GN1


d. Test reports for prestressing steel components. e. Mill test data for circumferential prestressing material regardless

of manufacture. Include chemical composition, physical properties, and dimensions of steel. Mill test data for at least three samples of final prestressing material taken from material delivered to Site. Identify each roll that Samples were taken from. Identify packages or rolls of prestressing material with mill and heat number.

5. Project Record Documents: Record actual location and final configuration of tank and accessories on design drawings upon completion of Work.


A. Qualifications:

1. The following prestressed concrete tank manufacturers are presumed to have the necessary qualifications for the proposed construction and submittals illustrating their qualifications are not required: a. The CROM Corporation

250 S W 36th Terrace Gainesville, FL 32607

b. Precon Corporation 115 S W 140th Terrace Newsberry, FL 32669

c. Preload 22 S Florida ST Mobile, AL 36606

2. Tank and Dome Construction Company: Shall be a firm with ten years of experience in the design and construction of AWWA D110 Type II wire-wound, circular prestressed concrete tanks with satisfactory evidence that it has the skill, reliability, and financial stability to build and guarantee the tank in accordance with the quality required by these specifications. The company constructing the tanks shall have built tanks in the past five years, and be presently responsible for, a minimum of ten dome-covered prestressed concrete tanks of equal or greater size than that required for this Project which meet these specifications and are now providing satisfactory service. Include name and address of owners.

3. Construction: The entire tank, including floor, wall, and roof shall be built by the tank construction company, using its own trained personnel and equipment.

697482A.GN1


4. Design: Design work for the tank shall be performed by a professional engineer with no less than five years of experience in the design and construction of AWWA D110 Type II wire-wound, circular prestressed concrete tanks. The professional engineer shall be a full-time staff member of the tank construction company and shall be licensed to work in the state where the project is located.

5. The diaphragm design and epoxy injection procedure shall have been used in the twenty tanks required in paragraph 1.06.A.1 of this section.

B. Shotcrete Panel Mockups:

1. When not using automated equipment, assemble test panel at least 30 inches by 30 inches for each mix being considered.

2. Assemble test panels to same thickness as structure, but not less than 3 inches.

3. Obtain and submit results of minimum three cubes or cores from panels for strength testing of shotcrete 7-days prior to application.

4. Cut or broken surfaces shall be dense and free from laminations and sand pockets.

5. Retain and maintain test panels during construction to establish standards by which completed shotcrete Work will be judged.

6. Independent Testing Laboratory Services will: a. Test proposed materials, including water. b. Test proposed mix proportions. c. Test specimens. d. Secure production samples of materials at plants or stockpiles

during construction and test. e. Test strength of shotcrete as Work progresses.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide a warranty document for workmanship and materials on the complete structural portion of the tank for a 5-year period from the date of acceptance of the work. In case leakage or other defects appear within the five-year period, the tank construction company shall promptly repair the tank at its own expense upon written notice by the Owner that such defects have been found. Leakage is defined as a documentable loss of liquids from within the tank regardless of the exterior observability of the leak. This warranty shall not apply to any accessory, equipment or product that is not a structural part of the tank and is manufactured by a company other than the tank construction company.

697482A.GN1



A. Materials delivered prior to time required, store in a dry, ventilated building, heat if necessary to prevent accumulation of moisture on materials or in wrapping. Do not store on ground or expose to weather.


A. Delay Work under the following conditions:

1. During high winds causing sand to separate at the nozzle. 2. When weather approaches freezing defined as below 40 degrees F when

temperature is falling, or until temperature is 35 degrees F when temperature is rising.

3. During rains of high intensity to wash cement out of fresh material.

B. Cold Weather: Take precautions to avoid low temperatures detrimental to epoxy grout or the ability to pump. If grouting procedure cannot be postponed, keep wall temperatures within the required temperature range.

C. Hot Weather: When temperatures exceed 90 degrees F, obtain approval for method used to protect shotcrete from excessive heat and drying.

D. Do not expose circumferential prestressing on walls to weather for more than 72 hours. Exercise precautions during adverse weather conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE

A. In accordance with Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete and as follows: Concrete Mix Design Class 5000F3S1P2C2.

2.02 SHOTCRETE

A. Shotcrete shall conform to the requirements of ACI 506.2 except as modified herein.

B. Shotcrete mixes shall utilize materials in accordance with Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete except as noted in this section.

C. Limit content of fly ash to a maximum of 25 percent of cementitious material by weight.

697482A.GN1


D. Shotcrete in contact with diaphragm or prestressing wire shall be proportioned to consist of not more than three parts sand to one part Portland cement by weight. Other shotcrete shall be proportioned to consist of not more than four parts sand to one part Portland cement by weight.

E. Shotcrete mixes used in the tank construction shall conform to the following:

2.03 WELDED WIRE FABRIC

A. In accordance with Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel.

2.04 MILD STEEL REINFORCING

A. In accordance with Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel.

2.05 CIRCUMFERENTIAL PRESTRESSING STEEL

A. Prestressing Wire:

1. The prestressing wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A821/A821M, Type B.

2. The prestressing wire size shall be 0.162 inches (8 gauge), 0.192 inches (6 gauge) or larger, but no larger than 0.250 inches.

3. The ultimate tensile strength, fpu shall be, 231,000 psi or greater for 8 gauge wire, 222,000 psi or greater for 6 gauge.

4. Splices for horizontal prestressed reinforcement shall be ferrous material compatible with the prestressing reinforcement and shall develop the full strength of the wire.

5. Anchorage: Prestressing manufacturer’s standard and capable of safely developing full strength of units, and not susceptible to galvanic action with prestressed steel.

6. Prestressing Steel Requirements: a. Initial prestress force in circumferential prestressing units after

anchoring shall not exceed 70 percent of guaranteed ultimate strength. Coordinate value with tolerance requirements and reflect values in calculations.

Mix Min Compressive

Strength (psi)

Maximum W/C Ratio

Air Content

(%)

Slump (in)

Fiber Reinforcement

(lbs/cyd)

Core Wall 4000 0.42 N/A 4"+/-1" -

Covercoat 4000 0.42 N/A 4"+/-1" 1.5

697482A.GN1


b. Final prestress force in circumferential prestressing units, when using nonelectronic or electronic wrapping machine, not capable of close stress tolerance, shall be determined by using stress loss of 25,000 psi for concrete shrinkage, plastic flow, and creep in steel plus 6 percent of initial wire stress system tolerances.

c. Calculate final circumferential prestress force and location on wall. Final prestress force shall provide for minimum residual compression in wall, above that required to resist internal water pressure of 100 psi. Maximum compression in core wall limited to 0.45 times design strength of core wall when using final prestress force after losses. Maximum initial compression in core wall limited to 0.55 times design strength of core wall. Calculate wall thickness to comply with these requirements and bending requirements.

B. Prestressing Strand:

1. The prestressing strand shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A416/A416M for low relaxation uncoated steel strand.

2. Strand size shall have a diameter of 0.50 or 0.60 inches. 3. The ultimate strength, fpu shall be 270,000 psi.

2.06 STEEL DIAPHRAGM SHELL

A. The galvanized steel diaphragm used in the construction of the core wall shall be 26 gauge with a minimum thickness of 0.017 inches conforming to the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M. Weight of zinc coating shall be not less than G90 of Table 1 of ASTM A653/A653M.

B. The diaphragm shall be formed with re-entrant angles and erected so that a mechanical key is created between the shotcrete and diaphragm.

C. The diaphragm shall be continuous to within 3 inches of the top and bottom of the wall. Horizontal joints or splices will not be permitted.

D. Vertical joints in the diaphragm shall be rolled seamed, crimped and sealed watertight using epoxy injection to form a continuous positive watertight seal.

E. In tanks designed to use a waterstop at the floor/wall joint, the steel shell diaphragm shall be epoxy bonded to the waterstop.

2.07 PVC WATERSTOPS, BEARING PADS, SPONGE FILLER, PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Plastic waterstops shall be extruded from an elastomeric plastic material of which the base resin is virgin polyvinyl chloride.

697482A.GN1


B. The profile and size of the waterstop shall be suitable for the hydrostatic pressure and movements to which it is exposed.

C. Bearing pads used in floor/wall joints shall consist of neoprene, natural rubber or polyvinyl chloride.

D. Sponge filler at the floor/wall joint shall be closed-cell neoprene.

E. Pressure relief valve shall be stainless steel or coated for exposure to raw sewage.

2.08 EPOXY

A. Epoxy Sealants:

1. Epoxy shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C881/C881M. 2. Epoxy used for sealing the diaphragm shall be Type III, Grade 1, and

shall be 100 percent solids, moisture insensitive, low modulus epoxy. 3. Epoxy used for placing the waterstop shall be Type II, Grade 2, and

shall be 100 percent solids, moisture insensitive, low exotherm epoxy. 4. When pumped, maximum viscosity of the epoxy shall be 10 poises at

77 degrees F. 5. The epoxy sealants used in the tank construction shall be suitable for

bonding to concrete, shotcrete, PVC, and steel.

B. Bonding Epoxy:

1. Epoxy resins used for enhancing the bond between fresh concrete and hardened concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C881/C881M.

2. Epoxy resins shall be a two-component, 100 percent solids, moisture-insensitive epoxy and shall be Type II, Grade 2.

2.09 SEISMIC RESTRAINT CABLES

A. When required by design, seismic restraint cables shall be seven-wire strand conforming to ASTM A416/A416M.

B. The strand shall be protected with a fusion-bonded, grit-impregnated epoxy coating conforming to ASTM A882/A882M.

C. The minimum ultimate strength of the seven-wire strand shall be 270,000 psi.

697482A.GN1


2.10 TANK ACCESSORIES

A. Primary access manway with 24 inches by 52 inches clear-opening rectangular Type 316 stainless steel wall manholes for access to the interior of the tank. Opening invert elevation shall be ten inches above surrounding grade. The cover shall be hindged and fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel. The wall manhole shall be designed to resist hydraulic loading without excessive deflection.

B. Interior ladder at primary access manway. Fabrication shall be Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic appropriate for the exposure conditions.

C. Exterior ladder, stair, and stair platform shall be aluminum construction in accordance with Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. The ladder shall have an aluminum safety cage and lockable security gate and/or a safety climbing device as required to meet applicable OSHA standards.

D. Aluminum handrail shall be in accordance with Section 05 52 16, Aluminum Railing.

E. Roof hatch cover, roof ventilator shall be fabricated from aluminum

F. The liquid level indicator shall be fabricated from Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic.

G. Accessory hardware, unless otherwise noted, shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM F593.

H. Anchor point device at center of roof for fall protection tieoff point. Device shall be manufactured from Type 316 stainless steel as required to meet applicable OSHA standards.

I. Pipe supports as identified on the drawings and in accordance with Sections 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications and 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems.

2.11 COATINGS

A. Interior of tank shall not be coated.

B. Exterior of tank below grade shall not be coated.

C. Exterior tank above-grade shall be coated with a multi-part system as follows:

1. Provide surface preparation in accordance with Coating Manufacturer’s instructions and SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of Concrete. Power wash with 5,000 psi using the rotating “turbo” nozzle, to remove all loose paint, dirt, dust, mildew and all other foreign matter. Apply

697482A.GN1


coatings in accordance with Coating Manufacturer’s instructions and within Manufacturer’s specified environmental parameters. Apply 1st Coat of Tnemec Series 151 Elasto-Grip or approved equal applied at 0.7 – 1.5 dry mils. Apply 2nd Coat of Tnemec Series 156 Enviro-Crete or approved equal applied at 6.0 - 8.0 dry mils via a brush and rolled application. Apply 3rd Coat of Tnemec Series 156 Enviro-Crete or approved equal applied at 6.0 - 8.0 dry mils via a brush and rolled application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify subgrade elevations at new tank construction prior to starting tank construction.

B. Verify top of concrete elevations and dimensions of existing construction prior to starting new construction related to tanks.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Floor:

1. Encase tank piping under foundations in concrete. 2. The subgrade shall be prepared by fine grading to ensure proper

placement of reinforcing steel with proper bottom cover. 3. A 6-mil polyethylene vapor-barrier shall be placed after subgrade

preparation has been completed. 4. Form and screed boards shall be of proper thickness and sufficiently

braced to ensure that the floor is constructed within proper thickness tolerances.

5. Precast concrete bricks (i.e. dobies) shall be used to support reinforcing steel supported directly on the subgrade to ensure positive control of placement of reinforcing steel. See Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel for additional information.

6. The floor shall be vibratory screeded to effect consolidation of concrete and proper encasement of floor reinforcing steel.

7. The floor shall be water cured for a minimum of 7 days after casting. See Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing for additional information.

8. The floor shall receive a light broom finish. See Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete for additional information.

697482A.GN1


B. Core Wall:

1. The wall shall be constructed utilizing diaphragm and shotcrete with each conforming to the following: a. Diaphragm Erection:

1) The diaphragm shall be protected against damage before, during, and after erection. Nail or other holes shall not be made in the diaphragm for erection except in the top 3 inches. Holes shall not be made in the diaphragm except for inserting wall pipes or sleeves, reinforcing steel, bolts, or other special appurtenances. Such penetrations shall be sealed with an epoxy sealant which complies with this section.

b. Shotcrete: 1) Shotcrete shall be applied by or under direct supervision of

experienced nozzlemen certified by the American Concrete Institute (ACI) as outlined in ACI certification publication CP-60.

2) Each shotcrete layer shall be broomed prior to final set to effect satisfactory bonding of the following layer.

3) No shotcrete shall be applied to reinforcing steel or diaphragm that is encrusted with overspray.

4) No less than 1/8-inch thick shotcrete shall separate reinforcing steel and prestressing wire.

5) The diaphragm shall be encased and protected with no less than 1 inch of shotcrete.

6) The interior shotcrete shall receive a light broom finish. c. Curing: Interior and exterior portions of the shotcrete wall shall be

water cured for a minimum of 7 days or until prestressing is completed. See Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing for additional information.

C. Epoxy Injection:

1. Epoxy injection shall be carried out from bottom to top of wall using a pressure pumping procedure.

2. Epoxy injection shall proceed only after the diaphragm has been fully encased, inside and outside, with shotcrete.

D. Dome:

1. Concrete shall be consolidated by means of a vibrator for proper encasement of reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric.

2. Surfaces at the joint between the wall and the dome shall be coated with bonding epoxy which complies with this section.

697482A.GN1


3. Plastic bolsters shall be used to support reinforcing steel and welded wire reinforcement to ensure positive control on placement of steel.

4. The exterior surface of the dome shall receive a light broom finish. 5. The dome shall be water cured for a minimum 7 days after casting or

until dome band prestressing is completed. See Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing for additional information.

6. Schedule wire wrapping and application of shotcrete so curing shall not be interrupted, and water from curing shall not wash or damage shotcrete wire coats.

E. Wire Prestressing:

1. Do not begin prestressing until core wall has obtained a compressive field strength of 4,000 psi or higher as determined by testing field cured samples.

2. Perform calibration work performed within 15 days prior to prestressing.

3. The initial tension in each wire shall be read and recorded to verify that the total aggregate force is no less than that required by the design. Averaging or estimating the force of the wire on the wall shall not be considered satisfactory evidence of correct placement of prestressing wires.

4. Recalibrate stress measuring apparatus during progress of Work. 5. Placement of the prestressing steel wire shall be in a continuous and

uniform helix of such pitch as to provide in each lineal foot of core wall height an initial force and unit compressive force equal to that shown on the design Drawings.

6. Shotcrete shall be used to completely encase each individual wire and to protect it from corrosion. To facilitate this encasement, the clear space between adjacent wires is to be no less than 1.5 wire diameter or 3/8 inch, whichever is larger.

7. Spread or remove from Work prestressing steel wrapped closer together. 8. Splicing of Wire:

a. Splicing of the wire shall be permitted only when completing the application of a full coil of wire or when removing a defective section of wire.

b. Join ends of wire with steel sleeves or splicing devices which will develop full strength of wire without slippage or loss of stress.

c. Anchor stressed prestressing steel, or tie off at frequent intervals as stressing proceeds to minimize loss of stress in event of breakage.

d. Remove from Work, coils of prestressing steel which have broken three or more times.

e. Stress prestressing steel only once.

697482A.GN1


f. Anchor wrapped prestressing steel to wall at least once for every coil or reel.

g. Do not permanently anchor one wire to previously wrapped wire. 9. Prestressing shall be accomplished by a machine capable of

continuously inducing a uniform initial tension in the wire before it is positioned on the tank wall. Tension in the wire shall be generated by methods not dependent on cold working or re-drawing of the wire. In determining compliance with design requirements, the aggregate force of all tensioned wires per foot of wall shall be considered rather than the force per individual wire, and such aggregate force shall be no less than that required by the design and as shown on approved Drawings.

10. The tank construction company shall supply equipment at the construction site to measure tension in the wire after it is positioned on the tank wall. The stress measuring equipment shall include: electronic direct reading stressometer accurate to within 2 percent, calibrated dynamometers and a test stand to verify the accuracy of the equipment.

11. The dome construction company shall supply equipment at the construction site to measure tension in the wire after it is positioned on the dome band. The stress measuring equipment shall include: electronic direct reading stressometer accurate to within 2 percent, calibrated dynamometers and a test stand to verify the accuracy of the equipment.

12. If stresses measured exceed values specified, discontinue operation and make satisfactory adjustments prior to proceeding with wrapping.

13. Apply additional wire to compensate for understressed wire. 14. After circumferential prestressing wires have been placed, they shall be

protected by encasement in shotcrete. This encasement shall completely encapsulate each wire and permanently bond the wire to the tank wall.

15. When multiple layers of wire are required, shotcrete cover between layers shall be no less than 1/8 inch thick.

F. Strand Prestressing:

1. Field handling of the prestressing strands and associated stressing equipment should be under the direction of a supervisor who has technical knowledge of strand prestressing principles and experience with the system or systems being utilized.

2. Each strand shall be individually anchored using anchor wedges capable of holding not less than 95 percent of the minimum tensile strength of the strand.

3. Prestressing jacks and gauges shall be individually identified and calibrated against known standards at intervals not exceeding six months.

697482A.GN1


4. Prestressing equipment shall be capable of consistently producing the specified stress at each point on the wall within a tolerance of plus or minus 7 percent of the specified initial stress in each strand.

5. Elongation measurements shall be made at each stressing location to verify that the strand force has been achieved. Measured elongation shall agree with calculated elongation within plus or minus 7 percent.

6. Prestressing records shall be kept during the operation and shall include tendon mark or identification, required elongation, gauge pressure to achieve required elongation, actual elongation achieved, actual gauge pressure, date of prestressing, name of the jack operator, and serial number or identification number of jacking equipment.

7. After circumferential prestressing strands have been placed, they shall be protected by encasement in shotcrete. This encasement shall completely encapsulate each strand and permanently bond the strand to the dome band.

8. When multiple layers of strand are required, shotcrete cover between layers shall be no less than 3/8 in. thick. Tension anchors shall be epoxy injected and epoxy coated prior to encasement in concrete.

G. Covercoat:

1. After circumferential prestressing wires or strands have been placed, a shotcrete cover having a thickness of no less than 1 inch shall be placed over the prestressing wires and strands, in accordance with ACI 506.2.

2. Cover each layer and outer layer of prestressing steel with a coating of shotcrete. Work from bottom to top of wall.

3. Completely embed the prestressing steel without voids. Maintain uniform flow of material from nozzle.

4. Cut out slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs resulting from nonuniform material flow and repair as Work progresses.

5. On completing surfaces, bring shotcrete to an even plane and to well-formed corners by working up to ground wires or other thickness or alignment guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.

6. Screed exposed surfaces or underlayers by working upward against gravity with thin-edged screed using a slicing motion to trim off high spots and expose low spots.

7. Avoid pulling and breaking surface with subsequent checking. 8. Remove deposits of loose sand before placing succeeding layers of

shotcrete. Clear rebound away continuously from the Work before initial set occurs, and do not reuse rebounded sand.

9. Slope construction joints or day’s work joints off to thin, clean, and to regular feathered slope edge. Thoroughly clean sloped portion and adjacent shotcrete with mortar film coating. Wet and scour with air jet, or sandblast with silica sand before placing adjoining Work.

697482A.GN1


10. Horizontal sections of the wall shall form true circles without flat areas, excessive bumps or hollows.

11. Where more than one layer of circumferential prestressing units are required, maintain minimum 1/4-inch cover over each underlayer. Shotcrete cover over outer layer shall be a minimum of 1-inch thickness applied in a minimum of three coats. Provide 1/4-inch minimum cover over prestressing unit for first coat. Apply finish coat approximately 1/4-inch thickness. Layers of shotcrete shall be broomed after initial set except finish coat.

12. Time the intervals between successive applications to allow for initial set to develop. After initial set, stiff broom shotcrete layers receiving another coat to remove laitance and to provide a bond with succeeding applications.

13. Apply coat to remove rough areas after ground wires have been removed.

14. Carefully screen sand for finish coat to remove oversize particles which rebound and mar surfaces.

15. Surface of finish coat shall be; of natural texture and coloration; free from spotting, cement or dust streaking, lap lines, uneven surfaces, and rebounded material.

16. The covercoat shall receive a sliced trowel finish. 17. Do not hand-patch. 18. Curing:

a. Keep shotcrete between layers of wire and cover damp by hand watering or fine mist spray.

b. Continuously water cure completed shotcrete surfaces for period of 7 days after application, or until subsequent shotcrete coats are applied prior to end of the 7-day curing period.

c. Remove laitance from wall by light sandblasting after curing period.

d. Do not use curing compounds. 19. Check coatings for bond by tapping lightly to test for hollow

sounding spots. 20. Cut out areas where bond is not fully developed and repair.

H. Corrosion Protection:

1. Inspect core wall and patched surfaces. 2. Test surfaces for chlorides or other chemicals that cause corrosion

of prestressing. 3. Remove corrosive chemicals from surfaces. 4. Patch surfaces by building out in uniform circular area level with

surface.

697482A.GN1


I. Wall Openings: Wall pipes, sleeves and manholes passing through the wall shall be sealed to the diaphragm by epoxy injection.

J. Coatings:

1. Interior Coatings: Coat surface of tank as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. a. Coatings shall be applied a minimum of 28 days after final

application of concrete or shotcrete. b. Application procedures for coatings shall be in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Exterior Coatings: Coat exterior concrete wall and dome surfaces.

a. Application procedures for coatings shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


A. Shotcrete Panel Field Tests:

1. When length of core is less than twice diameter, apply correction factors in accordance with ASTM C42 to obtain compressive strength of individual cores.

2. Average compressive strength of three cores taken from test panel equal or exceed 0.85 f’c with no individual core less than 0.75 f’c. Average of three cubes taken from a panel equal or exceed f’c with no individual cube less than 0.88 f’c.

3. Shotcrete will be based on results obtained from cores or sawed cubes. 4. Use of data obtained from impact hammers, ultrasonic equipment, or

nondestructive testing devices is not permitted. However, these devices may be used for determining uniformity of shotcrete.

5. Remove and replace shotcrete found not meeting tests, or cut cores and further test shotcrete, or repair and replace as approved by Owner.

B. Inspection and Testing:

1. Concrete and Shotcrete Testing: a. Compression Tests:

1) Compression test specimens shall be taken during construction from the first placement of each class of concrete specified herein and at intervals thereafter as selected by the Contractor’s Licensed Design Engineer to demonstrate compliance with these Specifications. At least one set of test specimens shall be made for each 50 yards of concrete/shotcrete placed. Each set of test specimens shall be a minimum of 5 cylinders.

697482A.GN1


2) Compression test specimens for concrete/shotcrete shall conform to ASTM C172/C172M for sampling and ASTM C31/C31M for making and curing test cylinders. Test specimens shall be 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high or 4-inch diameter by 8-inch high cylinders.

3) Compression test shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M. One test cylinder will be tested at 7 days for information, two at 28 days for acceptance, and two at 56 days for acceptance. In the event the test results from the 28 day tests meet the 56-day strength requirement, testing of the remaining cylinders is not required.

b. Air Content Tests (concrete only): 1) Air content tests shall conform to ASTM C231/C231M

(Pressure Method for Air Content). 2) Tests for air content shall be made prior to concrete

placement and whenever compression test specimens are made.

c. Slump Tests (concrete only): 1) Slump tests shall be made in accordance with

ASTM C143/C143M. 2) Slump tests shall be made whenever compression test

specimens are made.

C. Tightness Testing: Test tank as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete and AWWA D110.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 STORM DRAIN PIPING FEBRUARY 7, 2019 33 41 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 33 41 01 STORM DRAIN PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer’s Certification of Compliance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. As specified in the Data Sheets following “End of Section.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPE, FITTINGS, AND APPURTENANCES

A. General:

1. Pipe laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends pointing in direction of flow.

2. Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit correct assembly and inspection of entire joint.

3. Pipe invert may deviate from line or grade up to 1/2 inch for line and 1/4 inch for grade, provided that finished pipe line will present a uniform bore, and such variation does not result in a level or reverse sloping invert, or less than minimum slope shown.

4. Pipe bedding shall form continuous and uniform bearing and support for pipe barrel between joints. Pipe shall not rest directly on bell or pipe joint.

5. Prevent entry of foreign material into gasketed joints. 6. Plug or close off pipes that are stubbed off for manhole, concrete

structure, or for connection by others, with temporary watertight plugs.

B. Concrete Closure Collars: Only use concrete closure collars where shown or authorized by Engineer.

3.02 STORM DRAIN CLEANING

A. Prior to final acceptance and final inspection of the storm drain system by Engineer, flush and clean all parts of the system. Remove all accumulated construction debris, rocks, gravel, sand, silt, and other foreign material from the sewer system at or near the closest downstream manhole. If necessary, use mechanical rodding or bucketing equipment.

697482A.GN1

STORM DRAIN PIPING PW\DEN003\697482 33 41 01 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

B. Upon Engineer’s final manhole-to-manhole inspection of the sewer system, if any foreign matter is still present in the system, reflush and clean the sections and portions of the lines as required.

3.03 SUPPLEMENTS

A. Data Sheets.

Number Title

-.05 Reinforced Concrete Pipe

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 REINFORCED CONCRETE FEBRUARY 7, 2019 33 41 01.05 DATA SHEET - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 33 41 01.05 REINFORCED CONCRETE

Item Description

Pipe ASTM C76, Wall B. Mark each joint with pipe class. Rotating packer or platform not allowed.

Cement ASTM C150, Type II, or

ASTM C150, Type I, with fly ash; maximum 12 percent Tricalcium Aluminate, or

ASTM C595 Rev A, Type IP, with fly ash; Cement: ASTM C150.

Minimum 564 pounds per cubic yard without fly ash.

Minimum 479 pounds per cubic yard with fly ash.

Ratio: Water to Cementitious Materials

Not over 0.49.

Fly Ash ASTM C618, Class C or Class F, Tables 1 and 2 modified as follows:

Loss on Ignition: Maximum 3 percent Water Requirement: Maximum 100 percent of control Ratio Percent CaO/Fe2O3: Maximum 1.5

or test cement fly ash mix in accordance with ASTM C1012. Mix: Equal to or better than ASTM C150, Type II cement.

85 pounds per cubic yard minimum, 160 pounds per cubic yard maximum.

Test: ASTM C311 and ASTM C618.

Joints ASTM C443 Rev A. Captive gasket in groove.

Rubber Gaskets ASTM C443.

Tee Fittings Reinforced concrete, rubber gasketed. Provide plug when service piping is not required.

Plugs Removable. Removal shall provide a socket suitable for making a flexible jointed lateral connection or extension.

Circumferential Reinforcement

Not closer than 1 inch to inside surface of pipe. Area of outer circular reinforcing cage not less than 75 percent of inner cage.

Elliptical Reinforcement

Not allowed.

697482A.GN1

REINFORCED CONCRETE PW\DEN003\697482 33 41 01.05 DATA SHEET - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 33 41 01.05 REINFORCED CONCRETE

Item Description

Source Quality Control Testing

Load Bearing 0.01-inch Crack, Compressive Strength and Absorption: ASTM C76 Load Bearing Ultimate: ASTM C76.

Permeability: ASTM C497.

Voids: Longitudinally sawcut one pipe from each 100 lengths of pipe manufactured in half with saw that will not damage the concrete or reinforcing steel. Inspect for voids adjacent to circumferential bars. Voids will be considered continuous if a 1/16-inch diameter pin can be inserted 1/4 inch deep. If voids exist adjacent to more than 10 percent of the circumferential bars, two additional pipes shall be tested. If either of the two pipes fail, the entire 100 lengths will be rejected.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 CATCH BASINS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 33 44 13.13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 33 44 13.13 CATCH BASINS

PART 1 GENERAL (NOT USED)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STORMWATER STRUCTURES

A. Stormwater catch basins shall be in accordance with Index 600 to 699 of the ALDOT Standard Specifications, latest edition.

B. Stormwater catch basins shall be in accordance with Section 533 of the ALDOT Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, latest edition.

2.02 FRAMES AND GRATES

A. Stormwater catch basins shall be in accordance with Index 600 to 699 of the ALDOT Standard Specifications, latest edition.

B. Stormwater catch basins shall be in accordance with Section 533 of the ALDOT Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, latest edition.

C. Frames and grates for catch basins and storm drain inlets shall be fabricated of steel conforming to ASTM A36/A36M in accordance with details shown. Connections shall be welded. Welding shall conform to requirements of current Code for Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society. Frames and grates shall be properly cleaned and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Excavate as required to accomplish construction. Backfill shall be as specified for adjoining pipe trench.

3.02 PLACING PRECAST UNITS, EXTENSIONS AND FRAMES AND GRATES

A. Stormwater catch basins shall be installed in accordance with Index 600 to 699 of the ALDOT Standard Specifications, latest edition.

B. Stormwater catch basins shall be installed in accordance with Section 533 of the ALDOT Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, latest edition.

697482A.GN1

CATCH BASINS PW\DEN003\697482 33 44 13.13 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

C. If material in bottom of trench is unsuitable for supporting unit, excavate and backfill to required grade with 3-inch minus, clean, pit-run material. Set units to grade at locations shown.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Upon completion, clean each structure of all silt, debris, and foreign matter.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 05 15 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 40 05 15 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B31.1, Power Piping.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-

Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

c. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

4. International Code Council (ICC): 5. International Building Code (IBC). 6. International Mechanical Code (IMC). 7. Manufacturers’ Standardization Society (MSS):

a. SP 58, Pipe Hangers and Supports—Materials, Design and Manufacture.

b. SP 127, Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection, and Application.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Wetted or Submerged: Submerged, less than 1 foot above liquid surface, below top of channel wall, under cover or slab of channel or tank, or in other damp locations.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Catalog information and drawings of piping support system, locating each support, sway brace, seismic brace, hanger, guide, component, and anchor for piping 6 inches and larger and 4 inches and smaller. Identify support, hanger, guide, and anchor type by catalog number and Shop Drawing detail number.

697482A.GN1

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW\DEN003\697482 40 05 15 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

2. Calculations for each type of pipe support, attachment and anchor. 3. Revisions to support systems resulting from changes in related piping

system layout or addition of flexible joints. 4. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by




2. Maintenance information on piping support system.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Piping support systems shall be designed and Shop Drawings prepared and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the State of Alabama.


A. General:

1. Design, size, and locate piping support systems throughout facility, whether shown or not.

2. Piping 30 Inches and Smaller: Supports are shown only where specific types and locations are required; additional pipe supports may be required.

3. Piping Larger than 30 Inches: Support systems have been designed for piping shown.

4. Meet requirements of MSS SP 58 and ASME B31.1 or as modified by this section.

B. Pipe Support Systems:

1. Design pipe support systems for gravity and thrust loads imposed by weight of pipes or internal pressures, including insulation and weight of fluid in pipes.

2. Wind loads in accordance with governing codes. 3. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Rod Size: In accordance

MSS SP 58 Table 3 and Table 4. a. Ductile-iron Pipe 8 Inches and Under: Maximum span limited to

that for standard weight steel pipe for water service. b. Ductile-iron Pipe 10 Inches and Larger: Maximum span limited to

20 feet.

697482A.GN1


C. Anchoring Devices: Design, size, and space support anchoring devices, including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor support, to withstand shear and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each particular support.

D. Vertical Sway Bracing: 10-foot maximum centers or as shown.

E. Existing Support Systems: Use existing supports systems to support new piping only if Contractor can show they are adequate for additional load, or if they are strengthened to support additional load.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. When specified items are not available, fabricate pipe supports of correct material and to general configuration indicated.

B. Special support and hanger details may be required for cases where standard catalog supports are not applicable.

C. Materials: In accordance with Table 1 and Table 2, attached as Supplements at end of section.

2.02 HANGERS

A. Clevis: MSS SP 58, Type 1:

1. Anvil; Figure 260 for steel pipe and Figure 590 for ductile-iron pipe, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.

2. Insulated Steel Pipe: Anvil; Figure 260 with insulated saddle system (ISS), sizes 1/2 inch through 16 inches.

3. B-Line; Figure B3100, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.

B. Adjustable Swivel Split-Ring Pipe Clamp: MSS SP 58, Type 6:

1. Anvil; Figure 104, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches. 2. B-Line; Figure B3171, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches.

C. Steel Yoke Pipe Rolls and Roller Supports: MSS SP 58, Type 41 or Type 43:

1. Anvil; Figure 181 for sizes 2-1/2 inches through 24 inches, and Figure 171 for sizes 1 inch through 30 inches.

2. B-Line; Figure B3110 for sizes 2 inches through 24 inches and Figure B3114 for 30 inches.

697482A.GN1


D. Pipe Rollers and Supports: MSS SP 58, Type 44:

1. Anvil; Figure 175, sizes 2 inches through 30 inches. 2. B-Line; Figure B3120, sizes 2 inches through 24 inches.

2.03 WALL BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES

A. Welded Steel Wall Bracket: MSS SP 58, Type 33 (heavy-duty):

1. Anvil; Figure 199, 3,000-pound rating. 2. B-Line; Figure B3067, 3,000-pound rating.

B. Adjustable “J” hanger MSS SP 58, Type 5:


C. Offset Pipe Clamp: Anvil; Figure 103, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches.

D. Channel Type:

1. Unistrut. 2. Anvil; Power-Strut. 3. B-Line; Strut System. 4. Aickinstrut (FRP).

2.04 PIPE SADDLES

A. Provide 90-degree to 120-degree pipe saddle for pipe 6 inches and larger with baseplates drilled for anchors bolts.

1. In accordance with Standard Detail 4005-515. 2. Sizes 20 inches though 60 inches, Piping Technology & Products, Inc.;

Fig. 2000.

B. Saddle Supports, Pedestal Type:

1. Adjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58, Type 38 without clamp. a. Anvil; Figure 264, sizes 2-1/2 inches through 36 inches with

Figure 62C base. b. B-Line; Figure B3092, sizes 3/4 inch through 36 inches with

Figure B3088S base.

2.05 CHANNEL TYPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Channel Size: 12-gauge, 1-5/8-inch wide minimum steel, or 1-1/2-inch wide, minimum FRP.

697482A.GN1


B. Members and Connections: Design for loads using one-half of manufacturer’s allowable loads.

C. Fasteners: Vinyl ester fiber, polyurethane base composite nuts and bolts, or encapsulated steel fasteners.


1. B-Line; Strut System. 2. Unistrut. 3. Anvil; Power-Strut. 4. Aickinstrut (FRP System). 5. Enduro-Durostrut (FRP Systems).

2.06 FRP PIPE SUPPORTS SYSTEMS

A. General:

1. FRP with UV additive, protective veil, and vinyl ester resins resistance to chemicals listed in Supplement at end of section.

2. Fire Retardant: ASTM E84. 3. Include hangers, rods, attachments, and fasteners.

B. Clevis Hangers:

1. Factor of Safety: 3 to 1. 2. Minimum Design Load: 200 pounds.

C. Design:

1. Design pipe supports spacing, hanger rod sizing based upon manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Identify and highlight non-FRP fasteners or components in Shop Drawing.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Aickinstrut. 2. Enduro. 3. Century Composite.

2.07 PIPE CLAMPS

A. Riser Clamp: MSS SP 58, Type 8.


697482A.GN1


2.08 ELBOW AND FLANGE SUPPORTS

A. Elbow with Adjustable Stanchion: Sizes 2 inches through 18 inches, Anvil; Figure 62C base.

B. Elbow with Nonadjustable Stanchion: Sizes 2-1/2 inches through 42 inches, Anvil; Figure 63A or Figure 63B base.

C. Flange Support with Adjustable Base: Sizes 2 inches through 24 inches, Standon; Model S89.

2.09 INTERMEDIATE PIPE GUIDES

A. Type: Hold down pipe guide.

1. Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure B3552, 1-1/2 inches through 30 inches.

B. Type: U-bolts with double nuts to provide nominal 1/8-inch to 1/4-inch clearance around pipe; MSS SP 58, Type 24.

1. Anvil; Figure 137 and Figure 137S. 2. B-Line; Figure B3188 and Figure B3188NS.

2.10 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. Type: Spider.


1. Anvil; Figure 255, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. 2. B-Line; Figure B3281 through Figure B3287, sizes 1/2 inch through

24 inches.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchor Bolts:

1. Size and Material: Sized by Contractor for required loads, 1/2-inch minimum diameter and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

2. Bolt Length (Extension Above Top of Nut): a. Minimum Length: Flush with top of nut preferred. If not flush,

shall be no more than one thread recessed below top of nut. b. Maximum Length: No more than a full nut depth above top of nut.

697482A.GN1


B. Dielectric Barriers:

1. Plastic coated hangers, isolation cushion, or tape. 2. Manufacturer and Products:

a. B-Line; B1999 Vibra Cushion. b. B-Line; Iso Pipe, Isolation Tape.

C. Insulation Shields:

1. Type: Galvanized steel or stainless steel, MSS SP 58, Type 40. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Anvil; Figure 167, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. b. B-Line; Figure B3151, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.

D. Welding Insulation Saddles:

1. Type: MSS SP 58, Type 39. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Anvil; Figure Series 160, sizes 1 inch through 36 inches. b. B-Line; Figure Series B3160, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.

E. Plastic Pipe Support Channel:

1. Type: Continuous support for plastic pipe and to increase support spacing.

2. Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure Series B3106V, sizes 1/2 inch through 6 inches with Figure B3106 Vee bottom hanger.

F. Hanger Rods, Clevises, Nuts, Sockets, and Turnbuckles: In accordance with MSS SP 58.

G. Attachments:

1. I-Beam Clamp: Concentric loading type, MSS SP 58, Type 21, Type 28, Type 29, or Type 30, which engage both sides of flange.

2. Concrete Insert: MSS SP 58, Type 18, continuous channel insert with load rating not less than that of hanger rod it supports.

3. Welded Beam Attachment: MSS SP 58, Type 22. a. Anvil; Figure 66. b. B-Line; Figure B3083.

4. U-Channel Concrete Inserts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

5. Concrete Attachment Plates: a. Anvil; Figure 47, Figure 49, or Figure 52. b. B-Line; Figure B3084, Figure B3085, or Figure B3086.

697482A.GN1


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install support systems in accordance with MSS SP 58, unless shown otherwise.

2. Install pipe hanger rods plumb, within 4 degrees of vertical during shut down, start up or operations.

3. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by equipment.

4. Support large or heavy valves, fittings, and appurtenances independently of connected piping.

5. Support no pipe from pipe above it. 6. Support pipe at changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible

joints and couplings, and where shown. 7. Do not use adhesive anchors for attachment of supports to ceiling or

walls. 8. Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access areas or

bridge crane runs. 9. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal

and lateral sway bracing and to reduce movement after startup. 10. Install lateral supports for seismic loads at changes in direction. 11. Install pipe anchors where required to withstand expansion thrust loads

and to direct and control thermal expansion. 12. Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are

completed.

B. Standard Pipe Supports:

1. Horizontal Suspended Piping: a. Single Pipes: Clevis hangers or adjustable swivel split-ring. b. Grouped Pipes: Trapeze hanger system.

2. Horizontal Piping Supported from Walls: a. Single Pipes: Wall brackets, or attached to wall, or to wall

mounted framing with anchors. b. Stacked Piping: Wall mounted framing system and “J” hangers

acceptable for pipe smaller than 3-inch. c. Pipe clamp that resists axial movement of pipe through support is

not acceptable. Use pipe rollers supported from wall bracket. 3. Horizontal Piping Supported from Floors:

a. Saddle Supports: 1) Pedestal Type, elbow and flange. 2) Provide minimum 1-1/2-inch grout beneath baseplate.

697482A.GN1


b. Floor Mounted Channel Supports: 1) Use for pipe smaller than 3-inch running along floors and in

trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated using pedestal pipe supports.

2) Attach channel framing to floors with baseplate on minimum 1-1/2-inch nonshrink grout and with anchor bolts.

3) Attach pipe to channel with clips or pipe clamps. c. Concrete Cradles: Use for pipe larger than 3 inches along floor

and in trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated using stanchion type.

4. Insulated Pipe: a. Pipe hanger and support shall be on outside of insulation. Do not

enclose within insulation. b. Provide precut 120-degree sections of rigid insulation (minimum

length same as shield), shields and oversized hangers or insulated saddle system (ISS).

c. Wall-mounted pipe clips not acceptable for insulated piping. 5. Vertical Pipe: Support with wall bracket and elbow support, or riser

clamp on floor penetration.

C. Standard Attachments:

1. New Concrete Ceilings: Concrete inserts, concrete attachment plates, or concrete anchors as limited below: a. Single point attachment to ceiling allowed only for 3/4-inch rod

and smaller (8 inches and smaller pipe). b. Where there is vibration or bending considerations, do not connect

a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size.

2. Existing Concrete Ceilings: Channel type support with minimum of two anchor points, concrete attachment plates or concrete anchors as limited below: a. Single point attachment to ceiling is allowed only for 3/4-inch rod

and smaller (8 inches and smaller pipe). b. Where there is vibration or bending considerations do not connect

a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size.

3. Steel Beams: I-beam clamp or welded attachments. 4. Wooden Beams: Lag screws and angle clips to members not less than

2-1/2 inches thick. 5. Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles with

concrete anchors. 6. Concrete Beams: Concrete inserts, or if inserts are not used attach to

vertical surface similar to concrete wall. Do not drill into beam bottom.

697482A.GN1


D. Saddles for Steel or Concrete Pipe: Provide 90-degree to 120-degree pipe saddle for pipe sizes 6 inches and larger when installed on top of steel or concrete beam or structure, pipe rack, trapeze, or where similar concentrated point supports would be encountered.

E. Intermediate and Pipe Alignment Guides:

1. Provide pipe alignment guides, or pipe supports that provide same function, at expansion joints and loops.

2. Guide pipe on each side of expansion joint or loop at 4 pipe and 14 pipe diameters from each joint or loop.

3. Install intermediate guides on metal framing support systems not carrying pipe anchor or alignment guide.

F. Accessories:

1. Insulation Shield: Install on insulated piping with oversize rollers and supports.

2. Welding Insulation Saddle: Install on insulated steel pipe with oversize rollers and supports.

3. Dielectric Barrier: a. Provide between painted or galvanized carbon steel members and

copper or stainless steel pipe or between stainless steel supports and non-stainless steel ferrous metal piping.

b. Install rubber wrap between submerged metal pipe and oversized clamps.


A. Paint atmospheric exposed surfaces hot-dip galvanized steel components as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

3.03 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are a part of this specification:

1. Table 1: Nonchemical Areas.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 05 15 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

Table 1 Nonchemical Areas

Exposure Conditions Support Material

Process Areas: High Humidity or Hydrogen sulfide

Stainless steel

Process Areas: Wetted or Submerged Stainless steel

Notes:

1. Pre-coated steel to be fusion bonded epoxy or vinyl copolymer (Plastisol). 2. Stainless steel to be Type 316. 3. Galvanized steel to be per ASTM A653/A653M, Class G90, or hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 27 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 40 27 00 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section and any supplemental Data Sheets:

1. Air Force: A-A-58092, Tape, Antiseize, Polytetrafluorethylene. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO): HB-17, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 3. American Petroleum Institute (API): SPEC 5L, Specification for Line

Pipe. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators.

b. B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). c. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

Classes 25, 125, and 250. d. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300. e. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through

NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. f. B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. g. B16.11, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. h. B16.15, Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and

250. i. B16.21, Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. j. B16.22, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings. k. B16.24, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500. l. B16.25, Buttwelding Ends. m. B16.42, Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes

150 and 300. n. B31.1, Power Piping. o. B31.3, Process Piping. p. B31.9, Building Services Piping. q. B36.10M, Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.

5. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT): SNT-TC-1A, Recommended Practice for Personal Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing.

697482A.GN1

PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW\DEN003\697482 40 27 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

6. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C104/A21.4, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and

Fittings. b. C105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe

Systems. c. C110/A21.10, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. d. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure

Pipe and Fittings. e. C115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or

Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. f. C151/A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. g. C153/A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings. h. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 In.

Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm). i. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.

7. American Welding Society (AWS): a. Brazing Handbook. b. A5.8M/A5.8, Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and

Braze Welding. c. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel. d. QC1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors.

8. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A47/A47M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron

Castings. b. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and

Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. c. A105/A105M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings

for Piping Applications. d. A106/A106M, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel

Pipe for High-Temperature Service. e. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,

Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. f. A135/A135M, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-

Welder Steel Pipe. g. A139/A139M, Standard Specification for Electro-Fusion (Arc)–

Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 Inches and Over). h. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)

on Iron and Steel Hardware. i. A181/A181M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings,

for General-Purpose Piping. j. A182/A182M, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy

and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service.

k. A183, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts.

697482A.GN1


l. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.

m. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.

n. A197/A197M, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. o. A216/A216M, Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon,

Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service. p. A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of

Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.

q. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

r. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. s. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic

Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. t. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,

60,000 psi Tensile Strength. u. A312/A312M, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and

Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. v. A320/A320M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and

Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service. w. A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for

Pressure-Containing Parts. x. A395/A395M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron

Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. y. A403/A403M, Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic

Stainless Steel Piping Fittings. z. A409/A409M, Standard Specification for Welded Large Diameter

Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High-Temperature Service. aa. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. bb. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. cc. A587, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded

Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical Industry. dd. A743/A743M, Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-

Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application.

ee. A744/A744M, Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service.

ff. A774/A774M, Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures.

gg. A778, Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products.

697482A.GN1


hh. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. ii. B43, Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe,

Standard Sizes. jj. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. kk. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce

Metal Castings. ll. B75/B75M, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. mm. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. nn. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,

Bar and Shapes. oo. B462, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled UNS N06030,

UNS N06022, UNS N06035, UNS N06200, UNS N06059, UNS N10362, UNS N06686, UNS N08020, UNS N08024, UNS N08026, UNS N08367, UNS N10276, UNS N10665, UNS N10675, UNS N10629, UNS N08031, UNS N06045, UNS N06025, and UNS R20033 Alloy Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for Corrosive High-Temperature Service.

pp. B464, Standard Specification for Welded UNS N08020 Alloy Pipe.

qq. B474, Standard Specification for Electric Fusion Welded Nickel and Nickel Alloy Pipe.

rr. C582, Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant Equipment.

ss. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.

tt. D413, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Flexible Substrate.

uu. D543, Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents.

vv. D1248, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable.

ww. D1330, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets. xx. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

yy. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.

zz. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications.

aaa. D2310, Standard Classification for Machine-Made “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.

bbb. D2464, Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.

697482A.GN1


ccc. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

ddd. D2467, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.

eee. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.

fff. D2837, Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products.

ggg. D2996, Standard Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.

hhh. D3222, Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly (Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials.

iii. D3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials.

jjj. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials.

kkk. D4894, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Granular Molding and Ram Extrusion Materials.

lll. D4895, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Resin Produced from Dispersion.

mmm. F423, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Plastic-Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe, Fittings, and Flanges.

nnn. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. ooo. F437, Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly

(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ppp. F439, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. qqq. F441/F441M, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. rrr. F493, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated

Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. sss. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap

Screws, and Studs. ttt. F656, Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent

Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

9. FM Global (FM). 10. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings

Industry, Inc. (MSS): SP-43, Wrought and Fabricated Butt-Welding Fittings for Low-Pressure, Corrosion Resistant Applications.

11. NSF International (NSF): a. ANSI 61: Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. b. ANSI 372: Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content.

12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): LI 1, Industrial Laminating Thermosetting Products.

697482A.GN1


13. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Submerged or Wetted:

1. Zone below elevation of: a. Top face of channel walls and cover slabs. b. Roof of digester, including structure pipe penetrations. c. Liquid surface or within 2 feet above top of liquid surface. d. Top of tank wall or under tank cover.


A. Where pipe diameter, thickness, pressure class, pressure rating, or thrust restraint is not shown or specified, design piping system in accordance with the following:

1. Process Piping: ASME B31.3, normal fluid service unless otherwise specified.

2. Buried Piping: H20-S16 traffic load with 1.5 impact factor, AASHTO HB-17, as applicable.

3. Thrust Restraints: a. Design for test pressure shown in Piping Schedule. b. Allowable Soil Pressure: 1,000 pounds per square foot.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Submit catalogue cut sheets for all pipe and fittings furnished with sizes and options called out.

2. Shop Fabricated Piping: a. Detailed pipe fabrication or spool drawings showing special

fittings and bends, dimensions, coatings, and other pertinent information.

b. Layout drawing showing location of each pipe section and each special length; number or otherwise designate laying sequence on each piece.

3. Pipe Wall Thickness: Identify wall thickness and rational method or standard applied to determine wall thickness for each size of each different service including exposed, submerged, buried, and concrete-encased installations for Contractor-designed piping.

4. Hydraulic Thrust Restraint for Restrained Joints: Details including materials, sizes, assembly ratings, and pipe attachment methods.

5. Dissimilar Buried Pipe Joints: Joint types and assembly drawings.

697482A.GN1


6. Pipe Corrosion Protection: Product data. 7. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by



1. Manufacturer’s Certification of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements: a. Pipe and fittings. b. Factory applied resins and coatings.


3. Flanged Pipe and Fittings: Manufacturer’s product data sheets for gaskets including torqueing requirements and bolt tightening procedures.

4. Qualifications: a. Nondestructive Testing Personnel: SNT-TC-1A Level II

certification and qualifications. 5. Nondestructive inspection and testing procedures. 6. Test logs.


A. In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, and:

1. Flanges: Securely attach metal, hardboard, or wood protectors over entire gasket surface.

2. Threaded or Socket Welding Ends: Fit with metal, wood, or plastic plugs or caps.

3. Linings and Coatings: Prevent excessive drying. 4. Cold Weather Storage: Locate products to prevent coating from freezing

to ground. 5. Handling: Use heavy canvas or nylon slings to lift pipe and fittings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372.

1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited.

697482A.GN1


2.02 PIPING

A. As specified on Piping Data Sheet(s)and Piping Schedule located at the end of this section as Supplement.

B. Diameters Shown:

1. Standardized Products: Nominal size. 2. Fabricated Steel Piping (Except Cement-Lined): Outside diameter,

ASME B36.10M. 3. Cement-Lined Steel Pipe: Lining inside diameter.

2.03 JOINTS

A. Grooved End System:

1. Rigid type. 2. Use of flexible grooved joints allowed where shown on Drawings or

with prior approval by Engineer. 3. Flanges: When required, furnish with grooved type flange adapters of

same manufacturer as grooved end couplings.

B. Flanged Joints:

1. Flat-faced, carbon steel, or alloy flanges when mating with flat-faced cast or ductile iron flanges.

2. Higher pressure rated flanges as required to mate with equipment when equipment flange is of higher pressure rating than required for piping.

C. Threaded Joints: NPT taper pipe threads in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

D. Mechanical Joint Anchor Gland Follower:

1. Ductile iron anchor type, wedge action, with break-off tightening bolts. 2. Thrust rated to 250 psi minimum. 3. Rated operating deflection not less than:

a. 3 degrees for sizes through 12 inches. b. 2 degrees for sizes 14 inches through 16 inches. c. 1.5 degrees for sizes 18 inches through 24 inches. d. 1 degree for sizes 30 inches through 48 inches.

4. UL and FM approved. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. EBAA Iron Inc., Megalug. 1) DI Fittings: Model 1100. 2) DI Bells: Model 1700. 3) PVC to DI Fittings: Model 2000PV. 4) PVC Bells: Model 2800.

697482A.GN1


b. Ford Meter Box Co.: 1) DI Fittings: Model 1400. 2) DI Bells: Model 1450. 3) PVC to DI Fittings: Model 1500. 4) PVC Bells: Model 1350.

E. Flexible Mechanical Compression Joint Coupling:

1. Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 305 bands. 2. Manufacturers:

a. Pipeline Products Corp. b. Fernco Joint Sealer Co.

F. Mechanical connections of high-density polyethylene pipe to auxiliary equipment such as valves, pumps, tanks, and other piping systems shall be through-flanged connections consisting of the following:

1. Polyethylene stub end thermally butt-fused to end of pipe. 2. ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 stainless steel backing flange,

125-pound, ASME B16.1 standard. Use insulating flanges where shown.

3. Bolts and nuts of sufficient length to show a minimum of three complete threads when joint is made and tightened to manufacturer’s standard. Retorque nuts after 4 hours.

4. Gaskets as specified on Data Sheet.

2.04 GASKET LUBRICANT

A. Lubricant shall be supplied by pipe manufacturer and no substitute or “or-equal” will be allowed.

2.05 PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Coatings: See Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for details of coating requirements.

B. Heat Shrink Wrap:

1. Type: Cross-linked polyolefin wrap or sleeve with mastic sealant. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; WPC or TPS.

C. Polyethylene Encasement (Bagging):

1. Encasement Tube: Black polyethylene encasement tube, 8 mils minimum thickness, conforming to AWWA C105/A21.5, free of gels, streaks, pinholes, foreign matter, undispersed raw materials, and visible defects such as tears, blisters, and thinning at folds.

697482A.GN1


2. Securing Tape: Thermoplastic tape, 8 mils minimum thickness, 1 inch wide, pressure sensitive adhesive face capable of bonding to metal, bituminous coating, and polyethylene encasement tube.

D. Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Unions:

1. Materials: a. In accordance with applicable piping material specified in Pipe

Data Sheet. Complete assembly shall have ASME B31.9 working pressure rating equal to or higher than that of joint and pipeline.

b. Galvanically compatible with piping. c. Resistant for intended exposure, operating temperatures, and

products in pipeline. 2. Union Type, 2 Inches and Smaller:

a. Screwed or solder-joint. b. O-ring sealed with molded and bonded insulation to body.

3. Flange Type, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: a. Flanged, complete with bolt insulators, dielectric gasket, bolts,

and nuts. b. Bolt insulating sleeves shall be provided full length between

insulating washers. c. Ensure fit-up of components of insulated flange assembly to

provide a complete functioning installation. d. AWWA C207 steel flanges may be drilled oversize up to 1/8-inch

to accommodate insulating sleeves. e. No less than minimum thread engagement in accordance with

specified bolting standards will be permitted to accommodate thicknesses of required washers, flanges, and gasket.

4. Flange Insulating Kits: a. Gaskets: Full-face, Type E with elastomeric sealing element.

Sealing element shall be retained in a groove within retainer portion of gasket.

b. Insulating Sleeves: Full-length mylar. c. Insulating Washers: High-strength phenolic. d. Steel Washers: Plated, hot-rolled steel, 1/8 inch thick.

1) Flange Diameters 36 Inches or Less: Provide two washers per bolt.

2) Flange Diameters Larger Than 36 Inches: Provide four washers per bolt.

5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Dielectric Flanges and Unions:

1) PSI, Houston, TX. 2) Advance Products and Systems, Lafayette, LA.

b. Insulating Couplings: 1) Dresser; STAB-39. 2) Baker Coupling Company, Inc.; Series 216.

697482A.GN1


2.06 VENT AND DRAIN VALVES

A. Pipeline 2-Inch Diameter and Smaller: 1/2-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless shown otherwise.

B. Pipelines 2-1/2-Inch Diameter and Larger: 3/4-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless shown otherwise.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. Mark each pipe length on outside with the following:

1. Size or diameter and class. 2. Manufacturer’s identification and pipe serial number. 3. Location number on laying drawing. 4. Date of manufacture.

B. Code markings according to approved Shop Drawings.

C. Shop fabricate flanged pipe in shop, not in field, and delivered to Site with flanges in place and properly faced. Threaded flanges shall be individually fitted and machine tightened on matching threaded pipe by manufacturer.

2.08 FINISHES

A. Factory prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Pipe Data Sheet(s) and Piping Schedule.

B. Galvanizing:

1. Hot-dip applied, meeting requirements of ASTM A153/A153M. 2. Electroplated zinc or cadmium plating is unacceptable. 3. Stainless steel components may be substituted where galvanizing is

specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify size, material, joint types, elevation, horizontal location, and pipe service of existing pipelines to be connected to new pipelines or new equipment.

B. Inspect size and location of structure penetrations to verify adequacy of wall pipes, sleeves, and other openings.

697482A.GN1


3.02 PREPARATION

A. See Piping Schedule and Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for additional requirements.

B. Notify Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to field fabrication of pipe or fittings.

C. Inspect pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside.

D. Damaged Coatings and Linings: Repair using original coating and lining materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION—GENERAL

A. Join pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, unless otherwise shown or specified.

B. Remove foreign objects prior to assembly and installation.

C. Flanged Joints:

1. Install perpendicular to pipe centerline. 2. Bolt Holes: Straddle vertical centerlines, aligned with connecting

equipment flanges or as shown. 3. Use torque-limiting wrenches to ensure uniform bearing and proper bolt

tightness. 4. Plastic Flanges: Install annular ring filler gasket at joints of raised-face

flange. 5. Grooved Joint Flange Adapters: Include stainless steel washer plates as

required for mating to serrated faces and lined valves and equipment. 6. Raised-Face Flanges: Use flat-face flange when joining with flat-faced

ductile or cast iron flange. 7. Verify compatibility of mating flange to adapter flange gasket prior to

selecting grooved adapter flanging. 8. Flange fillers are to be avoided, but if necessary, may be used to make

up for small angles up to 6 degrees and for filling gaps up to 2 inches between flanges. Stacked flange fillers shall not be used.

9. Threaded flanged joints shall be shop fabricated and delivered to Site with flanges in-place and properly faced.

10. Manufacturer: Same as pipe.

D. Threaded and Coupled Joints:

1. Conform to ASME B1.20.1. 2. Produce sufficient thread length to ensure full engagement when

screwed home in fittings.

697482A.GN1


3. Countersink pipe ends, ream and clean chips and burrs after threading. 4. Make connections with not more than three threads exposed. 5. Lubricate male threads only with thread lubricant or tape as specified on

Piping Data Sheets.

E. Soldered Joints:

1. Use only solder specified for particular service. 2. Cut pipe ends square and remove fins and burrs. 3. After thoroughly cleaning pipe and fitting of oil and grease using

solvent and emery cloth, apply noncorrosive flux to the male end only. 4. Wipe excess solder from exterior of joint before hardened. 5. Before soldering, remove stems and washers from solder joint valves.

F. Pipe Connections at Concrete Structures: As specified in Article Piping Flexibility Provisions in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties.

G. PVC and CPVC Piping:

1. Provide Schedule 80 threaded nipple where necessary to connect to threaded valve or fitting.

2. Use strap wrench for tightening threaded plastic joints. Do not overtighten fittings.

3. Do not thread Schedule 40 pipe.

H. Ductile Iron Piping:

1. Cutting Pipe: Cut pipe with milling type cutter, rolling pipe cutter, or abrasive blade cutter. Do not flame cut.

2. Dressing Cut Ends: a. General: As required for the type of joint to be made. b. Rubber Gasketed Joints: Remove sharp edges or projections. c. Push-On Joints: Bevel, as recommended by pipe manufacturer. d. Flexible Couplings, Flanged Coupling Adapters, and Grooved

End Pipe Couplings: As recommended by the coupling or adapter manufacturer.

I. High-Density Polyethylene Piping:

1. Join pipes, fittings, and flange connections by means of thermal butt-fusion.

2. Perform butt-fusion in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s recommendations as to equipment and technique.

3. Special Precautions at Flanges: Polyethylene pipe connected to heavy fittings, manholes, and rigid structures shall be supported in such a manner that no subsequent relative movement between polyethylene pipe at flanged joint and rigid structures is possible.

697482A.GN1


J. Fiberglass Reinforced Piping:

1. Cut, fabricate, and install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Provide manufacturer’s representative for instructing workers on proper installation and jointing methods.

3. Installation shall be made by workers experienced in FRP pipe lay-up techniques.

3.04 INSTALLATION—EXPOSED PIPING

A. Piping Runs:

1. Parallel to building or column lines and perpendicular to floor, unless shown otherwise.

2. Piping upstream and downstream of flow measuring devices shall provide straight lengths as required for accurate flow measurement.

B. Supports: As specified in Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems.

C. Group piping wherever practical at common elevations; install to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space and other work.

D. Unions or Flanges: Provide at each piping connection to equipment or instrumentation on equipment side of each block valve to facilitate installation and removal.

E. Install piping so that no load or movement in excess of that stipulated by equipment manufacturer will be imposed upon equipment connection; install to allow for contraction and expansion without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

F. Piping clearance, unless otherwise shown:

1. Over Walkway and Stairs: Minimum of 7 feet 6 inches, measured from walking surface or stair tread to lowest extremity of piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.

2. Between Equipment or Equipment Piping and Adjacent Piping: Minimum 3 feet, measured from equipment extremity and extremity of piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.

3. From Adjacent Work: Minimum 1 inch from nearest extremity of completed piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.

4. Do not route piping in front of or to interfere with access ways, ladders, stairs, platforms, walkways, openings, doors, or windows.

697482A.GN1


5. Headroom in front of openings, doors, and windows shall not be less than the top of the opening.

6. Do not install piping containing liquids or liquid vapors in transformer vaults or electrical equipment rooms.

7. Do not route piping over, around, in front of, in back of, or below electrical equipment including controls, panels, switches, terminals, boxes, or other similar electrical work.

3.05 INSTALLATION—BURIED PIPE

A. Joints:

1. Dissimilar Buried Pipes: a. Provide flexible mechanical compression joints for pressure pipe. b. Provide concrete closure collar for gravity and low pressure

(maximum 10 psi) piping or as shown. 2. Concrete Encased or Embedded Pipe: Do not encase joints in concrete,

unless specifically shown.

B. Placement:

1. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed. 2. Pipe Base and Pipe Zone: As specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench

Backfill. 3. Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or

damage to pipe. 4. Measure for grade at pipe invert, not at top of pipe. 5. Excavate trench bottom and sides of ample dimensions to permit visual

inspection and testing of entire flange, valve, or connection. 6. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement. 7. Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement

operations are not in progress and at close of day’s work. 8. Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying. 9. Install closure sections and adapters for gravity piping at locations

where pipe laying changes direction. 10. Deflect pipe at joints for pipelines laid on a curve using unsymmetrical

closure of spigot into bell. If joint deflection of standard pipe lengths will not accommodate horizontal or vertical curves in alignment, provide: a. Shorter pipe lengths. b. Special mitered joints. c. Standard or special fabricated bends.

11. After joint has been made, check pipe alignment and grade. 12. Place sufficient pipe zone material to secure pipe from movement before

next joint is installed. 13. Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling.

697482A.GN1


C. PVC, CPVC, or HDPE Pipe Placement:

1. Lay pipe snaking from one side of trench to other. 2. Offset: As recommended by manufacturer for maximum temperature

variation between time of solvent welding and during operation. 3. Do not lay pipe when temperature is below 40 degrees F, or above

90 degrees F when exposed to direct sunlight. 4. Shield ends to be joined from direct sunlight prior to and during the

laying operation.

D. Tolerances:

1. Deflection from Horizontal Line, Except PVC, CPVC, or HDPE: Maximum 2 inches.

2. Deflection From Vertical Grade: Maximum 1/4 inch. 3. Joint Deflection: Maximum of 75 percent of manufacturer’s

recommendation. 4. Horizontal position of pipe centerline on alignment around curves

maximum variation of 1.75 feet from position shown. 5. Pipe Cover: Minimum 3 feet where not encased. Minimum 1 foot where

concrete encased unless otherwise shown.

3.06 INSTALLATION—CONCRETE ENCASED

A. Provide reinforced concrete pipe encasement where shown on Drawings and where otherwise required. Some piping may be required to be concrete encased for pipe strength requirements that are included in the Specifications. Piping under and within the influence of buildings, utility trenches, vaults, slabs, and other structures shall be concrete encased. See details on Drawings for encasement requirements.

B. Where concrete encased piping crosses structure construction and expansion joints, provide flexible piping joints to coincide with structure joints to prevent excessive pipe stress and breakage.

3.07 PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Ductile Iron Pipe:

1. Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and as shown in Piping Schedule.

2. Buried: Wrap with polyethylene bagging. 3. Submerged or Embedded: Coat with coal-tar epoxy as specified in

Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. If in potable water service, use NSF/ANSI 61 approved epoxy.

697482A.GN1


B. Carbon Steel Pipe:

1. Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 2. Buried:

a. Pipe: Wrap with tape coating system as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

b. Joints: Wrap with tape coating system as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, or heat shrink wrap as specified herein.

3. Submerged or Embedded: Shop coat with coal-tar epoxy as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. If in potable water service, use NSF/ANSI 61 approved epoxy.

C. PVC and CPVC Pipe, Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

D. Piping Accessories:

1. Exposed: a. Field paint black and galvanized steel, brass, copper, and bronze

piping components as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, as applicable to base metal material.

b. Accessories include, but are not limited to, pipe hangers, supports, expansion joints, pipe guides, flexible couplings, vent and drain valves, and fasteners.

2. Buried: a. Ferrous Metal and Stainless Steel Components: Coat with coal-tar

epoxy as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. b. Bolts, Nuts, and Similar Items: Coat with bituminous paint. c. Flexible Couplings and Similar Items: Wrap with heat shrink

wrap. d. Buried Valves and Similar Elements on Wrapped Pipelines: Coat

with bituminous paint and wrap entire valve in polyethylene encasement.

e. Cement-Coated Pipelines: Cement coat appurtenances same as pipe.

E. Polyethylene Encasement: Install in accordance with AWWA C105/A21.5 and manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Tape Coating System: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

G. Heat Shrink Wrap: Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to surfaces that are cleaned, prepared, and primed.

697482A.GN1


H. Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Unions:

1. Applications: a. Dissimilar metal piping connections. b. Where required for electrically insulated connection.

2. Pipe Installation: a. Submerged carbon steel, ductile iron, or galvanized piping in

reinforced concrete shall be isolated from the concrete reinforcement steel.

b. Align and install insulating joints as shown on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Bolt lubricants that contain graphite or other metallic or electrically conductive components that can interfere with the insulating capabilities of the completed flange shall not be used.

3.08 THRUST RESTRAINT

A. Location:

1. Buried Piping: Where shown and where required to restrain force developed at pipeline tees, plugs, caps, bends, and other locations where unbalanced forces exist because of hydrostatic testing and normal operating pressure.

2. Exposed Piping: At all joints in piping.

B. Thrust Ties:

1. Steel Pipe: Attach with joint harness specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties.

2. Ductile Iron Pipe: Attach with socket clamps anchored against grooved joint coupling or flange.

3. Flanged Coupling Adapters: For exposed installations, install manufacturer’s anchor studs through coupling sleeve or use dismantling joints.

C. Mechanical Joint Valve Restraint in Proprietary Restrained Joint Piping: Install pipe joint manufacturer’s adapter gland follower and pipe end retainer, or mechanical joint anchor gland follower.

3.09 SLAB, FLOOR, WALL, AND ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Application and Installation: As specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties.

697482A.GN1


3.10 BRANCH CONNECTIONS

A. Do not install branch connections smaller than 1/2-inch nominal pipe size, including instrument connections, unless shown otherwise.

B. When line of lower pressure connects to a line of higher pressure, requirements of Piping Data Sheet for higher pressure rating prevails up to and including first block valve in the line carrying the lower pressure, unless otherwise shown.

C. Threaded Pipe Tap Connections:

1. Ductile Iron Piping: Connect only with service saddle or at tapping boss of a fitting, valve body, or equipment casting.

2. Welded Steel or Alloy Piping: Connect only with welded threadolet or half-coupling as specified on Piping Data Sheet.

3. Limitations: Threaded taps in pipe barrel are unacceptable.

3.11 VENTS AND DRAINS

A. Vents and drains at high and low points in piping required for completed system may or may not be shown. Install vents on high points and drains on low points of pipelines as shown.


A. Notify Engineer at least 3 days prior to start of surface preparation or coating application work.

B. As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

3.13 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. Pressure Leakage Testing: As specified in Section 40 80 01, Process Piping Leakage Testing.

3.15 CLEANING

A. Following assembly and testing, and prior to final acceptance, flush pipelines, except as stated below, with water at 2.5 fps minimum flushing velocity until foreign matter is removed.

697482A.GN1


B. If impractical to flush large diameter pipe at 2.5 fps or blow at 4,000 fpm velocity, clean in-place from inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush or blow line at lower velocity.

C. Insert cone strainers in flushing connections to attached equipment and leave in-place until cleaning is complete.

D. Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by removing spools and valves from piping.

3.16 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are a part of this Specification:

1. Piping Schedule Legend. 2. Piping Schedule. 3. Data Sheets.

Number Title

40 27 00.01 Cement-Mortar-Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

40 27 00.10 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

PIPING SCHEDULE LEGEND

SERVICE

DR Process Drain

RS Raw Sewage

SD Storm Drain

V Vents

W1 Water-Potable

EXPOSURE

ALL All

BUR Buried

ENC Concrete Encased

EXP Exposed

SUB Submerged

MATERIAL

CLDI Cement-Lined Ductile Iron

ELDI Epoxy -Lined Ductile Iron

FRPX Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe Type (X = 1 to 3)

PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

RCP Reinforced Concrete Pipe

SST Stainless Steel

JOINT TYPE

FL Flanged

HU Hub and spigot

PRJ Proprietary Restrained

RM Restrained Mechanical

697482A.GN1

PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW\DEN003\697482 40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

S Screwed

W Welded (including solvent and fusion)

PRESSURE TEST

G Gravity Service: Test pressure is not shown on gravity services. Test to highest liquid level that pipe can be subject to.

H Hydrostatic

I In Service

P Pneumatic

PC Test per Uniform Plumbing Code

NA Not Applicable

69

7482

A.G

N1

PW

\DE

N00

3\69

7482

P

RO

CE

SS

PIP

ING

—G

EN

ER

AL

F

EB

RU

AR

Y 8

, 201

9 40

27

00 S

UP

PL

EM

EN

T 2

- 1

©

CO

PY

RIG

HT

201

9 C

H2M

HIL

L

PIP

ING

SC

HE

DU

LE

Ser

vice

L

egen

d

Siz

e(s)

(In

.)1

Exp

osu

re

Pip

ing

Mat

eria

l S

pec

ific

atio

n

Sec

tion

Jo

int

Typ

e

Lin

ing/

Coa

ting

2

Tes

t P

ress

ure

an

d T

ype

(psi

g-x)

, x

= T

ype

ind

icat

ed in

L

egen

d R

emar

ks

Pro

cess

D

rain

D

R

All

BU

R/E

NC

E

LD

I 40

27

00.0

1 R

M/P

RJ

15

0 H

Pro

cess

O

verf

low

O

F

All

BU

R

EL

DI

40 2

7 00

.01

RM

/PR

J

150

H

Pro

cess

O

verf

low

O

F A

ll E

XP

EL

DI

40 2

7 00

.01

FL

EX

P-N

o 4

150

H

Raw

S

ewag

e R

S A

ll E

XP

EL

DI

40 2

7 00

.01

FL

EX

P-N

o 4

150

H

Raw

S

ewag

e R

S

All

B

UR

/EN

C

EL

DI

40 2

7 00

.01

RM

/PR

J

150

H

Ven

t V

<

4”

EX

P/B

UR

/E

NC

PV

C

40 2

7 00

.01

W

EX

P-N

o 25

G

Wat

er -

P

otab

le

W1

>3”

A

ll C

LD

I 40

27

00.0

1 FL

/PR

J E

XP-

No

4 15

0 -2

00 H

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 CERAMIC-EPOXY-LINED FEBRUARY 8, 2019 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 1

SECTION 40 27 00.01 CERAMIC-EPOXY-LINED DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

Item Description

General Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61 acceptance.

Pipe manufacturer shall submit certification that source manufacturing facility has been producing ductile iron pipe of specified diameters, dimensions, and standards for a period of not less than 10 years. Testing of pipe required by AWWA C151/A21.51 shall be conducted in testing and laboratory facilities located in the USA and operating under USA laws and regulations. Pipe shall be handled during manufacture and shipped without nesting (without insertion of one pipe inside another).

Pipe Buried Liquid Service Using Push-on, Mechanical, or Proprietary Restrained Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, and AWWA C151/A21.51, pressure class conforming to Table 5 and Table 7 for Type 4 trench, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Follower glands shall be ductile iron.

Exposed Pipe Using Flange Joints: AWWA C115/A21.15, thickness Class 53 minimum, 250 psi minimum working pressure.

Lining Ceramic Epoxy: Pipe and fittings to be ceramic-epoxy lined shall not have been previously lined. Surface preparation shall be made to surfaces free of grease, oil, or other substance with abrasive blasting using clean sand or grit abrasive. Lining shall be done within 8 hours of surface preparation and surfaces shall be re-blasted if rusting appears before lining. Line with a total dry film thickness of 40 mils of ceramic epoxy. Ceramic epoxy shall be amine-cured Novolac epoxy with 20 percent minimum volume ceramic quartz pigment, Perma-Shield PL Series 431 by TNEMEC and Permox CTF, “or-pre-approved equal. Lining shall be applied above 40 degrees F ambient temperature and shall not be applied to flange faces. Lining thickness shall be tested using a magnetic film thickness gauge. Lining integrity shall be tested on surfaces with a nondestructive, 2,500-volt dielectric resistance test.

697482A.GN1

CERAMIC-EPOXY-LINED PW\DEN003\697482 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL


Item Description

Fittings Lined and coated same as pipe.

Mechanical: AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11, and AWWA C153/A21.53 ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Follower glands shall be ductile iron.

Proprietary Restrained: AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11, and AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Restraint shall be achieved with removable metal elements fitted between a welded bar on the pipe barrel and the inside of the joint bell or fitting sizes smaller than 16 inches may be mechanical joint, restrained by anchor gland followers, ductile iron anchor type, wedge action, with break-off tightening bolts. Assembled joints shall be rated for deflection in operation at rated pressure. Rated deflection shall be not less than 1-1/2 degrees for 36-inch and smaller pipe. Rated deflection shall be not less than 1/2 degree for 42-inch and larger pipe. Clow Corp., American Cast Iron Pipe Co., U.S. Pipe. Restrained joints relying on metal teeth molded into the gasket to prevent joint separation under pressure will not be accepted.

Flange: AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile iron, faced and drilled, Class 125 flat face. Gray cast iron will not be allowed.

Joints Mechanical: 250 psi minimum working pressure.

Proprietary Restrained: 150 psi minimum working pressure. American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Flex-Ring; U.S. Pipe, TR Flex.

Flange: Dimensions per AWWA C110/A21.10 flat face, or ASME B16.1 Class 250 raised face, ductile iron, threaded conforming to AWWA C115/A21.15. Gray cast iron will not be allowed.

Branch connections 3 inches and smaller, shall be made with service saddles as specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 CERAMIC-EPOXY-LINED FEBRUARY 8, 2019 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 3


Item Description

Bolting Mechanical, Proprietary Restrained, and Grooved End Joints: Manufacturer’s standard.

Flanged: ASTM A307, Grade B carbon steel heavy hex head or stud bolts, ASTM A563, Grade A carbon steel heavy hex head nuts and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Stud bolts are not allowed when bolting to tapped flanges. Torque bolts per gasket manufacturer recommendations.

Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and Submerged and Wetted Installations: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M, Grade B8M heavy hex head or stud bolts; ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M heavy hex nuts and ASTM F436 Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Stud bolts are not allowed when bolting to tapped flanges. Torque bolts per gasket manufacturer recommendations.

Gaskets General: Gaskets in contact with potable water shall be NSF ANSI 61 certified.

Mechanical and Proprietary Restrained Joints; Water and Sewage Service: Halogenated butyl or EPDM, Shore A hardness durometer 60, conforming to AWWA C111/A21.11.

Flanged, Water, Sewage and Hot Air Services: 1/8-inch thick, homogeneous black rubber (EPDM), hardness 60-80 (Shore A), rated to 275 degrees F, conforming to ASME B16.21 and ASTM D2000.

Full face for flat-faced flanges, flat-ring type for raised-face flanges. Blind flanges shall be epoxy-lined in accordance with the system specified above.

Gasket pressure rating to equal or exceed the system hydrostatic test pressure.

Joint Lubricant Manufacturer’s standard.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC) FEBRUARY 8, 2019 PIPE AND FITTINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 40 27 00.10 DATA SHEET - 1

SECTION 40 27 00.10 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS

Item Size Description

General All Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61 acceptance.

Pipe All Schedule 80 PVC: Type I, Grade I or Class 12454-B conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM D1785. Pipe shall be manufactured with titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection.

Threaded Nipples: Schedule 80 PVC.

Fittings All Schedule to Match Pipe Above: ASTM D2466 and ASTM D2467 for socket weld type and Schedule 80 ASTM D2464 for threaded type. Fittings shall be manufactured with titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection.

Joints All Solvent socket weld except where connection to threaded valves and equipment may require future disassembly.

Flanges All One-piece, molded hub type PVC flat face flange in accordance with Fittings above, ASME B16.1, Class 125 drilling

Bolting All Flat Face Mating Flange and In Corrosive Areas: ASTM A193/A193M, Type 316 stainless steel Grade B8M hex head bolts, ASTM A194/A194M Grade 8M hex head nuts and ASTM F436 Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

With Raised Face Mating Flange: Carbon steel ASTM A307 Grade B square head bolts, ASTM A563 Grade A heavy hex head nuts and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

697482A.GN1

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC) PW\DEN003\697482 PIPE AND FITTINGS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 27 00.10 DATA SHEET - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 40 27 00.10 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS

Item Size Description

Gaskets All Flat Face Mating Flange: Full faced 1/8-inch thick ethylene propylene (EPR) rubber.

Raised Face Mating Flange: Flat ring 1/8-inch ethylene propylene (EPR) rubber, with filler gasket between OD of raised face and flange OD to protect the flange from bolting moment.

Solvent Cement All Socket type joints shall be made employing solvent cement that meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM D2564 and primer that meets or exceeds requirements of ASTM F656, chemically resistant to the fluid service, and as recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer. Solvent cement and primer shall be listed by NSF 61 for contact with potable water.

Thread Lubricant All Teflon Tape.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 27 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 40 27 01 PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25,

125, and 250). b. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through

NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. C110/A21.10, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. b. C153/A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. c. C210, Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior

of Steel Water Pipelines. d. C213, Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior

of Steel Water Pipelines. e. C219, Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe. f. Manual M11, Steel Pipe—A Guide for Design and Installation.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)

on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.

5. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health

Effects. b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead

Content.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer’s data on materials, construction, end connections, ratings, overall lengths, and live lengths (as applicable).

B. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

697482A.GN1

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES PW\DEN003\697482 40 27 01 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide required piping specialty items, whether shown or not shown on Drawings, as required by applicable codes and standard industry practice.

B. Rubber ring joints, mechanical joints, flexible couplings, and proprietary restrained ductile iron pipe joints are considered flexible joints; welded, screwed, and flanged pipe joints are not considered flexible.

C. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372.


2.02 COUPLINGS

A. General:

1. Coupling linings for use in potable water systems shall be in conformance with NSF/ANSI 61.

2. Couplings shall be rated for working pressure not less than indicated in Piping Schedule for the service and not less than 150 psi.

3. Couplings shall be lined and coated with fusion-bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA C213.

4. Unless thrust restraint is provided by other means, couplings shall be harnessed in accordance with requirements of AWWA Manual M11 or as shown on Drawings.

5. Sleeve type couplings shall conform to AWWA C219 and shall be hydraulically expanded beyond minimum yield for accurate sizing and proofing of tensile strength.

B. Flexible Sleeve Type Coupling:

1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Steel Pipe:

1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 38. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 411.

697482A.GN1


b. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 253. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 441.

C. Transition Coupling for Steel Pipe:

1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 162. b. Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 413.

D. Flanged Coupling Adapter:

1. Anchor studs where required for thrust restraint. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Steel Pipe: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 128. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 913.

b. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 128. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 912.

E. Restrained Flange Adapter:

1. Pressure Rating: a. Minimum Working Pressure Rating: Not less than 150 psi. b. Safety Factor: Not less than two times working pressure and shall

be supported by manufacturer’s proof testing. 2. Thrust Restraint:

a. Provide hardened steel wedges that bear against and engage outer pipe surface, and allow articulation of pipe joint after assembly while wedges remain in their original setting position on pipe surface.

b. Products employing set screws that bear directly on pipe will not be acceptable.

3. Manufacturer and Product: EBAA Iron Sales Co.; Mega-Flange.

F. Restrained Dismantling Joints:

1. Pressure Rating: a. Minimum working pressure rating shall not be less than rating of

the connecting flange. b. Proof testing shall conform to requirements of AWWA C219 for

bolted couplings. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 131. b. Smith Blair, Inc.; Model 975.

697482A.GN1


G. Exposed Metallic Piping Plain End Couplings:

1. Plain end pipe couplings shall be self-restrained against hydrostatic thrust forces equal to not less than two times the working pressure rating of the coupling. Couplings shall accommodate 4 degrees angular deflection at the time of installation and subsequent to pressurization.

2. Casing, bolts, and nuts shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. The sealing sleeve shall be EPDM or NBR elastomer as best suited for the fluid service.

3. Couplings manufacturer and products shall be Straub Couplings, Grip-L or Metal Grip, or equal.

2.03 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Elastomer Bellows:

1. Type: Reinforced molded wide arch. 2. End Connections: Flanged, drilled 125-pound ASME B16.1 standard,

with split galvanized steel retaining rings. 3. Washers: Over retaining rings to help provide leak-proof joint under test

pressure. 4. Thrust Protection: Control rods to protect the bellows from

overextension. 5. Bellows Arch Lining: Buna-N, nitrile, or butyl. 6. Rated Temperature: 250 degrees F. 7. Rated Deflection and Pressure:

a. Lateral Deflection: 3/4 inch, minimum. b. Burst Pressure: Four times the working pressure. c. Compression deflection and minimum working pressure as

follows:

Size (inch)

Deflection (inch)

Pressure (psig)

2-1/2 to 12 1.06 150 14 1.65 130

16 to 20 1.65 110 24 to 36 1.9 100

8. Manufacturers and Products: a. General Rubber Corp.; 1015 Maxijoint. b. Mercer; Flexmore Style 450. c. Goodall Rubber Co.; Specification E-711. d. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Series 1500. e. Proco Products, Inc.; Series 251.

697482A.GN1


B. Teflon Bellows:

1. Type: Three convolutions, with metal reinforcing bands. 2. Flanges: Ductile iron, drilled 150 psi ASME B16.5 standard. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 100 psig, minimum, at 120 degrees F. 4. Thrust Restraint: Limit bolts to restrain force developed by specified

test pressure. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Garlock; Style 215. b. Resistoflex; No. R6905. c. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Style 113. d. Proco Products, Inc.; Series 443.

C. Metal Bellows:

1. Type: Single-ply, annular corrugated metal bellows with limit rods. Circumferential convolution welds not permitted.

2. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. End Connections: ASME 150-pound carbon steel flanges. 4. Minimum Design Working Pressure: 50 psig at 300 degrees F. 5. Length: Minimum of eight convolutions and minimum axial

compression of 3/4 inches. 6. Manufacturers and Products:

a. U.S. Bellows, Inc.; Universal Tied expansion joint. b. Metraflex, Model MN. c. Senior Flexonics Pathway, Inc.; Expansion Joints.

2.04 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Design:

1. Ball and socket type for earth settlement compensation. 2. Joints shall be double ball assemblies rated for 15-degree minimum

deflection and not less than 4 inches offset from centerline of connecting piping.

3. Assembly shall accommodate up to 4 inches of expansion in length. 4. Ductile iron conforming to AWWA C153/A21.53. 5. Rated for 350 psi. 6. Components shall be lined and coated by manufacturer with fusion-

bonded epoxy on all surfaces not bearing gaskets. 7. End Connections: Flanged or mechanical joint as shown and as required

by connecting pipe and fittings. 8. Joint connecting to mechanical joint shall be thrust restrained. 9. Bonding:

a. Manufacturer shall factory install thermite welded joint bonds for assembled expansion joint.

697482A.GN1


b. Provide 24-inch bond wires for field bonds to adjacent metallic piping.

c. Bond wires shall be 2 AWG with two 12-inch long THHN insulated 12 AWG wire pigtails.

B. Manufacturer and Product: EBAA Iron Sales Co.; Flex-Tend.

2.05 SERVICE SADDLES

A. Double-Strap Iron:

1. Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding 150 psi internal pressure without leakage or over stressing.

2. Run Diameter: Compatible with outside diameter of pipe on which saddle is installed.

3. Taps: Iron pipe threads. 4. Materials:

a. Body: Malleable or ductile iron. b. Straps: Type 316 stainless steel. c. Hex Nuts and Washers: Type 316 stainless steel. d. Seal: Rubber.

5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Smith-Blair; Series 313 or 366. b. Dresser; Style 91.

2.06 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Stainless Steel Pipe Sleeve:

1. Minimum Thickness: 3/16 inch. 2. Seep Ring:

a. Center steel flange for water stoppage on sleeves in exterior or water-bearing walls, 3/16-inch minimum thickness.

b. Outside Diameter: Unless otherwise shown, 3 inches greater than pipe sleeve outside diameter.

c. Continuously fillet weld on each side all around. d. Material: Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Modular Mechanical Seal:

1. Type: Interconnected synthetic rubber links shaped and sized to continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall sleeve opening.

2. Fabrication: a. Assemble interconnected rubber links with ASTM A276,

Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. b. Pressure plates shall be reinforced nylon polymer.

697482A.GN1


3. Size: According to manufacturer’s instructions for size of pipes shown to provide a watertight seal between pipe and wall sleeve opening, and to withstand a hydrostatic head of 40 feet of water.

4. Manufacturer: Thunderline Corp., Link-Seal Division.

2.07 SLAB, FLOOR, WALL AND ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Ductile Iron Wall Pipe:

1. Diameter, Lining, and Ends: Same as connecting ductile iron pipe. 2. Thickness: Equal to or greater than remainder of pipe in line. 3. Fittings: In accordance with applicable Pipe Data Sheet. 4. Thrust Collars:

a. Rated for thrust load developed at 250 psi. b. Safety Factor: Two, minimum. c. Material and Construction: Ductile iron or cast iron, cast integral

with wall pipe wherever possible, or thrust rated, welded attachment to wall pipe.

5. Manufacturers: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co.

B. Stainless Steel Wall Pipe:

1. Same material and thickness as connecting pipe, except 1/4-inch minimum thickness.

2. Lining: Same as connecting pipe. 3. Thrust Collar:

a. Outside Diameter: Unless otherwise shown, 3 inches greater than outside diameter of wall pipe.

b. Continuously fillet welded on each side all around.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Provide accessibility to piping specialties for control and maintenance.

3.02 PIPING FLEXIBILITY PROVISIONS

A. General:

1. Thrust restraint shall be provided as specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General.

2. Install flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.

697482A.GN1


B. Flexible Joints at Concrete Backfill or Encasement: Install within 18 inches or one-half pipe diameter, whichever is less, from the termination of any concrete backfill or concrete encasement.

C. Flexible Joints at Concrete Structures: Install 18 inches or less from face of structures; joint may be flush with face.

D. Flexible expansion joints shall be provided to compensate for earth settlement at buried piping connections to structure wall pipes. Wrap complete joint assembly in a double layer of polyethylene encasement, as specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General.

3.03 PIPING TRANSITION

A. Applications:

1. Provide complete closure assembly where pipes meet other pipes or structures.

2. Pressure Pipeline Closures: Plain end pieces with double flexible couplings, unless otherwise shown.

3. Restrained Joint Pipe Closures: Install with thrust tie-rod assemblies as shown or in accordance with NFPA 24.

4. Gravity Pipe Closures: As specified for pressure pipelines, or concrete closures.

5. Concrete Closures: Use to make connections between dissimilar pipe where standard rubber gasketed joints or flexible couplings are impractical, as approved.

6. Elastomer sleeves bonded to pipe ends are not acceptable.

B. Installation:

1. Flexible Transition Couplings: Install in accordance with coupling manufacturer’s instructions to connect dissimilar pipe and pipes with a small difference in outside diameter.

2. Concrete Closures: a. Locate away from structures so there are at least two flexible

joints between closure and pipe entering structure. b. Clean pipe surface before placing closure collars. c. Wet nonmetallic pipe thoroughly prior to pouring collars. d. Prevent concrete from entering pipe. e. Extend collar a minimum of 12 inches on each side of joint with

minimum thickness of 6 inches around outside diameter of pipe. f. Make entire collar in one placement. g. After concrete has reached initial set, cure by covering with well-

moistened earth.

697482A.GN1


3.04 PIPING EXPANSION

A. Piping Installation: Allow for thermal expansion due to differences between installation and operating temperatures.

B. Expansion Joints:

1. Flanged Piping Systems: Elastomer bellows expansion joint. 2. Nonmetallic Pipe: Teflon bellows expansion joint. 3. Pipe Run Offset: Flexible metal hose.

C. Anchors: Install as specified in Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems, to withstand expansion joint thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion.

3.05 SERVICE SADDLES

A. Ferrous Metal Piping (except stainless steel): Double-strap iron.

3.06 COUPLINGS

A. General:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Before coupling, clean pipe holdback area of oil, scale, rust, and dirt. 3. Application:

a. Metallic Piping Systems: Flexible couplings, transition couplings, and flanged coupling adapters.

b. Concrete Encased Couplings: Flexible coupling.

3.07 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Application:

1. As specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General. 2. Above Grade in Nonsubmerged Areas: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication. 3. Below Grade or in Submerged or Damp Environments: Shop-lined and

coated. 4. Alternatively, Molded Polyethylene Pipe Sleeve as specified may be

applied.

B. Installation:

1. Support non-insulating type securely in formwork to prevent contact with reinforcing steel and tie-wires.

697482A.GN1


2. Caulk joint with specified sealant in non-submerged applications and seal below grade and submerged applications with wall penetration seal.

3.08 SLAB, FLOOR, WALL, AND ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Applications:

1. Watertight and Below Ground Penetrations: a. Wall pipes with thrust collars. b. Provide taps for stud bolts in flanges to be set flush with wall face.

2. Nonwatertight Penetrations: Pipe sleeves with seep ring. 3. Existing Walls: Rotary drilled holes.

B. Wall Pipe Installation:

1. Isolate embedded metallic piping from concrete reinforcement using coated pipe penetrations as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

2. Support wall pipes securely by formwork to prevent contact with reinforcing steel and tie-wires.

3.09 PIPING TRANSITION TO PRECAST STRUCTURES

A. For each piping transition to a precast structure, provide a modular Mechanical Seal whose connection is watertight per paragraph 2.06 Pipe Sleeves.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 27 02 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 40 27 02 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Gas Association (AGA): 3, Orifice Metering of Natural Gas and Other Related Hydrocarbon Fluids.

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z21.15, Manually Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and Hose End Valves.

3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25,

125, and 250. b. B16.44, Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in

Above Ground Piping Systems up to 5 psi. 4. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE): 1011, Performance

Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

b. C500, Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. c. C504, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves, 3 In. (75 mm) Through

72 In. (1,800 mm). d. C508, Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-In.

Through 24-In. (50-mm Through 600-mm) NPS. e. C509, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. f. C510, Double Check Valve Backflow Prevention Assembly. g. C511, Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention

Assembly. h. C512, Air-Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for

Waterworks Service. i. C515, Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water

Supply Service. j. C541, Hydraulic and Pneumatic Cylinder and Vane-Type

Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates. k. C542, Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates. l. C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. m. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. n. C800, Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.

6. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

697482A.GN1

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW\DEN003\697482 40 27 02 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

b. A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts.

c. A380, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems.

d. A564/A564M, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

e. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. f. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce

Metal Castings. g. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,

Bar, and Shapes. h. B127, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy

(UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip. i. B139/B139, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod, Bar

and Shapes. j. B164, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar,

and Wire. k. B194, Standard Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy Plate,

Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar. l. B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for

General Applications. m. D429, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to

Rigid Substrates. n. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

7. Canadian Standards Association, Inc. (CSA): 9.1, Manually Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and Hose End Valves.

8. Chlorine Institute (CI): Pamphlet 6, Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine. 9. FM Global (FM). 10. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). 11. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

(IAPMO). 12. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS):

a. SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves. b. SP-81, Stainless Steel, Bonnetless, Flanged Knife Gate Valves. c. SP-85, Gray Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded

Ends. d. SP-88, Diaphragm Valves. e. SP-110, Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,

Grooved and Flared Ends. 13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

697482A.GN1


14. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health

Effects. b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead

Content. 15. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 16. USC Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Product data sheets for each make and model. Indicate valve Type

Number, applicable Tag Number, and facility name/number or service where used.

b. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction.

c. Certification for compliance to NSF/ANSI 61 for valves used for drinking water service.

d. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.

e. For each power actuator provided, manufacturer’s standard data sheet, with application specific features and options clearly identified.

f. Sizing calculations for open-close/throttle and modulating valves. g. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by




2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, for: a. Electric actuators; full compliance with AWWA C542.

3. Tests and inspection data. 4. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data. 5. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with

Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.

697482A.GN1


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Valves to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem, floor stand, operating nut, chain, wrench, and accessories to allow a complete operation from the intended operating level.

B. Valve to be suitable for intended service. Renewable parts not to be of a lower quality than specified.

C. Valve same size as adjoining pipe, unless otherwise called out on Drawings or in Supplements.

D. Valve ends to suit adjacent piping.

E. Resilient seated valves shall have no leakage (drip-tight) in either direction at valve rated design pressure. All other valves shall have no leakage (drip-tight) in either direction at valve rated design pressure, unless otherwise allowed for in this section or in stated valve standard.

F. Size operators and actuators to operate valve for full range of pressures and velocities.

G. Valve to open by turning counterclockwise, unless otherwise specified.

H. Factory mount operator, actuator, and accessories.

I. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372.


2.02 SCHEDULE

A. Additional requirements relative to this section are shown on Electric Actuated Valve Schedule located at the end of this section.

697482A.GN1


2.03 MATERIALS

A. Bronze and brass valve components and accessories that have surfaces in contact with water to be alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and 2 percent aluminum.

1. Approved alloys are of the following ASTM designations: B61, B62, B98/B98M (Alloy UNS No. C65100, C65500, or C66100), B139/B139M (Alloy UNS No. C51000), B584 (Alloy UNS No. C90300 or C94700), B164, B194, and B127.

2. Stainless steel Alloy 18-8 may be substituted for bronze.

B. Valve materials in contact with or intended for drinking water service to meet the following requirements:

1. Materials to comply with requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements.

2. Coatings materials to be formulated from materials deemed acceptable to NSF/ANSI 61.

3. Supply certification product is certified as suitable for contact with drinking water by an accredited certification organization in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61. Provide certification for each valve type used for drinking water service.


A. General:

1. Interior coatings for valves and hydrants shall be in accordance with AWWA C550, unless otherwise specified.

2. Exterior coating for valves and hydrants shall be in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

3. Material in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF/ANSI 61. 4. Exposed safety isolation valves and lockout valves with handles,

handwheels, or chain wheels shall be “safety yellow.”

B. Where epoxy lining and coating are specified, factory finishing shall be as follows:

1. In accordance with AWWA C550. 2. Either two-part liquid material or heat-activated (fusion) material except

only heat-activated material if specified as “fusion” or “fusion bonded” epoxy.

3. Minimum 7-mil dry film thickness except where limited by valve operating tolerances.

697482A.GN1


2.05 VALVES

A. Gate Valves:

1. General: a. AWWA gate valves to be in full compliance with stated AWWA

standard and the following requirements: 1) Provide 2-inch operating nut and handwheel for AWWA

gate valves 12 inches and smaller. 2) Provide totally enclosed spur or bevel gear operator with

indicator for AWWA gate valves 14 inches and larger. 3) Provide Affidavit of Compliance per the applicable AWWA

standard for AWWA gate valves. 4) Mark AWWA gate valves with manufacturer’s name or

mark, year of valve casting, valve size, and working water pressure.

5) Repaired AWWA gate valves shall not be submitted or supplied.

6) Supply AWWA gate valves with stainless steel bolting. 7) AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 valves may be substituted

for each other. 2. Type V134 Resilient Seated Ductile Iron Gate Valve 3 Inches to

36 Inches: a. Ductile iron body, resilient seat, bronze stem and stem nut, with

removable handwheel, ASME B16.1 Class 125 flanged ends, non-rising stem, in accordance with AWWA C515, minimum design working water pressure 200 psig, full port, fusion epoxy coated inside and outside per AWWA C550, NSF/ANSI 61 certified.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) American Flow Control; Series 2500. 2) M&H; Style 7000 and C515 Large RW Valves.

3. Type V135 Resilient Seated Ductile Iron Gate Valve 3 Inches to 36 Inches: a. Ductile iron body, resilient seat, bronze stem and stem nut,

mechanical joint ends, non-rising stem, in accordance with AWWA C515, minimum design working water pressure 250 psig, full port, fusion epoxy coated inside and outside per AWWA C550.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) American Flow Control; Series 2500. 2) Mueller A-2360/A-2361.

697482A.GN1


B. Ball Valves:

1. Type V300 Ball Valve 3 Inches and Smaller for General Water and Air Service: a. Two-piece, standard port, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and

end piece, hard chrome-plated solid bronze or brass ball, RTFE seats and packing, blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland, zinc-coated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip, rated 600-pound WOG, 150-pound SWP, complies with MSS SP-110. For steam service, provide stainless steel ball and stem.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Threaded:

a) Conbraco Apollo; 70-100. b) Nibco; T-580-70.

2) Soldered: a) Conbraco Apollo; 70-200. b) Nibco; S-580-70.

2. Type V307 Stainless Steel Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller: a. Three-piece, full port, ASTM A276 GR 316 or

ASTM A351/A351M GR CF8M stainless steel body and end pieces, Type 316 stainless steel ball, NPT threaded ends, reinforced PTFE seats, seals, and packing, adjustable packing gland, blowout-proof stainless steel stem, stainless steel lever operator with vinyl grip, rated 800 psig to 1,000 psig CWP, complies with MSS SP-110.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Conbraco Apollo; 86R-100/86-500 Series. 2) Nibco; T-595-S6-R-66-LL.

3. Type V320 Vee-Ball Valve 1 Inch to 16 Inches: a. ASME B16.1 Class 150-pound flanged ends, Type 317 stainless

steel body, heat treated nickel or hard chromium-plated Type 317 stainless steel ball, splined-type, 17-4 PH stainless steel shafts, reinforced PTFE flow-ring seal, reinforced PTFE with stainless steel or Hastalloy sleeve bearings, and PTFE V-ring packing. Valve to have 300:1 rangeability and equal percentage characteristic.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Fisher Controls: Design V150. 2) DeZurik: VPB V-Port Ball Valve.

4. Type V330 PVC Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller: a. Rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F, with ASTM D1784, Type I,

Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride body, ball, and stem, end entry, double union design, solvent-weld socket ends, elastomer seat, Viton or Teflon O-ring stem seals, to block flow in both directions. Provide pressure relief hole drilled on low pressure side of ball.

697482A.GN1


b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Nibco; Chemtrol Tru-Bloc. 2) ASAHI/America; Type 21. 3) Spears; True Union.

5. Type V331 PVC Ball Valve 3 Inches and 4 Inches: a. Rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F, with ASTM D1784 Type I, Grade 1

PVC full port body, Teflon seat, Viton O-ring stem, face and carrier seals, end entry design with dual union, solvent-weld socket ends, or single union ball valve with flanged ends drilled to ASME B16.1. Provide pressure relief hole drilled on low pressure side of ball.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Nibco; Chemtrol Tru-Bloc. 2) ASAHI/America; Type 21.

C. Plug Valves:

1. Type V462 Gauge Cock 1/8 Inch to 1/4 Inch: a. 1/4-inch bronze body, hexagon end pattern, tee head, male ends,

rated 125-pound SWP. b. Manufacturer and Product: United Brass Works; Figure 973.

2. Type V464 Corporation Stop 1/2 Inch to 2 Inches: a. AWWA C800 type, tapered threaded inlet, except when

connecting to tapped fittings which require IPS tapered threads, outlet compression connection or IPS threads to suit connecting pipe, stops 1 inch and smaller rated 100 psi, larger stops rated 80 psi.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Ford Meter Box Co. 2) Mueller Co.

D. Check and Flap Valves:

1. Type V608 Swing Check Valve 2 Inches to 24 Inches: Per MAWSS Standard Specifications.

2. Type V694 Check Valve 1 Inch to 48 Inches: a. Elastomer type flanged or slip-on as shown on Drawings, round

entry area to match pipe, contoured duckbilled shaped exit, flat bottom and off-set bill design, curved bill for 18 inches and larger, valve open with approximately 2 inches of line pressure and return to CLOSED position under zero flow condition, rated for 50 psi minimum operating pressure; flanges steel backing flange type, drilled to ASME B16.1, Class 125, plain-end valve attached with two Type 316 stainless steel adjustable bands, elastomer nylon-reinforced EPDM.

697482A.GN1


b. Manufacturer and Product: Red Valve Co.; Tideflex Check Valve Series TF-1 or 35-1.

E. Self-Regulated Automatic Valves:

1. Type V752 Sewage Air Release Valve 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Per MAWSS Standard Specifications.

F. Miscellaneous Valves:

1. Type V905 Pinch Valve 1 Inch to 24 Inches, electric motor operated: a. Cast-iron fully enclosed body, epoxy lined and coated,

ASME B16.1 Class 125 flanged ends, one-piece molded EPDM elastomer tube, full-port design, 90 psi minimum working pressure, double-acting upper and lower pinch bars that close on centerline, stainless steel stem, handwheel operator, position indicator, geared operator for valves 6 inches and larger.

b. The sleeve trim shall be one piece construction with integral flanges drilled to be retained by the flange bolts. The sleeve trim shall be reinforced with calendared nylon or calendared polyester fabric to match service conditions. The sleeve trim shall be connected to the pinch bar by tabs imbedded in the sleeve trim reinforcing ply. All internal valve metal parts are to be completely isolated from the process fluid by the sleeve trim. To promote laminar flow. The interior surface of the sleeve shall be smooth. Sleeves manufactured with interior arches or folds shall not be permitted.

c. The fixed pinch bar shall be set to pre-pinch the sleeve so that the minimum full open area is centered in the valve. For full port and reduced port sleeves the port areas shall be 100 percent of the full pipe area at the valve ends. For Cone and Variable Orifice sleeves the port area at the inlet shall be 100 percent of the full pipe area, reducing to a smaller port size at the outlet.

d. The solid steel pinch mechanism shall be single acting, closing the sleeve from the top only. The mechanism shall be supported in the valve body. To prevent pitting, corrosion, seizing and jamming. The pinch mechanism and side-rails shall be fully enclosed within the valve body. Side-Rails that slide through bushings or protrude through the valve body shall not be permitted. There shall be no cast parts in the operating mechanism. The mechanism shall be connected to the electrically actuated actuator through an ACME threaded stem. The electric motor shall be as specified. The pinch mechanism shall be adjustable for stroke without removing the valve from the line.

e. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Red Valve Co.; Series 5200 E.

697482A.GN1


2. Type V920 Hydrostatic Pressure Relief Valve, Floor Type 4 Inches: a. Floor type, cast-iron body, grate, and cover, removable cover and

strainer, body with integral seep ring, body length as shown on Drawings, neoprene rubber cover seat, epoxy body seat.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) M&H Valve; Style 147, F-1493. 2) Clow Valve; Figure F-1493.

3. Type V921 Hydrostatic Pressure Relief Valve, Wall Type 4 Inches: a. Wall type, flange style frame, cast-iron body and cover, bronze

seat body, resilient rubber seat on cover, bronze hinge pins, cast-iron wall pipe with integral seep ring and strainer, length as shown on Drawings.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) M&H Valve; Style 147, F-1494/F-1496. 2) Clow Valve; Figure F-1494/F-1496.

4. Type V930 Fire Hydrant: Per MAWSS standard.

2.06 OPERATORS AND ACTUATORS

A. Manual Operators:

1. General: a. For AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed requirements of

applicable valve standard. Provide gear reduction operator when force exceeds requirements.

b. For non-AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed applicable industry standard or 80 pounds, whichever is less, under operating condition, including initial breakaway. Provide gear reduction operator when force exceeds requirements.

c. Operator self-locking type or equipped with self-locking device. d. Position indicator on quarter-turn valves. e. Worm and gear operators one-piece design, worm-gears of gear

bronze material. Worm of hardened alloy steel with thread ground and polished. Traveling nut type operator’s threaded steel reach rod with internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut.

2. Exposed Operator: a. 2-inch AWWA operating nut with removable galvanized

handwheel. b. Cranks on gear type operator. c. Chain wheel operator with tieback, extension stem, floor stand,

and other accessories to permit operation from normal operation level.

d. Valve handles to take a padlock, and wheels a chain and padlock.

697482A.GN1


3. Buried Operator: a. Buried service operators on valves larger than 2-1/2 inches shall

have a 2-inch AWWA operating nut. Buried operators on valves 2 inches and smaller shall have cross handle for operation by forked key. Enclose moving parts of valve and operator in housing to prevent contact with the soil.

b. Buried service operators to be grease packed and gasketed to withstand submersion in water to 20 feet minimum.

c. Buried valves shall have extension stems, bonnets, and valve boxes.

B. Electric Operators, 120 Volts:

1. General: a. Unit shall be low profile to reduce amount of required space and

weigh 15 pounds or less. b. Size to 1-1/2 times required operating torque. Motor stall torque

not to exceed torque capacity of the valve. c. Provide operator mounting bracket to mount operator to valve

providing minimal torque to piping system when operating. 2. Operator Operation, General:

a. Suitable for full 90-degree rotation of quarter-turn valves. b. Manually override handwheel. c. Mechanical valve position indication.

3. Electronic Control: a. Torque Limiting Switches: Two single pole, double throw

mechanical switches. Switches operate at any point in valve travel.

b. Jammed-valve detection and protection. c. Motor over-temperature detection and protection. d. Travel limit switches, single pole double throw.

4. Open-Close (O/C) Service: a. Duty cycle for intermittent ON-OFF operation shall be 25 percent. b. Operator shall power to OPEN and power to CLOSE. c. Local Indication and Control:

1) Integral mechanical valve POSITION indication, 0 percent to 100 percent OPENED.

2) Integral OPENED and CLOSED indication lights. 3) Integral LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE (L-O-R). 4) Integral OPEN maintained switch which causes the valve to

stroke full OPENED, even if OPEN switch is released, while L-O-R switch is in LOCAL.

5) Integral CLOSE maintained switch which causes valve to stroke full CLOSED, even if CLOSED switch is released, while L-O-R switch is in LOCAL.

697482A.GN1


d. Remote Indication and Control: 1) Relay contact that closes when valve is capable of being

controlled remotely (L-O-R switch in REMOTE) for connection to and monitoring by plant control system.

2) Limit switch that closes when valve is fully OPENED for connection to and monitoring by plant control system.

3) Limit switch that closes when valve is fully CLOSED for connection to and monitoring by plant control system.

e. Modulating (M) Service: 1) Operator rated for continuous duty with servo shall be rated

for 100 percent modulating operation. 2) Operator shall modulate based on an externally applied

4 mA to 20 mA dc signal. 3) Operator shall be equipped with an electronic servo module

for valve modulation. a) Module shall provide serial communications with

provided cable for setup of valve operation. f. Local Indication and Control:

1) Integral mechanical valve POSITION indication, 0 percent to 100 percent OPENED.

2) Integral OPENED and CLOSED indication lights. 3) Integral LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE (L-O-R). 4) Integral OPEN momentary switch which causes valve to

stroke towards OPENED, as long as OPEN switch is held, while L-O-R switch is in LOCAL.

5) Integral CLOSE momentary switch which causes valve to stroke towards CLOSED, as long as CLOSED switch is held, while L-O-R switch is in LOCAL.

6) Position valve proportionally 0 to 100 percent OPEN with external 4 mA to 20 mA dc signal while in REMOTE.

g. Remote Indication and Control: 1) Relay contact that closes when valve is capable of being

controlled remotely (L-O-R switch in REMOTE) for connection to and monitoring by plant control system.

2) Limit switch that closes when valve is fully OPENED for connection to and monitoring by plant control system.

3) Limit switch that closes when valve is fully CLOSED for connection to and monitoring by plant control system.

4) Current Position Transmitter, 4 mA to 20 mA dc signal in proportion to 0 percent to 100 percent OPENED, with 0.5 percent accuracy and 0.5 percent repeatability, capable of driving a 750-ohm load, for connection to and monitoring by Plant Control System.

5. Control Features: Electric motor actuators with features as noted above, and as modified/supplemented in Electric Actuated Valve Schedule.

6. Manufacturer and Product: Flowserve Limitorque.

697482A.GN1


C. Electric Motor Actuators, 480 Volts:

1. General: a. Comply with latest version of AWWA C542. b. Size to 1-1/2 times required operating torque. Motor stall torque

not to exceed torque capacity of valve. c. Controls integral with actuator and fully equipped as specified in

AWWA C542. d. Stem protection for rising stem valves.

2. Actuator Operation—General: a. Suitable for full 90-degree rotation of quarter-turn valves or for

use on multiturn valves, as applicable. b. Manual override handwheel. c. Valve position indication. d. Operate from FULL CLOSED to FULL OPEN positions or the

reverse in the number of seconds given in Electric Actuated Valve Schedule.

3. Open-Close(O/C)/Throttling(T) Service: a. Size motors for one complete OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN cycle no less

than once every 10 minutes. b. Actuator suitable for throttling operation of valve at intermediate

positions. c. LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE Selector Switch, padlockable in each

position: 1) Integral OPEN-STOP-CLOSE momentary pushbuttons with

seal-in circuits to control valve in LOCAL position. 2) Remote OPEN-STOP-CLOSE momentary control dry

contact inputs in REMOTE position. Integral seal-in circuits for remote OPEN and CLOSE commands; valve travel stops when remote STOP contact opens.

3) Auxiliary contact that closes in REMOTE position. d. OPEN and CLOSED indicating lights. e. Integral reversing motor starter with built-in overload protection.

4. Modulating (M) Service: a. Size actuators for continuous modulating duty. b. Feedback potentiometer, or equivalent, and integral electronic

positioner/comparator circuit to maintain valve position. c. HAND-OFF-AUTO (Local-Off-Remote) Selector Switch,

padlockable in each position: 1) Integral OPEN-STOP-CLOSE momentary pushbuttons with

seal-in circuits to control valve in HAND (Local) position. 2) 4 mA to 20 mA dc input signal to control valve in AUTO

(Remote) position. 3) Auxiliary contact that closes in AUTO (Remote) position.

d. OPEN and CLOSED indicating lights.

697482A.GN1


e. Ac motor with solid state reversing starter or dc motor with solid state reversing controller, and built-in overload protection. Controller capable of 1,200 starts per hour.

f. Duty cycle limit timer and adjustable band width, or equivalent, to prevent actuator hunting.

g. Valve position output converter that generates isolated 4 mA to 20 mA dc signal in proportion to valve position, and is capable of driving into loads of up to 500 ohms at 24 volts dc.

5. Limit Switch: a. Single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) type, field adjustable, with

contacts rated for 5 amps at 120 volts ac. b. Each valve actuator to have a minimum of two auxiliary transfer

contacts at end position, one for valve FULL OPEN and one for valve FULL CLOSED.

c. Housed in actuator control enclosure. 6. Control Features: Electric motor actuators with features as noted above,

and as modified/supplemented in Electric Actuated Valve Schedule. 7. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Rotork Controls; Flowserve Limitorque;.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Tagging: 1-1/2-inch diameter heavy brass or stainless steel tag attached with No. 16 solid brass or stainless steel jack chain for each valve, bearing valve tag number shown on Electric Actuated Valve Schedule, Self-Regulated Valve Schedule or Drawings.

B. Limit Switch:

1. Factory installed NEMA 4X limit switch by actuator manufacturer. 2. SPST, rated at 5 amps, 120 volts ac.

C. T-Handled Operating Wrench:

1. Two each galvanized operating wrenches, 4 feet long. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Mueller; No. A-24610. b. Clow No.; F-2520.

3. Two each galvanized operating keys for cross handled valves.

D. Extension Bonnet for Valve Operator: Complete with enclosed stem, extension, support brackets, and accessories for valve and operator.

1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Pratt. b. DeZurik.

697482A.GN1


E. Floor Stand:

1. Nonrising, heavy pattern, indicating type. 2. Complete with solid extension stem, coupling, handwheel, stem guide

brackets, and yoke attachment. Stem length as required to connect valve operating nut and floor stand.

3. Stem Guide: Space such that stem L/R ratio does not exceed 200. 4. Anchor Bolts: Type 304 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Clow; Figure F-5515. b. Mueller, Figure A-26426.

F. Floor Box:

1. Plain type, for support of nonrising type stem. 2. Complete with solid extension stem, operating nut, and stem guide

brackets. Stem length as required to extend valve operating nut to within 3 inches of finish floor.

3. Stem Guide: Space such that stem L/R ratio does not exceed 200. 4. Anchor Bolts: Type 304 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Neenah Foundry; R 7506. b. Clow; No. F5690.

G. Cast-Iron Valve Box: Designed for traffic loads, sliding type, with minimum of 5-1/4-inch ID shaft.

1. Box: Cast iron with minimum depth of 9 inches. 2. Lid: Cast iron, minimum depth 3 inches, nonlocking type, marked

WATER or SEWER as applicable. 3. Extensions: Cast iron, ABS, or PVC pipe. 4. Two-piece box and lid for valves 4 inches through 12 inches, three-

piece box and lid for valves larger than 12 inches with base sized for valve.

5. Valve extension stem for valves with operating nuts 3 feet or greater below finish grade.

6. Manufacturers and Products: a. East Jordan Iron Works; Cast-Iron Valve Boxes. b. Bingham & Taylor; Cast-Iron Valve Boxes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Flange Ends:

1. Flanged valve bolt holes shall straddle vertical centerline of pipe.

697482A.GN1


2. Clean flanged faces, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten nuts progressively and uniformly.

B. Screwed Ends:

1. Clean threads by wire brushing or swabbing. 2. Apply joint compound.

C. PVC and CPVC Valves: Install using solvents approved for valve service conditions.

D. Valve Installation and Orientation:

1. General: a. Install valves so handles operate from fully open to fully closed

without encountering obstructions. b. Install valves in location for easy access for routine operation and

maintenance. c. Install valves per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Gate, Globe, and Ball Valves: a. Install operating stem vertical when valve is installed in horizontal

runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above finished floor, unless otherwise shown.

b. Install operating stem horizontal in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations greater than 4 feet 6 inches above finish floor, unless otherwise shown.

3. Eccentric Plug Valves: a. Unless otherwise restricted or shown on Drawings, install valve as

follows: 1) Liquids with suspended solids service with horizontal flow:

Install valve with stem in horizontal position with plug up when valve is open. Install valve with seat end upstream (flow to produce unseating pressure).

2) Liquids with suspended solids service with vertical flow: Install valve with seat in highest portion of valve (seat up).

3) Clean Liquids and Gas Service: Install valve with seat end downstream of higher pressure when valve is closed (higher pressure forces plug into seat).

4. Check Valves: a. Install valve in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

provide required distance from immediate upstream fitting. b. Install swing check valve with shaft in horizontal position.

E. Install line size ball valve and union upstream of each solenoid valve, in-line flow switch, or other in-line electrical device, excluding magnetic flowmeters, for isolation during maintenance.

697482A.GN1


F. Locate valve to provide accessibility for control and maintenance. Extension Stem for Operator: Where depth of valve operating nut is 3 feet or greater below finish grade, furnish operating extension stem with 2-inch operating nut to bring operating nut to a point within 6 inches of finish grade.

3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTION

A. Valve may be either tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate step.

B. Test that valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions. Test that two-way valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions from both directions.

C. Inspect air and vacuum valves as pipe is being filled to verify venting and seating is fully functional.

D. Count and record number of turns to open and close valve; account for discrepancies with manufacturer’s data.

E. Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing. Set opening and closing speeds, limit switches, as required or recommended by Engineer.

F. Test hydrostatic relief valve seating; record leakage. Adjust and retest to maximum leakage of 0.1 gpm per foot of seat periphery.


A. Valve(s) as listed below require manufacturer’s field services:

1. V905.

B. Manufacturer’s Representative: Present at Site for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:

1. 1/2 person-day for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 1/2 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion

of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.

C. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

697482A.GN1


3.04 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are part of this Specification.

1. Electric Actuated Valve Schedule. 2. Self-Regulated Valve Schedule.

END OF SECTION

69

7482

A.G

N1

PW

\DE

N00

3\69

7482

P

RO

CE

SS

VA

LV

ES

AN

D O

PE

RA

TO

RS

F

EB

RU

AR

Y 8

, 201

9 40

27

02 S

UP

PL

EM

EN

T 1

- 1

©

CO

PY

RIG

HT

201

9 C

H2M

HIL

L

Ele

ctri

c A

ctu

ated

Val

ve S

ched

ule

Tag

N

um

ber

V

alve

T

ype

Act

uat

or P

ower

S

up

ply

V

alve

Siz

e (i

nch

es)

Pro

cess

F

luid

Max

imu

m

Op

erat

ing

Flo

w

(gpm

)

Max

imu

m

P

(p

si)

Ser

vice

Tra

vel

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Con

trol

Fea

ture

M

odif

icat

ions

/ S

up

ple

men

ts

FV

-132

, F

V-1

33

V-1

35

Gat

e V

alve

480-

volt,

thre

e-ph

ase

30

RS

35

,000

18

O/C

60

0 A

, D, E

, w/ s

pur

gear

for

ho

rizo

ntal

ori

enta

tion

w/

cast

iron

act

uato

r st

and

FV

-131

V

-135

G

ate

Val

ve

480-

volt,

thre

e-ph

ase

30

RS

35

,000

18

O/C

60

0 A

, D, E

, MJx

FLG

w/

spur

gea

r fo

r ho

rizo

ntal

or

ient

atio

n w

/ cas

t iro

n ac

tuat

or s

tand

FC

V-1

40

V30

7,

Bal

l va

lve

480

-vol

t, th

ree-

phas

e 4”

W

55

0 65

O

/C

60

C

FV

-136

, F

V-1

37

V90

5,

Pin

ch

Val

ve

480

-vol

t, th

ree-

phas

e 24

” no

min

al,

24”

x 16

” co

ne

SS

6945

18

M

60

C, J

J

6974

82A

.GN

1

PR

OC

ES

S V

AL

VE

S A

ND

OP

ER

AT

OR

S

PW

\DE

N00

3\69

7482

40

27

02 S

UP

PL

EM

EN

T 1

- 2

F

EB

RU

AR

Y 8

, 201

9

©C

OP

YR

IGH

T 2

019

CH

2M H

ILL

Ele

ctri

c A

ctu

ated

Val

ve S

ched

ule

Tag

N

um

ber

V

alve

T

ype

Act

uat

or P

ower

S

up

ply

V

alve

Siz

e (i

nch

es)

Pro

cess

F

luid

Max

imu

m

Op

erat

ing

Flo

w

(gpm

)

Max

imu

m

P

(p

si)

Ser

vice

Tra

vel

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Con

trol

Fea

ture

M

odif

icat

ions

/ S

up

ple

men

ts

Ser

vice

: O/C

= O

pen-

Clo

se, T

= T

hrot

tling

, M =

Mod

ulat

ing

Con

trol

Fea

ture

Mod

ific

atio

ns/S

uppl

emen

ts:

A =

Act

uato

r sh

all o

pen

valv

e up

on lo

ss o

f si

gnal

. B

= A

ctua

tor

shal

l clo

se v

alve

upo

n lo

ss o

f si

gnal

. C

= A

ctua

tor

shal

l rem

ain

in la

st p

ositi

on u

pon

loss

of

sign

al.

D =

Loc

al O

PEN

-CL

OS

E m

omen

tary

pus

hbut

tons

that

mus

t be

cont

inuo

usly

dep

ress

ed to

initi

ate/

mai

ntai

n va

lve

trav

el; t

rave

l sto

ps w

hen

push

butto

n is

re

leas

ed o

r w

hen

end

of tr

avel

lim

it is

rea

ched

. E

= R

emot

e O

PE

N-C

LO

SE

mai

ntai

ned

dry

cont

acts

; tra

vel s

tops

whe

n re

mot

e co

ntac

t ope

ns, o

r w

hen

end

of tr

avel

lim

it is

rea

ched

. F

= T

hree

24-

volt

dc in

terp

osin

g re

lays

for

rem

ote

OP

EN

-ST

OP

-CL

OS

E c

ontr

ol. R

elay

s po

wer

ed e

xter

nally

, the

reby

per

mitt

ing

valv

e co

ntro

l fro

m g

reat

er

dist

ance

s.

G =

Mot

or a

nd c

ontr

ol e

nclo

sure

(s)

NE

MA

250

, Typ

e 4

with

120

-vol

t spa

ce h

eate

rs.

H =

Mot

or a

nd c

ontr

ol e

nclo

sure

(s)

NE

MA

250

, Typ

e 6

(IP

68)

with

120

-vol

t spa

ce h

eate

rs.

I =

Mot

or a

nd c

ontr

ol e

nclo

sure

(s)

NE

MA

250

, Typ

e 7

with

120

-vol

t spa

ce h

eate

rs.

J =

Val

ve p

ositi

on o

utpu

t con

vert

er th

at g

ener

ates

isol

ated

4 m

A to

20

mA

dc

sign

al in

pro

port

ion

to v

alve

pos

ition

, and

is c

apab

le o

f dr

ivin

g in

to lo

ads

of u

p to

500

ohm

s at

24

volts

dc.

K

= 1

20-v

olt s

econ

dary

con

trol

pow

er tr

ansf

orm

er.

L =

Ext

erna

lly o

pera

ble

pow

er d

isco

nnec

t sw

itch.

69

7482

A.G

N1

PW

\DE

N00

3\69

7482

P

RO

CE

SS

VA

LV

ES

AN

D O

PE

RA

TO

RS

F

EB

RU

AR

Y 8

, 201

9 40

27

02 S

UP

PL

EM

EN

T 2

- 1

©

CO

PY

RIG

HT

201

9 C

H2M

HIL

L

Sel

f-R

egu

late

d V

alve

Sch

edu

le

Tag

No.

V

alve

Typ

e N

o.

Siz

e (i

nch

es)

Inle

t*

Pre

ssu

re

Ou

tlet

* P

ress

ure

M

axim

um

p

sig

Flo

w

(gp

m)

Flu

id

-A

V75

2 2

30

0 15

0 7,

000

AIR

-B

V75

2 2

30

0 15

0 7,

000

AIR

-C

V75

2 2

30

0 15

0 7,

000

AIR

-D

V75

2 2

30

0 15

0 7,

000

AIR

-E

V75

2 2

30

0 15

0 7,

000

AIR

-F

V75

2 2

30

0 15

0 7,

000

AIR

-G

V75

2 2

30

0 15

0 7,

000

AIR

*Inl

et P

ress

ure

= S

et p

ress

ure

for

pres

sure

rel

ief

valv

e or

dow

nstr

eam

set

pre

ssur

e fo

r pr

essu

re r

educ

ing

valv

e.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING FEBRUARY 7, 2019 40 80 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 40 80 01 PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS


1. Testing Plan: a. Submit prior to testing and include at least the information that

follows. 1) Testing dates. 2) Piping systems and section(s) to be tested. 3) Test type. 4) Method of isolation. 5) Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping

section(s) to be tested. 2. Certifications of Calibration: Testing equipment. 3. Certified Test Report.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Notify Engineer in writing 5 days in advance of testing. Perform testing in presence of Engineer.

B. Pressure Piping:

1. Install temporary thrust blocking or other restraint as necessary to protect adjacent piping or equipment and make taps in piping prior to testing.

2. Wait 5 days minimum after concrete thrust blocking is installed to perform pressure tests. If high-early strength cement is used for thrust blocking, wait may be reduced to 2 days.

3. Prior to test, remove or suitably isolate appurtenant instruments or devices that could be damaged by pressure testing.

4. New Piping Connected to Existing Piping: a. Isolate new piping with blind flanges, or as acceptable to

Engineer. b. Test joint between new piping and existing piping by methods that

do not place entire existing system under test load, as approved by Engineer.

697482A.GN1

PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING PW\DEN003\697482 40 80 01 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

5. Test Pressure: As indicated on Piping Schedule, or as specified by equipment manufacturer.

C. Test section may be filled with water and allowed to stand under low pressure prior to testing.

D. Gravity Piping:

1. Perform testing after service connections, manholes, and backfilling have been completed between stations to be tested.

2. Determine groundwater level at time of testing by exploratory holes or other method acceptable to Engineer.

3. Pipe 42 Inches Diameter and Larger: Joint testing device may be used to isolate and test individual joints.

3.02 HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING

A. Fluid: Clean water of such quality to prevent corrosion of materials in piping system.

B. Exposed Piping:

1. Perform testing on installed piping prior to application of insulation. 2. Maximum Filling Velocity: 0.25 foot per second, applied over full area

of pipe. 3. Vent piping during filling. Open vents at high points of piping system or

loosen flanges, using at least four bolts, or use equipment vents to purge air pockets.

4. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 30 minutes, minimum, and for such additional time as necessary to conduct examinations for leakage.

5. Examine joints and connections for leakage. 6. Correct visible leakage and retest as specified. 7. Empty pipe of water prior to final cleaning or disinfection.

C. Buried Piping:

1. Test after backfilling has been completed. 2. Expel air from piping system during filling. 3. Apply and maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force pump.

Valve off piping system when test pressure is reached. 4. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 2 hours minimum,

reopening isolation valve only as necessary to restore test pressure. 5. Determine actual leakage by measuring quantity of water necessary to

maintain specified test pressure for duration of test.

697482A.GN1


6. Maximum Allowable Leakage:

000,148)D(PS

= L2/1

where:

L = Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour. S = Length of pipe tested, in feet. D = Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches. P = Test pressure during leakage test, in pounds per square inch.

7. Correct leakage greater than allowable, and retest as specified.

3.03 PNEUMATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING

A. Do not perform on:

1. PVC or CPVC pipe. 2. Piping larger than 18 inches. 3. Buried and other non-exposed piping.

B. Fluid: Oil-free, dry air.

C. Procedure:

1. Apply preliminary pneumatic test pressure of 25 psig maximum to piping system prior to final leak testing, to locate visible leaks. Apply soap bubble mixture to joints and connections; examine for leakage.

2. Correct visible leaks and repeat preliminary test until visible leaks are corrected.

3. Gradually increase pressure in system to half of specified test pressure. Thereafter, increase pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of specified test pressure until required test pressure is reached.

4. Maintain pneumatic test pressure continuously for minimum of 10 minutes and for such additional time as necessary to conduct soap bubble examination for leakage.

5. Correct visible leakage and retest as specified.

D. Allowable Leakage: Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of leakage.

E. After testing and final cleaning, purge with nitrogen those lines that will carry flammable gases to assure no explosive mixtures will be present in system during filling process.

697482A.GN1


3.04 HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR GRAVITY PIPING

A. Testing Equipment Accuracy: Plus or minus 1/2-gallon water leakage under specified conditions.

B. Maximum Allowable Leakage: 0.16 gallon(s) per hour per inch diameter per 100 feet. Include service connection footage in test section, subjected to minimum head specified.

C. Exfiltration Test:

1. Hydrostatic Head: a. At least 6 feet above maximum estimated groundwater level in

section being tested. b. No less than 6 feet above inside top of highest section of pipe in

test section, including service connections. 2. Length of Pipe Tested: Limit length such that pressure on invert of

lower end of section does not exceed 30 feet of water column.

D. Infiltration Test:

1. Groundwater Level: At least 6 feet above inside top of highest section of pipe in test section, including service connections.

E. Piping with groundwater infiltration rate greater than allowable leakage rate for exfiltration will be considered defective even if pipe previously passed a pressure test.

F. Defective Piping Sections: Replacer or test and seal individual joints, and retest as specified.

3.05 PNEUMATIC TEST FOR GRAVITY PIPING

A. Equipment:

1. Calibrate gauges with standardized test gauge provided by Contractor at start of each testing day. Engineer will witness calibration.

2. Install gauges, air piping manifolds, and valves at ground surface. 3. Provide pressure release device, such as rupture disc or pressure relief

valve, to relieve pressure at 6 psi or less. 4. Restrain plugs used to close sewer lines to prevent blowoff.

B. Procedure:

1. Require that no person enter manhole where pipe is under pressure. 2. Slowly introduce air into pipe section until internal air pressure reaches

4 psi greater than average back pressure of groundwater submerging pipe.

3. Allow 2 minutes minimum for air temperature to stabilize.

697482A.GN1


C. Allowable Leakage: Test section will be considered defective when time required for pressure to decrease from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi greater than average back pressure of groundwater submerging pipe is less than that computed using values from following table:

Table 1*

A

Pipe Diameter (Inches)

B

Time per Foot up to Length in

Col C (Seconds)

C

Test Length (Feet)

D

Test Time for any Length

Between Col C & E (Min:Sec)

E

Length at Which Time

in Col F Applies (Feet)

F

Time per Foot for

Total Length

(Seconds)

4 0.18 636 1:54 1,114 0.10

6 0.40 424 2:50 743 0.23

8 0.71 318 3:47 557 0.41

10 1.11 255 4:43 446 0.63

12 1.60 212 5:40 371 0.91

15 2.50 170 7:05 297 1.42

18 3.62 141 8:30 248 2.06

21 4.92 121 9:55 212 2.81

24 6.42 106 11:20 187 3.67

Example: 15-inch diameter pipe: For 150 feet, T = 2.50 sec (Col B) x 150 ft = 375 sec = 6:15 For 250 feet, T = 7:05 (Col D) For 500 feet, T = 1.42 sec (Col F) x 500 ft = 710 sec = 11:50

*Based on 0.003 cfm per square foot with a minimum significant loss of 2 cfm and a maximum loss of 3.5 cfm.

D. Piping with groundwater infiltration rate greater than allowable leakage rate for exfiltration will be considered defective even if pipe previously passed a pressure test.

E. Defective Piping Sections: Replace or test and seal individual joints, and retest as specified.


A. Test Report Documentation:

1. Test date. 2. Description and identification of piping tested. 3. Test fluid.

697482A.GN1


4. Test pressure. 5. Remarks, including:

a. Leaks (type, location). b. Repair/replacement performed to remedy excessive leakage.

6. Signed by Contractor and Engineer to represent that test has been satisfactorily completed.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FEBRUARY 8, 2019 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 - 1

SECTION 40 90 01 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section gives general requirements for the Process Instrumentation and Control (PIC) System. The Contract Drawings expand on requirements of this section. The following PIC subsections expand on requirements of this section:

1. Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control Components. 2. Section 40 95 80, Fiber Optic Communication System.

B. Major Work Items Include but are not limited to:

1. Engineering, furnishing, installing, calibrating, adjusting, testing, documenting, starting up, and system operator training for a complete control system for Three Mile Creek Severe Weather Attenuation Tanks (SWATs).

2. Major parts are: a. Field instrumentation. b. Station 1 Wash Water Pump Replacement: Terminate and test the

new signal wiring inside CP-110 to the existing RTU-4 PLC. Also include test procedures for control and monitoring of the new pump.

c. Station 2 Electrical Building control panel, CP-210 (RTU-210). d. Modifications to existing Remote Terminal Unit CP-110 (RTU-4). e. Software and applications programming for new RTU-210 and its

OIU. f. Fiber optic subsystem that provides communications link between

CP-210 (RTU-210) and existing CP-110 (RTU-4). Modifications to the existing RTU-4 radio communications link so the wide area SCADA system monitors and controls equipment associated with RTU-210. Refer to the RTU Communications Block Diagram. 1) Incorporate new RTU-210 into the existing local SCADA

network, which includes the existing Bristol RTU that connects to the SCADA system via two radio links.

2) Provide reconfiguration and applications programming of this existing RTU so it passes data back and forth with the new RTU-210. Upload monitored data and download control commands from the wide area SCADA system.

697482A.GN1

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW\DEN003\697482 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 90 01 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

3. Application Software (Programming) modifications to the existing system to include the new Station 2 and Station 1 modifications: a. Provide reconfiguration and applications programming of the

SCADA severs to fully incorporate the new RTU-210 and RTU-4 modifications onto the wide area network. As a minimum, tasks include: 1) Creating new graphics and modifying existing graphics to

both monitor and control at the Wright Smith, Jr. WWTP. 2) Creating new graphics and modifying existing graphics to

monitor only at the following locations: a) MAWSS Lift Station Operations Center located at the

Stickney WTP. The I/O Servers are LSPC01 and LSPC02 HMI-Intouch 10.0.2 (Stand Alone). The Historian/Server is LSPC06. The operating system is Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 Industrial SQL Server ArchestA System V 26.002.

b) CC Williams WWTP: The I/O Server and Historian are CCoperations1 and CCoperations 2 respectively with Intouch Invensys V.11.1.19102 (2014 R2 SP1) (System Platform).

c) Shelton Beach Lift Station Office: 3) Adding the new RTU-210 information and existing RTU-4

modifications to the listed server databases. 4) Add trending functions. 5) Update the existing Wonderware application, historian, and

reporting for the new Lift Station 2 PLC and OIU applications and existing Station 1 PLC and OIU modifications provided under this contract.

b. Detailed Design: PIC System as shown and specified includes functional and performance requirements and component specifications. Complete detailed PIC System design.

c. Factory testing of Lift Station 2. d. Performance testing of Lift Stations 1 and 2, influent & drain

valves, SWATs and diversion box levels, and flows. 4. Complete As-Built Panel Wiring Diagrams:

b. The design intent is for the PIC System Integrator to prepare complete as-built wiring diagrams for both the new control panel, CP-210 (RTU-110), and the modified control panel, CP-110 (RTU-4).

c. For the modified Station 1 control panel, CP-110 (RTU-4), show all existing wiring and components on the as-builts, which includes the removal of existing PLC I/O and panel components and instruments. Refer to the supplement provided after this specification section for the existing PLC I/O list for Station 1 control panel, CP-110 (RTU-4).

697482A.GN1


d. During the construction phase, the contract shall field verify all existing wiring and PLC I/O. Prior to disconnecting the existing wires, inside of CP-110 (RTU-4), the contractor shall label each wire to remain connected inside the existing control panel. Unused abandoned wire (Disconnected on both ends) shall be removed from the control panel. Unused wire connected to an existing circuit shall be capped off, labeled, and neatly bundled with ties, and hung securely inside the panel.

5. Standard Software: a. OUI: Runtime standard software provided by the PIC System

Integrator. PIC System Integrator is not required to provide development standard software.

b. HMI: Owner has an existing Wonderware system at the locations specified under paragraph 1.02.B.3.

c. Historian Configuration: Provided by the PIC System Integrator. d. Reporting Configuration: Provided by the PIC System Integrator. e. Remote Alarm Notification Software Modifications: Provided by

the PIC System Integrator. 6. Application Software (Programming):

a. PLC: Provided by PIC System Integrator for the new and existing PLCs.

b. HMI: Provided by PIC System Integrator. c. Historian Configuration: Provided by PIC System Integrator. d. Reporting Configuration: Provided by PIC System Integrator. e. Remote Alarm Notification Software Modifications: Provided by

the PIC System Integrator.

C. Acceptable PIC Systems Integrator: Contractor shall use the services of one of the following approved PIC Systems Integrator:

1. Prism Systems, Inc. 200 Virginia St. Mobile, AL 36603 Phone: 251-341-1140 Fax: 251-341-1166 2. Precision Engineering, Inc. 5550 Commerce Blvd. East Mobile, AL 36619 Phone: 251-443-8844 Fax: 251-443-8843

697482A.GN1


1.02 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel

Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service.

b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.

c. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.

d. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. e. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.

2. International Society of Automation (ISA): a. S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification

(NRC ADOPTED). b. PR12.6, Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for Hazardous

(Classified) Locations. c. S5.4, Standard Instrument Loop Diagrams. d. S20, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control

Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. e. S50.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial

Process Instruments. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

b. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. 4. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 5. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): 508A, Standard for Safety,

Industrial Control Panels.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations:

1. CP: Control Panel. 2. FDT: Factory Demonstration Test. 3. HMI: Human-Machine Interface. 4. I&C: Instrumentation and Control. 5. I/O: Input and Output. 6. LCP: Local Control Panel. 7. MCC: Motor Control Center. 8. O&M: Operations and Maintenance. 9. OIU: Operator Interface Unit. 10. PAT: Performance Acceptance Test.

697482A.GN1


11. PIC: Process Instrumentation and Control. 12. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. 13. P&ID: Process and Instrument Diagram. 14. RTU: Remote Terminal Unit. 15. SI: Systems Integrator.

B. Enclosure: Control panel, console, cabinet, or instrument housing.

C. Application Software and Programming: Software and Programming to provide functions unique to this Project including but not limited to:

1. Configuring databases, tables, displays, historians, reports, parameter lists, ladder logic, function blocks, and control strategies required to implement functions unique to this Project.

2. Programming in any programming or scripting language.

D. Rising/Falling: Terms used to define actions of discrete devices about their set points.

1. Rising: Contacts close when an increasing process variable rises through set point.

2. Falling: Contacts close when a decreasing process variable falls through set point.

E. Signal Types:

1. Analog Signals, Current Type: a. 4 mA to 20 mA dc signals conforming to ISA S50.1. b. Unless otherwise indicated for specific PIC Subsystem

components, use the following ISA 50.1 options: 1) Transmitter Type: Number 2, two-wire. 2) Transmitter Load Resistance Capacity: Class L. 3) Fully isolated transmitters and receivers.

2. Analog Signals, Voltage Type: 1 to 5 volts dc within panels where a common high precision dropping resistor is used.

3. Discrete signals, two-state logic signals using dc or 120V ac sources as indicated.

4. Pulse Frequency Signals: a. Direct current pulses whose repetition rate is linearly proportional

to process variable. b. Pulses generated by contact closures or solid-state switches as

indicated. c. Power source less than 30V dc.

5. Special Signals: Other types of signals used to transmit analog and digital information between field elements, transmitters, receivers, controllers, and digital devices.

697482A.GN1


F. Instrument Tag Numbers:

1. Tag numbers are provided in the following format: HS-1-2[OOR].

Notation Explanation

HS ISA designator for Hand Switch 1 Unit process number 2 Loop number

[OOR] Identifier: On/Off/Remote


A. Detailed Wiring Design: Panel wiring diagrams, interconnecting wiring diagrams, and loop wiring diagrams are included in Contract Drawings and designed to completely show control panel wiring, terminations, wiring numbers, interfaces with other systems, hardwired functions, interlocks, and wiring of components to be provided.

B. Design Requirements:

1. Complete detailed design of PIC components and PIC drawings. 2. Provide consistent hardware and software functions for PIC design as

shown and specified and includes: a. Functional requirements, performance requirements, and

component specifications. b. P&IDs, block diagrams, and network diagrams.

3. Typical drawings for installation details, control panel layouts, control panel schedules, PLC I/O module wiring, panel power, and control diagrams.

C. Use qualified PIC System Integrator for at least the following work:

1. For PIC Equipment and Ancillaries: a. Completing detail design. b. Submittals. c. Equipment, enclosures, and ancillaries. d. Instructions, details, and recommendations to, and coordination

with Contractor for Certificate of Proper Installation. e. Verify readiness for operation. f. Verify correctness of final power and signal connections (lugging

and connecting). g. Adjusting and calibrating. h. Starting up. i. Testing and coordination of testing. j. Training.

697482A.GN1


2. Verify following Work not by PIC System Integrator is provided: a. Correct type, size, and number of signal wires with their

raceways. b. Correct electrical power circuits and raceways. c. Correct size, type, and number of PIC-related pipes, valves,

fittings, and tubes. d. Correct size, type, materials, and connections of process

mechanical piping for in-line primary elements. 3. Non-PIC Equipment Directly Connected to PIC Equipment:

a. Obtain from Contractor, manufacturers’ information on installation, interface, function, and adjustment.

b. Coordinate with Contractor to allow required interface and operation with PIC System.

c. For operation and control, verify installations, interfacing signal terminations, and adjustments have been completed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

d. Test to demonstrate required interface and operation with PIC System.

e. Examples of items in this category, but not limited to the following: 1) Valve operators, position switches, and controls. 2) Motor control centers. 3) Generators. 4) Switchgear. 5) Adjustable speed and adjustable frequency drive systems.

f. Examples of items not in this category: 1) Internal portions of equipment provided under Division 26,

Electrical, that are not directly connected to PIC equipment. 2) Internal portions of package system instrumentation and

controls that are not directly connected to PIC equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit proposed submittal breakdown consisting of sequencing and packaging of information in accordance with the project schedule.

2. Partial submittal not in accordance with the project schedule will not be accepted.

3. Submittal Format: a. Hard Copy: Required for all submittals. b. Electronic Copies: Required for all submittals.

1) Manufacturer’s Standard Documents: Adobe Acrobat PDF. 2) Documents created specifically for Project:

a) Text and Graphics: Microsoft Word. b) Lists: Microsoft Excel, unless otherwise noted for

specific items. c) Drawings: MicroStation or AutoCAD.

697482A.GN1


4. Identify proposed items, options, installed spares, and other provisions for future work (for example, reserved panel space; unused components, wire, and terminals).

5. Shop Drawings, full-scaled details, wiring diagrams, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature.

6. Legends and Abbreviation Lists: Complete definition of symbols and abbreviations used on this Project (for example, engineering units, flow streams, instruments, structures, and other process items used in nameplates, legends, and data sheets).

7. Activity Completion: a. Action Submittals: Completed when reviewed and approved. b. Information Submittals: Completed when reviewed and found to

meet conditions of the Contract.

B. Action Submittals:

1. Bill of Materials: List of required equipment. a. Group equipment items by enclosure and field, and within an

enclosure, as follows: 1) PIC Components: By component identification code. 2) Other equipment: By equipment type.

b. Data Included: 1) Equipment tag number. 2) Description. 3) Manufacturer, complete model number, and all options not

defined by model number. 4) Quantity supplied. 5) Component identification code where applicable. 6) For panels, include panel reference number and name plate

inscription. 2. Instrument, Component and Panel List:

a. Submit complete version of Instrument, Component and Panel List, as a minimum, with the following information: 1) DWG Number. 2) Loop Number. 3) Tag Number. 4) Code and Description. 5) Setpoint and Required Options.

3. Component Data Sheets: Data sheets for I&C components. a. Format:

1) Similar to ISA TR20.00.01. 2) Microsoft Excel, one component per data sheet. 3) Submit proposed format for Component Data Sheets before

completing data sheets for individual components.

697482A.GN1


b. Content: Specific features and configuration data for each component, including but not limited to: 1) Tag Number. 2) Component type identification code and description. 3) Location or service. 4) Service conditions. 5) Manufacturer and complete model number. 6) Size and scale range. 7) Set points. 8) Materials of construction. 9) Options included. 10) Power requirements. 11) Signal interfaces. 12) Name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer’s

local office, representative, distributor, or service facility. 4. Sizing and Selection Calculations:

a. Primary Elements: 1) Complete calculations plus process data used. Example for

Flow Elements: Minimum and maximum values, permanent head loss, and assumptions made.

b. Controller, Computing, and Function Generating Modules: Actual scaling factors with units and how they were computed.

c. Electronic Copies: Microsoft Excel, one file for each group of components with identical sizing calculations.

5. Catalog Cuts: I&C Components, Electrical Devices, and Mechanical Devices: a. Catalog information, mark to identify proposed items and options. b. Descriptive literature. c. External power and signal connections. d. Scaled drawings showing exterior dimensions and locations of

electrical and mechanical interfaces. 6. Preliminary Panel Elevation Drawings: Provide prior to submitting:

Panel Construction Drawings (New and Existing Panels): a. Scale Drawings: Show dimensions and location of front of panel

devices. b. Panel Legend (Bill of Materials): List front of panel devices by

tag number. Include nameplate inscriptions and service legends. 7. Panel Construction Drawings (New and Existing Panels):

a. Scale Drawings: Show dimensions and location of panel mounted devices, doors, louvers, and subpanels, internal and external.

b. Panel Legend: List front of panel devices by tag numbers, nameplate inscriptions, service legends, and annunciator inscriptions.

c. Bill of Materials: List devices mounted within panel that are not listed in panel legend. Include tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number.

697482A.GN1


d. Construction Details: NEMA rating, materials, material thickness, structural stiffeners and brackets, lifting lugs, mounting brackets and tabs, door hinges and latches, and welding and other connection callouts and details.

e. Construction Notes: Finishes, wire color schemes, wire ratings, wire and terminal block, numbering and labeling scheme.

8. Panel Control Diagrams (New and Existing Panels): For discrete control and power circuits. a. Diagram Type: Ladder diagrams. Include devices, related to

discrete functions, that are mounted in or on the panel and that require electrical connections. Show unique rung numbers on left side of each rung.

b. Item Identification: Identify each item with attributes listed. 1) Wires: Wire number and color. Cable number if part of

multiconductor cable. 2) Terminals: Location (enclosure number, terminal junction

box number, or MCC number), terminal strip number, and terminal block number.

3) Discrete Components: a) Tag number, terminal numbers, and location

(“FIELD,” enclosure number, or MCC number). b) Switching action (open or close on rising or falling

process variable), set point value and units, and process variable description (for example, Sump Level High).

4) I/O Points: PLC unit number, I/O tag number, I/O address, terminal numbers, and terminal strip numbers, for both new PLC furnished and existing PLC modifications provided under this contract.

5) Relay Coils: a) Tag number and its function. b) On right side of run where coil is located, list contact

location by ladder number and sheet number. Underline normally closed contacts.

6) Relay Contacts: Coil tag number, function, and coil location (ladder rung number and sheet number).

7) Communications and Networks: a) Network type, address or node identification, port or

channel number, and type of connector. b) Include automatic dialer telephone systems.

c. Show each circuit individually. No “typical” diagrams or “typical” wire lists will be permitted.

d. Ground wires, surge protectors, and connections. e. Circuit Names: Show names corresponding to Circuit and

Raceway Schedule for circuits entering and leaving a panel. Refer to Division 26, Electrical.

697482A.GN1


9. Panel Wiring Diagrams (New and Existing Panels): a. Show point-to-point and terminal-to-terminal wiring within panel. b. Cover wiring within a panel including but not to instrumentation,

control, power, and communications, and digital networks. 10. Loop Wiring Diagrams: Individual, end-to-end wiring diagram for each

analog and discrete or equipment loop. a. Conform to the minimum requirement of ISA S5.4. b. Show loop components within a panel and identify each

component, component terminals, and panel terminals. c. If a loop connects to panels or devices not provided under this

section and its subsections, such as control valves, motor control centers, package system panels, variable speed drives, include the following information: 1) Show the first component connected to within the panel or

device that is not provided under this section and its subsections.

2) Identify the component by tag and description. 3) Identify panel and component terminal numbers.

d. Show: 1) Terminal numbers, location of dc power supply, and

location of common dropping resistors. 2) Switching contacts in analog loops and output contacts of

analog devices. Reference specific control diagrams where functions of these contacts are shown.

3) Tabular summary on each analog loop diagram. 4) Circuit and raceway schedule names.

11. Communications and Digital Networks Diagrams: a. Scope:

1) Includes the local area network consisting of the following: a) Station 2: New RTU, network switch, fiber segment,

Operator Interface Unit (OIU), and dataport. b) Station 1: Existing RTU, existing radio systems

(Typ. of 2), existing Ethernet switch, and new fiber transceiver.

2) Show connection to wide area SCADA System. b. Format: Network schematic diagrams for each different type of

network. c. Show:

1) Interconnected devices, both passive and active. 2) Device names and numbers. 3) Terminal numbers. 4) Communication Media: Type of cable. 5) Connection Type: Type of connector. 6) Node and device address number such as IP address. 7) Wire and cable numbers and colors.

697482A.GN1


12. Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams: a. Diagrams, device designations, and symbols in accordance with

NEMA ICS 1. b. Diagrams shall bear electrical Subcontractor’s signature attesting

diagrams have been coordinated with Division 26, Electrical. c. Show:

1) Electrical connections between equipment, consoles, panels, terminal junction boxes, and field mounted components.

2) Component and panel terminal board identification numbers, and external wire and cable numbers.

3) Circuit names matching Circuit and Raceway Schedule. 4) Intermediate terminations between field elements and panels

(for example, to terminal junction boxes and pull boxes). 5) Pull boxes.

13. Panel Power Requirements and Heat Dissipation: For control panels, tabulate and summarize the following: a. Required voltages, currents, and phase(s). Include calculations

and list assumptions. b. Maximum heat dissipations Btu per hour. Include calculations and

list assumptions. c. Steady State Temperature Calculations: Calculate internal panel

temperatures assuming an ambient air temperature of 95 degrees. Confirm that the calculated internal panel temperature does not exceed the rated operating temperature of all panel components.

14. Installation Details: Include modifications or further details required to adequately define installation of I&C components.

15. List of spares, expendables, test equipment and tools. 16. Applications Software (Programming) Draft Submittal: To be submitted

prior to the first Coordination meeting. a. Prior to programming the PLC, submit a control narrative

detailing all control functions including all software functions, software switches, alarms, failures, resets, etc.

b. Prior to programming the HMI, submit draft graphics including, but not limited to, draft overview screens, draft motor faceplates, draft control faceplates, draft analog faceplate, alarm summary, and trend screens. Also include the proposed objects (pumps, analog displays, etc.) and planned color schemes (including On/Off colors, alarm colors, etc.).

17. Applications and programming software documentation: a. PLC documentation in electronic (i.e., viewable in programming

package) and hard copy format. b. Complete configuration documentation for microprocessor based

programmable devices.

697482A.GN1


c. For each device, include program listings and function block diagrams, as appropriate showing: 1) Functional blocks or modules used. 2) Configuration, calibration, and tuning parameters. 3) Descriptive annotations.

d. Refer to PIC subsections for additional requirements.

C. Informational Submittals: For PIC equipment, provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation and readiness for operation.

1. Owner Training Plan: Reference Division 01, General Requirements in addition to requirements in this section.

2. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: In accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operating and Maintenance Data, unless otherwise specified in this section. a. Content and Format:

1) Complete sets O&M manuals. 2) Sufficient detail to allow operation, removal, installation,

adjustment, calibration, maintenance and purchasing replacements for each PIC component.

3) Final versions of Legend and Abbreviation Lists. 4) Manual format in accordance with Section 01 78 23,

Operating and Maintenance Data. b. Include:

1) Process and Instrumentation Diagrams: One reproducible copy and electronic version in CAD software of the Owner’s choice of revised P&ID and Block Diagrams to reflect as-built PIC design.

2) Refer to paragraph Shop Drawings for the following items: a) Bill of Materials. b) Catalog Cuts. c) Component Data Sheets. d) Panel Control Diagrams. e) Panel Wiring Diagrams, one reproducible copy. f) Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams, one reproducible

copy. g) Communications and Digital Network Diagrams, one

reproducible copy. h) Application Software Documentation.

3) Device O&M manuals for components, electrical devices, and mechanical devices include: a) Operations procedures. b) Installation requirements and procedures. c) Maintenance requirements and procedures. d) Troubleshooting procedures. e) Calibration procedures.

697482A.GN1


f) Internal schematic and wiring diagrams. g) Component and I/O module Calibration Sheets from

field quality control calibrations. 4) List of spares, expendables, test equipment and tools

provided. 5) List of additional spares, expendables, test equipment and

tools recommended. 3. Performance Acceptance Tests (PAT) Submittals:

a. Preliminary Test Procedures: Outlines of proposed tests, forms, and checklists.

b. Final Test Procedures: Proposed test procedures, forms, and checklists.

c. Test Documentation: Copy of signed off test procedures when tests are completed.


A. Qualifications:

1. PIC System Integrator: Minimum of 10 years’ experience providing, integrating, installing, and starting up similar systems as required for this Project.

2. PIC System Integrator’s Site Representative: Minimum of 5 years’ experience installing systems similar to PIC System required for this Project.

3. Refer to PICS subsections for additional requirements.

B. Calibration Instruments: Each instrument used for calibrating PIC equipment shall bear the seal of a reputable laboratory certifying that instrument has been calibrated within the previous 12 months to a standard endorsed by the NIST.

C. Coordination Meetings:

1. General: a. In accordance with Division 01, General Requirements. b. Meeting Locations: Project Site or SCADA location facility. c. Meetings Attended By: Engineer, Owner, PIC System Integrator,

and Contractor. d. Specific dates of all meetings will be established in Progress

Schedule. 2. PIC Schedule Coordination Meeting:

a. Purpose of meetings: Discuss and review schedule and resolve scheduling issues.

b. Timing: Within 14 days after submittal of PIC schedule. 3. Panel Design Coordination Meeting:

a. Purpose of meeting: Discuss new panel drawings and existing panel modifications drawings submittal comments.

b. Timing: Within 14 days after the first panel design submittal review has been completed.

697482A.GN1


4. Application Software Coordination Meeting: a. Purpose of meeting:

1) HMI Graphics: a) Discuss and establish conventions, standards, formats,

and configurations for screen development. b) Identify all status and alarm points and all values to be

displayed. c) Identify all control actions to be displayed. d) Discuss review comments for the preliminary graphic

displays submitted by the PIC system integrator. 2) PLC Control: Review the pump, SWATs, influent valves,

and drain valves control strategy. b. Timing: Within 14 days after the Applications submittal review

has been completed.


A. Provide Site and warehouse storage facilities for PIC equipment.

B. Prior to shipment, include corrosive-inhibitive vapor capsules in shipping containers, and related equipment as recommended by the capsule manufacturer.

C. Prior to installation, store items in dry indoor locations. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions.

D. Cover panels and other elements that are exposed to dusty construction environments.


A. As specified in PIC subsections.

B. In computing spare parts quantities based on specified percentages, round up to nearest whole number.

C. Spare Parts:

Description Percent of Each

Type and Size Used No Less Than

(of each type used)

dc power supplies 20 1

Fuses 20 5

Indicating light bulb 20 5

Hand Switches and Lights 10 2

Surge Suppressors 10 2

697482A.GN1


D. Expendables: For following items, provide manufacturer’s recommended 2-year supply, unless otherwise noted.

1. Corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules. 2. Air filters for ventilated panels.

E. Test Equipment and Tools:

Item Qty. Options and Model

Pressure and Electrical Calibrator

1 Transmation Model 1091PLUS-LP with test leads, rechargeable batteries, ac charger, pressure transducer modules, and protective case. Transducer pressure ranges: Appropriate for pressure devices provided.

Pressure Pump Kit

1 Hand pump (0 to 300 psig), calibration labels, tubing, fittings, and carrying case. Transmation Pump Kit 22980P-300.

Terminal Kit 1 Kit of solderless terminals and cable ties; Jensen Tools Model 23B210.


A. Standard Environmental Requirements: Unless otherwise noted, design equipment for continuous operation in these environments:

1. Freestanding Panel and Consoles: a. Inside, Air Conditioned: NEMA 1. b. Inside: NEMA 12.

2. Smaller Panels and Assemblies (that are not Freestanding): a. Inside, Air Conditioned: NEMA 12. b. All Other Locations: NEMA 4X.

3. Field Elements: Outside.

B. Special Environmental Requirements: Design following panels for continuous operation in environments listed:

1. CP-210: a. Location: Inside. b. Panel Construction: NEMA 12, painted steel, ventilated.

697482A.GN1


C. Environmental Design Requirements: Following defines the types of environments referred to in the above.

1. Inside, Air Conditioned: a. Temperature:

1) Normal: 60 to 80 degrees F. 2) With Up to 4-Hour HVAC System Interruptions: 40 to

105 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity:

1) Normal: 10 percent (winter) to 70 percent (summer). 2) With Up to 4-Hour HVAC System Interruption: 10 to

100 percent. c. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.


A. Activity Completion: The following is a list of key activities and their completion criteria:

1. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and approved. 2. Quality Control Submittals: Reviewed and accepted. 3. Factory Demonstration Test: Completed and required test

documentation accepted. 4. Hardware Delivery: Hardware delivered to Site and inventoried by

Owner. 5. PAT: Completed and required test documentation accepted.

B. PIC Substantial Completion: When Engineer issues Certificate of Substantial Completion.

1. Prerequisites: a. All PIC Submittals have been completed. b. PIC System has successfully completed PAT. c. Owner training plan is on schedule. d. All spares, expendables, and test equipment have been delivered

to Owner.

C. PIC Acceptance: When Engineer issues a written notice of Final Payment and Acceptance.

1. Prerequisites: a. Certificate of Substantial Completion issued for PIC System. b. Punch-list items completed. c. Final revisions to O&M manuals accepted. d. Maintenance service agreements for PIC System accepted by

Owner.

697482A.GN1


D. Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times: Do not start the following key Project activities until the prerequisite activities and lead times listed below have been completed and satisfied:

Activity Prerequisites and Lead Times

Submittal reviews by Engineer

Engineer acceptance of Submittal breakdown and schedule

Hardware purchasing, fabrication, and assembly

Associated Shop Drawing Submittals completed

Shipment Completion of PIC Shop Drawing Submittals, Factory Demonstration Testing, and preliminary O&M manuals

Owner Training Owner training plan completed

PAT Startup, Owner training, and PAT procedures completed; notice 2 weeks prior to start

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. PIC functions as shown on Drawings and as required for each loop. Furnish equipment items as required. Furnish all materials, equipment, programming and software, whether indicated or not, necessary to effect required system and loop performance.

B. First Named Manufacturer: PIC design is based on first named manufacturers of equipment and materials.

1. If an item is proposed from other than first named manufacturer, obtain approval from Engineer for such changes in accordance with Article Submittals.

2. If using proposed item requires other changes, provide work and equipment to implement these changes. Changes that may be required include, but are not limited to: different installation, wiring, raceway, enclosures, connections, isolators, intrinsically safe barriers, software, and accessories.

C. Like Equipment Items:

1. Use products of one manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer’s services.

2. Implement all same or similar functions in same or similar manner. For example, control logic, sequence controls, and display layouts.

697482A.GN1


2.02 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS

A. Location: Article Supplements.

B. Organization: By unit process, major function, and P&ID number.

C. Functional Requirements for Control Loops:

1. Provide control loops meeting requirements outlined in all sections of Loop Specifications.

2. Loop specifications requirements are supplemented by the P&IDs and standard functional requirements of the PICS Subsystem.

3. Coordinate Control Loops affecting package systems with package system supplier standard and specific operational requirements.

2.03 I&C COMPONENTS

A. Specifications: Refer to Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control Components, for Specifications for I&C components.

B. Components for each Loop: Major components for each loop are listed in Instrument, Components and Panel List referenced in Article Supplements. Furnish ancillary equipment that is necessary to achieve required loop performance.

C. Control Panels: Reference Instrument, Components and Panel List in Article Supplements.

D. Network Components: Reference Instrument, Components and Panel List in Article Supplements.

2.04 REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS

A. Reference to Instrument, Components and Panel List in Article Supplements and RTU Communications Block Diagram Drawing.

B. Furnish RTU and ancillary equipment that are necessary to achieve required performance. Refer to Loop Descriptions in Article, Supplements for additional performance requirements.

C. Cables: Provide all cables for interconnecting PLC components both inside individual panels and between panels, remote devices, or package systems.

2.05 RTU I/O

A. Physical I/O points are shown on P&IDs and are included in the Input/Output List referenced in Article Supplements. This list is not all-inclusive. Provide any additional I/O, functions or operations required to provide a completely operational system. Note that this list does not show the PLCs diagnostic fault detection points that are required.

697482A.GN1


B. Spare I/O:

1. Provide each PLC with at least 20 percent installed spare I/O points for each type of I/O used by that PLC, or as noted on the Instrument, Components and Panel List.

2. In calculating the installed spare I/O quantities, base calculations on (1) the actual I/O used for this project plus, (2) the points in the I/O list that are marked with Note 1. This note states “Furnish, wire and terminate this I/O point now, but for future use”.

3. Wire all spare I/O to terminal blocks and, where required, surge suppressors or interposing relays so that it is ready for field termination.

C. Cables: Provide all cables for interconnecting PLC components both inside individual panels and between panels or remote devices.

2.06 APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING

A. Provide Applications Software and Programming for PLC and Operator Interface Unit, and as required to meet the functionality specified in the Loop Specifications.

1. Provide all applications software and drivers required for PLC and OIU programming.

2. Provide all applications programming to provide control logic and displays to meet the functional requirements listed in the Loop Specifications and shown on the Drawings.

B. Provide Application Programming for Servers and Operator Workstations at the following locations: Wright Smith, Jr. WWTP, Stickney WTP, and CC Williams WWTP, and Shelton Beach Lift Station Office.

1. Provide all applications programming to provide control logic and displays to meet the functional requirements listed in the Loop Specifications and shown on the Drawings.

2.07 NAMEPLATES AND TAGS

A. Panel Nameplates: Enclosure identification located on the enclosure face.

1. Location and Inscription: As shown. 2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached to panel with stainless steel

screws. 3. Letters: 1/2-inch black on white background, unless otherwise noted.

697482A.GN1


B. Component Nameplates—Panel Face: Component identification located on panel face under or near component.

1. Location and Inscription: As shown. 2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached to panel with stainless steel

screws. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch black on white background, unless otherwise noted.

C. Component Nameplates—Back of Panel: Component identification located on or near component inside of enclosure.

1. Inscription: Component tag number. 2. Materials: Adhesive backed, laminated plastic. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch black on white background, unless otherwise noted.

D. Legend Plates for Panel Mounted Pushbuttons, Lights, and Switches.

1. Inscription: Refer to: a. Table under paragraph Standard Pushbutton Colors and

Inscriptions. b. Table under paragraph Standard Light Colors and Inscriptions. c. P&IDs in Drawings.

2. Materials: Stainless steel, keyed legend plates. Secured to panel by mounting nut for pushbutton, light, or switch.

3. Letters: Black on gray or white background.

E. Service Legends: Component identification nameplate located on face of component.

1. Inscription: As shown. 2. Materials: Adhesive backed, laminated plastic. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch black on white background, unless otherwise noted.

F. Nametags: Component identification for field devices and instruments.

1. Inscription: Component tag number. 2. Materials: 16-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch imposed. 4. Mounting: Affix to component with 16- or 18-gauge stainless steel wire

or stainless steel screws.

2.08 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. In accordance with Division 26, Electrical.

B. I&C and electrical components, terminals, wires, and enclosures: UL recognized or UL listed.

697482A.GN1


C. Wires within Enclosures:

1. ac Circuits: a. Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: For current to be carried, but not less than 18 AWG.

2. Analog Signal Circuits: a. Type: 600-volt stranded copper, twisted shielded pairs or triad

with a 100 percent, aluminum-polyester shield rated 60 degrees C. b. Size: 18 AWG, minimum.

3. Other dc Circuits. a. Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: For current carried, but not less than 18 AWG.

4. Special Signal Circuits: Use manufacturer’s standard cables. 5. Wire Identification: Numbered and tagged at each termination.

a. Wire Tags: Machine printed, heat shrink. b. Manufacturers:

1) Brady PermaSleeve. 2) Tyco Electronics.

D. Wires entering or leaving enclosures, terminate and identify as follows:

1. Analog and discrete signal, terminate at numbered terminal blocks. 2. Special signals, terminated using manufacturer’s standard connectors. 3. Identify wiring in accordance with Division 26, Electrical.

E. Terminal Blocks for Enclosures:

1. Quantity: a. Accommodate present and spare indicated needs. b. Wire spare RTU I/O points to terminal blocks. c. One wire per terminal for field wires entering enclosures. d. Maximum of two wires per terminal for No. 18 AWG wire for

internal enclosure wiring. e. Spare Terminals: 20 percent of all connected terminals, but not

less than 10 per terminal block. 2. General:

a. Connection Type: Screw compression clamp. b. Compression Clamp:

1) Complies with DIN-VDE 0611. 2) Hardened steel clamp with transversal groves that penetrate

wire strands providing a vibration-proof connection. 3) Guides strands of wire into terminal.

c. Screws: Hardened steel, captive and self-locking. d. Current Bar: Copper or treated brass. e. Insulation:

1) Thermoplastic rated for minus 55 to plus 110 degree C. 2) Two funneled shaped inputs to facilitate wire entry.

697482A.GN1


f. Mounting: 1) Standard DIN rail. 2) Terminal block can be extracted from an assembly without

displacing adjacent blocks. 3) End Stops: Minimum of one at each end of rail.

g. Wire preparation: Stripping only permitted. h. Jumpers: Allow jumper installation without loss of space on

terminal or rail. i. Marking System:

1) Terminal number shown on both sides of terminal block 2) Allow use of preprinted and field marked tags. 3) Terminal strip numbers shown on end stops. 4) Mark terminal block and terminal strip numbers as shown

on Panel Control Diagrams and Loop Diagrams. 5) Fuse Marking for Fused Terminal Blocks: Fuse voltage and

amperage rating shown on top of terminal block. j. Test Plugs: Soldered connections for 18 AWG wire.

1) Pin Diameter: 0.079 inch. 2) Quantity: 10. 3) Manufacturer and Product:

a) Weidmuller, Type PS. b) Entrelec; Type FC2. c) Phoenix Contact, Type MPS.

3. Spare Fuse Holder: a. Provide spare fuse holder(s) for all enclosures containing fuses. b. Quantity: As required to hold all spare fuses for each enclosure. c. DIN Rail Mountable. d. Manufacturer and Product: Weidmuller, 7914760001.

4. Terminal Block, General-Purpose: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 30 amp. c. Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG. e. Color: Grey body. f. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. g. Test Sockets: One screw test socket 0.079-inch diameter. h. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Weidmuller; 1020100000 with 0280600000. 2) Entrelec; Type M4/6.T. 3) Phoenix Contact.

5. Terminal Block, Ground: a. Wire Size: 22 AWG to 12 AWG. b. Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG. c. Color: Green and yellow body. d. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.

697482A.GN1


e. Grounding: Ground terminal blocks electrically grounded to the mounting rail.

f. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Weidmuller; 1010100000. 2) Entrelec; Type M4/6.P. 3) Phoenix Contact.

6. Terminal Block, Blade Disconnect Switch: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 10-amp. c. Wire Size: 22 AWG to 12 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG. e. Color: Grey body, orange switch. f. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. g. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Weidmuller; 7910210000. 2) Entrelec; Type M4/6.SN.T. 3) Phoenix Contact.

7. Terminal Block, Diode: a. Rated Voltage: 24V dc. b. Rated Current: 30 ma. c. Wire Size: 16 AWG. d. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Weidmuller. 2) Phoenix Contact ST-IN.

8. Terminal Block, Fused, 24V dc: a. Rated Voltage: 600V dc. b. Rated Current: 16-amp. c. Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG. e. Color: Grey body. f. Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inches. g. Indication: LED diode 24V dc. h. Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum. i. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Weidmuller 1880410000. 2) Entrelec; Type M10/13T.SFL. 3) Phoenix Contact.

9. Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 16-amp. c. Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG. e. Color: Grey body. f. Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inches. g. Indication: Neon Lamp 110V ac. h. Leakage Current: 1.8 mA, maximum.

697482A.GN1


i. Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum j. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Weidmuller 1880420000. 2) Entrelec; Type M10/13T.SFL. 3) Phoenix Contact.

10. Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac, High Current: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 35 amps. c. Wire Size: 18 AWG to 8 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 8 AWG. e. Color: Grey. f. Fuse: 13/32 inch by 1.5 inches. g. Spacing: 0.95 inch, maximum. h. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Weidmuller 7940029428. 2) Entrelec; Type MB10/24.SF. 3) Phoenix Contact.

F. Grounding of Enclosures:

1. Furnish isolated copper grounding bus for signal and shield ground connections.

2. Furnish and install door grounding kit for enclosures. 3. Ground all DIN rail. 4. Ground all components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Ground surge suppressors with shortest possible ground conductor

length. 6. Ground bus grounded at a common signal ground point in accordance

with National Electrical Code requirements. 7. Coordinate ground connection for control panels with Electrical

Contractor. 8. Single Point Ground for Each Analog Loop:

a. Locate signal ground at dc power supply for loop. b. Use to ground wire shields for loop.

9. Ground terminal block rails to ground bus.

G. Analog Signal Isolators: Furnish signal isolation for analog signals that are sent from one enclosure to another and as shown on the Drawings. Do not wire in series instruments on different panels, cabinets, or enclosures.

H. Power Distribution within Panels:

1. Feeder Circuits: a. One or more 120V ac, 60-Hz feeder circuits as shown on

Drawings. b. Make provisions for feeder circuit conduit entry. c. Furnish terminal board for termination of wires.

697482A.GN1


2. Power Panel: Furnish main circuit breaker and a circuit breaker on each individual branch circuit distributed from power panel. a. Locate to provide clear view of and access to breakers when door

is open. b. Breaker sizes: Coordinate such that fault in branch circuit will

blow only branch breaker but not trip the main breaker. 1) Branch Circuit Breaker: 15 amps at 250V ac.

c. Provide UL 489 listed breakers. d. Breaker Manufacturers and Products:

1) Eaton; WMT series. 2) Square D; Multi 9 series. 3) Allen-Bradley; 1489-A series.

3. Circuit Wiring: P&IDs and Control Diagrams on Drawings show function only. Use following rules for actual circuit wiring: a. Devices on Single Circuit: 20, maximum. b. Multiple Units Performing Parallel Operations: To prevent failure

of any single branch circuit from shutting down entire operation, do not group all units on same branch circuit.

c. Branch Circuit Loading: 12 amperes continuous, maximum. d. Panel Lighting and Service Outlets: Put on separate 15-amp,

120V ac branch circuit. e. Provide 120V ac plugmold for panel components with line cords.

I. Signal Distribution:

1. Within Panels: 4 mA to 20 mA dc signals may be distributed as 1 to 5V dc.

2. Outside Panels: Isolated 4 mA to 20 mA dc only. 3. All signal wiring twisted in shielded pairs.

J. Signal Switching:

1. Use dry circuit type relays or switches. 2. No interruption of 4 mA to 20 mA loops during switching. 3. Switching Transients in Associated Signal Circuit:

a. 4 mA to 20 mA dc Signals: 0.2 mA, maximum. b. 1 to 5V dc Signals: 0.05V, maximum.

K. Relays:

1. General: a. Relay Mounting: Plug-in type socket. b. Relay Enclosure: Furnish dust cover. c. Socket Type: Screw terminal interface with wiring. d. Socket Mounting: Rail. e. Provide holddown clips.

697482A.GN1


2. Signal Switching Relay: a. Type: Dry circuit. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. c. Contact Rating: 0 to 5 amps at 28V dc or 120V ac. d. Contact Material: Gold or silver. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 0.9 watts (dc), 1.2VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations. i. Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp. j. Seal Type: Hermetically sealed case. k. Manufacturers and Products: Tyco/Potter and Brumfield;

Series KH/KHA. 3. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Nonlatching:

a. Type: Compact general-purpose plug-in. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. c. Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 240V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 1.8 watts (dc), 2.7VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations. i. Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp. j. Push to test button. k. Manufacturers and Products: Tyco/Potter and Brumfield;

Series KUP. 4. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Latching:

a. Type: Dual coil magnetic latching relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. c. Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 120V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 2.7 watts (dc), 5.3VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 5,000,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 500,000 operations. i. Manufacturer and Product: Tyco/Potter and Brumfield; Series

KUL. 5. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Time Delay:

a. Type: Adjustable time delay relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. c. Contact Rating: 10A at 240V ac.

1) Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. d. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. e. Operating Temperature: Minus 10 to 55 degrees C. f. Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Delay Time Range: Select range such that time delay set point fall

between 20 to 80 percent of range.

697482A.GN1


h. Time Delay Set Point: As noted or shown. i. Mode of Operation: As noted or shown. j. Adjustment Type: Integral potentiometer with knob external to

dust cover. k. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Tyco/Potter and Brumfield: a) Series CB for 0.1 second to 100-minute delay time

ranges. b) Series CK for 0.1 to 120 second delay time ranges.

L. Electrical Transient Protection:

1. General: a. Function: Protect elements of PIC System against damage due to

electrical transients induced in interconnecting lines by lightning and nearby electrical systems.

2. Show Surge Suppressors on Shop Drawings. 3. Furnish, install, coordinate, and inspect grounding of surge

suppressors at: a. Connection of ac power to PICS System equipment including

panels, consoles, assemblies, and field-mounted analog transmitters and receivers.

b. For analog and other signals, as shown on the P&IDs, where SS-X means “Surge Suppressor, Type X”.

4. Products: Surge suppressors shall conform to the requirements of the Surge Suppressor Products Table, which is a Supplement to this section.

5. Install and ground surge suppressors as per manufacturer’s instructions and applicable standard details.

M. Power Supplies:

1. Furnish to power instruments requiring external dc power, including two-wire transmitters and dc relays.

2. Convert 120V ac, 60-Hz power to dc power of appropriate voltage(s) with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure that instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances.

3. Provide output over voltage and over current protective devices to: a. Protect instruments from damage due to power supply failure. b. Protect power supply from damage due to external failure.

4. Enclosures: NEMA 1/IP20. 5. UL 508 Listed. 6. Mount such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other

components. 7. Fuses: For each dc supply line to each individual two-wire transmitter.

a. Type: Indicating. b. Mount so fuses can be easily seen and replaced.

697482A.GN1


8. Provide same manufacturer for Power supply and 24V dc UPS systems. 9. Manufacturers:

a. Phoenix Contact; Trio series. b. PULS; Dimension Series. c. Sola; SDN-C series.

N. Intrinsically Safe Circuits:

1. Intrinsically safe circuits will conform to NFPA 70 Standards: a. All terminal strips, electrical raceways, and cable trays will be

color coded light blue. b. All intrinsically safe circuits will maintain appropriate

separation/isolation from non-intrinsically safe circuits. c. All intrinsically safe conduit will be marked to clearly indicate

that the conduit contains intrinsically safe circuits. d. Grounding as specified by the intrinsically safe barrier

manufacturer will be installed in conformance with manufacturer specifications.

O. Intrinsic Safety Barriers:

1. Intrinsically Safe Relays: Monitor discrete signals that originate in hazardous area and are used in a safe area. a. Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000.

2. Intrinsically Safe Barriers: Interface analog signals as they pass from hazardous area to safe area. a. Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000.

P. Internal Panel Lights for Panels:

1. Provide on each freestanding panel. 2. Type: Door Switched fluorescent panel lighting package. 3. Quantity: Provide light of length between 60 and 90 percent of panel

width. Provide multiple lights if required. 4. Mounting: Inside and in the top of back-of-panel area. 5. Protective shield for lights. 6. Manufacturers:

a. Hoffman; ALF series. b. Rittal.

Q. Service Outlets for Panels:

1. Type: Three-wire, 120-volt, 15-ampere, GFCI duplex receptacles. 2. Quantity:

a. For panels 4 feet wide and smaller: One, minimum. b. For panels wider than 4 feet: One for every 4 feet of panel width,

two minimum per panel.

697482A.GN1


3. Mounting: DIN Rail mounted, evenly spaced along back-of-panel area. 4. Manufacturers:

a. Phoenix Contact; EM-DUO series. b. Weidmuller; DRAC series. c. Allen-Bradley; 1492-DIN series.

2.09 FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Panels with nominal external dimensions as shown on Drawings. 2. Panel Construction and Interior Wiring: In accordance with the National

Electrical Code, state and local codes, NEMA, ANSI, UL, and ICECA. 3. Fabricate panels, install instruments, wire, and plumb, at the factory of

the PIC System Integrator. 4. Electrical Work: In accordance with Division 26, Electrical. 5. Fabricate panels as per applicable standard details.

B. Factory Assembly: Assemble panels at the factory of the PIC System Integrator. No fabrication other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage shall be done on panels at Site.

C. UL Listing Mark for Enclosures: Mark stating “Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel” per UL 508A.

D. Wiring within PIC Panels:

1. Restrain by plastic ties or ducts or metal raceways. 2. Hinge Wiring: Secure at each end so that bending or twisting will be

around longitudinal axis of wire. Protect bend area with sleeve. 3. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. 4. Abrasion protection for wire bundles which pass through holes or across

edges of sheet metal. 5. Connections to Screw Type Terminals:

a. Locking-fork-tongue or ring-tongue lugs. b. Use manufacturer’s recommended tool with required sized anvil

to make crimp lug terminations. c. Wires terminated in a crimp lug, maximum of one. d. Lugs installed on a screw terminal, maximum of two.

6. Connections to Compression Clamp Type Terminals: a. Strip, prepare, and install wires in accordance with terminal

manufacturer’s recommendations. b. Wires installed in a compression screw and clamp, maximum of

one for field wires entering enclosure, otherwise maximum of two.

7. Splicing and tapping of wires, allowed only at device terminals or terminal blocks.

697482A.GN1


8. Terminate 24V dc and analog signal circuits on separate terminal block from ac circuit terminal blocks.

9. Separate analog and dc circuits by at least 6 inches from ac power and control wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device terminations.

10. Arrange wiring to allow access for testing, removal, and maintenance of circuits and components.

11. Plastic Wire Ducts Fill: Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommendation.

E. Temperature Control:

1. Control Enclosures: a. Nonventilated Enclosures: Size to adequately dissipate heat from

equipment mounted inside panel or on panel. b. Ventilated Enclosures:

1) Ventilate CP-210 as specified below. 2) Furnish with louvers and forced ventilation as required to

prevent temperature buildup from equipment mounted inside panel or on panel.

3) For panels with backs against wall, furnish louvers on top and bottom of panel sides.

4) For panels without backs against wall, furnish louvers on top and bottom of panel back.

5) Ventilation Fans: a) Furnish where required or noted to provide adequate

cooling. b) Create positive internal pressure within panel. c) Fan Motor Power: 120V ac, 60-Hz, thermostatically

controlled. d) Size in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

6) Air Filters: Disposable High-Density Type 12. 7) Manufacturers:

a) Hoffman; TFP Series with AFLTRX filters. b) Rittal.

F. Dataports:

1. Provide dataport on the front of the CP-210 enclosure. Locate dataport vertically centered and offset on hinged side of door.

2. Ports: a. One, NEMA 5-15R non-GFCI duplex receptacle, minimum. b. One, RJ-45 Ethernet port, minimum. c. One, USB port, minimum.

3. Construction: a. NEMA Type 4/12 rating. b. Powder Coated Steel. c. Quarter Turn Latch with lock.

697482A.GN1


4. Features: a. 5-amp circuit breaker. b. Door gasket.

5. Manufacturer and Product: Hoffman, Intersafe Data Interface Ports.

G. Freestanding Panel Construction:

1. Enclosure NEMA rating based on environmental design requirements and referenced in Article Environmental Requirements, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or listed in Article Supplements.

2. Materials: Sheet steel, unless otherwise shown on Drawings with minimum thickness of 12-gauge, unless otherwise noted.

3. Panel Fronts: a. Fabricated from a single piece of sheet steel, unless otherwise

shown on Drawings. b. No seams or bolt heads visible when viewed from front. c. Panel Cutouts: Smoothly finished with rounded edges. d. Stiffeners: Steel angle or plate stiffeners or both on back of panel

face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or operation.

4. Internal Framework: a. Structural steel for instrument support and panel bracing. b. Permit panel lifting without racking or distortion.

5. Lifting rings to allow simple, safe rigging and lifting of panel during installation.

6. Adjacent Panels: Securely bolted together so front faces are parallel. 7. Doors: Full height, fully gasketed access doors where shown on

Drawings, or listed in Article Supplements. a. Latches: Three-point, Southco Type 44. b. Handles: “D” ring, foldable type. c. Hinges: Full length, continuous, piano type, steel hinges with

stainless steel pins. d. Rear Access Doors: Extend no further than 24 inches beyond

panel when opened to 90-degree position. e. Front and Side Access Doors: As shown on Drawings, or listed in

Article Supplements.

H. Nonfreestanding Panel Construction:

1. Enclosure NEMA rating based on environmental design requirements and referenced in Article Environmental Requirements, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or listed in Article Supplements.

2. Metal Thickness: 14-gauge, minimum. 3. Doors:

a. Rubber-gasketed with continuous hinge. b. 3-point latching mechanism.

697482A.GN1


4. Manufacturers: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Rittal.

I. Factory Finishing:

1. Enclosures: a. Stainless Steel and Aluminum:

1) Not painted, unless located outdoors in sunlight. 2) If located outdoors in sunlight,

a) Manufacturer applied finish, no field finishing. b) ANSI 61 white polyester powder coat outside.

b. Nonmetallic Panels: Not painted. c. Steel Panels:

1) Manufacturer applied finished, no field finishing. 2) ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coat outside. 3) White polyester powder coat inside.

2. Manufacturer’s standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment with light gray color.

3. Refer to drawings for additional requirements.

2.10 LIFT STATION 2 PANEL SPECIFICATIONS

A. General: Refer to contract drawings for Lift Station 2 panel details.

B. Operator Controls and Indications:

1. As a minimum, provide for each pump the following indicators on the panel front: a. Pump High Vibration, Leakage, and High Temperature alarm

pilot lights for each pump or Operator Panel, one per Pump, provided by pump supplier.

b. Pump ON status light, one per pump. c. Pump VFD In Bypass light, one per pump.

2. Provide the following indicators for the panel front for the pump station backup logic: a. Wetwell High-High Level/Start Lag Pump light. b. Wetwell High Level/Start Lead Pump light. c. Wetwell Low Level/Stop Pumps light. d. Lift Station in Backup Mode light.

C. Functional Requirements:

1. Refer to the Loop Specifications, Supplement 1 at the end of this specification section, for the PLC pump sequence control description.

697482A.GN1


2. Pump Backup Relay Logic Operation: a. Pump Backup Float Relay Logic Start/Stop Control:

1) The pumps shall run based on the float switches and relay backup logic in the event of Station 2 PLC failure or failure of both stations 1 or 2 level transmitters. Receipt of a run command for a particular pump will cause the pump to run provided that the wetwell level has not reached the LOW float/stop all pumps set point.

2) Start the designated lead pump, for a preset time delay (initial setting, 30 seconds), when the level rises above a high level/start lead pump set point (LSH-210).

3) Start the designated lag pump, for a preset time delay (initial setting, 30 seconds), when the level rises above the high-high level/start lag pump set point (LSHH-210).

4) Stop the active pumps when the level falls below a low level set point (LSL-210).

b. Pump Alternation: The 4-pump alternator switch shall assign the lead and lag pumps, for the pump backup relay logic operation, and rotate the four pumps for the lead and lag positions. After the pump run cycle, the lag pump will become the lead pump and the next pump in line will be designated as the lag pump.

d. Disable PLC Control: The OIU shall be provided with a Disable PLC selector switch which provides pump control only from the Pump Backup Float Relay Logic.

3. In the event of a high temperature alarm, high vibration (Station 2 pumps only), or leakage alarm, shut down the pump. Manual reset shall be required for the pump to resume operation. The pump will remain off and the respective alarm light will remain latched until the pump is reset by manually reset by pressing the respective pump reset control on its respective Pump Operator Panel.

4. Upon resumption of power after an outage, pumps shall resume operation without manual intervention. (Pumps shall reset automatically, not manually.)

D. Special Requirements:

1. Provide either intrinsically safe devices or explosion proof devices for all components in classified hazardous locations. a. Level switches are new and located in a Class 1, Division 1,

Group D area. b. Submersible level transducers are new and located in a Class 1,

Division 1, Group D area. Provide suitable intrinsically safe barriers meeting the entity parameters of the level device.

697482A.GN1


2. Provide intrinsically safe relays in the control panels for signals entering panel from classified area in accordance with the NEC. Provide intrinsically safe circuits as specified. As a minimum, intrinsic safety barriers shall be used for float signals circuits. Intrinsically safe relays are not required if field device is explosion proof.

2.11 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Corrosion-Inhibiting Vapor Capsule Manufacturers:

1. Hoffmann Engineering Co; Model A-HCI. 2. Zerust; Model VC.


A. General:

1. Engineer and Owner may actively participate in many of the tests. 2. Engineer and Owner reserve right to test or retest specified functions. 3. Engineer and Owner’s decision will be final regarding acceptability and

completeness of testing. 4. Procedures, Forms, and Checklists:

a. Except for Unwitnessed Factory Test, conduct tests in accordance with, and documented on, Engineer and Owner accepted procedures, forms, and checklists.

b. Describe each test item to be performed. c. Have space after each test item description for sign off by

appropriate party after satisfactory completion. 5. Required Test Documentation: Test procedures, forms, and checklists

signed by Engineer and PIC System Integrator/Contractor. 6. Conducting Tests:

a. Provide special testing materials and equipment. b. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables,

equipment, and data. c. If not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and

data provide suitable means of simulation. d. Define simulation techniques in test procedures. e. Test Format: Cause and effect.

1) Person conducting test initiates an input (cause). 2) Specific test requirement is satisfied if correct result (effect),

occurs.

B. Unwitnessed Factory Test:

1. Scope: Inspect and test PIC System to ensure it is operational, ready for FDT.

2. Location: PIC System Integrator’s facility.

697482A.GN1


3. Integrated Test: a. Interconnect and test PIC System, except for primary elements

and smaller panels. b. Exercise and test all functions. c. Provide stand-alone testing of smaller panels. d. Simulate inputs and outputs for primary elements, final control

elements, and panels excluded from test. e. Test RTU and all applications software. f. Test all panels provided as a part of the PICS.

C. Factory Demonstration Tests (FDT):

1. Engineer and Owner approval of FDT procedures is required before scheduling the FDT.

2. Notify Engineer and Owner of test schedule 4 weeks prior to start of test.

3. Scope: a. Test entire PIC System, with exception of primary elements, final

control elements, and certain smaller panels, to demonstrate it is operational.

b. FDT required for all control panels. 4. Location: PIC System Integrator’s facility. 5. Correctness of wiring from panel field terminals to PLC system

input/output points and to panel components. a. Simulate each discrete signal at terminal strip. b. Simulate correctness of each analog signal using current source.

6. PLC operation. Demonstrate operations between new RTU-210 and the existing RTU-4, where RTU-4 exchanges data with RTU-210 for pump control. All other existing control logic in RTU-4 shall remain with exception to the existing Station 1 Diversion Box level and Recirculation Pumps A and B. Also demonstrate when communications are lost as specified under Section 40 90 01, Supplement 1.

7. For all applications software (Programming): Provide a means to demonstrate modifications to the existing SCADA system locations. Provide all needed computer hardware and software licenses to adequately demonstrate all modifications in the factory prior to installation in the field.

8. Loop-Specific Functions: Demonstrate functions shown on P&IDs, control diagrams, and loop specifications: a. One of each type function; for example, if there are filter

backwash sequence control for several identical filters, demonstrate controls for one filter.

b. One of each type of function in each panel; for example, but not limited to annunciator operation, controller operation, and recorder operation.

c. All required and shown functions for 90 percent of loops.

697482A.GN1


9. Nonloop-Specific Functions: a. Capacity: Demonstrate that PIC systems have required spare

capacity for expansion. Include tests for both storage capacity and processing capacity.

b. Timing: Include tests for timing requirements. c. Diagnostics: Demonstrate online and offline diagnostic tests and

procedures. 10. Correct deficiencies found and complete prior to shipment to Site. 11. Failed Tests:

a. Repeat and witnessed by Engineer. b. With approval of Engineer, certain tests may be conducted by PIC

System Integrator and witnessed by Engineer as part of Functional Test.

12. Make following documentation available to Engineer, and Owner at test site both before and during FDT: a. Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, and Change Orders. b. Master copy of FDT procedures. c. List of equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial

number. d. Approved hardware Shop Drawings for equipment being tested. e. Approved preliminary software documentation Submittal.

13. Daily Schedule for FDT: a. Begin each day with meeting to review day’s test schedule. b. End each day with each meeting to review day’s test results and to

review or revise next day’s test schedule.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. For equipment not provided by PIC System Integrator, but that directly interfaces with the PIC System, verify the following conditions:

1. Proper installation. 2. Correct control action. 3. Switch settings and dead bands. 4. Opening and closing speeds and travel stops. 5. Input and output signals.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Material and Equipment Installation: Retain a copy of manufacturers’ instructions at Site, available for review at all times.

B. Electrical Wiring: As specified in Division 26, Electrical.

C. Install instrumentation, panels, and surge suppressors as per applicable standard details.

697482A.GN1



A. General:

1. Coordinate PIC System testing with Engineer, Owner, and affected Subcontractors.

2. Notify Engineer and Owner of Performance Test schedule 2 weeks prior to start of test.

3. Engineer and Owner may actively participate in tests. 4. Engineer and Owner reserves right to test or retest specified functions. 5. Engineer and Owner’s decision will be final regarding acceptability and

completeness of testing.

B. Startup and Testing Team:

1. Thoroughly inspect installation, termination, and adjustment for components and systems.

2. Complete onsite tests. 3. Complete onsite training. 4. Provide startup assistance.

C. Functional Test; Operational Readiness Inspections and Calibrations: Prior to startup, inspect and test to ensure that entire PIC System is ready for operation.

1. Loop/Component Inspections and Calibrations: a. Check PIC System for proper installation, calibration, and

adjustment on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis.

b. Prepare component calibration sheet for each active component (except simple hand switches, lights, gauges, and similar items). 1) Project name. 2) Loop number. 3) Component tag number. 4) Component code number. 5) Manufacturer for elements. 6) Model number/serial number. 7) Summary of functional requirements, for example:

a) Indicators and recorders, scale and chart ranges. b) Transmitters/converters, input and output ranges. c) Computing elements’ function. d) Controllers, action (direct/reverse) and control modes

(PID). e) Switching elements, unit range, differential

(fixed/adjustable), reset (auto/manual).

697482A.GN1


8) Calibrations, for example: a) Analog Devices: Actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10,

50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. b) Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset points. c) Controllers: Mode settings (PID).

9) Space for comments. c. These inspections and calibrations do not require witnessing.

D. Performance Acceptance Tests (PAT):

1. General: a. Test all PIC elements to demonstrate that PIC System satisfies all

requirements. b. Test Format: Cause and effect.

1) Person conducting test initiates an input (cause). 2) Specific test requirement is satisfied if correct result (effect)

occurs. c. Procedures, Forms, and Checklists:

1) Conduct tests in accordance with, and documented on, Engineer and Owner accepted procedures, forms, and checklists.

2) Describe each test item to be performed. 3) Have space after each test item description for sign off by

appropriate party after satisfactory completion. d. Required Test Documentation: Test procedures, forms, and

checklists. All signed by Engineer and Contractor. e. Conducting Tests:

1) Provide special testing materials, equipment, and software. 2) Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process

variables, equipment, and data. 3) If it is not practical to test with real process variables,

equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. 4) Define simulation techniques in test procedures.

f. Coordinate PIC System testing with Owner and affected Subcontractors. 1) Excessive Test Witnessing: Refer to Supplementary

Conditions. 2. Test Requirements:

a. Once facility has been started up and is operating, perform a witnessed PAT on complete PIC System to demonstrate that it is operating as required. Demonstrate each required function on a paragraph-by-paragraph and loop-by-loop basis.

b. Perform local and manual tests for each loop before proceeding to remote and automatic modes.

697482A.GN1


c. Where possible, verify test results using visual confirmation of process equipment and actual process variable. Unless otherwise directed, exercise and observe devices supplied by others, as needed to verify correct signals to and from such devices and to confirm overall system functionality. Test verification by means of disconnecting wires or measuring signal levels is acceptable only where direct operation of plant equipment is not possible.

d. Make updated versions of documentation required for PAT available to Engineer and Owner at Site, both before and during tests.

e. Make one copy of O&M manuals available to Engineer and Owner at the Site both before and during testing.

f. Refer to referenced examples of PAT procedures and forms in Article Supplements.

3.04 TRAINING

A. General:

1. Provide an integrated training program to meet specific needs of staff. 2. Include training sessions, classroom and field, for managers, engineers,

operators, and maintenance personnel. 3. Provide instruction on one working shift(s) as needed to accommodate

personnel schedule. 4. Owner reserves the right to make and reuse video tapes of training

sessions.

B. Operations and Maintenance Training:

1. Include a review of O&M manuals and survey of spares, expendables, and test equipment.

2. Use equipment similar to that provided or currently owned by operations personnel.

3. Provide training suitable for instrument technicians with at least a 2-year associate engineering or technical degree, or equivalent education and experience in electronics or instrumentation.

C. Operations Training:

1. Training Session Duration: One 8-hour instructor day. 2. Number of Training Sessions: One. 3. Location: Site. 4. Content: Conduct training on loop-by-loop basis.

a. Loop Functions: Understanding of loop functions, including interlocks for each loop.

b. Loop Operation: For example, adjusting process variable set points, AUTO/MANUAL control transfer, AUTO and MANUAL control, annunciator acknowledgement and resetting.

c. Interfaces with other control systems.

697482A.GN1


D. Maintenance Training:

1. Training Session Duration: One 8-hour instructor day. 2. Number of Training Sessions: One. 3. Location: Project Site. 4. Content: Provide training for each type of component and function

provided. a. Loop Functions: Understanding details of each loop and how they

function. b. Component calibration. c. Adjustments: For example, controller tuning constants, current

switch trip points, and similar items. d. Troubleshooting and diagnosis for PLCs. e. Replacing lights, fuses, batteries. f. Component removal and replacement. g. Periodic maintenance. h. Air filter replacement.

3.05 CLEANING/ADJUSTING

A. Repair affected surfaces to conform to type, quality, and finish of surrounding surface.

B. Cleaning:

1. Prior to closing system using tubing, clear tubing of interior moisture and debris.

2. Upon completion of Work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from interior and exterior of equipment.

3. Replace enclosure air filters just prior to Final Payment and Acceptance.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect enclosures and other equipment containing electrical, instrumentation and control devices, including spare parts, from corrosion through the use of corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules.

B. Periodically replace capsules in accordance with capsule manufacturer’s recommendations. Replace capsules just prior to Final Payment and Acceptance.

697482A.GN1


3.07 SUPPLEMENTS

A. Supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are part of this Specification.

1. Loop Specifications. 2. Instrument List. 3. Existing Lift Station 1 Input/Output List. For information only. 4. New Lift Station 2 PLC Input/Output List. 5. Surge Suppressor Products Table. 6. Photo of Existing SCADA Screen – Manhole 13. 7. Instrument Calibration Sheet: Provides detailed information on each

instrument (except simple hand switches, lights, and similar items). 8. I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet: Each sheet shows detailed information

for installation, adjustment, and calibration of a given valve. 9. Performance Acceptance Test Sheet: Describes the PAT for a given

loop. The format is mostly free form. a. Lists the requirements of the loop. b. Briefly describes the test. c. Cites expected results. d. Provides space for check off by witness.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 1 – 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

LOOP SPECIFICATIONS

FORMAT

The loop specifications are divided into the following sections:

Process Monitoring and Control Systems (PMCS) Overview: This section together with the Block Diagram Drawings describes the PMCS.

Function Definitions: This section defines various functions used in subsequent sections.

Required Global Functions: These functions are required for all identified variables, and thus are not included in the subsequent Unit Process Loop Specifications.

Modular Functions: For functions used repetitively, modular functions have been developed and are used in the specific Unit Process Descriptions.

Unit Processes: Loop specifications for each specific Unit Process are described. These descriptions include extensive use of referenced Modular Functions.

PMCS OVERVIEW

Refer to the Block Diagram Drawings. The PMCS consists of an EtherNet/IP network whose nodes include PLCs, Servers, and Workstations.

PLCs: One new PLC (RTU-210) shall be provided by the PICS supplier. One existing PLC (RTU-4) shall be modified by the PICS supplier.

There are existing plant PLCs located at the Wright Smith, Jr. WWTP and Lift Station Operations Center located at Stickney WTP. The modifications to those PLCs, for the new upgrades, will be provided by the PIC systems integrator. Servers and Operator Workstations: Modifications to the servers and Operator

workstations at the Wright Smith, Jr. WWTP, Lift Station Operations Center located at Stickney WTP, CC Williams WWTP, and Shelton Beach Lift Station Office shall all be performed under this contract as described in Specification Section 40 90 01.

FUNCTION DEFINITIONS

Pump Run Fail: A pump is commanded-to-run from the PMCS, but is not confirmed running within a preset time. Unless otherwise noted, running is confirmed by receiving an ON status contact closure from the pump’s starter or adjustable speed drive.

Open Fail: A valve is commanded-to-open from the PMCS, but is not confirmed open within a preset time. Unless otherwise noted, a valve is confirmed open by receiving OPEN limit switch contact closure from the valve.

697482A.GN1

LOOP SPECIFICATIONS PW\DEN003\697482 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 1 – 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

Close Fail: A valve is commanded-to-close from the PMCS, but is not confirmed closed within a preset time. Unless otherwise noted, a valve is confirmed closed by receiving CLOSE limit switch contact closure from the valve.

Position Fail: A modulating valve is commanded to a set point position from the PMCS, but the valve is not confirmed to be within a preset percentage of set point within a preset time. This function requires that modulating valve is furnished with a position transmitter, which sends position signal back to PMCS.

Totalize Flow: Integrate flow rate with respect to time. Unless otherwise noted, operator shall be able to reset totalized value to zero, but reset function shall be password protected.

Start: Issue a maintained RUN command. Controlled device shall run as long as the RUN command signal is present. On absence of RUN command, the controlled device immediately ceases operation.

Stop: Cease the maintained RUN command.

Elapsed Run Time: Calculate total time (in tenths of an hour) a device has been in operation. For constant speed pumps, use starter M-contacts to detect when the pump is in operation. For adjustable speed pumps, use ON status contacts from the drive that closes when the drive is in operation. Unless otherwise noted, operator shall be able to reset elapsed run time to zero, but reset function shall be password protected.

Equipment Sequencing: If more than one piece of equipment (e.g. a pump) is required to achieve operating parameters, the following designations shall be assigned:

Lead: The first piece of equipment in a multi-piece sequence to be called to operate.

Lag: The second piece of equipment in a multi-piece sequence to be called to operate.

Lag-Lag: Also called 2nd Lag, this is the third piece of equipment in a multi-piece sequence to be called to operate. Subsequent additional equipment designations would be assigned as 3rd Lag, 4th Lag, etc.

Standby: A piece of equipment in a multi-piece sequence that is called to operate only in the event of a higher order equipment failure and shutdown.

Cycle Count: Count the number of cycles a piece of equipment undergoes. One cycle is defined as the transition from OFF to ON. For valves, one cycle is defined from one CLOSED status event to the next.

Alarm: An event indicating a non-normal, excessive, or dangerous condition resulting in a programmed control response and annunciation of the event.

697482A.GN1


Warning: An indication and annunciation that an operating parameter is approaching an alarm status, the primary purpose being to alert the Operator to take appropriate action. Normal operation continues during a warning.

Compound Loop Control:

Provide an analog output to adjust the feed rate of the controlled device; e.g., adjustable speed pump, control valve position.

Compound loop control uses both feed forward and feedback logic to maintain a set point. Due to feed forward logic, compound loop control has the potential benefit of providing faster response than a conventional PID feedback loop.

Parameters defined in the specific unit process control narratives include: Analysis (Process and Set Point Variable). Flow rate (Feed Forward Variable). Controlled Device.

Two Mode Feedback Control:

Maintain a set point process variable by means of feedback control using both proportional and integral action. The controller shall provide an analog output to adjust the feedrate of the controlled device; e.g., adjustable speed/stroke feed pump, control valve position.

During startup, tune the loop by adjusting proportional band and integral time settings.

Parameters defined in the specific unit process control narratives include: Process Variable. Process Variable Set Point. Controlled Device.

REQUIRED GLOBAL FUNCTIONS

1. Calculate and display Elapsed Run Time of each pump or other piece of equipment whose ON status is displayed by the PMCS System.

2. Calculate and display Cycle Counts of each pump or other piece of equipment whose ON status is displayed by the PMCS System.

3. Trend each process variable that has a PLC analog input.

4. If shown under PMCS discrete displays, derive HIGH-HIGH and LOW-LOW alarms from the associated process variable.

5. Totalize flow rate of each flow rate analog input.

697482A.GN1


6. Bumpless Transfer: For the PLC/PMCS System, configure all “software” Manual/Auto switches so they provide “bumpless transfer.”

a. Manual to Auto Transition: Once the transition occurs, immediately run the device if the Auto Mode so commands.

b. Auto to Manual Transition:

1) If a device has been running in Auto, configure so it continues to run once placed in Manual.

2) If a device has not been running in Auto, configure so it does not run once placed in Manual.

3) If an adjustable speed device has been running at a certain speed in Auto, configure so it runs at the same speed once placed in Manual.

MODULAR FUNCTIONS (Implement if noted in the specific unit process loop specifications)

Modular Function: Alternation

PMCS Discrete Displays

Change assignments (alternate) a group of controlled equipment in a predetermined automatic sequence.

Provide both manually assigned and automatic trigger alternation. Configure a software switch of the form:

X / X+1 / X+2 / etc. / ALT where

X+… series represents each piece of equipment in the controlled equipment group. In this mode, the X+… equipment is manually assigned as the Lead device, and other pieces of controlled equipment are accordingly assigned.

ALT represents the mode where alternation is triggered automatically. For example, suppose there are three pumps in a group. Configure a 1/2/3/ALT alternation switch to provide the following assignments.

Selector Position Lead Lag Lag 2 1 1 2 3 2 2 3 1 3 3 1 2

ALT Automatically alternate as per trigger

See Specific Unit Process Requirements for:

Sequence.

Controlled Equipment Group.

Alternation Trigger.

697482A.GN1


Modular Function: Analog Indicator

PMCS Value Displays

Analog Value (see specific loop to identify specific analog value).

Modular Function: Field Alarm

PMCS Display and Control Functions

Field Alarm.

Display flashing yellow when Field Alarm True and Unacknowledged. Display steady yellow when Field Alarm True and Acknowledged. Display ceases when Field Alarm False and Acknowledged.

Modular Function: Field Condition Status

PMCS Discrete Display

Field Condition Status (see specific loop to identify specific field condition).

Modular Function: Flow


High Flow Alarm.

Low Flow Alarm.

PMCS Value Displays

Flow Rate.

Total Flow, Daily.

Total Flow, Monthly.

PMCS Trends

See Global Functions.

Modular Function: Flow Pacing


PMCS Value Displays

Active Substance Required (Dosage Set Point X Process Flow).

Process Flow.

Dosage Set Point.

697482A.GN1


PMCS Trends


Provide flow pacing of the controlled equipment, including manual dosage adjustment.

Modular Function: Level


High Level Alarm.

Low Level Alarm.

PMCS Value Displays

Level.

PMCS Trends


Modular Function: Modulating Valve Operation


Position Fail.

Valve under PMCS control (Field Hand Switch in Remote or Auto).

PMCS Value Display

Position.


Provide MANUAL/OFF/AUTO control of Valve.

In MANUAL, provide position adjust.

In AUTO, provide control as per individual Unit Process Loop Specifications.

Modular Function: Modulating Valve Status


Open Position.

Closed Position.

Position Fail.

697482A.GN1


PMCS Value Display

Position Set Point.

Position Feedback.

Modular Function: ON Status


ON Status.

PMCS Value Display

Elapsed Run Time; display last 24 hours; see Global Functions.

Cycle Counter; display last 24 hours; see Global Functions.

Modular Function: Open/Close Status


Open Status.

Closed Status.

PMCS Value Display


Modular Function: Open/Close Valve or Gate Operation


Open Status.

Closed Status.

Open Fail.

Close Fail.

Valve/Gate under PMCS control (Field Hand Switch in Remote or Auto).

PMCS Value Display

Position, for valves/gates in transition between Open and Close.


697482A.GN1



Provide MANUAL/OFF/AUTO control of Valve/Gate.

In MANUAL, provide Open/Close control.


Modular Function: Open/Close Valve or Gate Status


Open Status.

Closed Status.

PMCS Value Display


Modular Function: RUN Command


ON Status.

Pump/Equipment Run Fail.

Pump/Equipment under PMCS Control (Field/MCC/VFD Hand Switch – if provided – in Remote or Auto).

Pump/Equipment Local Disconnect Open (if provided).

PMCS Value Display




Provide MANUAL/OFF/AUTO control of Pump.

In MANUAL, provide Start/Stop control.


Enable the above control only if the Pump is under PMCS control.

Also, enable the Pump Run Fail only if the Pump is under PMCS control.

697482A.GN1


Modular Function: RUN Command/Speed Adjust


ON Status.

Pump/Equipment Run Fail.



Enable/Disable Status (if provided).

PMCS Value Display



Pump Speed.


Provide MANUAL/OFF/AUTO control at Pump.

In MANUAL, provide Start/Stop control and manual speed adjust.

In AUTO, provide control and speed adjust as per individual Unit Process Loop Specifications.

Enable the above control only if the Pump is under PMCS control.

Also, enable Pump Run Fail only if the Pump is under PMCS control.

Modular Function: RUN Status


ON Status.

Pump/Equipment Fail.



PMCS Value Display



697482A.GN1


Modular Function: Speed

PMCS Value Displays

Speed.

PMCS Trends

See Global Function.

Modular Function: Speed Adjust


Drive Fail.

Pump under PMCS Control (Field Hand Switch in Remote or Auto).

PMCS Value Display

Pump Speed.

PMCS Control Functions

Provide Manual Speed Adjust.

Modular Function: Two Mode Feedback Control


Set Point Deviation Alarm.

PMCS Value Displays

Process Variable.

Process Variable Set Point.

Tuning Parameters such as Proportional band and reset rate.


Provide Two Mode Feedback Control.

Create error alarm if process variable deviates by more than x absolute units from set point for a sustained time.

PMCS Trends


697482A.GN1


UNIT PROCESSES

Unit Processes 110 & 210: Pump Stations 1 and 2

Modular Function: Level, Station 1 and 2 Wet well, LIT-110 and LIT-210.

Modular Function: Modulating Valve Operation, SWAT Drain Valves FV-135, 136, and 137.

Modular Function: RUN Command/Speed Adjust, Station 1 or 2 Pump X (Where X=115A, 115B, 115C, 215D, 215E, 215F, 215G):

For pump control, Station 2 RTU-210 will be the primary controller for stations 1 and 2 as described below where Station 1 PLC (RTU-4) will function as a remote I/O to Station 2 PLC (RTU-210). On loss of communications between the two RTUs, Station 1 and Station 2 will operate independently from each as described below.

All pumps will be provided with AUTO and MANUAL control from the Local PLC Panel Operator Interface Unit (OIU) and remotely at the Wright Smith Jr., WWTP SCADA System.

In ON, the pump will run.

In OFF, the pump will not run.

In AUTO, adjust speed of pump to maintain the wetwell level set point per the sequence described below.

Level Process Variable: Wet well Levels, Station 1 LIT-110; Station 2 LIT-210.

Level Transmitter Select 1/2: Operator entered.

Station 1 Lag Pump Select 1/2/3/ALT: Operator entered.

Station 2 Lead Pump Select 1/2/3/4/ALT: Operator entered.

Level Set Points: Operator entered.

Pump Speed Set Points: Operator entered.

Pump Start/Stop Delay Timers: Operator entered.

Controlled Device: Pump Speed.

PUMP SEQUENCE NORMAL OPERATION (Overflow Event): During a wet weather event, the existing and new 3-Mile Creek Pump Stations 1 and 2 will pump flow to severe weather attenuation tanks 1, 2, and 3 (SWATs). When flows begin to exceed the capacity of the 3-Mile Creek Stations, the level in the Pump Stations will begin to rise and the pumps will be called to operate as described below.

697482A.GN1


As the water level within the Pump Stations increases and reaches a preset elevation, the PLC will distribute a close command to all SWAT drain valves on the discharge of each SWAT (FV-135, 136, and 137). As the water level within the Pump Stations continues to rise, the Pump Stations pump will be called to run in the following order: TABLE 1 Pump Sequence

New Pump Station (Station 2) Existing Pump Station (Station 1) Lead Lag 1 Lag 2 Lag 3 Lag 4 Lag 5

The failed designated lead or lag pump will be replaced by the standby pump, where the standby pump shall start after a preset adjustable time delay and operate in the failed pump start/stop control sequence position. The speed of the Pump Stations pumps will be controlled by the liquid level within the Pump Stations. The pump will convey overflow volume to SWAT 1. The SWATs will fill by gravity overflow in sequential order (1->2->3).

AUTO/MANUAL

When the pumps are placed in REMOTE at their respective VFD and in AUTO at the PLC Panel OIU, the pumps shall operate via Pump Lead-Lag Sequence PLC control logic.

PUMP STATION SPEED DETERMINATION

Lead One - Linear Speed Control Logic

– Maximum and minimum set points for wet well level and pump speed shall be adjustable set by an operator in the SCADA system. Pump start delays and stop delays shall also be provided for each pump (Lead, Lag 1, Lag 2, Lag 3, Lag 4, & Lag 5) and independently adjustable by an operator in the SCADA system.

The recommended maximum and minimum wet well level elevations are respectively (-) 1.0 ft and (-) 7.5 CONTROLLER

The recommended maximum and minimum pump speeds, set within the PLC, are respectively 100% and 73%.

– The Lead pump speed will be calculated by interpolating between a min and max speed based on wet well level shown in Equation 1. When the lead pump is the only pump in operation, it will be controlled by this equation and referenced as the Lead One Logic. When lag pumps are called to run, the lead and lag pumps will be controlled by the LSP logic described below.

697482A.GN1


Equation 1 Pump Speed Calculation (Lead One Logic)

Pump Speed=Max. Speed – (Max. Speed – Min. Speed) x (Max. Level – Measured Wet Well Level) (Max. Level – Min. Level)

– Once lag 1 pump is started, all pumps are controlled to a level set point (LSP) by a PID CONTROLLER and a level set point (LSP) as described below.

PUMP LEAD-LAG SEQUENCE PLC CONTROL LOGIC

– A level set point (LSP) will be set by the operator at SCADA or local control panel OIU. A recommended value is at an elevation of (-)1.0 CONTROLLER

– The LSP will be the set point of a proportional-integral CONTROLLER. Station 1 existing level instrument will be utilized for wet well level monitoring and pump control and a new level instrument will be installed to measure the level in Station 2. The Level Transmitter signal selection for pump control will be provided at the local control panel OIU or plant SCADA.

– The initial suggested tuning parameters for the CONTROLLER will be:

Proportional Gain = (-)0.5 Integral Time = 80 s Derivative Time = 0 s (No Derivative)

– The measured variable ranged is 0 ft (EL -10.0 ft) to +22 ft (EL +12.0 ft).

– The controlled variable will be the pump speed for all pumps currently online

– The controlled variable range will be 73% - 100%

– Pump speeds will be limited to a minimum value of 73% to keep pumps within their allowable operational range as suggested by the manufacturer and to avoid dead head conditions.

PUMP STATION UNITS OPERATION

– All pumps shall shut-off.

– The number of lag pumps in operation will be determined using a speed limits strategy.

– Pump sequencing derived from input from MAWSS staff and CH2M staff will be used.

o The lead pump in the new wet well will start first.

o Once additional flow is required, the assigned lag pump 1 in the existing wet well becomes Lag 1.

o As additional flow is needed the remaining Lag pumps will turn on alternating between wet wells.

697482A.GN1


– Table 2 – Speed Limits Control Set Points

The speed limits tables provide four items: the speed that initiates a lag pump start, the speed that the CONTROLLER should reset to when a pump has started, the speed that initiates a lag pump stop, and the speed that the CONTROLLER should reset to when a lag pump has stopped.

TABLE 2 Speed Limits Control Set Points

Pump Pump Start Speed Start Reset Speed Stop Speed Stop Reset Speed

Lead Pump 100% N/A 73% N/A Lag Pump 1 100% 73% 73% 87% Lag Pump 2 100% 77% 73% 77% Lag Pump 3 100% 89% 73% 77% Lag Pump 4 100% 91% 73% 77% Lag Pump 5 100% 94% 73% 77%

– Delays for pump starts and stops are to be used. The CONTROLLER must sustain at or pass pump start/stop thresholds for the length of time described below:

o Pump start delay = 30 secs

o Pump stop delay = 30 secs

– Pump Control Start/Stop Operation

o If the level in the wet well reaches an elevation of (-) 1.0 ft for at least 30 seconds without any pumps in operation, the Lead pump will be started at 100% speed (refer to equation 1 interpolation) and its pump speed will be interpolated between a min and max speed dependent upon the wet well level. This logic will be referred to as Lead One Logic.

o As the level in the wet well increases the calculated controlled variable (pump speed) increases to a maximum value of 100% and as the level in the wet well decreases the calculated controlled variable decreases to 73%.

o With lead pump in operation, if the elevation of the wet well increases to (-)1.0 ft and holds at or above elevation (-) 1.0 ft for 30 seconds, Lag 1 will be started and both pumps will be controlled with LSP logic (When more than one pump is in operation, the LSP pump control logic will be used to control all pumps in operation).

o Once Lag Pump 1 starts, the CONTROLLER output variable for both pumps is reset to 73% (to reduce flow surges with the new pump coming online). Shown in Table 2.

o If the level in the wet well increases above the level set point when Lead 1 and Lag 1 are in operation, the CONTROLLER will increase the control variable output (pump speed).

697482A.GN1


o If the level continues to increase and the CONTROLLER output (speed) reaches 100% and stays at 100% for 30 seconds, Lag 2 will start, as shown in Table 1.

o Once Lag Pump 2 starts, the CONTROLLER output variable for both pumps is reset to 77% (to reduce flow surges with the new pump coming online).

o If the level decreases and the CONTROLLER decreases the controlled variable to or below 73% (stop speed for all pumps) for more than 30 seconds (pump stop delay), Lag 2 pump is stopped and the CONTROLLER output is reset to 77% for Lag 1 and Lead 1.

o If the level continues to decrease and falls at or below 73% for 30 seconds, Lag 1 pump is stopped. The CONTROLLER output is reset to 87% for Lead 1.

o Lead One Logic is once again used to calculate the Lead pump speed.

o If the level continues to decrease and falls at or below -7.5 ft for 30 seconds, the Lead pump is stopped and no pumps are online.

PUMP STATION OPERATION – LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS

On loss of communications, between Stations 1 and 2 PLCs, Station 2 will continue to operate the four pumps (P-215D, E, F, G), via PLC logic from the RTU-210 PLC and level transmitter (LIT-210) and Station 1 will operate from the existing Station 1 float backup relay logic. The existing Station 1 float switch elevations will be adjusted in the field to the following elevations:

Float Switch Tag No. / Pump Start-Stop Control New Float Elevation

LSLL-110A (Stop all pumps) -2 Ft. EL

LSL-110B (Start Lead Pump) 1 Ft. EL

LSH-110C (Start Lag 1 Pump) 2 Ft. EL

LSHH-110D (Start Lag 2 Pump) 3 Ft. EL

SWAT ACTIVATION SCADA ALARM

On any type of SWAT activity, an alarm through SCADA shall notify the Operators at the Wright Smith WWTP. The alarm shall be displayed and recorded through SCADA and acknowledged by the Operator.

Unit Processes 130 & 200: SWATs and Diversion Box

Modular Function: Level, LT-135, 136, 137, SWAT X (X= 1, 2, 3).

Modular Function: Level, LT-200, Diversion Box

697482A.GN1


Modular Function: Open/Close Valve Operation, FV-131, 132, 133, SWAT X Influent Valve (X=1, 2, 3).

Modular Function: Modulating Valve Operation, FV-135, 136, 137, SWAT X Drain Valve (X = 1, 2, 3).

Modular Function: Manhole/Meter Vault Flow, FE/FIT-114 (SWAT 1); FE/FIT-113 (SWATs 2&3)

The following logic described below shall be executed only in RTU-210.

In AUTO, modulate the drain valves using control to adjust the drain discharge flow rate in response to the diversion box level as described in the sequence below.

SWAT FILL SEQUENCE The SWAT influent valves will have provisions to be operated manually at the valve, automatically from the Station 2 CP-210 Operator Interface Unit (OIU), or remotely from the Wright Smith Jr., WWTP HMI SCADA System. All set points and time delays will have the capability to be adjusted either locally or remotely.

An operator HMI selector switch shall allow the selection and indicate which of the three SWATs are to be the initial flow recipient (IFR), second-priority SWAT, and third-priority SWAT influent valves. That selection shall open the selected SWAT’s influent valve with the remaining two SWAT influent valves in a default closed position. During a flow diversion event where wastewater is being pumped into the SWATs, the IFR shall receive the all the influent flow until is liquid level reaches an operator-set percentage capacity. Upon reaching that capacity, the influent valve to the second-priority SWAT, as operator-selected, shall be opened. When the second-priority SWAT’s liquid level reaches an operator-set percentage capacity, the influent valve to the third-priority SWAT, as defaulted by the operator’s selection of the priority and second-priority SWATs, shall be opened. When the flow diversion event is passed as indicated by the initiation of a SWAT Drain Sequence, the second and third-priority SWAT influent valves shall be closed as their default state. SWAT DRAIN SEQUENCE Once the diversion event passes following a storm event, the pumps will stop based on the pump station stop pump level set point. As the diversion box level drops below the 3.5 water depth, the drain valve on the discharge of SWAT 1 will be opened to the position based upon the table below, to allow SWAT 1 to drain to the Trunk Sewer. Once SWAT 1 flow meter indicates a flow of 200 gpm, then the drain valve for SWAT 2 will be opened, based upon the table below, and begin to drain. Once SWAT 1 is completely drained, as indicated by its flow meter dropping below the flow set point, SWAT 1 drain valve shall default to 25% open position. Once the common drain flow meter for SWAT 2 and 3 flow drops to 200 gpm with SWAT 2 valve greater than 10% opened, then SWAT 3 drain valve will open, after a preset adjustable time delay of 10 minutes, based upon the table below. SWAT 2 will then default to 25% open once it is fully drained. Once SWAT 3 is fully drained, set its discharge valve to default 25% open.

697482A.GN1


TABLE 3 Diversion Box Level & Drain Valve Position

Water Depth

Water Surface

Elevation Valve %

Open 3.15 -0.04 0 2.90 -0.29 8 2.65 -0.54 16 2.40 -0.79 23 2.15 -1.04 31 1.90 -1.29 39 1.65 -1.54 47

The SWAT drain valves will have provisions to be operated manually at the valve, automatically from the Station 2 CP-210 Operator Interface Unit (OIU), or remotely from the Wright Smith Jr., WWTP. All set points and time delays will have the capability to be adjusted either locally or remotely.

Note that the valves will not be allowed to open if the either station pump is running. If a pump is called to run, all open valves will be interlocked closed.

END OF LOOP SPECIFICATIONS

697482A.GN1

TAG NO LOOP TITLE COMP_CODE COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

MEASURING RANGE

OR SETPOINT

MEASURING

UNIT

ZERO REFERENCE

POINT

MOUNTING

DETAIL P+ID NO

LSH201B Diversion Box W/ Adjustable Weir Diversion Activation L18 Level Switch, Float, Mercury 0.42 Ft. EL 4091‐248 08‐N‐601

LE/LT200 Diversion Box W/ Adjustable Weir Radar Level L7R Level Element and Transmitter, Radar 0 ‐15 Ft. Bottom of Div. Box 4091‐263 08‐N‐601

LSL210 Pump Station 2 Level Low (Stop Pumps) L18 Level Switch, Float, Mercury ‐7.5 Ft. EL 4091‐262 08‐N‐601

LSH210 Pump Station 2 Level High (Start Lead Pump) L18 Level Switch, Float, Mercury ‐1 Ft. EL 4091‐262 08‐N‐601

LSHH210 Pump Station 2 Level High High (Start Lag Pump/Alarm) L18 Level Switch, Float, Mercury 1 Ft. EL 4091‐262 08‐N‐601

LE210 Pump Station 2 Level L42 Level Element and Transmitter, Submersible, Wastewater 0‐12 Ft. EL ‐9.5 4091‐267CG 08‐N‐601

PE/PI215D Pump D Line Pressure P04, P15 Pressure Gauge w/Annular seal 0‐50 PSI 4091‐304DG 08‐N‐601

PE/PID215E Pump E Line Pressure P04, P15 Pressure Gauge w/Annular seal 0‐50 PSI 4091‐304DG 08‐N‐601

PE/PID215F Pump F Line Pressure P04, P15 Pressure Gauge w/Annular seal 0‐50 PSI 4091‐304DG 08‐N‐601

PE/PID215G Pump G Line Pressure P04, P15 Pressure Gauge w/Annular seal 0‐50 PSI 4091‐304DG 08‐N‐601

FE210 SWAT 2 & 3 Influent Flow F04 Flow Element & Transmitter, Electromagnetic 0‐50 MGD 4091‐273 08‐N‐601

AE/AIT/AIC211 Combustible Gas High Alarm A10 Combustible Gas Element and Transmitter 10 % LEL 4091‐151AG 08‐N‐601

QS204 Intrusion Door Alarm #1 M43 Intrusion Switch N/A N/A 08‐N‐601



PI115A Pump A Line Pressure P04, P15 Pressure Gauge w/Annular seal 0‐50 PSI 4091‐304DG 08‐N‐602

PI115B Pump B Line Pressure P04, P15 Pressure Gauge w/Annular seal 0‐50 PSI 4091‐304DG 08‐N‐602

PI115C Pump C Line Pressure P04, P15 Pressure Gauge w/Annular seal 0‐50 PSI 4091‐304DG 08‐N‐602

FE/FIT110 SWAT 1 Influent Flow F04 Flow Element & Transmitter, Electromagnetic 0‐50 MGD 4091‐273 08‐N‐602

LSH136B SWAT 2 Level High L18 Level Switch, Float, Mercury 44.7 Ft. EL 4091‐248 08‐N‐603

LSH137B SWAT 3 Level High L18 Level Switch, Float, Mercury 44.7 Ft. EL 4091‐248 08‐N‐603

LE/LIT136 SWAT 2 Level L42 Level Element and Transmitter, Submersible, Wastewater 0‐30 Ft. Bottom of Side Wall 4091‐267CG 08‐N‐603

LE/LIT137 SWAT 3 Level L42 Level Element and Transmitter, Submersible, Wastewater 0‐30 Ft. Bottom of Side Wall 4091‐267CG 08‐N‐603

Three Mile Creek Instrument List

PW\DEN003\697482

2/8/2019

©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL INSTRUMENT LIST

40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 2 ‐ 1

697482A.GN1

Tag Number Description Type Rack Slot Point Address Fault Range Min Range Max

QS115A P‐115A LIFT PUMP A AUTO DI 0 1 1 %IX4.0

MS115A P‐115A LIFT PUMP A RUNNING DI 0 1 2 %IX4.1

XSH115A P‐115A LIFT PUMP A MOISTURE DI 0 1 3 %IX4.2

TSH115A P‐115A LIFT PUMP A OVERTEMP DI 0 1 4 %IX4.3

QS106 DI 0 1 5 %IX4.4

QS107 DI 0 1 6 %IX4.5

QS1006 RTU ‐ NORMAL POWER DI 0 1 7 %IX4.6

QS115B P‐115B LIFT PUMP B AUTO DI 0 1 8 %IX4.7

M115B P‐115B LIFT PUMP B RUNNING DI 0 1 9 %IX5.0

XSH115B P‐115B LIFT PUMP B MOISTURE DI 0 1 10 %IX5.1

TSH115B P‐115B LIFT PUMP B OVERTEMP DI 0 1 11 %IX5.2

QS104 CONTROL RM INTRUSION DI 0 1 12 %IX5.3

QS105 CONTROL RM AUTH ENTRY ‐ KEY DI 0 1 13 %IX5.4

QS1007 RTU ‐ UPS POWER DI 0 1 14 %IX5.5

JS1001 POWER/PHASE LOSS DI 0 1 15 %IX5.6

QS115C P‐115C LIFT PUMP C AUTO DI 0 1 16 %IX5.7

M115C P‐115C LIFT PUMP C RUNNING DI 0 1 17 %IX6.0

XSH115C P‐115C LIFT PUMP C MOISTURE DI 0 1 18 %IX6.1

TSH115C P‐115C LIFT PUMP C OVERTEMP DI 0 1 19 %IX6.2

QS10006 GENERATOR RUNNING DI 0 1 20 %IX6.3

QS1008 GENERATOR ALARM DI 0 1 21 %IX6.4

LSLL110A LSLL‐110A LIFT STA LEVEL LOW LOW DI 0 1 22 %IX6.5

LSL110B LSLL‐110B LIFT STA LEVEL LOW DI 0 1 23 %IX6.6

QS150_1 FCV‐150‐1 SIDE STREAM STORAGE VLV REMOTE DI 0 1 24 %IX6.7

ZSO150_1 FCV‐150‐1 SIDE STREAM STORAGE VLV OPEN DI 0 1 25 %IX7.0

ZSC150_1 FCV‐150‐1 SIDE STREAM STORAGE VLV CLOSED DI 0 1 26 %IX7.1










LSL101A LSL‐101A DIV BOX LEVEL LOW DI 0 2 4 %IX14.3

ZSO105 ZSO‐150 STORM SCREEN AUTO RUN DI 0 2 5 %IX14.4

LSL135A LSL‐135A TANK LEVEL LOW DI 0 2 6 %IX14.5

LSH135B LSL‐135B TANK LEVEL HIGH DI 0 2 7 %IX14.6

LSHH135C LSL‐135C TANK LEVEL HIGH HIGH DI 0 2 8 %IX14.7

ZSO140 FCV‐140 SIDE STREAM STORAGE VLV OPEN DI 0 2 9 %IX15.0

ZSC140 FCV‐140 SIDE STREAM STORAGE VLV CLOSED DI 0 2 10 %IX15.1

QS140 FCV‐140 SIDE STREAM STORAGE VLV REMOTE DI 0 2 11 %IX15.2

LSH110C LSH‐110C LIFT STA LEVEL HIGH DI 0 2 12 %IX15.3

LSHH110D LSHH‐110D LIFT STA LEVEL HIGH HIGH DI 0 2 13 %IX15.4

QS140A P‐140A RECIRC PUMP AUTO DI 0 2 14 %IX15.5

M140A P‐140A RECIRC PUMP RUNNING DI 0 2 15 %IX15.6

QS150 P‐150 WASH WATER PUMP AUTO DI 0 2 16 %IX15.7

M150 P‐150 WASH WATER PUMP RUNNING DI 0 2 17 %IX16.0

QS136 B‐136 EXH BLOWER AUTO DI 0 2 18 %IX16.1

M136 B‐136 EXH BLOWER RUNNING DI 0 2 19 %IX16.2

QS135 FCV‐135 STORAGE VALVE REMOTE DI 0 2 20 %IX16.3

LSHH101C LSHH‐101C DIV BOX LEVEL HIGH HIGH DI 0 2 21 %IX16.4

QS140B P‐140B RECIRC PUMP B AUTO DI 0 2 22 %IX16.5

M140B P‐140B RECIRC PUMP B RUNNING DI 0 2 23 %IX16.6

Existing I/O List ‐ For Information Only

PW\DEN003\697482

2/7/2019

©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

EXISTING I/O LIST

40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 3 ‐1

697482A.GN1



QS120 P‐120 LIFT STA PUMP AUTO DI 0 2 24 %IX16.7

M120 P‐120 LIFT STA PUMP RUNNING DI 0 2 25 %IX17.0

LSL120 LSL‐120 LIFT STA SUMP PUMP FLOAT DI 0 2 26 %IX17.1

TSH120 P‐120 LIFT STA SUMP PUMP OVERTEMP DI 0 2 27 %IX17.2

HS115D P‐120 LIFT STA SUMP PUMP LOR SWITCH DI 0 2 28 %IX17.3

LSH101B LSH‐101B DIV BOX LEVEL HIGH DI 0 2 29 %IX17.4

ERDI_2_30 DI 0 2 30 %IX17.5

ERDI_2_31 DI 0 2 31 %IX17.6

ERDI_2_32 DI 0 2 32 %IX17.7

HS115A P‐115A LIFT PUMP A RUN DO 0 3 1 %QX20.0

HS140A P‐140A RECIRC PUMP RUN DO 0 3 2 %QX20.1

HS136 B‐136 EXH BLOWER RUN DO 0 3 3 %QX20.2

HSO150_1 FCV‐150‐1 SIDE STREAM STORAGE VLV OPEN DO 0 3 4 %QX20.3

HSC150_1 FCV‐150‐1 SIDE STREAM STORAGE VLV CLOSE DO 0 3 5 %QX20.4



HS115B P‐115B LIFT PUMP B RUN DO 0 3 8 %QX20.7

HS140B P‐140B RECIRC PUMP B RUN DO 0 3 9 %QX21.0



HSO140 FCV‐140 SIDE STREAM STORAGE VLV OPEN DO 0 3 12 %QX21.3

HSC140 FCV‐140 SIDE STREAM STORAGE VLV CLOSE DO 0 3 13 %QX21.4

HS115C P‐115C LIFT PUMP C RUN DO 0 3 14 %QX21.5

HS150 P‐150 WASH WATER PUMP RUN DO 0 3 15 %QX21.6



HS120 P‐120 LIFT STA PUMP RUN DO 0 3 18 %QX22.1

ERDO_3_19 DO 0 3 19 %QX22.2

ERDO_3_20 DO 0 3 20 %QX22.3

ERDO_3_21 DO 0 3 21 %QX22.4

ERDO_3_22 DO 0 3 22 %QX22.5

DO 0 3 23

DO 0 3 24

DO 0 3 25

DO 0 3 26

DO 0 3 27

DO 0 3 28

DO 0 3 29

DO 0 3 30

DO 0 3 31

DO 0 3 32

LT135 LI‐135 SIDE STREAM STORAGE TANK LEVEL AI 0 4 1 %ID38 0.0 30.0

ZT135 ZI‐135 DRAIN VALVE POSITION INDICATOR AI 0 4 2 %ID42 0.0 100.0

LT100 LI‐100 DIVERSION BOX LEVEL AI 0 4 3 %ID46 0.0 10.9

LT110 LI‐110 LIFT STATION LEVEL AI 0 4 4 %ID50 0.0 26.1

TE105 TI‐110 CONTROL ROOM TEMP AI 0 4 5 %ID54

AI 0 4 6

ERAI_4_7 AI 0 4 7 %ID62 0.0 100.0

ERAI_4_8 AI 0 4 8 %ID66 0.0 100.0

ERAI_4_9 AI 0 4 9 %ID70 0.0 100.0

AI 0 4 10

AI 0 4 11

AI 0 4 12

P115AVFD_FB AI 0 4 13 %ID86 0.0 100.0

P115BVFD_FB AI 0 4 14 %ID90 0.0 100.0

EXISTING I/O LIST


PW\DEN003\697482

2/7/2019


697482A.GN1



P115CVFD_FB AI 0 4 15 %ID94 0.0 100.0

LT1000 AI 0 4 16 %ID98 0.0 10.0

LIC135 FCV‐135 STORAGE VALVE POSITION COMMAND AO 0 5 1 %QD168 0.0 100.0

P115AVFDFB_AO AO 0 5 2 %QD180 0.0 100.0

P115BVFDFB_AO AO 0 5 3 %QD192 0.0 100.0

P115CVFDFB_AO AO 0 5 4 %QD204 0.0 100.0

ERAO_5_5 AO 0 5 5 %QD216 0.0 100.0

AO 0 5 6

AO 0 5 7

AO 0 5 8

ERDI_7_1 DI 0 6 1 %IX1754.0

ERDI_7_2 DI 0 6 2 %IX1754.1

ERDI_7_3 DI 0 6 3 %IX1754.2

DI 0 6 4

DI 0 6 5

DI 0 6 6

DI 0 6 7

DI 0 6 8

DI 0 6 9

DI 0 6 10

DI 0 6 11

DI 0 6 12

DI 0 6 13

DI 0 6 14

DI 0 6 15

DI 0 6 16

DI 0 6 17

DI 0 6 18

DI 0 6 19

DI 0 6 20

DI 0 6 21

DI 0 6 22

DI 0 6 23

DI 0 6 24

DI 0 6 25

DI 0 6 26

DI 0 6 27

DI 0 6 28

DI 0 6 29

DI 0 6 30

DI 0 6 31

DI 0 6 32

PW\DEN003\697482

2/7/2019


EXISTING I/O LIST


697482A.GN1

Tag Tag Suffix/Function Description DI DO AI AO

QS215X, X=D,E,F,G AUTO Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

M215X, X= D,E,F,G RUNNING Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

XS215X, X=D,E,F,G HIGH MOISTURE Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

TSH215X, X=D,E,F,G OVERTEMP Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

VSH215X, X=D,E,F,G VIBRATION HIGH Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

HS215X, X=D,E,F,G MTR START Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

LSH136B LEVEL HIGH SWAT 2 Level 1

LSH137B LEVEL HIGH SWAT 3 Level 1

YS215X, X=D,E,F,G VFD ALARM Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

YA215X, X=D,E,F,G COMMON ALARM Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

SF215X, X=D,E,F,G SPEED FEEDBACK Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

SC215X, X=D,E,F,G SPEED CTRL Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

LIT210 LEVEL Lift Station 2 Wet Well 1

LSL210B ALL PUMPS OFF Lift Station 2 Wet Well 1

LSH210C BACKUP LEAD PUMP ON Lift Station 2 Wet Well 1

LSHH210D BACKUP LAG PUMP ON/HIGH ALARM Lift Station 2 Wet Well 1

LT200 LEVEL Diversion Box 2 1

LSH201B LEVEL HIGH Diversion Box 2 1

ZCO131 OPENED COMMAND SWAT 1 Influent Valve 1

ZCC131 CLOSED COMMAND SWAT 1 Influent Valve 1

ZSO131 OPENED SWAT 1 Influent Valve 1

QS131 REMOTE SWAT 1 Influent Valve 1

ZSC131 CLOSED SWAT 1 Influent Valve 1











ZT135A POSITION INDICATOR SWAT 1 Drain Valve 1

ZT135B POSITION COMMAND SWAT 1 Drain Valve 1

ZSO135 OPENED SWAT 1 Drain Valve 1

QS135 REMOTE SWAT 1 Drain Valve 1

ZSC135 CLOSED SWAT 1 Drain Valve 1











QS136 REMOTE SWAT 2 & 3 Common Drain Valve 1

FIT110 FLOW SWAT 1 FLOW 1

FIT210 FLOW SWAT 2 & 3 FLOW 1

LT136 LEVEL SWAT 2 Level 1

LT137 LEVEL SWAT 3 Level 1

M236A RUNNING Odor Control Blower 1 (FUTURE) 1

M236B RUNNING Odor Control Blower 2 (FUTURE) 1

LIFT STATION 2 PLC I/O

PW\DEN003\697482

2/8/2019


LIFT STATION 2 PLC INPUT/OUTPUT LIST


697482A.GN1

Tag Tag Suffix/Function Description DI DO AI AO

LIFT STATION 2 PLC I/O

QS236A FAULT Odor Control Blower 1 (FUTURE) 1

QS236B FAULT Odor Control Blower 2 (FUTURE) 1

QS20006 RUNNING Generator 2 1

QS2008 FAULT Generator 2 1

QS2007 FUEL LEVEL Generator 2 1

QS210 UTILITY/GEN Lift Station 2 Transfer Switch 1

QS20X, (X=4,5,6) INTRUSION Lift Station 2 Electrical Room 3

TSH20X, (X=5,6) HIGH TEMP Lift Station 2 Electrical Room 2

QS211 ALARM Lift Station 2 Wet Well High Combustible Gas 1

YS210A UPS FAILURE Lift Station 2 Control Panel 1

YS210B UPS LOW BATTERY Lift Station 2 Control Panel 1

YS210D PAC FAILURE Lift Station 2 Control Panel 1

YS110 PAC FAILURE Lift Station 1 Control Panel 1

QS212 ALARM Lift Station 2 Common Alarm 1

FT113 FLOW Manhole/Meter Vault Pump Station 2 Ultrasonic Flowmeter 1

AIC211 COMBUSTIBLE GAS HIGH ALARM Lift Station 2 Wet Well 1

FT114 FLOW Manhole/Meter Vault Pump Station 1 Ultrasonic Flowmeter 1

II215X (X=D,E,F,G) MOTOR CURRENT Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

BF215X (X=D,E,F,G) BYPASS FAIL Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

BI215X (X=D,E,F,G) IN BYPASS Lift Station 2 Pump X, X=D,E,F,G 4

TOTAL FOR CABINET 80 10 20 7

LIFT STATION 2 PLC INPUT/OUTPUT LIST


PW\DEN003\697482

2/8/2019


697

482A

.GN

1

Surg

e Su

ppre

ssor

Pro

duct

s T

able

SS T

ype

App

lica

tion

Enc

losu

re/M

ount

ing

Man

ufac

ture

r/M

odel

Pri

ncip

le o

f O

pera

tion

/Per

form

ance

Cri

teri

a/F

eatu

res

CO

MM

EN

TS

1

Pro

tect

120

V a

c,

sing

le-p

hase

po

wer

in c

ontr

ol

pane

ls

NE

MA

Rat

ing:

Non

e L

ocat

e in

side

pan

elP

hone

ix C

onta

ct,

Par

t No.

290

5228

Pri

ncip

le o

f O

pera

tion

:T

wo

stag

e:

1) H

igh

ener

gy m

etal

oxi

de v

aris

tor

2) B

ipol

ar s

ilic

on a

vala

nche

dev

ice

Per

form

ance

Cri

teri

a:1)

AR

C: H

andl

es 6

0 kA

on

10 b

y 35

0 w

avef

orm

2) M

OV

: Han

dles

40

kA o

n 8

by 2

0 w

avef

orm

3) G

T: H

andl

es 1

0 kA

on

8 by

20

wav

efor

m

Nom

inal

Am

p C

apac

ity:

15A

prov

ide

as n

eede

d

2P

rote

ct a

nalo

g si

gnal

s w

ithi

n co

ntro

l pan

els

NE

MA

Rat

ing:

Non

e L

ocat

e in

side

pan

elP

hone

ix C

onta

ct,

Par

t No.

290

6809

Pri

ncip

le o

f O

pera

tion

:T

wo-

Stag

e:

1) H

igh

ener

gy m

etal

oxi

de v

aris

tor

2) B

ipol

ar s

ilic

on a

vala

nche

dev

ice

Tes

ted

and

rate

d fo

r 50

oc

curr

ence

s of

2,0

00-a

mp

peak

test

wav

e fo

rm. P

rovi

de

as n

eede

d.

3

Pro

tect

dig

ital

(2

4VD

C)

sign

als

wit

hin

cont

rol

pane

ls

NE

MA

Rat

ing:

Non

e L

ocat

e in

side

pan

elP

hone

ix C

onta

ct,

Par

t No.

290

6809

Pri

ncip

le o

f O

pera

tion

:M

ulti

-Sta

ge:

1) H

igh

ener

gy m

etal

oxi

de v

aris

tor

2) B

ipol

ar s

ilic

on a

vala

nche

dev

ice

4

Pro

tect

dig

ital

(1

20V

AC

) si

gnal

s w

ithi

n co

ntro

l pa

nels

NE

MA

Rat

ing:

Non

e L

ocat

e in

side

pan

elP

hone

ix C

onta

ct,

Par

t No.

283

9185

(P

lug)

28

3928

2 (B

ase)

Pri

ncip

le o

f O

pera

tion

:Si

ngle

-Sta

ge:

1) H

igh

ener

gy m

etal

oxi

de v

aris

tor

2) B

ipol

ar s

ilic

on a

vala

nche

dev

ice

5A

nalo

g si

gnal

of

2-w

ire

tran

smit

ter

NE

MA

Rat

ing:

NE

MA

4X

Fiel

d in

stal

led

in s

tain

less

st

eel p

ipe

nipp

les;

adj

acen

t to

2-w

ire

tran

smit

ter

ED

CO

, SS

64 S

erie

sor C

ompa

rabl

e P

hone

ix

Con

tact

Pro

duct

Pri

ncip

le o

f O

pera

tion

:T

wo-

Stag

e:

1) H

igh

ener

gy m

etal

oxi

de v

aris

tor

2) B

ipol

ar s

ilic

on a

vala

nche

dev

ice

6

Bot

h an

alog

si

gnal

and

120

V

ac p

ower

of

4-w

ire

tran

smit

ter

NE

MA

rat

ing:

NE

MA

4X

Fiel

d in

stal

led;

adj

acen

t to

4-w

ire

tran

smit

ter

ED

CO

, SL

AC

-120

36

or Com

para

ble

Pho

neix

C

onta

ct P

rodu

ct

Pri

ncip

le o

f O

pera

tion

:T

wo

stag

e:

1) H

igh

ener

gy m

etal

oxi

de v

aris

tor

2) B

ipol

ar s

ilic

on a

vala

nche

dev

ice

Per

form

ance

Cri

teri

a:1)

Wit

h 12

0V A

C o

utle

t and

AC

cir

cuit

bre

aker

in a

w

eath

erpr

oof

encl

osur

e

Tes

ted

and

rate

d fo

r 50

oc

curr

ence

s of

2,0

00-a

mp

peak

test

wav

efor

m. P

rovi

de

as n

eede

d

PW

\DE

N00

3\69

7482

2/7/

2019

©C

OP

YR

IGH

T 2

019

CH

2M H

ILL

SUR

GE

SU

PP

RE

SSO

R P

RO

DU

CT

S T

AB

LE

40 9

0 01

SU

PP

LE

ME

NT

5 -

1

69

7482

A.G

N1

P

W\D

EN

003\

6974

82

INS

TR

UM

EN

TA

TIO

N A

ND

CO

NT

RO

L

FE

BR

UA

RY

8, 2

019

FO

R P

RO

CE

SS

SY

ST

EM

S

©C

OP

YR

IGH

T 2

019

CH

2M H

ILL

40

90

01 S

UP

PL

EM

EN

T 7

- 1

CH

2M H

ILL

INS

TR

UM

EN

T C

AL

IBR

AT

ION

SH

EE

T

Rev

.06.

05.9

2 C

OM

PO

NE

NT

M

AN

UF

AC

TU

RE

R

PR

OJE

CT

C

ode:

N

ame:

N

umbe

r:

Nam

e:

Mod

el:

Nam

e:

S

eria

l #:

F

UN

CT

ION

S

R

AN

GE

V

AL

UE

U

NIT

S

CO

MP

UT

ING

FU

NC

TIO

NS

? Y

/ N

C

ON

TR

OL

? Y

/ N

In

dica

te?

Y /

N

Cha

rt:

Des

crib

e:

Act

ion?

dir

ect /

rev

erse

M

odes

? P

/ I

/ D

Rec

ord?

Y /

N

Sca

le:

S

WIT

CH

? Y

/ N

U

nit R

ange

: T

rans

mit

/ In

put:

D

iffe

rent

ial:

fi

xed/

adju

stab

le

Con

vert

? Y

/ N

O

utpu

t:

R

eset

? au

tom

atic

/ m

anua

l A

NA

LO

G C

AL

IBR

AT

ION

S

DIS

CR

ET

E C

AL

IBR

AT

ION

S

Not

e

RE

QU

IRE

D

AS

CA

LIB

RA

TE

D

RE

QU

IRE

D

AS

CA

LIB

RA

TE

D

No.

In

put

Indi

cate

d O

utpu

t In

crea

sing

Inp

ut

Dec

reas

ing

Inpu

t N

umbe

r T

rip

Poi

nt

Res

et P

t. T

rip

Poi

nt

Res

et P

t.

In

dica

ted

Out

put

Indi

cate

d O

utpu

t

(not

e ri

sing

or

fall

ing)

(n

ote

risi

ng o

r fa

llin

g)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

C

ON

TR

OL

MO

DE

SE

TT

ING

S:

P:

I:

D:

7.

#

NO

TE

S:

Com

pon

ent

Cal

ibra

ted

an

d R

ead

y

for

Sta

rtu

p

By:

D

ate:

T

ag N

o.:

6974

82A

.GN

1

INS

TR

UM

EN

TA

TIO

N A

ND

CO

NT

RO

L

PW

\DE

N00

3\69

7482

F

OR

PR

OC

ES

S S

YS

TE

MS

F

EB

RU

AR

Y 8

, 201

9 40

90

01 S

UP

PL

EM

EN

T 7

- 2

©

CO

PY

RIG

HT

201

8 C

H2M

HIL

L

CH

2M H

ILL

INS

TR

UM

EN

T C

AL

IBR

AT

ION

SH

EE

T

Rev

.06.

05.9

2

EX

AM

PLE

- A

NA

LYZE

R/T

RA

NSM

ITTE

R

CO

MP

ON

EN

T

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

ER

P

RO

JEC

T

Cod

e: A

7 N

ame:

Lee

ds &

Nor

thru

p N

umbe

r: W

DC

3071

5.B

2 N

ame:

pH

Ele

men

t & A

naly

zer/

Tra

nsm

itte

r M

odel

: 124

29-3

-2-1

-7

Nam

e: U

OSA

AW

T P

HA

SE 3

Ser

ial #

: 115

5332

2

FU

NC

TIO

NS

RA

NG

E

VA

LU

E

UN

ITS

C

OM

PU

TIN

G F

UN

CT

ION

S?

N

CO

NT

RO

L?

N

Indi

cate

? Y

R

ecor

d? N

C

hart

:

D

escr

ibe:

A

ctio

n? d

irec

t / r

ever

se

Mod

es?

P /

I / D

Sca

le:

1-14

pH

uni

ts

S

WIT

CH

? N

U

nit R

ange

: T

rans

mit

/ In

put:

1-14

pH

uni

ts

D

iffe

rent

ial:

fixe

d/ad

just

able

C

onve

rt?

Y

Out

put:

4-20

m

A d

c

Res

et?

auto

mat

ic /

man

ual

AN

AL

OG

CA

LIB

RA

TIO

NS

D

ISC

RE

TE

CA

LIB

RA

TIO

NS

N

ote

R

EQ

UIR

ED

A

S C

AL

IBR

AT

ED

R

EQ

UIR

ED

A

S C

AL

IBR

AT

ED

N

o In

put

Indi

cate

d O

utpu

t In

crea

sing

Inp

ut

Dec

reas

ing

Inpu

t N

umbe

r T

rip

Poi

nt

Res

et

Pt.

Tri

p P

oint

R

eset

Pt.

In

dica

ted

Out

put

Indi

cate

d O

utpu

t

(not

e ri

sing

or

fall

ing)

(n

ote

risi

ng o

r fa

llin

g)

1.0

1.0

4.0

1.0

4.0

1.0

3.9

1.

N

.A.

N

.A.

2.3

2.3

5.6

2.2

5.5

2.3

5.6

2.

1.

7.

5 7.

5 12

.0

7.5

11.9

7.

5 12

.0

3.

12.7

12

.7

18.4

12

.7

18.3

12

.6

18.3

4.

14

.0

14.0

20

.0

14.0

20

.0

14.0

20

.0

5.

6.

C

ON

TR

OL

MO

DE

SE

TT

ING

S:

P: N

.A.

I:

D:

7.

#

NO

TE

S:

Com

pon

ent

Cal

ibra

ted

an

d R

ead

y fo

r

1.

Nee

d to

rec

heck

low

pH

cal

ibra

tion

sol

utio

ns.

Sta

rtu

p

By:

J.D

. Sew

ell

Dat

e: J

un-6

-92

Tag

No.

: AIT

-12-

6[pH

]

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FEBRUARY 8, 2019 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 8 - 1

CH2M HILL I&C VALVE ADJUSTMENT SHEET Rev.06.05.92

PARTS Project Name: Project Number:

Body Type: Mfr:

Size: Model:

Line Connection: Serial #:

Operator Type: Mfr:

Action: Model:

Travel: Serial #:

Positioner Input Signal: Mfr:

Action: Model:

Cam: Serial #:

Pilot Action: Mfr:

Solenoid Rating: Model:

Serial #:

I/P Input: Mfr:

Converter Output: Model:

Action: Serial #:

Position Settings: Mfr:

Switch Contacts: Model:

Serial #:

Power Type: Air Set Mfr:

Supply Potential: Model:

Serial #:

ADJUSTMENTS Initial Date VERIFICATION Initial Date

Air Set Valve Action

Positioner Installation

Position Switches Wire Connection

I/P Converter Tube Connection

Actual Speed

REMARKS: Valve Ready for Startup

By:

Date:

Tag No.:

697482A.GN1

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW\DEN003\697482 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 8 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

CH2M HILL I&C VALVE ADJUSTMENT SHEET Rev.06.05.92 EXAMPLE

PARTS Project Name: SFO SEWPCP Project Number: SFO10145.G2

Body Type: Vee-Ball Mfr: Fisher Controls

Size: 4-inch Model: 1049763-2

Line Connection: 159 # ANSI Flanges Serial #: 1003220

Operator Type: Pneumatic Diaphragm Mfr: Fisher Controls

Action: Linear - Modulated Model: 4060D

Travel: 3-inch Serial #: 2007330

Positioner Input Signal: 3-15 psi Mfr: Fisher Controls

Action: Direct - air to open Model: 20472T

Cam: Equal percentage Serial #: 102010

Pilot Action: Mfr:

Solenoid Rating: None Model:

Serial #:

I/P Input: 4-20 mA dc Mfr: Taylor

Converter Output: 3-15 psi Model: 10-T-576-3

Action: Direct Serial #: 1057-330

Position Settings: Closed / Open 5 deg, rising Mfr: National Switch

Switch Contacts: Close / Close Model: 1049-67-3

Serial #: 156 &157

Power Type: Pneumatic Air Set Mfr: Air Products

Supply Potential: 40 psi Model: 3210D

Serial #: 1107063

ADJUSTMENTS Initial Date VERIFICATION Initial Date

Air Set JDS Jun-06-92 Valve Action JDS Jun-03-92

Positioner JDS Jun-06-92 Installation JDS Jun-03-92

Position Switches JDS Jun-06-92 Wire Connection JDS Jun-04-92

I/P Converter JDS Jun-07-92 Tube Connection JDS Jun-04-92

Actual Speed JDS Jun-07-92

REMARKS: Valve was initially installed backwards. Valve Ready for Startup

Observed to be correctly installed May-25-92 By: J.D. Sewell

Date: Jun-07-92

Tag No.: FCV-10-2-1

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FEBRUARY 8, 2019 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 9 - 1

CH2M HILL PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST SHEET Rev.06.05.92

Project Name: Project No.:

Demonstration Test(s): For each functional requirement of the loop: (a) List and number the requirement. (b) Briefly describe the demonstration test. (c) Cite the results that will verify the required performance. (d) Provide space for signoff.

Forms/Sheets Verified By Date Loop Accepted By Owner

Loop Status Report By:

Instrument Calibration Sheet Date:

I&C Valve Calibration Sheet

Performance Acceptance Test By Date

Performed

Witnessed Loop No.:

697482A.GN1

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW\DEN003\697482 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 9 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

CH2M HILL PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST SHEET Rev.06.05.92 EXAMPLE

Project Name: SFO SEWPCP Plant Expansion Project No.: SFO12345.C1

Demonstration Test(s): For each functional requirement of the loop: (a) List and number the requirement. (b) Briefly describe the demonstration test. (c) Cite the results that will verify the required performance. (d) Provide space for signoff.

1. MEASURE EFFLUENT FLOW

1.a With no flow, water level over weir should be zero and

FIT indicator should read zero. Jun-20-92 BDG

2. FLOW INDICATION AND TRANSMISSION TO LP & CCS

With flow, water level and FIT indicator should be related by expression

Q (MGD) = 429*H** (2/3) (H = height in inches of water over weir).

Vary H and observe that following.

2.a Reading of FIT indicator. Jun-6-92 BDG

2.b Reading is transmitted to FI on LP-521-1. Jun-6-92 BDG

2.c Reading is transmitted and displayed to CCS. Jun-6-92 BDG

H(measured) 0 5 10 15

Q(computed) 0 47.96 135.7 251.7

Q(FIT indicator) 0 48.1 137 253

Q(LI on LP-521-1) 0 48.2 138 254

Q(display by CCS) 0 48.1 136.2 252.4

Forms/Sheets Verified By Date Loop Accepted By Owner

Loop Status Report J.D. Sewell May-18-92 By: J.D. Smith

Instrument Calibration Sheet J.D. Sewell May-18-92 Date: Jun-6-92

I&C Valve Calibration Sheet N.A.

Performance Acceptance Test

By Date

Performed J. Blow MPSDC Co.

Jun-6-92

Witnessed B.deGlanville Jun-6-92 Loop No.: 30-12

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 INSTRUMENTATION AND FEBRUARY 7, 2019 CONTROL COMPONENTS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 40 91 00 - 1

SECTION 40 91 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL COMPONENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section gives general requirements for instrumentation and control components.


A. Spare Parts:

Description Percent of Each

Type and Size Used No Less Than

Y51, PLC Power Supply 10 1 of each type

Y51, PLC Lithium Battery 10 1

Y51, PLC I/O Cards 10 1 of each type

B. Expendables: For following items, provide manufacturer’s recommended 2-year supply, unless otherwise noted.

1. Corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Article Mechanical Systems Components covers requirements of mechanical PIC components that are not specifically referenced by Section 40 90 01, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, including Supplements.

B. All other Part 2 articles cover components that are referenced by the supplemental Instrument, Component and Panel List and Surge Suppressor Products Table in Section 40 90 01, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, or by specific component numbers in other PIC subsections.

2.02 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMPONENTS

A. ON/OFF Valves:

1. Type: Ball valve. 2. Materials: Brass, stainless steel, PVC, or CPVC, as recommended by

manufacturer for designated service, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

697482A.GN1

INSTRUMENTATION AND PW\DEN003\697482 CONTROL COMPONENTS FEBRUARY 7, 2019 40 91 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Whitey; Series 41 through Series 43. b. Hoke; Flomite 7100 Series.

B. Test Tap:

1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Imperial-Eastman; quick-disconnect couplings No. 292-P and

caps No. 259-P. b. Crawford Fitting Co.; Swagelok quick-connects Series QC4 and

caps QC4-DC. c. Parker; CPI Series precision quick couplings.

C. Copper Tubing and Fittings:

1. Type K hard copper, ASTM B88, with commercially pure wrought copper solder joint fittings. Make joints with 95-5 wire solder, ASTM B32, Grade 95 TA. Do not use cored solder.

2. Alternatively, Type K, soft temper copper tubing, ASTM B88, with brass compression type fittings may be used where shown on Drawings.

3. Manufacturers: a. Parker-Hannifin. b. Swagelok tube fittings.

D. Plastic Tubing and Fittings:

1. Tubing: a. Polyethylene capable of withstanding 190 psig at 175 degrees F. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Dekoron; Type P. 2) Imperial Eastman; Poly-Flo black instrument tubing.

2. Fittings: a. Type: Brass compression. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Imperial Eastman; Poly-Flo tube fittings. 2) Dekoron; E-Z fittings.

E. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A312/A312M, Type 316, 0.065-inch wall, seamless, soft annealed, as shown on Drawings.

F. Stainless Steel Fittings:

1. Compression Type: a. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A182/A182M forged

bodies or ASTM A276 barstock bodies, flareless.

697482A.GN1


b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Parker Flodar; BA Series. 2) Swagelok tube fittings. 3) Parker CPI tube fittings; Parker A-LOK dual ferrule tube

fittings. 2. Socket Weld Type:

a. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A182/A182M forged bodies or ASTM A276 barstock bodies, 3,000 psi maximum working pressure, safety factor 4:1.

b. Manufacturers: 1) Cajon. 2) Swagelok. 3) Parker WELDLOK.

2.03 I&C COMPONENTS

A. A10 Combustible Gas Monitor

1. Provide a combustible gas element and transmitter, controller, and remote sampling system with the following minimum features: a. General:

1) Function: Continuously measure ambient air for the lower explosive limit (LEL) of combustible hydrocarbon-based gases.

2) Type: a) Sampling pump that facilitates remote sampling. b) Infrared principle of operation.

3) Parts: Sensor/transmitter, single channel controller, sampling pump, calibration kit, filters and ancillaries.

b. Performance: 1) Gas Measured: Combustibles (methane-type). 2) Range: 0 to 100 percent LEL. 3) Discrete Output Set Point: 10 percent LEL.

c. Sensor/Transmitter: 1) Broad band infrared principle of operation. 2) Sensor integral to transmitter. 3) Zero and span controls. 4) Display: 128 by 64 pixel screen. 5) Nonintrusive one-person field adjustments, using magnetic

controls. 6) Sensor Life: 5 years, typical. 7) Operating Temperature Range: Minus 30 degrees F to

130 degrees F. 8) Operating Humidity Range: 0 to 95 percent RH,

noncondensing. 9) Alphanumeric readout of gas concentration and gas type.

697482A.GN1


10) Housing: Cast aluminum. 11) Rack or stanchion mounted adjacent to sample draw system

panel. 12) Nominal Dimensions: 6W by 13H by 5D, inches, nominal. 13) Power Input: Loop powered from controller, 18V dc to

30V dc, three-wire. 14) Signal Interface: 4-20 mA dc output to controller. 15) Classification: Explosion-proof rating for use in areas rated

Class I, Division 1, Group B, Group C, and Group D. d. Pumped Sample Draw Accessory:

1) Sample inlet and outlet flame arrestors. 2) Operating Voltage: 120VAC. 3) Temperature Range: Minus 4 degrees F to 104 degrees F. 4) Coalescing Sample Filter Assembly: Required. 5) Low Flow Fault Alarm Relay: One SPDT, 5 amp at

250V ac, Form C contacts. 6) Explosion-proof enclosure.

e. SensAlert Controller: 1) Enclosure:

a) Fiberglass: Provide stainless rain hood for enclosure to protect sides, back, and top of enclosure and front display from direct sunlight.

b) UL listed. c) NEMA4X rated. d) Rack or stanchion mount.

2) Temperature: Minus 4 to 122 degrees F. 3) Humidity: 5 to 95 percent relative humidity. 4) LCD Display: Alphanumeric. 5) LED Display: 3 digit by 1.5-inch red LED. 6) Indicators: Power, Fail alarm, Low alarm, High alarm,

program and span. 7) Controls:

a) Pushbutton programming. b) Reset button for alarms and calibration mode.

8) Strobe: Red lens flashing strobe (Rated NEMA 4X). 9) Horn: 110 dB warbling horn. 10) Power: 120V AC, UPS back up power from CP-210. 11) Alarm Relays: SPDT, Rated 6 amps at 115V ac. (High

combustible gas alarm. f. Calibration Kit:

a) Calibration cylinder. b) Cylinder regulator. c) Teflon tubing. d) Carrying case.

g. Coalescing Filter: Required. h. SCADA: Provide audible and visual alarm at all SCADA

locations on high gas alarm.

697482A.GN1


i. Manufacturer and Product: Sensidyne Combustible Gas Monitoring System with the following major parts: 1) SensAlert Plus Explosion-Proof Infrared Transmitter, 0 to

100 percent LEL. 2) Pumped Sample Draw Assembly, explosion proof. 3) SensAlarm Controller Gas Monitor with horn and beacon

strobe. 4) Power Module.

B. F4 Flow Element and Transmitter, Electromagnetic:

1. General: a. Function: Measure, indicate, and transmit the flow of a conductive

process liquid in a full pipe. b. Type:

1) Electromagnetic flowmeter, with operation based on Faraday’s Law, utilizing the pulsed dc type coil excitation principle with high impedance electrodes.

2) Full bore meter with magnetic field traversing entire flow-tube cross section.

3) Unacceptable are insert magmeters or multiple single point probes inserted into a spool piece.

c. Parts: Flow element, transmitter, interconnecting cables, surge protection device, and mounting hardware. Other parts as noted.

2. Service: a. Stream Liquid:

1) Raw Sewage. 2) Pipe Material: Cement lined ductile iron pipe.

3. Performance: a. Flow Range: As noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of rate for all flows resulting

from pipe velocities of 2 to 30 feet per second. c. Turndown Ratio: Minimum of 10 to 1 when flow velocity at

minimum flow is at least 1 foot per second. 4. Element:

a. Meter Size: As noted. b. Meter Tube Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise

noted. c. Liner Material:

1) Polyurethane, unless otherwise noted. 2) For potable water service, must have appropriate approvals.

d. Operating Temperature: Minus 4 to 122 degrees F. e. Connection Type: 150-pound ANSI raised-face flanges

AWWA C207, Table 2 Class D; or wafer style depending on meter size, unless otherwise noted.

f. Flange Material: Carbon steel, unless otherwise noted.

697482A.GN1


g. Liner Protectors: Covers (or grounding rings) on each end to protect liner during shipment.

h. Electrode Type: Flush or bullet nose as recommended by the manufacturer for the noted stream fluid.

i. Electrode Material: Type 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy C, unless otherwise noted.

j. Grounding Ring: 1) Required, unless otherwise noted. 2) Quantity: Two, unless otherwise noted. 3) Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

k. Submergence: Continuous (up to 10 feet depth), NEMA 6P/IP68.

l. Hazardous Area Certification: 1) Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D: If noted. 2) Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, and FM approved:

If noted. 3) Class 1, Division 1, Groups C, D, and FM approved: If

noted. 5. Transmitter:

a. Power (Transmitter): 120VAC, 60 Hz, unless otherwise noted. b. Mounting: Remote mounted on stanchion adjacent to flow meter

vault. c. Display: Required, unless otherwise noted.

1) Digital LCD display, indicating flow rate and total. 2) Bi-directional Flow Display: Required, unless otherwise

noted. a) Forward and reverse flow rate. b) Forward, reverse and net totalization.

d. Parameter Adjustments: By keypad or non-intrusive means. e. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, minimum, unless otherwise noted. f. Empty Pipe Detection:

1) If noted. 2) Drives display and outputs to zero when empty pipe

detected. 6. Signal Interface (at Transmitter):

a. Analog Output: 1) Isolated 4 mA to 20 mA dc for load impedance from 0 ohm

to at least 500 ohms minimum for 24V dc supply. 2) Supports Superimposed Digital HART protocol.

b. Discrete Outputs: If noted. 1) Two discrete outputs, typical, rated for up to 30 volts,

typical. 2) Programmable as noted for the following typical

parameters: a) Totalizer pulse, high/low flow rates, percent of range,

empty pipe zero, fault conditions, forward/reverse, etc.

697482A.GN1


c. Discrete Input: If noted. 1) Contact closure, configured as noted for the following

typical parameters: reset totalizer, change range, hold output constant, drive output to zero, and low flow cutoff, etc.

d. Other: As noted. 7. Cables:

a. Types: As recommended by manufacturer. b. Lengths: As required to accommodate device locations. c. Splices in cable will not be acceptable.

8. Built-in Diagnostic System. 9. Factory Calibration:

a. Calibrated in an ISO 9001 and NIST certified factory. b. Factory flow calibration system must be certified by volume or

weight certified calibration devices. c. Factory flow calibration system shall be able to maintain

calibration flow rate for at least 5 minutes for repeatability point checks.

10. Manufacturers: a. Endress & Hauser, Inc. Flow Measuring System:

1) Promag W 400 series. 2) Or approved equal.

C. L007R Level Element and Transmitter, Radar, Type R:

1. General: a. Function: Continuous level measurement. b. Type: Radar, Noncontacting. c. Loop-powered. d. Parts: Element/integral transmitter and accessories as noted.

2. Service: a. Raw Sewage. b. Humidity: 0 to 100 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. c. Operating Temperature Range:

1) Ambient: Minus 196 degrees F to plus 176 degrees F. 2) At Flange (Inside Vessel):

a) Dependent on antenna type and O-ring material. b) For cone antenna and Buna-N seal, minus

40 degrees F to plus 230 degrees F. 3) Pressure Rating:

a) Dependent on antenna type and process temperature. b) At Minus 14.5 to 2320 psi.

3. Performance: a. Process Range: As noted. b. Frequency: 26 GHz. c. Accuracy at Reference Conditions: Plus or minus 2 mm. d. Resolution: 0.04 inch (1mm).

697482A.GN1


4. Element/Integral Transmitter: a. Features:

1) Dual port technology; noise reduction because of two ports each for transmitting and receiving.

2) Unit shall employ multi echo tracking algorithms for reliable level measurement.

b. Enclosure: 1) Rating: NEMA 4X/IP66/IP67 watertight, with weather

protection cover. 2) 316 stainless steel.

c. Display: Integral, unless otherwise noted. d. Antenna Type: Flush mounted, PTFE horn antenna, unless

otherwise noted. e. Antenna Material: Type 316L stainless steel, unless otherwise

noted. f. Process Connection:

1) 4-inch ANSI 150-pound flange, unless otherwise noted. 2) Material: Type 316L stainless steel.

g. Approvals: a) FM Intrinsic Safety and Nonincendive: Required. b) FM, Explosion-proof: Required. c) Others: As noted.

h. Element Beam Angle: 1) Antenna size dependent. 2) For 3-inch antennas, beam angles of 3 degrees.

5. Signal and Electrical Interface: 4 to 20 mA HART output.

6. Other: Transient Voltage Surge Suppression: Required. 7. Accessories:

a. Handheld Programmer: Endress + Hauser SFX350 Handheld Communicator, unless otherwise noted.

b. Software: FDT based software provided for remote method of configuration, set-up and storage of parameters via computer.

8. Manufacturer and Product: a. Endress + Hauser, Micropilot FMR62. b. Or approved equal.

D. L18 Level Switch, Non-Mercury:

1. General: a. Function: Actuate contact at preset liquid level. b. Type:

1) Direct-acting, Polyurethane housing float with enclosed, encapsulated switch and integral cable.

2) For use with intrinsically safe circuits. 2. Service (Liquid): Wastewater, unless otherwise noted.

697482A.GN1


3. Performance: a. Setpoint: As noted. b. Actuation Point: 1-inch above/below horizontal. c. Temperature: 32 degrees F (nonfreezing) to 170 degrees F.

4. Features: a. Entire Assembly: Watertight and impact-resistant. b. Float:

1) Material and Size: 3-3/8-inch diameter polypropylene float with polyurethane foam interior.

c. Cable: 1) Length as noted or as necessary per mounting requirements. 2) Chlorinated Poly Ethylene and suitable for continuous

service. d. Mounting:

1) Mounting Kit: Stainless steel mounting bracket or hook with float cord weight.

5. Signal Interface: a. Switch Type: Mercury type. b. Switch Contacts:

1) Rated 10 amps continuous at 120V ac. 2) Contact Type: Either NO or NC, SPDT, as required by

application or as noted. 6. Accessories: As noted. 7. Manufacturers: Conery 2900 B25C1 (NO) or 2901 B1SC1 (NC).

E. L42 Level Element/Transmitter, Submersible, Wastewater:

1. General: a. Function: Measure and transmit signal proportional to level. b. Type:

1) Totally submersible pressure sensor (loop powered). 2) Suitable for wastewater.

c. Parts: Sensor, interconnecting cable, other parts as noted. 2. Service:

a. Fluid: Wastewater, unless otherwise noted. 3. Performance:

a. Process Range: 1) As noted. 2) Provide fixed factory range such that noted process range is

between 40 percent and 80 percent of fixed factory range. b. Accuracy: 0.2 percent of full scale. c. Temperature, Operating: 14 degrees F to plus 158 degrees F.

4. Features: a. Sensor:

1) Type 316 stainless steel housing with aluminum oxide ceramic sensor, unless otherwise noted.

2) NEMA 6/IP 68 rating (submersible).

697482A.GN1


3) Dimensions, Nominal: a) Outer Diameter: 1.65 inches. b) Length: 5 inches.

4) Loop powered, 9-30V dc. b. Interconnecting Cable:

1) Length: As required. 2) Polyurethane sheathed, unless otherwise noted. 3) Kevlar strain relief cord. 4) Integral vent tube.

c. Sensor Termination Enclosure: Required, unless otherwise noted. 1) Enclosure: IP 66/67. 2) Houses such noted items as desiccant vent and filter. 3) 2-Inch Pipe Mounting Kit: If noted.

d. Accessories: 1) Aneroid Bellows: If noted.

a) Bellows shall be suitable for application. 2) Desiccant Module: Required, unless otherwise noted. 3) Cable Hanger, Kellems Type Grip: Required, unless

otherwise noted. 4) Lightning Protection: External (protects 4 mA to 20 mA dc

output). 5) Anchor Assembly: If noted.

a) Marine anchor, clamps, Type 316 stainless steel cable or chain, length as required, nominally 3 feet longer than interconnecting cable.

5. Signal Interface: 4 mA to 20 mA dc output, for load impedance of 0 ohm to 750 ohms, minimum for 24V dc supply without load adjustment.

6. Certification(s): a. Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D. b. Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G. c. Class III, Division 1.

7. Manufacturers and Products: a. Endress & Hauser Waterpilot FMX21. b. Or approved equal.

F. M43 Intrusion Switch:

1. General: a. Function: Monitor intrusion of entry points such as doors,

overhead doors, and chain link gates. b. Type:

1) Magnetic. 2) Large.

c. Parts: Magnet, switch, and cabling.

697482A.GN1


2. Features: a. Type: Large magnet, surface-mount suitable for door, unless

otherwise noted. b. Cable: Armored, 36 inches long. c. Mounting Kits:

1) For Overhead Doors: If noted. 2) For Chain Link Fence: If noted.

d. Magnet Length: 2.5 inches, nominal. e. Magnet and Switch Dimensions: Each, 2.6 long by 0.875 wide by

0.600 thick, nominal inches. f. Housing: Weather-resistant aluminum. g. Two holes on switch and magnet for fasteners. h. Current Sensor Assembly: If noted.

1) Suited for use in 24V ac/dc circuits to protect the 10-watt rated standard switch.

2) Includes shunt-to-ground circuit that shunts voltage above 60V ac/dc to ground.

3) Quick blow fuse blows at 0.5 amp. i. Additional Features: If and as noted.

3. Signal Interface: a. Switch: NO (closed loop), unless otherwise noted. b. Contact Rating: 70VA ac/50 watts dc, unless otherwise noted. c. Maximum Voltage: 150V ac/200V dc. d. Maximum Switching Current: 0.7-amp ac/1.0-amp dc. e. Maximum Carry Current: 2.5 amps.

4. Manufacturer and Product: a. George Risk Industries; Intrusion Switch, Model 4400A with

Model 2210. b. Or approved equal.

G. M26 Handswitch, Light, and Pushbuttons, Corrosion-Resistant, Round:

1. General: a. Function: Select, initiate, and display discrete control functions. b. Type: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant, industrial.

2. General Features: a. Mounting: 30.5 mm single round hole. Panel thickness 1/16 inch

to 1/4 inch. b. Legend Plate: Standard size, square style laminate with white field

and black markings, unless otherwise noted. Markings as shown, or as implied by P&IDs.

c. Configuration: Light, pushbutton, or switch as noted or shown. 3. Light Features:

a. Lights: Universal LED lamps for operation from 12 to 120V ac/dc, unless otherwise noted.

b. Lens Color: Color as specified, noted, or shown.

697482A.GN1


c. Push-to-test, unless otherwise noted. d. Additional: As noted.

4. Pushbutton Features: a. Operator: Single pushbutton, flush, unless otherwise noted. b. Color: Black, unless otherwise noted. c. Boot: None, unless otherwise noted. d. Contact Arrangement: As required or shown. e. Finger safe guard. f. Additional: As noted.

5. Selector Switch Features: a. Operator: Knob, unless otherwise noted. b. Color: Black, unless otherwise noted. c. Boot: None, unless otherwise noted. d. Positions: As required or shown. e. Return: Manual, unless otherwise noted. f. Contact Arrangement: As required or shown. g. Additional: As noted.

6. Signal Interface: a. Contact Block:

1) Type: Standard, unless otherwise noted. 2) Materials: Silver amalgam, unless otherwise noted. 3) Rating: 10 amps continuous at 120V ac, unless otherwise

noted. 4) Sequence: Break-before-make, unless otherwise noted or

shown. 5) Arrangement: Normally open or normally closed as shown,

or to perform the functions noted. 7. NEMA Rating: NEMA 4, watertight, dust-tight, and NEMA 4X,

corrosion-resistant. 8. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Allen-Bradley; Bulletin 800H. b. Square D Co.; Class 9001, Type SK. c. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer, Type E34.

H. M30 Horn, Indoor/Outdoor:

1. General: a. Function: Audible alarm. Produces sound by electro-mechanical

vibration of a diaphragm. 2. Performance:

a. Temperature, Operating: Minus 65 degrees F to 150 degrees F. b. Sound Output Level: 100 dB nominal at 10 feet (110 dB at

1 meter). 3. Features:

a. Dimensions: 4-3/8 inches in height and width, and 2.5 inches in depth, for horn and enclosure.

b. Body: Die-cast zinc.

697482A.GN1


c. Diaphragm: Stainless steel. d. Projector: None, unless otherwise noted. e. Listings: UL, cUL listed, FM, CSA approved.

4. Enclosure: a. Type: Cast aluminum with neoprene-gasketed NEMA 4X

housing. b. Mounting: Surface mount.

5. Power: 120V ac, 50/60-Hz, unless otherwise noted. 6. Manufacturer: Federal Signal Corp.; Model 350WB.

I. P4 Pressure Gauge:

1. General: a. Function: Local pressure indication. b. Type: Bourdon tube element.

2. Performance: a. Scale Range: As noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.50 percent of full scale.

3. Features: a. Dial: 4-1/2-inch diameter. b. Pointer Vibration Reduction: Required, unless otherwise noted.

Use the following method. 1) Liquid filled gauge front, unless otherwise noted. Glycerine

fill, unless otherwise noted. c. Case Material: Black thermoplastic, unless otherwise noted. d. Materials of Wetted Parts (including element, socket/process

connection, throttling device (if specified) and secondary components): Stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

e. Pointer: Adjustable by removing ring and window. f. Window: Glass or acrylic, unless otherwise noted. g. Threaded reinforced polypropylene front ring. h. Case Type: Solid front with blow-out back.

4. Process Connection: a. Mounting: Lower stem, unless otherwise noted. b. Size: 1/2-inch MNPT, unless otherwise noted.

5. Accessories: a. Throttling Device: Required, unless otherwise noted.

1) Type suitable for the intended service. 2) Install in gauge socket bore.

6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Ashcroft; Duragauge Model 1259/Model, 1279/Model,

1279 PLUS! b. Ametek U.S. Gauge; Solfrunt Model 19XX/1981 Advantatge. c. WIKA, Type 2XX.34.

697482A.GN1


J. P15 Pressure Seal, Annular:

1. General: a. Function:

1) Sense pressure in a process line and transfer to pressure monitoring device.

2) Protect attached pressure monitoring device from sludge or slurry.

b. Type: Annular fluid-filled device that senses pressure through flexible sleeve around full pipe circumference.

2. Performance: a. Operating Conditions: Suitable for line pressures up to pipe flange

rating. 3. Features:

a. Construction: 1) In-line, 8 Inches and Smaller: Full-faced thru-bolted with

outside diameter same as mating flanges, unless otherwise noted.

2) In-line, 10 Inches and Larger: Wafer style. 3) Offline: Threaded, unless otherwise noted.

b. Materials: 1) Body: Carbon steel, unless otherwise noted. 2) Flanges (where applicable): Carbon steel, unless otherwise

noted. 3) Flexible Sleeve: Buna-N, unless otherwise noted. 4) Fill Fluid: Ethylene glycol/water or propylene glycol, unless

otherwise noted. c. Factory Filled System:

1) Filled and assembled with pressure monitoring device(s). 2) Coordinate attached pressure monitoring device(s) with

system integrator. Seal vendor’s standard pressure monitoring device(s) only acceptable if it meets specification of the related pressure monitoring device.

4. Process Connections: a. Mounting: In-line or offline, as noted or shown. b. Pipe Size:

1) In-line: As noted or shown. 2) Offline: 2 inches, unless otherwise noted.

c. Connections: 1) In-line, Full-faced through-bolted: ASME B16.5, 150-pound

flanges. 2) In-line, Wafer style: Compatible with Classes 150/300

flange drilling. 3) Offline: Female NPT Threaded, unless otherwise noted.

697482A.GN1


5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Red Valve Company; Series 40, Series 42/742, Series 48. b. Dover/OPW Engineered Systems; Iso-Ring.

K. S111 Analog Signal Isolator:

1. General: a. Function: Provide electric isolation of an analog signal. b. Type: DIN rail compatible. c. Parts: Isolator, power terminal block, DIN rail connector.

2. Operating Temperature: Minus 20 to 65 degrees C. 3. Performance:

a. Maximum Transmission Error: Less than 0.1 percent of final value.

b. Thermal Drift: less than 0.002 percent / degree K. c. Electrical Isolation:

1) Three way. 2) Basic insulation according to EN 61010.

d. Response Time: For a step input, output goes from 10 to 90 percent of output span in 3.2 mS, typical.

4. Signal Interface: a. Input: 4 to 20 mA dc. b. Output: 4 mA to 20 mA dc. c. Output Load: less than 500 ohms at 20 mA.

5. Enclosure: a. Dimensions: 93H by 6W by 103D, mm, nominal. b. Mounting: DIN Rail. c. Color: Green. d. Housing Material: PBT.

6. Power: a. 24V dc power supply nominal. b. 19.2 – 30V dc power supply range.

7. Accessories: a. DIN Rail connector:

1) One minimum; one for every two isolators in the same panel.

b. Power Terminal Block: 1) Distributes power to the DIN rail connector. 2) One per panel; can power up to 80 isolators in one panel.

8. Manufacturer and Product: a. Phoenix Contact: Signal Conditioner – MINI MCR-SL-I-I, Part

2864406 with 1) DIN Rail Connector Part 2869728. 2) Power Terminal Block – MINI MCR-SL-PTB-FM, Part

2902958.

697482A.GN1


L. S724 Indicator, NEMA 4X, Sunlight Readable, Panel Mount.

1. General: a. Function: Display the value of an analog signal. b. Type: Digital, panel mount, dual line, sunlight readable. c. Parts: Transmitter and accessories.

2. Environmental: a. Operating Temperature: Minus 40 to 65 degrees C. b. Humidity: 0 to 90 percent non-condensing.

3. Performance: a. Input Range: 4-20 mA dc. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.03 percent of span; plus or minus

1 count. 4. Features:

a. Display: 1) 6 digits, 0.60 inches high, dual line. 2) LED, Sunbright.

b. Custom engineering units on display. 1) Units match scale range of associated transmitter.

c. Non-Volatile Memory – no battery needed. d. Password protected. e. Programmable via four front panel buttons. f. Integral 24 dc power supply.

5. Power: Universal 85-265V ac or 12/24V dc input power. 6. Signal Interface:

a. Isolated analog retransmission output. b. Relays:

1) Two Form C (SPDT). 2) 3 amps at 30V dc and 125/250V ac resistive load.

c. Digital Communications: Modbus RTU. 7. Enclosure:

a. Type: NEMA 4X. b. Panel Mount. c. Dimensions: 4.5W by 2.5H by 5.5 D inches, nominal.

8. Accessories: Mounting brackets. 9. Manufacturer and Product:

a. Precision Digital ProVu PD6000-7H2. b. Or approved equal.

M. Y51 PLC Hardware:

1. General Requirements: Provide PLC hardware based on the following minimum requirements. a. PLC Processors shall be located in the first slot of the first

I/O rack, except for remote I/O racks. b. Plant SCADA and OIT communication modules shall be located

in the second slot of the first I/O rack, except for remote I/O racks.

697482A.GN1


c. Design the system to accommodate a minimum of two additional I/O modules per chassis.

d. Furnish card slot fillers for vacant slots for chassis based hardware.

e. Provide a minimum of 25 percent spare I/O points of each type. f. For signals originating in hazardous areas, provide intrinsic safety

relays and barriers in the PLC panels. g. Provide individual indicating fuse blocks for each analog signal. h. Provide individual fuse blocks for each discrete output signal. i. Provide individual fuse blocks for each digital input card. j. All digital and analog signals, including spare signal points, shall

be wired to individual terminal blocks for terminating field connections.

2. Emerson ControlWave Micro PLC/RTU System: a. Quantity: Package System Supplied b. Contractor to verify model numbers in conformance with

MAWSS latest PLC standards and compatibility of existing PLC/RTUs at site.

c. System Controller: 1) Power: 120V ac. 2) Manufacturer and Product: Emerson ControlWave Micro

System Controller (PSMM) Part No. 396657-01-1. d. CPU/Memory Module:

1) Manufacturer and Product: Emerson ControlWave Micro Part No. 396879-11-0S.

e. Expansion Module (if required): 1) Emerson ControlWave Micro Part No. 396879-06-4.

f. I/O Modules: 1) Discrete Input Modules:

a) 8 points. b) 24V dc input modules. c) Separate isolation/interposing relays shall be provided

for sensing of circuits other than 120V ac. d) Quantity: As determined by I/O count and spare

requirements listed under paragraph General Requirements. One minimum per panel.

e) Manufacturer and Product: Emerson ControlWave Micro Part No. 395722-02-8.

2) Discrete Input Modules: a) 8 points. b) 120V ac input modules. c) Quantity: As determined by I/O count and spare


d) Manufacturer and Product: Emerson ControlWave Micro Part No. 395722-04-2.

697482A.GN1


3) Discrete Output Module: a) 8 individually isolated points. b) 24V dc output modules, unless otherwise noted. c) Normally open contacts, 1.5 amps per point. d) Points per Common: One, individually isolated. e) Separate isolation/interposing relays shall be provided

for control signals that require higher currents. f) Quantity: As determined by I/O count and spare


g) Manufacturer and Product: Emerson ControlWave Micro Part No. 395622-00-0.

4) Analog Input Module: a) 8 points. b) Input Current Type: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 5V dc,

individually selectable. c) Quantity: As determined by I/O count and spare


d) Separate surge suppressors shall be provided for analog signals connected to equipment located outdoors.


5) Analog Output Module: a) 4 points. b) Output: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 5V dc, individually

selectable. c) Quantity: As determined by I/O count and spare


d) Separate surge suppressors shall be provided for analog signals connected to equipment located outdoors.


g. Interconnecting Cable and Accessories: 1) Ethernet Cable:

a) UTP Category 6 cable with RJ45 end connectors. b) Required for internal PLC control panel connections. c) Separate surge suppressors shall be provided for

Ethernet signals connected to equipment located outdoors.

h. Other Hardware and Appurtenances: As required for a complete and functional system.

697482A.GN1


N. Y271 Network Switch, Fiber, Ring Member:

1. General: a. Function: Ethernet switch that is a ring member (node) on a

copper and looped fiber Ethernet network. b. Type: Industrial grade; can accommodate either copper or fiber

ports, or both. c. Parts: Ethernet switch and ports.

2. Service: a. Operating Temperature Range: minus 40 to 70 degrees C. b. Humidity: 10 – 95 percent, non-condensing.

3. Performance: a. Shock: 15g at 11 ms. b. Vibration: 1g, 10-500-Hz, triaxial. c. Seismic: 20g, 9-150-Hz, 10 cycles. d. Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF): Greater than 55 years.

4. Features a. Switch:

1) Full IEEE 802.3 compliance. 2) Switching Method: Store and forward. 3) DIN-Rail Mount. 4) Auto sensing speed and flow control. 5) Auto cable sensing. 6) Up to 2.6 Gb/s throughput. 7) Power Requirements: 9.6-32V dc.

5. Enclosure: a. Dimensions: 6H by 1.4W by 5D inches, nominal. b. DIN-Rail mount.

6. Signal Interface: a. 10/100 Base TX: 8 RJ-45 copper ports, unless otherwise noted. b. 100 Base FX:

1) 2 total, unless otherwise noted. 2) ST fiber connectors: As noted.

7. Manufacturers and Products: a. Hirschmann; SPIDER II 8TX/2FX-ST Industrial Ethernet Switch. b. Or approved equal.

O. Y410 Operator Interface Unit (OIU), Type M:

1. General: a. Function: Provides graphical interface with PLC or RTU. b. Type: Color touchscreen.

2. Environmental: a. Operating Temperature: 32 to 122 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 – 90 percent (non-condensing).

3. Power: a. Input: 24Vdc, 400mA.

697482A.GN1


4. Features: a. Touchscreen

1) Type: 4-wire analog resistive. 2) Resolution: Continuous. 3) Light transmission: above 80 percent. 4) Lifespan: 1 million activations, minimum.

b. Display: 1) Type: 10.0-inch TFT color. 2) Size: 10-inch diagonal. 3) Resolution: 800 by 480. 4) Brightness (cd/m squared): 300. 5) Contrast ratio: 500:1. 6) Backlight: LED. 7) Backlight longevity: 30,000 hrs.

c. Hardware: 1) CPU Type: 32-bit RISC CPU, 600MHz. 2) Memory: 128MB Flash, 128MB RAM.

d. Signal Interface: 1) Ethernet port: 10/100Base-T (RJ45). 2) Serial ports:

a) Com 1: RS-232/RS-485, 2 or 4 wire. b) Com 3: RS-485, 2 wire.

3) USB port: 1 host 2.0 port. 5. Dimensions, Nominal: 8H by 11W by 2D inches. 6. Manufacturers and Products: Maple Systems, HMI5100L, 10-inch Slim

Graphic HMI.

P. Y725 Uninterruptible Power Supply, Type A:

1. General: a. Function: Provides back-up power and power regulation for

panels and network components. b. Environment: Indoors only. c. Alarms: No hardwired alarm signal interface. d. Parts: UPS and accessories.

2. Environmental: a. Operating Temperature: 32 to 104 degrees F.

3. Performance: a. Required Capacity for Specific Application: Furnish model that

provides at least 15 percent more than connected panel or device load

b. Full Load Capacities: 1) Pro 700: 700 VA, 420 watts. 2) Pro 1000: 1000 VA, 600 watts. 3) Pro 1300: 1300 VA, 780 watts. 4) Pro 1500: 1500 VA, 865 watts.

697482A.GN1


c. Backup Runtime: 1) Model and Load Dependent:

a) Pro 700: 5 minutes at 400 watts. b) Pro 1000: 4 minutes at 600 watts. c) Pro 1300: 6 minutes at 700 watts. d) Pro 1500: 4 minutes at 800 watts.

d. Transfer Time: 4 ms, typical. Blackout response time. 4. Power:

a. Input: 120V ac, 50/60-Hz. b. Output:

1) On utility: 120V ac, 50/60-Hz (auto sensing). 2) On battery: 115V ac, 50/60-Hz (auto sensing.

c. Output Connections: Model dependent; minimum of six total NEMA5-15R outlets; three battery and surge; three surge only.

5. Features: a. LCD Display. b. Automatic voltage regulation. c. Surge protection:

1) All AC outlets. 2) Data lines.

d. Power chute software. e. Push button circuit breaker. f. Automatic diagnostic testing. g. Battery type: Sealed lead-acid, maintenance free. h. Alarms:

1) Visual (LCD display) and audible alarms. 2) No hardwired output alarm signal.

6. Dimensions: Ranging from Pro 700 (8H by 4W by 12D inches nominal) to Pro 1500VA (12H by 4W by 15D inches nominal).

7. Accessories: 6-foot input cord and plug. 8. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Schneider APC Back-UPS Pro Model 1500VA. b. Phoenix Contact.

Q. Y607 Programming Laptop with RTU Programming Software:

1. General: a. Note: Component specified herein is based on the state of the art

during design. Contractor shall provide the latest state of the art hardware available during the submittal process, and shall upgrade features as necessary. The following specifications outline minimum requirements for each computer.

b. Function: Supports access to LAN at various locations; communicates with and provides user interface for troubleshooting and programming PACs and PLCs.

697482A.GN1


2. Hardware: a. CPU: Intel Core i5 (minimum). b. Memory: 8GB DRAM (minimum). c. Hard Disk: 1000GB5 SATA hard drive (minimum). d. Optical Drive: DVD+/‐RW. e. Display: 15.6-inch FHD (1920 x 1080 resolution) Wide View,

Anti-Glare. f. Sound: Integrated speakers. g. Input Device: US keyboard, touchpad. h. Communications:

1) Gigabit Ethernet controller (RJ-45). 2) Wireless: Dell Wireless™ 1504 802.11g/n Single Band

Wi-Fi Half Mini-card. 3) Bluetooth: Dell Wireless™ 380 Bluetooth 4.0 LE Module.

i. Ports: 1) HDMI connector, Type A. 2) DisplayPort. 3) VGA D-sub connector, 15-pin. 4) Two USB 3.0 and three USB 2.0 connectors. 5) One USB/eSATA combo port. 6) Headphones/speaker connector, Mini-jack stereo. 7) Microphone/line in connector, Mini-jack stereo. 8) 10‐in‐1 media card reader.

3. Software: a. Windows 7 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate compatible with

ControlWave Micro programming software. b. Microsoft Office Professional. c. Programming Software: ControlWave Designer. d. Norton anti-virus software, latest version. e. Include DVDs/CDs for all software supplied including Dell

resource DVD(s). 4. Support Agreement:

a. Onsite Hardware Support: 7-day/24 hour, 4-hour response, 3 years.

5. Accessories: a. Cable lock.

6. External Cables: a. USB cable compatible with USB ports on PLC processors. b. RJ45 Ethernet cord.

7. Manufacturer and Model: a. DELL Precision M4700 or latest model. b. Equivalent Toshiba product.

8. Provide model current at time of purchase with equal or superior function and performance.

697482A.GN1


PART 2 PRODUCT (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 SUBSYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 40 95 80 – 1

SECTION 40 95 80 FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): X3T9.5 2. Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 802.3,

Telecommunication and Information Exchange Between Systems. 3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO). 4. National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA); Electronics Industry

Association (EIA): a. 492, Specifications for Optical Waveguide Fibers. b. 568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard. c. 607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements

for Telecommunications.

1.02 ABBREVIATIONS

A. ATM asynchronous transfer mode

B. AUI attachment unit interface

C. dB decibel

D. FOCS Fiber Optic Communication Subsystem

E. LAN local area network

F. MHz megahertz

G. micro x 10-6

H. Mbps megabits per second

I. N newton

J. n, nano x 10-9

K. nm nano meter

L. OTDR optical time-domain reflectometer

697482A.GN1

FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION PW\DEN003\697482 SUBSYSTEM FEBRUARY 7, 2019 40 95 80 – 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

M. PICS Process Instrumentation and Control System

N. m micrometer

O. UPS uninterruptible power supply

P. V ac volts alternating current


A. This section covers requirements for Fiber Optic Communication Subsystem (FOCS) and is in addition to Section 40 90 01, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.

B. Function of FOCS is to transmit digital data between network nodes. Requirements listed identify minimum acceptable system performance.

C. Provide a FOCS from CP-210 (RTU-210) in the new electrical building to CP-110 (RTU-4) in the existing electrical building.

D. Provide a FOCS based on referenced standards for use in the following local area networks: Ethernet.

E. FOCS shall include: Fiber optic cable and ancillaries for all fiber optic segments shown on the P&ID/Block Diagram.

F. Splicing will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.

G. The FOCS supplier shall furnish multi-mode cable, as shown on the Drawings.

H. Prior to procuring connectors, the FOCS supplier shall confirm with the Owner that ST connectors are their preference.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Site Layout Diagram Showing: a. Access holes, with identification. b. Abovegrade cable routings, with pole and cable identification. c. Belowgrade conduit routings between access holes and buildings,

with conduit counts and identification. d. Cable routings to patch panels, fiber centers, or network nodes,

with cable and node identification.

697482A.GN1


2. Cable Schedule Showing: a. Cable identification. b. Fiber counts for each cable and identification of used fiber pairs. c. Cable length and attenuation, with two connector pairs and no

planned number of splices, based on TIA/EIA 568, Annex H. 3. Component Data:

a. Manufacturer and model number. b. General data and description. c. Engineering specifications and data sheet. d. Scaled drawings and mounting arrangements.

4. Light Budget Calculations: For each link, submit light budget calculations demonstrating each link has sufficient excess light strength. Calculations shall include: a. Source light strength. b. Receiver sensitivity. c. Light losses including connections and lineal cable losses. d. Reserve light capacity.

B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s statement that installer is certified to perform installation Work.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.

3. Manufacturer's suggested installation practice. 4. Testing related submittals. 5. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.


A. Optical Fiber Cable and Cable Splice Centers:

1. Outside, Underground/Submerged: Minus 20 to 40 degrees C. 2. Outside, Overhead: Minus 40 to 80 degrees C. 3. Outside, Aboveground in Conduit: Minus 40 to 80 degrees C. 4. Inside: 0 to 40 degrees C.

B. Equipment:

1. Outside, Aboveground: Minus 40 to 80 degrees C. 2. Control Rooms, Equipment Rooms and Telecommunications Closets:

30 to 55 percent relative humidity, 18 to 24 degrees C. 3. Other Interior Areas: 0 to 100 percent relative humidity, 5 to

35 degrees C.

697482A.GN1


1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts, special tools, and materials:

Item Quantity Jumpers of each length needed One complete set per unit

Special maintenance tools One complete set

B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Fiber Optic Cable, Multimode:

1. Fiber Characteristics: Multimode Indoor/Outdoor: a. Comply with TIA/EIA 568 and ANSI X3T9.5. b. 50/125 m graded-index glass. c. Tight-Buffered, 900 m buffer. d. Maximum Attenuation:

1) 850 nm: 2.8 dB/km. 2) 1,300 nm: 1.0 dB/km.

e. Minimum Bandwidth: 1) Effective Modal Bandwidth: 5350 MHz-km.

f. Color coded buffer as per TIA/EIA 598. g. Minimum Bend Radius, Buffered Fiber: 1 inch.

2. Cable: a. Fiber Count:

1) Multimode: Twelve fibers per cable, minimum. b. All Dielectric Construction: No electrically conductive

components in fiber optic cable are allowed. c. Gel-Free: Fibers tight-buffered, not in gel-filled loose-tube. d. Style: Break-out. e. Strength Member:

1) Nonconductive; integral part of cable; supports stress of installation and load during use.

2) Fiberglass epoxy rod, aramid fiber, kevlar. 3) Minimum Tensile Strength: 600 pounds.

f. Protective Covering: Continuous and free from holes, splices, blisters, and other imperfections.

g. Minimum Bend Radius: 1) Short-Term under Tension: 20 times cable diameter. 2) Long-Term without Tension: 15 times cable diameter.

697482A.GN1


h. Identification: 1) Identify with tags shown and in accordance with

Section 40 90 01, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.

2) Use waterproof tags and identifications. i. Special Features:

1) Indoor Use: Must be flame-retarded. 2) Outdoor Use:

a) UV Resistant. b) Suitable for installation in buried conduit. c) Suitable for aerial lashing: If noted. d) Suitable for Direct Buried (no conduit): If noted. e) Armored: If noted.

3) Indoor Use: Plenum rating not required for indoor use, if fiber is installed in either a tray or riser. Rating must be either tray or riser, as applicable.

j. Manufacturer and Model: Corning FREEDM® Cables, Single Jacket.

B. Ethernet Fiber-to-Copper Transceivers:

1. Function: Convert fiber optic Ethernet signal (10/100 Mbit/s) to copper signal.

2. Features: a. Support fiber optic cable type specified. b. Fiber Optic Connectors: ST style unless otherwise noted. c. Copper Connection: One (1) 10/100Base RJ45 port. d. Power: 24VDC, unless otherwise noted. e. DIN Rail mounted with approximate dimensions of 1.1 W X 4.5

H X 3.2 D inches. f. Operating Temperature range: 0 to 60 degrees C.

3. Manufacturer: a. Hirschmann; b. Phoenix Contact; c. Moxa.

C. Fiber Centers (Patch Panels):

1. Function: Provides a secure place to terminate fiber optic cables. 2. Features:

a. Compartments: Two; one for fiber optic cable, one for jumpers to individual equipment.

b. Coil Former: Former to wind slack cable around, provides controlled long-radius bends.

c. Connectors: Minimum 12 ST connectors, as applicable, for entry and exit.

697482A.GN1


d. Size: Maximum 18 inches by 12 inches by 4 inches. e. Construction: 1.5 millimeter steel with noncorrosive finish. f. Mountings: Suitable for permanent attachment as shown, or

provide separate mountings that do not obscure covers and doors. g. Doors: Separate doors for cable and jumper terminations and

lockable. 3. Manufacturer and Product(s): Corning WIC.

D. Connectors:

1. General: a. Design is based upon ST type connectors. b. Prior to procuring connectors, confirm that this is the Owner’s

preference. 2. Features:

a. In accordance with requirements of TIA/EIA 568, Section 12.4.3 or Annex F.

b. Pull Strength: 0.2 N minimum. c. Durability: Sustain minimum 500 mating cycles without violating

other requirements. 1) Ferrules: Free-floating low loss ceramic. 2) Polarizing key on duplex connector systems.

3. Quantity: Connectorize fibers, minimum per cable: a. Single-mode: Six.

4. Attenuation: a. In accordance with requirements of TIA/EIA 568, Section 12.4.4. b. Maximum of 0.75 dB per connector pair.

5. Manufacturer: AMP.

E. Jumper Cables:

1. In accordance with requirements of TIA/EIA 568, Section 12.5. 2. Function: To connect from fiber centers to network nodes, such as

computer workstations. 3. Fiber Characteristics: In accordance with requirements for fiber optic

cable. 4. Cable Configuration:

a. Individual tight-buffer thermoplastic, multimode or single-mode fibers, to match fibers being jumpered on.

b. Protected with kevlar strength members and enclosed in thermoplastic jacket.

5. Length: Standard, to meet requirements shown, plus minimum 3 meters at workstations.

6. Connectors: a. As required by Article Connectors. b. On-Axial Pull Strength: 33 N. c. Normal-to-Axial Pull Strength: 22 N.

697482A.GN1


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Conduits are provided under Division 26, Electrical.

1. Ensure that installed conduit system conforms with fiber optic system requirements, including: a. Conduits: Size and number. b. Access Holes, Handholes, and Pull Boxes: Location and size, to

ensure cables can be installed without exceeding manufacturer's limitations.

c. Outlet Boxes: Size to coordinate with outlet cover plates for adequate volume and bend radius.

2. Spare Conduits (if shown): No cables shall be pulled into spare conduits.

3. Expansion Plugs: Seal conduits to stop ingress of water and grit with fabricated expansion plugs.

B. Fiber Optic Cable:

1. Install cables in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 2. Install cable directly from shipping reels. Ensure that cable is not:

a. Dented, nicked, or kinked. b. Subjected to pull stress greater, or bend radius less, than

manufacturer's specification. c. Subjected to treatment that may damage fiber strands during

installation. 3. Cables per Conduit: One cable maximum, unless otherwise shown. 4. If calculation indicates that cable will attenuate signals more than 8 dB,

reroute may be allowed, if approved by Engineer. 5. Identification: Identify cable on both ends and in access holes and pull

points it goes through. 6. Sealing: Seal cables into conduits to stop ingress of water and grit with

fabricated expansion plugs. 7. Access Holes:

a. Provide supports for cables in access and handholes as shown. b. While maintaining minimum bend radius, lace cables neatly to

supports to keep them out of way of personnel.

C. Fiber Centers:

1. Install securely in field panels or racks as shown. 2. Minimum, one per facility having one or more network nodes.

697482A.GN1


D. Cable Terminations:

1. Terminate cables in accordance with TIA/EIA 568. 2. Slack:

a. Fiber Centers, Hubs, and Switches: Minimum, 3 meter slack fiber at each end, coiled neatly in cable management equipment.

3. Connectors: a. Terminate all spare fibers in each cable to specified connectors. b. Connect into fiber management system.

E. Ethernet Fiber-to-Copper Transceivers:

1. Install transceivers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Location: Install transceivers securely in field panels or racks, close to

network nodes and fiber centers. 3. Power: Energize each transceiver from its field panel’s UPS or rack’s

UPS, if applicable. 4. Connections:

a. Connect transceiver to fiber optics and network node. b. Lace fiber optics neatly in place, routed through wireways.


A. Test components of installation in accordance with standards and Specifications.

B. Provide equipment, instrumentation, supplies and skilled staff necessary to perform testing.

C. Advise Engineer at least 72 hours in advance of each test. Engineer will have option to witness and participate actively in tests.

D. Document test results of each cable to confirm that at least specified number of fibers meet standards, in accordance with Supplement titled As-Built Fiber Optic Cable Installation.

E. For each conduit, complete As-Built Conduit Installation form included as Supplement to this section.

F. Document results of repeater and transceiver tests.

G. For each installed segment, record its reel number.

697482A.GN1



A. In accordance with Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

B. General:

1. Provide equipment, instrumentation, supplies, and skilled staff necessary to perform testing.

2. Outlets, cables, patch panels, and associated components shall be fully assembled and labeled prior to field testing.

3. Testing performed on incomplete systems shall be redone on completion of the Work.

4. Document Test Results: Confirm each cable has at least specified number of fibers that meet standards, in accordance with As-Built Fiber Optic Cable Installation form included as Supplement to this section.

5. Confirm quantities and sizes of conduit, in accordance with As-Built Conduit/Innerduct Installation form included as Supplement to this section.

C. Test Equipment:

1. Provide serial number of each test instrument. 2. Provide copy of current calibration certificate for each instrument that is

used to test both on- and off- reel testing. 3. Field test instruments shall have latest software and firmware installed. 4. Optical Fiber Cable Testers:

a. Field test instrument shall be within calibration period recommended by manufacturer. 1) Provide a copy of the calibration certificate for all

instruments used for fiber cable testing. b. Optical Loss Test Set (OLTS):

1) Single-mode Optical Fiber Light Source: a) Provide dual laser light sources with central

wavelengths of 1,310 nm (plus or minus 20 nm) and 1,550 nm (plus or minus 20 nm).

b) Output Power: Minus 10 dBm, minimum. c) Manufacturer: Fluke Networks, or equal.

2) Multimode Optical Fiber Light Source: a) Provide dual LED light sources with central

wavelengths of 850 nm (plus or minus 30 nm) and 1,300 nm (plus or minus 20 nm).

b) Output Power: Minus 20 dBm minimum. c) Meet launch requirements of TIA/EIA 455-78. This

launch condition can be achieved either within the field test equipment or by use of an external mandrel wrap, as described in Clause 11 of TIA 568-C.3, with Category 1 light source.

d) Manufacturer: Fluke Networks, or equal.

697482A.GN1


3) Power Meter: a) Provide 850 nm, 1,300/1,310 nm, and 1,550 nm

wavelength test capability. b) Power Measurement Uncertainty: Plus or

minus 0.25 dB. c) Store reference power measurement. d) Save at least 100 results in internal memory. e) PC interface (serial or USB). f) Manufacturer: Fluke Networks, or equal.

4) Optional Length Measurement: Capable of measuring optical length of fiber using time-of-flight techniques.

5. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR): a. Bright, color transmissive LCD display with backlight. b. Rechargeable for 8 hours of normal operation. c. Weight with battery and module of not more than 4.5 pounds and

volume of not more 200 cubic inches. d. Internal nonvolatile memory and removable memory device with

at least 16 MB capacity for results storage. e. Serial and USB ports to transfer data to PC. f. Single-mode OTDR:

1) Wavelengths: 1,310 nm (plus or minus 20 nm) and 1,550 nm (plus or minus 20 nm).

2) Event Dead Zone: 2 meters maximum at 1,310 nm and 2 meters maximum at 1,550 nm.

3) Attenuation Dead Zone: 15 meters maximum at 1,310 nm and 15 meters maximum at 1,550 nm.

4) Distance Range: Minimum 10,000 meters. 5) Dynamic Range: Minimum 10 dB at 1,310 nm and

1,550 nm. g. Multimode OTDR:

1) Wavelengths: 850 nm (plus or minus 20 nm) and 1,300 nm (plus or minus 20 nm).

2) Event Dead Zone: 1 meter maximum at 850 nm and 2 meters maximum at 1,300 nm.

3) Attenuation Dead Zone: 6 meters maximum at 850 nm and 15 meters maximum at 1,300 nm.

4) Distance Range: 2,000 meters minimum. 5) Dynamic Range: Minimum 10 dB at 850 nm and 1,300 nm.

h. Manufacturer: Fluke Networks, or equal. 6. Fiber Microscope:

a. Magnification: 250X or 400X for end-face inspection. b. Manufacturer: Fluke Networks.

697482A.GN1


7. Integrated OLTS, OTDR, and Fiber Microscope: a. Test equipment that combines into one instrument such as OLTS,

OTDR, and fiber microscope may be used. b. Manufacturer: Fluke Networks, or equal.

D. Cable Testing:

1. Test cables twice: a. On-the reel, just prior to installation. b. Post-installation. c. Compare results.

2. TIA/EIA 568: Demonstrate that minimum 100 percent fibers in each cable meet requirements of TIA/EIA 568, Annex H, as modified here: a. Maximum attenuation as specified in Part II, Fiber Optic Cable. b. Measure attenuation at both 850 nm and 1,300 nm.

3. Replace and retest cables that do not have specified number of fibers that meet attenuation standards.

4. Test procedures and field test instruments shall comply with applicable requirements of: a. LIA Z136.2. b. TIA/EIA 455-78. c. TIA/EAI 455-133. d. TIA 526-7. e. TIA 526-14. f. TIA 568-C.1. g. TIA 568-C.3. h. TIA TSB 140.

5. Test attenuation and polarity of installed cable plant with OLTS and installed condition of cabling system and its components with OTDR.

6. Verify condition of fiber end face. 7. Perform on each cabling link (connector to connector). 8. Perform on each cabling channel (equipment to equipment). 9. Do not include active devices or passive devices within link or channel

other than cable, connectors, and splices. For example, link attenuation does not include such devices as optical bypass switches, couplers, repeaters, or optical amplifiers.

10. Document Tests: a. OLTS dual wavelength attenuation measurements for single-mode

and multimode links and channels. b. OTDR traces and event tables for single-mode and multimode

links and channels.

697482A.GN1


E. Fiber Testing Parameters:

1. Each cabling link shall be in compliance with the following test limits: a. Optical Loss Testing:

1) Backbone (multi-mode) Link: a) Calculate link attenuation by the formulas specified in

TIA 568-C.1. b) Values for Attenuation Coefficient (dB/km) are listed

in the table below:

Attenuation Coefficient

Type of Optical Fiber

Wavelength (nm)


(dB/km) Wavelength

(nm)


(dB/km)

Multi-mode 50/125 micro-m

850 2.8 1300 1

b. OTDR Testing: 1) Reflective Events: Maximum 0.75 dB. 2) Nonreflective Events: Maximum 0.3 dB.

c. Magnified Endface Inspection: 1) Visually inspect fiber connections for end-face quality. 2) Scratched, pitted, or dirty connectors shall be diagnosed and

corrected.

F. Diagnosis and Correction:

1. Installed cabling links and channels shall be field tested and pass test requirements and analysis as described herein.

2. Link or channel that fails these requirements shall be diagnosed and corrected.

3. Document corrective action and follow with new test to prove corrected link or channel meets performance requirements.

4. Provide final and passing result of tests for links and channels.

G. Acceptance: Acceptance of test results will be given in writing after Project is tested and completed in accordance with Contract Documents and satisfaction of Owner.

H. Test Execution:

1. Optical Fiber Cable Testing: a. Tests performed that use laser or LED in test set shall be carried

out with safety precautions in accordance with LIA Z136.2.

697482A.GN1


b. Link and channel test results from OLTS and OTDR shall be recorded in test instrument upon completion of each test for subsequent uploading to a personal computer in which administrative documentation may be generated. 1) Record end-face images in memory of test instrument for

subsequent uploading to a personal computer and reporting. c. Perform Testing:

1) On each cabling segment (connector to connector). 2) On each cabling channel (equipment to equipment). 3) Using high-quality test cords of same fiber type as cabling

under test. a) Test cords for OLTS testing shall be between 1 meter

and 5 meters in length. b) Test cords for OTDR testing shall be approximately

100 meter for launch cable and at least 25 meters for receive cable.

2. Optical Loss Testing (OLTS): a. Backbone Link:

1) Test multimode at 850 nm and 1,300 nm in accordance with TIA 526-14A, Method B, One Reference Jumper or equivalent method.

2) Perform tests in both directions. 3. OTDR Testing:

a. Test backbone, horizontal, and centralized links at appropriate operating wavelengths for anomalies and to ensure uniformity of cable attenuation and connector insertion loss. 1) Multimode: 850 nm and 1,300 nm.

b. Test each fiber link and channel in one direction. c. Install launch cable between OTDR and first link connection. d. Install receive cable after last link connection.

4. Magnified End Face Inspection: a. Inspect fibers at 250X or 400X magnification.

1) 250X magnification is suitable for inspecting multimode and single-mode fibers.

2) Record end-face images in memory of test instrument for subsequent uploading to a personal computer and reporting.

5. Length Measurement: 1) Record length of each fiber. 2) Measure optical length using OLTS or OTDR.

6. Polarity Testing: a. Test paired duplex fibers in multifiber cables to verify polarity in

accordance with subclause 10.3 of TIA/EIA 568-C.1. b. Verify polarity of paired duplex fibers using OLTS.

697482A.GN1


7. Test Results Documentation: a. Test results saved within field-test instrument shall be transferred

into Windows-based database utility that allows for maintenance, inspection, and archiving of test records. These test records shall be uploaded to the personal computer unaltered. For example, “as saved in the field-test instrument.” The file format, CSV (comma separated value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and shall not be used.

b. Available for inspection by Owner or Owner’s representative during installation period. Submit within 5 working days of completion of tests on cabling served by a telecommunications room or of backbone cabling.

c. Database for project, including twisted-pair copper cabling links, if applicable, shall be stored and delivered on CD-ROM prior to Owner acceptance of building. CD-ROM shall include software tools required to view, inspect, and print test reports.

d. Circuit IDs reported by test instrument shall match specified label identification.

e. Provide in electronic database for each tested optical fiber with the following information: 1) Identification of Site. 2) Name of test limit selected to execute stored test results. 3) Name of personnel performing test. 4) Date and time test results were saved in memory of tester. 5) Manufacturer, model, and serial number of field test

instrument. 6) Version of test software and version of test limit database

held within test instrument. 7) Fiber identification number. 8) Length for Each Optical Fiber: Optionally the index of

refraction used for length calculation when using a length capable OLTS.

9) Test results to include OLTS attenuation link and channel measurements at appropriate wavelength and margin; difference between measured attenuation and test limit value.

10) Test results to include OTDR link and channel traces, and event tables at appropriate wavelength.

11) Length for each optical fiber as calculated by the OTDR. 12) Overall pass/fail evaluation of link-under-test for OLTS and

OTDR measurements. 13) Magnified End Face Inspection:

a) Picture or image of each fiber end-face. b) Pass/fail status of end-face based upon visual

inspection.

697482A.GN1


I. Drawings:

1. Record Copy: Provide at end of Project on CD-ROM. a. CAD format and include notations reflecting as-built conditions of

additions and variations from Drawings provided, such as to cable path and termination point.

b. CAD drawings shall incorporate test data imported from test instruments.

2. As-built Drawings: a. Include, but not limited to block diagrams, frame and cable

labeling, cable termination points, equipment room layouts, and frame installation details.

b. Include field changes made up to construction completion: 1) Field directed changes to pull schedule. 2) Field directed changes to cross connect and patching

schedule. 3) Horizontal cable routing changes. 4) Backbone cable routing or location changes. 5) Associated detail Drawings.

3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:

1. 1/2 person-day for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 1/2 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion

of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. 1/2 person-day for facility startup.

B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

3.05 SUPPLEMENTS

A. Supplements listed below, following “END OF SECTION,” are part of this Specification.

1. As-Built Fiber Optic Cable Installation Form. 2. As-Built Conduit Installation Form.

END OF SECTION

662616A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 AS-BUILT CONDUIT INSTALLATION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 40 95 80 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

PROJECT: MAWSS 3-Mile Creek SWAT

Contractor: Signed by:

AS-BUILT FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION Sheet 1 of 2

Cable Identification: Routing: From: In: (Identify field panel, control room, etc. in building) Through: 1 (Identify access hole, building, gallery, etc.) Through: 2 Through: 5 Through: 3 Through: 6 Through: 4 Through: 7 To: In: See As-Built Conduit Installation forms for identification of conduits/innerducts cable is routed through. Acceptable Attenuation: Multimode Fibers cable length* 850 nm: 3.0 dB/km x km + 1.5 dB = dB 1300 nm: 1.0 dB/km x km + 1.5 dB = dB *Contractor to provide actual length installed, within ±0.1 km.

Fiber ID Use/Spare Measured Attenuation (dB)

Hub-to-Node Node-to-Hub

850 nm 1,300 nm 850 nm 1,300 nm

697482A.GN1

AS-BUILT CONDUIT INSTALLATION PW\DEN003\697482 40 95 80 SUPPLEMENT 1 – 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

AS-BUILT FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION Sheet 2 of 2

Acceptable Attenuation: Single-mode Fibers cable length* 1310 nm: 1.0 dB/km x km + 1.5 dB = dB 1550 nm: 1.0 dB/km x km + 1.5 dB = dB *Contractor to provide actual length installed, within ±0.1 km.

Fiber ID Use/Spare

Measured Attenuation (dB)

Hub-to-Node Node-to-Hub

1,310 nm 1,550 nm 1,310 nm 1,550 nm

662616A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 AS-BUILT CONDUIT INSTALLATION FEBRUARY 7, 2019 40 95 80 SUPPLEMENT 2 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

PROJECT: MAWSS 3-Mile Creek SWAT

Specific WRF: Contractor: Signed by:

AS-BUILT CONDUIT INSTALLATION From: To: (Identify building, access hole, field panel, etc.) Sheet 1 of 1 Conduits: Used: 4-inch; 2-inch Spare: 4-inch; 2-inch Confirm all spares unrestricted: Yes/No (Provide number of conduits in each category) Conduit ID Cable ID / Spare (Continued overleaf delete if not applicable)

END OF SUPPLEMENT

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 ACTIVATED CARBON ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 44 11 29.14 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 44 11 29.14 ACTIVATED CARBON ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. D2563 Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-

Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts. b. D2584 Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced

Resins. c. D2854 Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Activated

Carbon. d. D2866 Standard Test Method for Total Ash Content of Activated

Carbon. e. D2867 Standard Test Methods for Moisture in Activated Carbon. f. D3299 Standard Specification for Filament-Wound, Fiberglass

Reinforced Thermoset Resin Chemical Resistant Tanks. g. D3467 Standard Test Method for Carbon Tetrachloride Activity of

Activated Carbon. h. D3802 Standard Test Method for Ball-Pan Hardness of Activated

Carbon. i. D4097 Standard Specification for Contact Molded, Glass Fiber

Reinforced Thermoset Resin Chemical Resistant Tanks. j. D4607 Standard Test Method for Determination of Iodine Number of

Activated Carbon. k. D5742 Standard Test Method for Determination of Butane Activity of

Activated Carbon. l. E544, Standard Practices for Referencing Suprathreshold Odor

Intensity. m. E679, Standard Practices for the Determination of Odor and Taste

Thresholds by a Forced-Choice Ascending Concentration Series Method of Limits.

2. National Bureau of Standards (NBS): PS15, Recommended Practice for Shipping and Installation of Reinforced Plastic Tanks.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. DT: Detection Threshold.

B. dB: Decibel.

C. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic.

697482A.GN1

ACTIVATED CARBON ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS PW\DEN003\697482 44 11 29.14 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

D. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene.

E. OU: Odor Units.

F. ppbv: Parts Per Billion, Volume.

G. ppmv: Parts Per Million, Volume.

H. WC: Water Column.

1.03 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work under this section shall include the following as required to refurbish, reconfigure and return to active service the existing odor control system at SWAT No. 1:

1. Remove and reinstall the odor control system blower fan in the reconfigured location.

2. Reinstall the air duct with the additional duct components as needed to accommodate the reconfigured location.

3. Include and install all accessories as needed to provide a complete and functional odor control system.

B. The work under this section shall also include the provision and installation of a passive odor control unit on Pumping Station No. 2 as indicted on Drawing 20-D-201.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Catalog information, descriptions, specifications, layouts, sketches and other information sufficient to clearly and readily demonstrate compliance with all parts of the Specifications and Drawings.

2. Dimensional and weight information of any new components. 3. A marked-up version of this specification clearly identifying any exceptions

or variations being proposed to the Specifications. Exceptions or variations will be reviewed but may not be deemed acceptable.

4. Manufacturers submitting proposals for equipment that would require changes in the design shall also include detailed information on structural, electrical, mechanical, and other miscellaneous modifications necessary to adapt their equipment to the arrangement shown. Engineer shall be compensated for review of these items.

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 ACTIVATED CARBON ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 44 11 29.14 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL


1. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 2. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, as specified in

Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services. 4. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period

of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current information.


1.05 SPARE PARTS:

A. Provide the following spare parts.

1. None required.


A. The media system supplier shall have experience in carbon adsorption systems in odor control applications demonstrating at least 5 years’ experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EXISTING EQUIPMENT INFORMATION

A. Manufacturer: US Filter/Westates.

B. Unit Model Number: VSC-300.

C. Quantity: Two.

D. Capacity (each): 1500 cfm.

E. Number of carbon beds (each): One.

F. Carbon weight: 3000 pound each.

G. Installation Date: 2000.

H. Serial Number’s: 131231C-1 and 131231C-2.

697482A.GN1

ACTIVATED CARBON ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS PW\DEN003\697482 44 11 29.14 - 4 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

2.02 INTERCONNECTION DUCTWORK, DAMPER, AND FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR

A. Ductwork between existing ductwork and exhaust fan and between the exhaust fan and the reactor vessel shall be comprised of the existing ductwork to the fullest extent practical. Additional duck, fittings and bends as required for the installation shall be provided by the Contractor. All ductwork shall be FRP.

2.03 FANS

A. Odor Control Fan:

1. Remove for reinstallation the existing odor control fan for the SWAT No. 1 Odor Control system.

2. The fan shall be designed for the pressure drop through the ductwork and carbon unit.

3. The fan shall be suitably protected prior to reinstallation. Any damage shall be repaired to the Engineer’s satisfaction or the unit shall be replaced in kind if judged unrepairable by the Engineer.

2.04 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide all items not specifically specified which are required to implement the specified functions and the functions required for proper system operation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION FOR SHIPPING

A. For all new components, the manufacturer's recommendations on shipping and handling shall be followed.

3.02 FACTORY TESTING

A. All new equipment shall be factory tested for compliance with the requirements specified herein.

3.03 FAN FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Functional testing shall be conducted after the reinstallation of the system blower.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 WEIR AND BAFFLE PLATES FEBRUARY 7, 2019 44 42 28 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 44 42 28 WEIR AND BAFFLE PLATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and

Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.

c. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.

d. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. e. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate. f. B308/B308M, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy

6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. g. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer’s drawings showing dimensions of the items and accessories being provided.

B. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, and stating the following:


A. Deliver materials to Site properly packaged for ease of handling and to minimize damage during shipping.

B. Handling and storage of items provided hereunder shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Care shall be taken not to damage components and accessories.

697482A.GN1

WEIR AND BAFFLE PLATES PW\DEN003\697482 44 42 28 - 2 FEBRUARY 7, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Like items of equipment specified herein shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, and manufacturers’ services.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel:

1. Plate, Baffles, and Supports: ASTM A167 and ASTM A276, minimum 1/4 inch thick.

2. Fasteners: ASTM A193/A193M and ASTM A194/A194M, Type 316.

2.03 APPURTENANCES

A. Anchoring: Type 316 stainless steel adhesive anchors as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.


A. In accordance with Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE FEBRUARY 8, 2019 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 44 42 56.02 - 1

SECTION 44 42 56.02 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Petroleum Institute (API): a. Standard 610, Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical,

and Natural Gas Industries. b. Standard 670, Machinery Protection Systems.

2. Hydraulic Institute (HI) Standards: a. 9.6.4, Rotodynamic Pumps for Vibration Measurements and

Allowable Values. b. 14.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance

Tests. 3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): MG 1, Motors

and Generators. 4. NSF International (NSF):

a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall conform to the ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. 2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and

identification of materials of construction. 3. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand,

NPSH required, and pump efficiency over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the design flow conditions.

697482A.GN1

HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE PW\DEN003\697482 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 44 42 56.02 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

4. Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings showing equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and weights of components. Assembly and installation drawings including shaft size, seal, coupling, bearings, anchor bolt plan, parts nomenclature, and materials of construction lists. Baseplate drawings with leveling jackscrew details, anchor bolt and sleeve details, and minimum foundation installation and leveling requirements.

5. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 6. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor

manufacturer, and including any motor modifications. 7. Factory finish system. 8. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by




2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, that factory finish system is identical to requirements specified herein.

3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 5. Factory Functional and Performance Test Reports. Factory test data for

each pump shall be submitted, reviewed, and approved by Engineer prior to shipment of equipment.

6. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information.





A. Furnish for each pump:

1. Complete set packing. 2. Complete set bearings. 3. Complete set gaskets and O-ring seals. 4. One complete set of special tools required to dismantle pump.

697482A.GN1


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Lateral and Torsional Vibrations:

1. Pump and motor assembly shall have no natural frequencies within 20 percent of operating speed range.

2. Fundamental critical speed of rotating assembly shall be no less than 50 percent above rated speed.

3. Manufacturer shall conduct analysis of lateral and torsional vibration of pump and motor assembly. a. Excitation frequency range of analysis shall include, but not be

limited to, number of motor poles and number of impeller vanes. b. Perform detailed stress analysis for pump-coupling-motor system

at each critical speed, and steady-state operating condition. c. Stress analysis shall demonstrate that in no case shall the

maximum stress on pump, coupling and motor components exceed endurance limits of pump, coupling and motor assembly components materials of construction.

2.02 SUPPLEMENTS

A. Some specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements.

2.03 SHAFT SEALS

A. Sealing system for vertical turbine pump shafts shall be packed stuffing box or mechanical seal as indicated in pump data sheet.

B. Mechanical Seal Requirements:

1. Nonfretting type requiring no wearing sleeves for the shafts. 2. Shafts for pumps specified with mechanical seals shall be furnished

with no reduction in size through the seal area. 3. Split Type:

a. Requiring no field assembly other than assembly around shaft and insertion into pump or balanced cartridge design in conjunction with a spool type spacer coupling as specified in pump data sheet.

b. Nonshaft O-rings shall be of ball and socket type requiring no gluing.

c. Initial seal installation at factory shall be with nonsplit seal faces, with spare seals and spare kits to have split faces.

d. Unless otherwise specified, shall be capable of 400 psig service, be self-aligning, self-centering, single.

e. Manufacturer and Product: A.W. Chesterton Company; Chesterton 442.

697482A.GN1


4. Arrangement shall allow removal of seal without disturbing pump or driver.

5. For clear water services and solids up to 5 percent by weight, face combination shall be hard/soft. Otherwise, hard/hard faces shall be used.

6. Designed so dynamic O-ring moves towards a clean surface as face wears and springs are not in pumped fluid.

7. Face shall be spring loaded to provide self-aligning despite stuffing box misalignment.

8. Where cartridge type mechanical seals are specified: a. Single, balanced, flexible stator design. b. Capable of 600 psig service. c. O-ring secondary seals and setscrew drive with three-point

centering to ensure 0.003 inch of maximum perpendicularity of rotary face to shaft.

d. Gland shall have flush port and be affixed to equipment with adjustable tabs to fit irregular bolt patterns.

e. Manufacturers and Products: 1) A.W. Chesterton Company; 155. 2) Crane; 1B.

9. Seal Materials: a. Metals:

1) Loaded Parts Over 0.060-inch Cross Section: Type 316 stainless steel minimum.

2) Thinner Parts (springs): Hastelloy-C, Alloy 20, AMS5876 Elgiloy, or other alloy that is not vulnerable to chloride stress corrosion.

b. Elastomers: Fluorocarbon Viton, preferred unless seal manufacturer recommends ethylene propylene for service conditions.

c. Faces: Homogeneous construction. Surface treatments and plated faces are unacceptable. 1) Acceptable hard faces include nickel bound tungsten

carbide, self-sintered silicon carbide, reaction bonded silicon carbide, or graphitized silicon carbide. Silicon carbide is preferred because of its higher pressure-velocity capability.

2) Acceptable soft face is carbon-graphite, either Union Carbide 658RC or Purecarbon P8412.

10. Seal Environmental Controls: a. Pipe seal flush port to drain to wet well or hub drain as shown on

Drawings with a 1/8-inch orifice plate in the line. Provide venting of seal chamber.

697482A.GN1


b. Mechanical seals for anything other than clear water services shall be fitted with Enviroseal SpiralTrac Version F, N, or D, installation Type I as recommended by A.W. Chesterton Company. 1) Provide fluid circulation in seal chamber that removes

frictional heat from mechanical seal. 2) Convey particulate matter and contaminants for removal by

conveying them from bore to shaft by means of integral machined spiral.

3) Removes particulate matter from seal chamber, without seal flush water, through integral machined exit groove.

c. Material of construction shall be Type 316 stainless steel. d. Connect mechanical seal to water purge supply where indicated

on Drawings.

C. Packing Requirements:

1. Stuffing Box: a. Tap to permit introduction of seal liquid. b. Hold a minimum of five rows of packing and a lantern ring. c. Face attached. d. Box and shaft shall be suitable for field installation without

machining or other modifications of mechanical seal outlined above for applicable pump and operating conditions.

2. Packing Rings: a. Three asbestos free die-molded packing rings of braided graphite

material free of PTFE. 1) A.W. Chesterton Company; 1400R for nonpotable water

services. b. Three die-molded rings of braided PTFE material.

1) A.W. Chesterton Company; 1725 that is NSF/ANSI 61 acceptable for potable water services.

c. Glands: 1) Two-piece split construction. 2) Fit impeller end of packing with A.W. Chesterton

Company; Enviroseal SpiralTrac, Version P, packing protection.

3. Where pumped fluid is clear water: a. Pump discharge run through 1/8-inch orifice for packing

lubrication. b. Otherwise, provide seal water flow control and monitoring as

detailed on Drawings. 1) External Seal Water Flow: 5 gallons to 30 gallons per hour

flow rate, plus or minus 10 percent accuracy. 2) Manufacturer and Product: A.W. Chesterton Company;

SingleFlow.

697482A.GN1


4. Shaft Sleeve: a. Fit section of shaft or impeller hub that extends through or into

stuffing box with replaceable stainless steel sleeve with a Brinell hardness of not less than 500.

b. Sleeve shall be held to the shaft to prevent rotation. c. Gasketed to prevent leakage between shaft and sleeve. d. Thickness: 3/8 inch minimum.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location.

B. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds.

C. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. Prepare and prime, and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. Inspect for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function.

B. Test equipment actually furnished.

C. Factory Test Report: Include test data sheets, curve test results, certified correct by a registered professional engineer.

D. Functional Test:

1. Perform manufacturer’s standard, test on equipment. Include vibration test, as follows: a. Dynamically balance rotating parts of each pump and its driving

unit before final assembly. b. Limits: Complete Rotating Assembly Including Coupling, Drive

Unit, and Motor: Less than 90 percent of limits established in the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

E. Performance Test:

1. Conduct on each pump. 2. Perform under simulated operating conditions.

697482A.GN1


3. Test for a continuous 1-hour period without malfunction. 4. Test Log:

a. Record the following: 1) Total head. 2) Capacity. 3) Horsepower requirements.

5. Adjust, realign, or modify units and retest in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards if necessary.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Level base by means of steel wedges (steelplates and steel shims). Wedge taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no change of level or springing of baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.

C. Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and level with driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.

D. After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as specified in Section 03 62 00, Grouting. Remove wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout.

E. Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump flanges.

F. Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.


A. As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump.

1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation.

697482A.GN1


2. Vibration Test: a. Test with unit installed and in normal operation, and discharging

to connected piping systems at rates shall not develop vibration exceeding 80 percent of limits specified in HIS 9.6.4.

b. If unit exhibits vibration in excess of limits specified, adjust or modify as necessary. Unit that cannot be adjusted or modified to conform as specified shall be replaced.

3. Test for continuous 1-hour period. 4. Test Report Requirements: In accordance with Hydraulic Institute

Standards for centrifugal pump tests HIS 14.6.


A. Manufacturer’s Representative:

1. Present at Site for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: a. 1/2 person-days for installation assistance and inspection. b. 1/2 person-days for functional testing and completion of

Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.

B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.

3.05 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of this Specification.

1. Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump Data Sheet.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE FEBRUARY 8, 2019 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL 44 42 56.02 SUPPLEMENT - 1

HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DATA SHEET

Tag Numbers: N/A

Pump Name: Washwater Booster Pump @ SWAT #1

Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) WEINMAN

(2) PRE-APPROVED EQUAL

SERVICE CONDITIONS

Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Potable Water

Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 70 Max 90 Min 50

Abrasive (Y/N) N Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 40

Altitude (Feet above Mean Sea Level): 20

Area Classification: not classified

Ambient Temperature (degrees F.): 20 to 105

Location: Indoor (Y/N): N Outdoor (Y/N): Y

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 550

Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 150

BHP at Rated Point: 27.1

Maximum Shutoff Pressure (Ft): 162________

Min. Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 77

Max. NPSH Required at Capacity (Ft. Absolute): 8

Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 1,750

Constant (Y/N): Y

Adjustable (Y/N): N

697482A.GN1

HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE PW\DEN003\697482 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 44 42 56.02 SUPPLEMENT - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

DESIGN AND MATERIALS

Pump Type: Horizontal (Y/N) Y Frame-Mounted (Y/N) Y

Vertical (Y/N) N Other

Casing Material: Cast Iron

Casing Wear Rings (Y/N) Y Casing Wear Ring Material: Bronze

Impeller: Type: Enclosed Material: Bronze

Impeller Wear Rings (Y/N) N Impeller Wear Ring Material: N/A

Shaft Material: SAE-1045 Steel Shaft Sleeve Material: 416 SS

Shaft Seal: Packing (Y/N) N Mechanical (Y/N) Y Type:

Seal Lubrication:

ABMA B-10 Bearing Life (hrs): 100,000 Lubrication: Grease

Bearings: Outboard End Type: Inboard End Type:

Coupling: Falk (Y/N) Fast: (Y/N) Spring-Grid (Y/N)

Gear Type (Y/N) Spacer (Y/N) Y

Manufacturer Standard (Y/N) Y

Baseplate Material: Steel

Drive Type: Direct-Coupled X Belt Adjustable Speed Other

Horsepower: 40 Voltage: 460/3/60 Phase: Synchronous Speed (rpm) 1750

Service Factor: 1.15

Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head-capacity point on pump curve.

Enclosure: DIP _____ EXP _____ ODP _____ TEFC X_____ CISD-TEFC _____ TENV _____ WPI _____ WPII _____ SUBM _____

Mounting Type: Horizontal: Y Vertical Solid Shaft: N Nonreverse Ratchet (Y/N) N

REMARKS Pump shall be suitable for direct drop-in replacement of the existing water booster pump (5” suction, 4” discharge).

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 44 42 56.04 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SECTION 44 42 56.04 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. 11, Load Rating and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, and 150.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-

Wrought, Special Quality. 4. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS):

a. 11.6, Submersible Pump Test. b. 14.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance

Tests. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code. b. 497, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable

Liquids, Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas.

7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall conform to ratings and nomenclature of Hydraulic Institute Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. 2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and

identification of materials of construction, including cable seal details.

697482A.GN1

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PW\DEN003\697482 44 42 56.04 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

3. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at guarantee point.

4. For variable speed motors, provide variable speed curves for every 50 rpm over the operational range.

5. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 6. Motor data, in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 20 00,

Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors. 7. Adjustable frequency drive data, in accordance with the requirements of

Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System. 8. Factory-finish system. 9. L-10 bearing life calculations per ABMA. 10. If required, wiring for motor protection module. 11. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by

Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.


1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 4. Factory Performance Test Reports. 5. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with

Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, that factory finish system meets requirements specified herein.

6. Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for period of 1 year and 5 years. Include list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information.


8. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.



A. Furnish for this set of pumps:

1. One set mechanical seals. 2. One complete set of special tools required to dismantle pump.

697482A.GN1


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Submersible, vertical shaft, centrifugal nonclog type, for pumping wastewater.

B. Designed for continuous operation under submerged or partially submerged conditions, and intermittent operation when totally dry without damage to pump or motor.

C. Pump and Electrical Driver: Meet requirements for class, group, and division location in accordance with NFPA 70.

D. Where adjustable speed drives are required, furnish a coordinated operating system complete with pump, drive, and speed controller.

E. Pumps furnished under this section to be provided by a single manufacturer.

2.02 SUPPLEMENTS

A. Specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Equipment consists of pump complete with motor, control system, guide rail, anchoring brackets, base elbow, power cable, and pump lifting cable.

B. Characteristics:

1. Motor and rotating parts shall be removable from motor end of pump. 2. Mating surfaces to be watertight and fitted with nitrile O-rings. 3. Pumps fitted with dynamically balanced nonclog impellers designed to

pass course solids and stringy materials.

C. Lifting Arrangement:

1. Type 316 stainless steel chain, 2 feet minimum, and one “grip-eye.” 2. Attach chain permanently to pump and access platform with stainless

steel wire rope. 3. “Grip-eye” capable of being threaded over and engaging links of

stainless steel chain so pump and motor may be lifted with “grip-eye” and independent hoist.

697482A.GN1


D. Sliding Guide Bracket:

1. Integral part of pump unit. 2. Pump unit to be guided by no less than two guide bars, or equivalent

cable system, and pressed tightly against discharge connection elbow with metal-to-metal contact or through use of profile-type gasket, provided gasket is attached to pump’s flange and can be easily accessed for inspection when pump is lifted out of wetwell.

3. Pump metal parts that come into contact with guide rail or cable system shall be made of nonsparking materials.

E. Motor nameplate horsepower not to be exceeded at head-capacity point on pump curve.

F. Pump motor and sensor cables shall be suitable for submersible pump application and cable sizing shall conform to NFPA 70 specifications for pump motors. Cables shall be of sufficient length to reach junction boxes without strain or splicing.

G. Motor Protection Module: If required, provide pump with a motor protection module for remote mounting. Contract Drawings are based on first named submersible pump manufacturer and motor protection module. If pump and motor protection module other than first named manufacturer is provided, provide revised wiring for the motor protection module.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in readily visible location.

B. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. Prepare, and prime, and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. Pump:

1. Factory Performance Test: a. In accordance with HIS 11.6, Level A for submersible pump tests.

697482A.GN1


b. Include vibration tests at a range of rates between low discharge head and shutoff head conditions specified. If units exhibit vibration in excess of limits specified, adjust or modify as necessary. Units that cannot be adjusted or modified to conform shall be replaced

c. Include curve test results. 2. Conduct on each pump. 3. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.

Throttle discharge valve to obtain pump data points on curve at 2/3, 1/3, and shutoff conditions.

B. Submersible Motor Functional Test: In accordance with HIS 11.6.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Mount the discharge elbow to the floor of the wetwell floor with stainless steel bolts.

C. Connect piping without imposing strain to flanges.

D. No portion of pump shall bear directly on floor of sump.


A. Functional Test: Conduct on each pump.

1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation.

2. Test each pump for continuous 1-hour period at simulated maximum head condition with temporary piping as required to return flow to wet well. Concurrent testing of two pumps is acceptable.

3. Test Report Requirements: In accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards for submersible pump tests HIS 14.6 and 11.6.

B. Vibration Field Observation Test:

1. Test with units installed and in normal operation, and discharging to connected piping systems at rates between low discharge head and high discharge head conditions specified.

2. If units visibly exhibit excessive vibration or trip vibration monitors, adjust or modify as necessary. Units that cannot be adjusted or modified to eliminate excessive vibration shall be replaced.

697482A.GN1


C. Pump Test:

1. General: a. Conduct on each pump provided. b. Conduct in accordance with HIS 11.6.

2. Routine Production Tests: a. Check impeller, motor rating and electrical connections for

compliance to specification. b. Test motor and cable insulation for moisture content and

insulation defects. c. Prior to submergence, run pump dry to establish correct rotation

and mechanical integrity. d. Conduct abbreviated three-point operational performance test. e. After operational performance test, perform insulation test again.

3. Factory Seven-Point Plotted, Performance Test: a. Level A for submersible pump tests. b. Include: curve test results. c. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.

4. Vibration test. 5. Hydrostatic test.


A. Manufacturer’s Representative: Present at Site for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:

1. 1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 1 person-day for functional testing and completion of Manufacturer’s

Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. 1 person-day for facility startup.

B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

3.04 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are part of this Specification.

1. Data Sheets: Pump and Motor.

END OF SECTION

697482A.GN1

PW\DEN003\697482 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS FEBRUARY 8, 2019 44 42 56.04 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SUBMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.04

Tag Numbers: P-215D, P-215E, P-215F, P-215G,

Pump Name: Pumps D, E, F & G

Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) Flygt -NP3356/706 3-870

(2) KSB model KRTU 300-400/1006XNG-S

quote number 6095073

(3) Wilo Model FA35.54T+T42-8/50 GEx

SERVICE CONDITIONS

Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent Solids): Raw Sewage

Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 70 Max 90 Min 50

Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: 1 Viscosity Range: 1.1

Abrasive (Y/N) Y Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Minimum diameter solid pump can pass (inches) 3

Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 18

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Primary Duty Point:

Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 6030 @ Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 55.2

Secondary Duty Point:

Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 3000 @ Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 74

Maximum Shutoff Pressure (Ft): 95

Min. Rated Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 83.4

Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 880 Constant (Y/N): N Adjustable (Y/N): Y

DESIGN AND MATERIALS

Pump Type: Heavy-Duty Nonclog (Y/N) Y Other:

Volute Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 - Belzona 1321 coated Pump Casing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48

Motor Housing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48

Wear Rings Case (Y/N): Y

Material: Hard Iron (ASTM A-532 (Alloy 111A) 25% chrome cast iron

Wear Ring Impeller (Y/N): N Material: _____

697482A.GN1

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PW\DEN003\697482 44 42 56.04 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 2 FEBRUARY 8, 2019 ©COPYRIGHT 2019 CH2M HILL

SUBMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.04

Tag Numbers: P-215D, P-215E, P-215F, P-215G

Pump Name: Pumps D, E, F & G

Elastomers: Nitrile Rubber

Fasteners: Stainless Steel

Impeller: Type: Double-Shrouded Non-Clog (Y/N) Y Other: Material: Hard Iron (ASTM A-532 (Alloy 111A) 25% chrome cast iron

Shaft Material: Stainless steel AISI 431 or 420

Base Elbow: Cast Iron ASTM A48 - Belzona 1341 coated

Double Mechanical Seal (Y/N): Y Bearing Life (Hrs): 100,000

DRIVE MOTOR (See Section A: 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.)

Horsepower: 135 Voltage: 480 Phase: 3 Synchronous Speed (rpm): 885

Enclosure: EXP

CLASSIFICATION: Class 1, Group D, Division 1

Other Features:

Moisture Detection Switches (Y/N): Y

Thermal Protection Embedded in Windings (Y/N): Y

REMARKS:

1. All pumps shall be supplied with Hard-Iron or with Engineer-approved Hard-Iron equivalent on components where Hard-Iron is required and Belzona coated components where required herein. KSB and WILO components shall be supplied with flanged reducers on the discharge base bend as required for compatibility with the indicated discharge piping

2. In addition to the required five-year warranty, Pump Manufacturer shall issue a special guarantee that any required replacement parts will be delivered to the Owner or its designated repair shop within 21 days of the placement of an order for those parts. Special guarantee shall further state that should any parts not be delivered within the required period, the Pump Manufacturer shall reimburse MAWSS any cost up to $1,000 per day for MAWSS to obtain and deploy temporary pumping facilities to offset the capacity lost due to the inoperable pump inclusive of equipment rental, fuel, and labor and service costs associated with pump deployment.

PART 3

DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY)